HCIA - Routing & Switching

1 A network administrator has captured a data frame in the network with the destination MAC address of 01-00-5E-A0-BI-C3.
The correct statement about this MAC address s Q.

❑ A It is a unicast MAC address
❑ B. It is a broadcast MAC address
❑ C. It is a multicast MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. It is an illegal MAC address
2. Which of the following is not the working principle of CSMNCD?

❑ A. Listen While Talk
❑ B. RRetransmission after a fixed time delay (Right Answers)
❑ C. Conflict suspension
❑ ITh Retransmission after random delay
❑ E. Listen Before Talk
Answer: B
3. The 1Py4 address of the host is 200_200_200_201/30_ Which host with the following IPv4 address and its communication do not need to be forwarded by the muter?
❑ A 200 200 200.1
❑ B. 200 200 200_202 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 200 200 200 200
❑ O. 200 200 200 203
Answer: B
4_ If the Ethernet data frame is Lengthaype=0x0806, which of the ft:Mowing statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. This data frame is an Ethernet H frame. (Right Answers)
❑ B. This data frame is an IEEE 802.3 frame
❑ C. The source MAC address of this data frame must not be FFFF-FFFF-FFFFF (Right Answers)
❑ D The destination MAC address of this data frame must be FFFF-FFFF-FFFFF.
Answer: AC
5. When a router enabled with Proxy ARP function receives an ARP request packet and finds that the requested IP addr not its own, what actions are performed? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A If there is a route to the destination address, send its own MAC address to the ARP requester (Right Answers )
❑ B. Discard the message
❑ C. Broadcast ARP request message
❑ D. Find if there is a route to the destination address or not (Right Answers )
Answer: AD
6. Which of the fallowing storage media are commonly used by Huawei routers? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. SDRAM (Right Answers)
❑ B. NVRAM (Right Answers)
❑ C_ Flash (Right Answers )
❑ D_ Hard Disk
❑ E. SD Card (Right Answers )
Answer: ABCE
7 The Vag operating system commands are droded into four access nanMnro Innl. canaqurasan Wan and management level. Much level can run various busirress configurabon commands but cannot operate te file system ,
▪ Access level
D a. Mantonere level
coDevratian 'Teo might Answers)
❑ D. Management level
/NSW C
8 On the VRP interface, you cannot use the command delete or unreserved vrpcfg zip to delete files. You must empty them in the recycle bin to delete files comretely.
OA. TRUE
OB FALSE (Right Answers)
Answer: F
9 The switch MAC address table is existing as follows. which of the following statements is correct?
(fluawei>ictim mac-address
RAC address table of slot 0:
*AC Address VLAM/ PtVLAN CEVLAN Port Type (17R
VS1/SI
Ilk7.•1tn1-!
SON -0811 -0b49 I - Et h0/0/3 stati.
Total amtchias items on slot 0 displayed =
*AC address table of slot C:
*AC Akira: VLAN/ PEVLM Cf YLMI Port Type LSP/LSR-ID

VSI/SI RAC-Tunnel
5489-989d-ld30 Ith0/0/1 *amid 0/-
548.5-9895-18a6 I - Eth0/0/2 dynamic 0/-
c
-
total watching Item on slot 0 displayed 7'
E A The MAC address 5489-9885-1838 is manually configured by the administrator.
E 13_ The MAC address 5489-9811-0b49 is manually configured by the administrator (Right Answers)
E C. The MAC address 5489-3891-1450 is manually configured by the administrator.
E D. After the switch is restarted, all MAC addresses need to be re-learned.
Answer: 13
10 As shown in the figure below, the switch starts the STP protocol. When the network is stable, which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A SWB is the root bridge in this network

❑ B SWA is the root bridge in this network (Right Answers)
❑ C Both ports of SWB are in Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑ D Both ports of SWC are in Forwarding state_
Answer: BC
11 The STP protocol is enabled on both switches shown in the figure below_ An engineer made the following conclusions on this network_ Do you think what is the correct conclusion? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The GO/0/2 port of SWB is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers )
❑ B The GO/N2 port of SWA is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑ C Both pods of SWB are designated pods_
❑ D The GO/0/3 part of SWA is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers )
❑ E Both pods of MA are designated pods (Right Answers)
Answer: ABDE
12. Compared to STP protocol, which kind of port role is added in RSTP protocol? (Multiple Choice)
El A. Alternate port (Right Answers)
I=1 B. Backup port (Right Answers)
I=1 C. Root port
❑ D. Designated port
Answer: AB
13 As shown in the figure, the two switches use the defaut parameters to run STP On Switch A the configuration command SIP root primary is used. On the switch B the configuration command SIP priority 0 is used. Which of the following
,
ports will be blocked
5WA HUB SWEI
E0
EO 0 3 GO 0 1
GO 0 1
MAC 00e0-ft00-0001 mac:wee-mama

❑ A GO/0/2 of switch A (Right Answers)
❑ B. GO/0/1 of switch B
❑ C GO/0/1 of switch A
❑ D E0/0/3 of HUB
Answer: A
14. Which of the following parameters does not the configuration BPDU packet of the STP protocol?
❑ A. Port ID
I=1 B. Bridge ID
❑ C. VLAN ID (Right Answers)
❑ D. Root ED
Answer: C
15. By default, how many seconds are the Forward Delay of STP protocol?
I=1 A. 20
I=1 B. 15 (Right Answers )
El C. 10
1=1 D. 5
Answer: B
16. Which of the following parameters are used in the switched network that runs the STP protocol when performing spanning tree calculations? (Multiple Choice)
7 A. Root path cost (Right Answers)
❑ B. Port ID (Right Answers)
O C. Bridge ED (Right Answers)
E D. Forward Delay
Answer: ABC
17. In the STP protocol, assume that at switches are configured with the same piton-Ey. The MAC address of switch 1 s 0.0-en-fc-0600-40, and the MAC address of switch 2 is 011.04,00-00-10, the MAC address of switch 3 e. 00-e0-fc-00-00-
20, and the MAC address of switch 4 is 00-e0-fc-00-00-80, then the root switch sheuM be ()
17 A. Switch 1
❑ 13_ Switch 2 (Right Answers)
El C. Switch
El a Switch 4
Answer: B
18, The network shown in the figure below, the MAC address of the switch has been marked Enter the command sip root secondary on the SW0 switch. Which of the following switches become the root bridge of this network,
SWA SWB
00-01-02-03-04-AA 00-01-02-03-04-BB
00-01 02 03 04-CC 00-01-02-03-04-OD

❑ A SWA
❑ 13 SWB
▪ SWC
❑ 0 SW0 (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
19. Both the two switches shown in the following figure have SIP enabled. Which port will eventually be in the Blocking state?
SWA SWB
4096 00-01-02-03-04-AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-BB
G 0/0/3
G 0/0/2
❑ A. GO/0/2 port of SWA

❑ B. GO/0/3 port of SWA
❑ C. GO/0/2 port of SWB
❑ D. G0/0/3 port of SWB (Right Answers )
Answer: ❑
20 The network as shown in the following figure, after the OSPF protocol is stable, what is the neighbor status of Router A and Router B?
Router A Router B
Router ID 10.0.1,1 Router ID 10.0.2.2
Priority=255 Priority=0
Router C
Router ID 10.0.3.3
Priority=0
❑ A 2-way
❑ B. Down
❑ C FuiE (Right Answers )
❑ D. Attempt
Answer: C
21. In the network shown below, which of the following commands can be entered in the router to enable Host A to ping through Host B? (Multiple Choice)
GO/0/1
16.612.2/30
OST A Rou r A
Gl
11.0.12.1/30 immiumml
10.0i.1.1/30 0
W:10.0.12.2
1-Lavin°
G0/0/2
10.0 1
HOST B
the 10.0.12.5/
O A. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1 Router B : ip route-static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.2
O B. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.1 Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.2
I=1 C. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.2 Router B : ip route-static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1 (Right Answers )
O D. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.2 Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.1 (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
22. The network as shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.25510.0.12.2
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.21.2 preference 70
GO/0/1
0.0.12.1/24 __10,012.2/24 I oopback 0
10.0.2.2/32
10.0,21.1/24 10.0.21.2/2
G0/0/2 Router B
❑ A. The NextHop that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is 10.0.12.2. (Right Answers)
O B. If the GO/0/1 port is Down, the route that Router A reaches 10.0.0.2 is changed to 10.0.21.2. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is 10.0.21.2.
0 D. If the GO/0/2 port is Down, the route that Router A reaches 10.0.0.2 is changed to 10.0.12.2.
Answer. AB
23. Which of the following OSPF versions are suitable for IPv6?
El A. OSPFv2
1:1 B. OSPFv3 (Right Answers)
C] C. OSPFv4
D D. OSPFv1
Answer: B
24 T he network as shown in the following figure, which of the following commands can enable RouterA to forward a packet with the destination IP address of 19 00 32 (Multiple Choice)
Loopback0 10.0.2.2/32
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24
GO/0/1 O
Router A Router B
O a
O
nr
3.3
/33
Router C
Loopback0 10_0.3.3/32
❑ A ip route-static 10.03.3 255 255 255 255 10 0.1 22 (Right Answers)
❑ B ip route-static 10 0.2.2 255 255255 255 100_12 2 ip route-static 10 03 3 255255.255 255 10 0 2 2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. ip route-static 0.0 0.0 0.0.0.0 10 0 122 (Right Answers )
❑ 0 ip route-static 10 0.33 255 255255255 1002 2
Answer: ABC
25. Which of the following about the statement of static routing are incorrect?
❑ A. Manual configuration by network administrator
❑ B. Inter-route information needs to be exchanged between routers (Right Answers)
❑ C. Can not automatically adapt to changes in network topology
❑ D. Low system performance requirements
Answer: B
26. Which of the following commands can be used to check whether OSPF has correctly established neighbor relationships?
❑ A. display ospf neighbor
❑ B. display ospf brief
❑ C. display ospf peer (Right Answers )
❑ D. display ospf interface
Answer: C
27 For multiple paths to the same destination network, the router needs to select by comparing the size of the Cost value_ If the value of the Cost is the same, then select according to the size of the Preference value.
❑ A. True
CO.False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
28. As shown in the figure below ; Host A and Host B cannot communicate.
HOST A HOST B
IP: 10.0.12.1/30 IP: 10.0.12.2/24
MAC: MAC-A MAC:MAC-B
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B False
Answer: A
29 For multiple paths to the same destination network, the router needs to select by comparing the size of the Preference value_ If the Preference is the same, then select according to the size of the Cost value.
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B False
Answer: A
30. The routing table consists of multiple elements. What is wrong with the following statement?
❑ k Proto shows to learn the routing protocol of this route

❑ B. NextHop shows the local interface address of this route (Right Answers)
❑ G. Pre shows the priority of this routing protocol
❑ D. Destination/Mask shows the address and mask length of the destination network/host
Answer: B
31 The correct description of the following is 0 (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The next hop in the routing table is redundant_ If there is an outgoing interface, the packet can be forwarded.
❑ B. Routes obtained through different routing protocols have different priorities (Right Answers)
❑ C. The metrics defined by different routing protocols are not comparable (Right Answers)
❑ D. The metrics defined by different routing protocols are comparable
Answer: BC
32. ip route-static 10_0.2.2 255255/55.25510.0.12.2 preference 20, about this command, which is the correct statement? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The route can guide the data packets forwarding with the destination IP address of 10.0.2.2. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The route can guide the data packets forwarding with the destination IP address 10.0.12.2.
❑ C. The priority of the route is 20 (Right Answers)
❑ D The NextHop of the route is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
33. The network as shown in the following figure, when the network administrator performs traffic planning, it is expected that the packets sent by Host A to Host B will be connected to G0/0/3 interface between the routers. The packets sent by
Host B to Host A go pass the G0/0/4 interface between routers Which of the following commands can implement this requirement, (Multiple Choice)
0.0.122/30
HOST A
11.0,2-1
19: 10.0.12.1/30 /
OW:10.0.112
IP: 10.0.12.5/30
10.0.126
❑ A_ Router A p route-static 10 0.12.5 255 255 255 252 11.0 12.2 Router B ip route-static 10.0.12 1 255255255252 11012 5 (Right Answers)
❑ B Router A p route-static 0 0 0.0 0.0.0.0 11.0.12 6 Router B ip route-static 0 00 0 0.0.0.0 11 0.12.1
❑ C. Router A p route-static 10.0.12 5 255255255252 11 0.12_6 Router B ip route-static 10 0 12 1 255 255 255 252 11 0 12.1
❑ D. Router A p route-static 0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0 11.0 12 2 Router B ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 11_0.12.5 (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
34. If the IP address requested by the DHCP client is already occupied, which packet will the DHCP server use as the response?
❑ A. DHCP ACK
❑ B DHCP RELEASE
❑ G. DHCP NAK (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCP DISCOVER
Answer: C
35. The DHCP REQUEST message must be sent in broadcast form.

❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
36. Which DHCP message does the DHCP client send when it wants to leave the network?
❑ A. DHCP DISCOVER
❑ B. DHCP RELEASE (Right Answers)
DHCP REQUEST
• DHCP ACK
Answer: B
37 Huawei devices can be managed using the Telnet protocol. Which of the following statements is correct about this management function?
❑ A The port number used by Telnet defaultly is 22, which cannot be modified
❑ B. Telnet must enable the VTY interface, and the maximum is 15 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Telnet does not support authentication based on username and password
❑ D. Telnet does not support deploying ACLs to increase security.
Answer: B
38 As shown, the topology and the configuration on the switch interconnect pod, you can determine that the data frame labeled as VLAN 10 can be forwarded normally between the two switches_
GEO 1 GE 1
LSW1 LSW2
[LSWIlinterface GigatitEthemet0/0/1
[LSW1-Gigabitatiemet0/0/1]Port link-type trunk
(LSW1-GigabitEttitunet0/0/11eort trunk pvid vlan 20
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/111kort trunk allow-pass Nan 10
I
ILSW2jinterface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
ILSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/1Wort link-type trunk
f LSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/11Nart trunk pvid vlan 10
(LSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/11Port trunk allow -pass Wan 10
❑ A True
❑ B- False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
30 The output information of a port of the switch is as follows What is wrong with the following statement?
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port link-type trunk
port trunk pvid vlan 100
port trunk allow-pass vlan 100 200
❑ A. tithe data frame carries a VLAN TAG of 200, the switch strips the VLAN TAG and sends out (Right Answers)
❑ B. If the port receives a data frame without VLAN TAG, the switch needs to add VLAN TAG100.
❑ C The link type of the port is Hybrid type
E D. If the data frame carries a VLAN TAG of 100, the switch strips the VLAN TAG and sends out.
Answer: A
40 Which information of the data frame is judged by the VLANIF interface to perform Layer 2 forwarding or Layer 3 forwarding?
❑ A. Destination MAC (Right Answers)
❑ B Source IP
❑ C. Destination pod
❑ D Source MAC
Answer: A
41 Packets forwarded between two routers must not carry VLAN TAG.
❑ A True
❑ B False (Right Answers )
Answer: B
42. The Priority field in the VLAN tag identifies the priority of the data frame. What is the priority range?
❑ A. 0-15
❑ EL 0-63
❑ C. 0-7 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 0-3
Answer: C
43. What is the characteristic of port-based VLAN partition?
❑ A. Add a VLAN tag to the data frame based on the lP address carried in the packet.
❑ B. Assign the VLAN ID according to the protocol type and encapsulation format of the data frame.
❑ G. The host moving location no need to reconfigure the VLAN
❑ D. The host moving location needs to reconfigure VLAN (Right Answers)
Answer: D
44. The Protocol field in the PPP frame format is OxC223, indicating that the protocol is:
❑ A. CHAP (Right Answers )
❑ B. PAP
❑ C. NCP
❑ D. LCP
Answer: A
45 The configuration information of a router is as follows. Which combination of wernarne and password used by the peer router can enable PPP channel associated to complete authentication?
mist Password cipher teat

test service -,YPC 151,4
El A. Username: (esti Password: (esti

❑ B Llwmame: test Password: test (Right Answers)
❑ C. Username: test2 Password: test
▪ Llsername: test2 Password: test2
Answer: B
46. Which method does the PPPoE client use to send PADI packets to the Server?
❑ A. Broadcast (Right Answers)
❑ B. Unicast
❑ C. Multicast
❑ D. Anycast
Answer: A
47 The network shown in the following figure requires the network where the host is located to access the Internet through Easy IP. Which of the following ACL5 should be used on the 00/0/3 interface of the muter?
❑ A. ad number 2000 rub 5 permit source 10 0.13.1 0 0 0 0

❑ B. act number 2000 rub 5 permit source 10 0.120 00 0255
❑ G ad number 2000 rub 5 permit source 100 12_1 00 00
❑ B. act number 2000 rub 5 permit source 100_13 0 0 0 0 255 (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
48 The configuration information of a router is as follows Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
ISOM
authent i cal ien..schtme default.
authentication-scheme huawei
authentication-mode radius
authorization-scheme default
authorisation-scheme huawei
accounting-scheme•, defnult
domain default
domain default_admin
domain huawei
authentication-schema huawei
authorization-scheme huawei
local-user huawei password cipher 1.23956
local-user huaweitthuawei password cipher GS41321.
ke
❑ N The domain which domain name is huawei does not use the accounting scheme (Right Answers)
❑ B. if the username huawei is used for authentication, the password needs to be 654321.
❑ C. The authorization mode used by the domain which domain name is huawei is local authorization. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The authentication mode used by the domain which domain name is huawei is local authentication.
Answer: AC
49. The IKE protocol is used to establish an SA for IPsec auto-negotiation, which can support identity authentication when the address of the initiator of the negotiation changes dynamically
❑ B. False
Answer: A
50. By default, in the SNMP protocol, which port number is used by the proxy process to send an alarm message to the NMS,
❑ A 163
❑ B. 161
❑ C 162 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 164
Answer: C
51. If the result of the packet matching ACL is "reject", the packet is finally discarded.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
52. In terms of security, [Psec tunnel mode is superior to [Psec transport mode.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
53. What is the status of the OSPFv3 adjacency relationship after it is established?
❑ A. Loading
O B. 2-way
O C. Full (Right Answers)
❑ D. Down
Answer: C
54. The network as shown in the following figure, when OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces, Router A and Rcuter B cannot establish adjacencies.
Fe80::fe03:e24f/64 Fe80::fe03:c3fb/64
-1
30011 2:1/64 300112;1/64 1
GO/0/1
Router B Router A
Router ID 10.0.2.2 Router ID 10.0.2.2
O A. True (Right Answers)
0 B. False
Answer: A
55. Which of the following fields are fields that exist in both 1Pv6 and [PV4 headers? (Multiple Choice)
O A. Source Address (Right Answers)
El B. Version (Right Answers)
O C. Destination Address (Right Answers)
O D. Next Header
Answer: ABC
56. What is the destination address of the DHCPv6 request packet?

O A. FF01::1:2
LI B. FF02::1:2 (Right Answers)
111 C. FF02::1
O D. FF02::2
Answer: B
57. By defauFt, how many seconds is the period of OSPFv3 HELLO packet sending on the Ethernet link?
O A. 30
O B. 10 (Right Answers)
O C. 20
El D. 40
Answer: B
58. Which of the following fields does the MPLS header include? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Label (Right Answers)
▪ EXP (Right Answers)
❑ TTL (Right Answers)
❑ Tas
Answer: ABC
59 SR (SegmentRouting) defines a destination address prefix/node and adjacency in the network as segments, and assigns SIDS (Segment 10s) to the segments. By performing an unordered list of Adjacency SIDS and Prefix/Node SIDS
(destination address prefixes/node segments), a forwarding path is obtained
❑ A True
❑ 11 False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
60 The ARP protocol can resolve the MAC address of the target device according to the destination IP address, thereby, to map the link layer address and the IP address
❑ B. False
Answer: A
61 The Traced diagnostic tool records the 0 of each ICMP TTL timeout message so that the user can be provided with the IP address of the packet when it arrives at the destination_
❑ A Destination port
❑ B. Source port
❑ C Destination IP address
❑ D. Source 1F1 address (Right Answers)
Answer: D
€2. VLSM can expand any IP network segment ; including Class D addresses.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
63_ Which fields in the IPv4 header are related to sharding? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A_ Fragment Offset (Right Answers)
▪ Flags (Right Answers)
❑ G. Tit
❑ IT identification (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
64. The pwd and dir commands in the VRP operating platform can view the file information in the current directory.
❑ A_ True
Answer: 13
65. The output information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
<Huawei>display startup
MainBoard:
Startup system software: flash:/AR2220E-V200R007COOSPC600.cc
Next startup system software: flash:/AR2220E-V200R007COOSPC600.cc
Backup system software for next startup: null
Startup saved-configuration file: flash:/vrpcfg.zip
Next startup saved-configuration file: flash:/backup.zip
Startup license file: null
Next startup license file: null
Startup patch package: Null
Next startup patch package: null
Startup voice-files: null
Next startup voice-files: null
O A. The currently used VRP version file is the same as the VRP file used for the next startup. (Right Answers)
O B. The currently used VRP version file is different from the VRP file used for the next startup.
O C. The currently used configuration file is different from the one used for the next startup. (Right Answers)
O D. The currently used configuration file is the same as the one used for the next startup.
Answer: AC
66. For a switch running STP, the port can be directly converted to the Disabled state in any state.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
67. Which of the following MAC addresses will not age? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Dynamic MAC address
❑ B. Black hole MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Static MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Port MAC address
Answer: BC
68. By default, the bridge priority of a switch is 32768.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
69. Which port of the following switches is blocked as shown in the following figure?
SVVA SWB
4096 00-01-02-03-04-AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-BB
SWC
32768 00-01-02-03-04-CC
❑ A. GO/0/2 of SWC
❑ B. GO/0/1 of SWC (Right Answers)
❑ C GO/0/3 of SWB
❑ D. GO/0/3 of SWA
Answer: B
70. As shown in the following figure, all hosts can communicate normally. What is the correct relationship between the SWBMAC address and the port?
G 0/0/3 G 0/0/3
SA SB
G 0/0/
G /0/2 G 0/0/1
HOST A HOST B HOST C

IP: 10.1.1.1/24 IP: 10.1.1.2/24 IP: 10.1.1.3/24
MAC:MAC-A MAC:MAC-B MAC:MAC-C
❑ A. MAC-A G0/0/3 MAC-B G0/0/3 MAC-C GO/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC-A GO/0/1 MAC-B GO/0/2 MAC-C G0/0/3
❑ C. MAC-A G0/0/2 MAC-B G0/0/2 MAC-C G0/0/3
❑ D. MAC-A GO/0/1 MAC-B GO/0/1 MAC-C G0/0/3
Answer: A
71. A switch running STP protocol will send TCN BPDUs only when a port on the switch fails.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
72. How many bits of the Port ED total length in the spanning tree protocol?
El A. 16 (Right Answers)
El B. 4
El C. 2
El ID 8
Answer: A
73. As shown in the figure, the correct description about this network topology is 0.
VA
HostA Host& Host C Host D

❑ A. There are 6 collision domains in this network.
111 B. There are 6 broadcast domains in this network.
❑ C. There are 12 collision domains in this network.
El D. There are 2 broadcast domains in this network. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
74. Which of the following statements about the Backup port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
O A. Backup port as a backup of the designated port, providing another backup path from the root bridge to the corresponding network segment (Right Answers)
0 B. Backup port not only forwards user traffic but also learns MAC address
C C. Backup port does not forward user traffic but learns MAC address
0 D. Backup port provides another switchable path from the designated bridge to the root as the backup port of the root port
Answer: A
75. A network consisting of switches does not have STP enabled. A Layer 2 loop must occur.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
76_ When a port running the standard STP protocol receives a suboptimal BPDU, it immediately sends its own configuration BPDU from this port_
❑ B. False
Answer: A
77 As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF protocol_ The top of the link is the size of the Cost value_ What is the path of the RA to the network 10 0 0 NB'?
'
1°
10.0.0.0/8
Router Router D
Router C
❑ A. A-B-D
❑ B. PA can not reach 10.0.0.018
❑ C A-D
❑ D A-C-D (Right Answers)
Answer: D
TB Which of the following statements about OSPF neighbor status is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. In the Exchange state, the routers send each other a DO packet containing the summary of the link state information to describe the content of the local LSDB (Right Answers)
❑ B. The master-sinve relationship of OSPF is formed in the ExStarl state (Right Answers)
❑ C_ After the router LSDB is synchronized, it is converted to the Full state_ (Right Answers)
❑ D_ The serial number of the OD packet is determined in the Exchange state_
Answer: ABC
79. On the network shown in the following figure, the administrator wants Router A to use static mutes to send packets to Router B priority through GO/0/1 Which command can be used to meet this requirement'
GO/0/1
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12 2/24 Loopback 0
O 10.0.2.2/32
10.0.21.1/24 10.0.21.2/2
Router A GO/0/2 Router B
❑ A. ip mute-static 100 22 255.255.255.255 10 0.12 2 ip route-static 10.0 22 255.255.255.255 10 0212 preference 40
❑ B. ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255 255 255 10.0.122 ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.212 preference 70 Might Answers)
❑ C ip route-static 10 0 22 255.255.255.255 100_12.2 ip route-static 10 0 22 255.255.255.255 10 0212
▪ ip route-static 10 02 2 255 255 255 255 10 0.12 2 preference 70 ip route-static 10 0 2.2 255.255.255.255 10.021.2
Answer: B
80 ip route-static 10 0.12.0 255 255.255 0 192.168.1.1

The correct description about this command is 0.
❑ A. The priority of this route is 100
❑ B. This command configures a route to the 192.168.1.1 network_
❑ C This command configures a route to the 10_0 12 0 network. (Right Answers)
❑ D. if the router learns the route of the same destination network as this route through other protocols, the router wit prefer this route.
Answer: C
81 Network structure and OSPF partition as shown in the figure, except for R1, routers R2, R3 and R4 are ABR routers of OSPF.
Areal R4 Area2
❑ A True
Answer: B
82[R1] ospf
[R1-ospf-I area I
[R1-ospf-1-area-00 0 1] netted< 10 0.12 0 0 0 0255
As shown in the configuration, the administrator has configured OSPF on R1, but R1 cannot learn the mutes of other routers. The possible reason is () (Multiple Choice)
❑ A This router is not configured with authentication, but the neighbor router is configured with authentication (Right Answers )
❑ B The OSPF process 10 is not configured when this router is configured_
❑ C The area ID configured by this router is different from the area ID of its neighbor router (Right Answers )
❑ B. This router does not announce the network connecting neighbors when configuring OSPF (Right Answers)
Answer: ACID
83. Which of the following data packets is the OSPF protocol encapsulated in?
❑ A. IP (Right Answers)
❑ B. liTTP
❑ C. UDP
❑ D. TGP
Answer: A
84 Whichi of the following about the default route is correct! (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The default route can only be manually configured by the administrator.
❑ B In the routing table the default route appears as a route to the network 0 0 0 0 (the mask is also 0 0 00) (Right Answers)
❑ C There must be a default route in the routing table of any router
❑ 0 If the destination address of the packet cannot match any destination address of the routing table, the packet will be forwarded by selecting the default route (Right Answers)
Answer: BO
85 When configuring a static mule on a broadcast interlace, you can configure a static route by specifying the next hop address or outbound interlace_
❑ A True
❑ B False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
86. Which of the following attributes cannot be used as a parameter to measure Cost?
111 A. Delay
111 B. sysname (Right Answers)
El C. Hop count
❑ D. Bandwidth
Answer: B
87. As shown in the following figure. Router A and Router B establish an OSPF neighbor relationship. The OSPF process ID of Router A is 1 and the area ID is O. Which of the following methods can enable Router B to obtain the route of the
nehvork segment where Host A is located? (Multiple Choice)
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24
GO/0/1
Rou er A Router B
is° E;
0
lj IP:192.168.1.1/24
GW:192.168.1.2
HOST A
0 A ospf t area 0.0.0.0 network 192.168.1.00.0.0.255 0 (Right Answers)
FA B ospf 1 import-route direct 0 (Right Answers)
P C. ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 192168.0.00.0.255 255 (Right Answers)
❑ D ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 1.2 0.0.0.0 0 (Right Answers )
Answer. ABCD
88. Which of the following fields does not contain in HELLO packets of OSPF protocol?
El A. Neighbor
11] B. sysname (Right Answers)
CI C. Hello Interval
CI D. Network Mask
Answer: B
89. What are the roles of OSPF DR and BDR? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Reduce the number of adjacencies (Right Answers)
111 B. Reduce the type of OSPF packets
C] C. Reduce the time it takes to establish adjacency
CI D. Reduce the number of exchanges of link state information (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
90. Which of the following are routing protocols? (Multiple Choice)

CI A. BGP (Right Answers)
El B. IPX
111 C. OSPF (Right Answers)
111 D. IP
Answer: AC
91. A company network administrator wants to be able to remotely manage branch network devices. Which of the following protocols will be used?
❑ A. VLSM
❑ B. Telnet (Right Answers)
❑ C. RSTP
❑ D. CIDR
Answer: B
92. Which of the following message types does DHCP contain? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. DHCP ROLLOVER
❑ B. DHCP DISCOVER (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCP REQUEST (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCP OFFER (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
93. Telnet is based on the TCP protocol.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
95. What should do when the Access port sends a data frame?
❑ A. Replace VLAN TAG forwarding
❑ B. Stripping TAG forwarding (Right Answers)
❑ C. Mark PVID forwarding
❑ D. Send a message with TAG
Answer: B
96. If the configuration information of a port on a switch is as follows, when this port sent the data frames of which VLAN, the VLAN TAG is stripped?
port hybrid tagged vlan 2 to 3 100
port hybrid untagged vlan 4 6
❑ A. 4,5,6
❑ B. 4,6
❑ C. 1,4,6 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 1,4,5,6
Answer: C
97. The configuration information of a port on the switch is as follows, when the port sends the data frame of which VLAN TAG is carried, the VLAN TAG is stripped?
*
port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 20 30 90
❑ A 10 (Right Answers)
❑ B 20
❑ C. 30
❑ D. 40
Answer: A
98. When a port of the switch sends a data frame carrying the same VLAN TAG and PVID, it must strip the VLAN TAG forwarding.
❑ A. True
❑ B FaEse (Right Answers)
Answer: B
99 As shown in the following figure, Router A uses manual link aggregation and adds GO/0/1 and G0/0/2 ports to aggregation group 1 The incorret statement about the status of Router A aggregation port 1 is:
Eth-Trunk 1 10.0.12.1/24 Eth-Trunk 1 10.0.12.2/24
O C0/0/2 O
Router A Router B
❑ A_ Only shut down GO/0/2 of Router B, Eth-Trunk 1 protocol up
❑ Tum off GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 ports on Router B at the same time, Eth-Tmnk 1 protocol up (Right Answers)
❑ a Only shut down GO/0/1 of Router B, Eth-Trunk 1protocol up
❑ B. Turn off GO/0/1 and G0/0/2 ports on Router B at the same time, Eth-Trunk 1 protocol down
Answer: B
1 00. In the network shown in the figure the correct description of the following is:
5 WA RTA SWB
HUB SWC
❑ A. The network between RTA and SWC is the same collision domain.
❑ B. The network between SWA and SWC is the same broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The network between SWA and SWC is the same collision domain. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The network between SWA and SWB is the same broadcast domain.
Answer: BC
1 09. When NAT uses a dynamic address pool, addresses in the address pool can be reused, that is, the same IP is mapped to multiple intranet (Ps at the same time
❑ A True
Answer: B
102. Which of the following values is used in the LengthfType field of the Ethernet data frame, indicating that the packet is in the PPPoE discovery phase?
❑ A. 0x0800
❑ B. 0x8863 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 0x8864
❑ D. 0x0806
Answer, B
103. Regarding PPP configuration and deployment ; which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. PPP does not support mutual authentication
❑ B. PPP cannot modify keepalive time
❑ C. PPP cannot be used to deliver IP addresses.
❑ D. PPP supports CHAP and PAP authentication modes. (Right Answers )
Answer: D
104. On the Huawei device, if AAA authentication is used for authorization, when the remote server does not respond, authorization can be performed from the network device side.
0 B. False
Answer: A
105. As shown in the network, the configuration information of Router A is as follows. Which of the following statement is wrong?
acl number 2000
rule 5 deny source 200.0.12.0 0.0.0.7
rule 10 permit source 200.0.12.0 0.0.0.15
traffic-filter outbound acl 2000
Router A
❑ A. The host with the source FP address of 200.0.12.2 cannot access the Internet.
❑ B. The host with the source EP address of 200.0.12.6 cannot access the Internet.
❑ C. The host with the source IP address of 200.0.12.8 cannot access the Internet. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The host with the source IP address of 200.0.12.4 cannot access the Internet.
Answer: C
106. Based on ACL rules, which of the following types can an ACL be classified into? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Layer 2 ACL (Right Answers)
❑ B. User ACL
❑ C. Advanced ACL (Right Answers)
❑ D. Basic ACL (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
107. The Management Information Base MIB is a virtual database that is stored on the NMS.
O A. True
O B. False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
108. As shown in the following figure, what is the scope of AH protocol authentication in IPsec tunnel mode?
New IP Header IP Header ,AH Header TCP Header Data

1
2
3
4
O A. 1
O B. 2
O C. 3
O D. 4 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
109. The ACL on the AR G3 series router supports two matching sequences: configuration order and automatic sorting.
D A. True (Right Answers)
[11 B. False
Answer: A
110. The requested node multicast address consists of the prefix FF02::1:FF00:0/104 and the last 24 bits of the unicast address.
0 A. True (Right Answers)
O B. False
Answer: A
111. How many seconds is the period of the OSPFv3 HELLO packet on the P2P link by default?
O A. 10 (Right Answers)
El B. 20
O C. 30
El D. 40
Answer: A
112. The multicast address FF02::2 indicates all routers in the link-local range.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
113. The basic header length of an IPv6 message is a fixed value.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
114. IPv6 address 2001: ABEF 224E: FFE2: BCCO: CDOO: DDBE 8D58 cannot be abbreviated.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
115. The router Router D neighbor relationship is as follows Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
(-Router D>displey osofv3 peer 10. 0, 3. 3 verbose

OSPFv3 Process (1)
Neighbor 10. 0, 3. 3 is 2-Way, interface address FE80; ;MO:FCFF :4ECS

In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface GEC/0/0
DR Priority is 1 DR is 10.0.2.2 BDR is 10.0.1.1
Options is 01000013
Dead timer due in 00:00:35
Neighbour is up for 00:00:00
Database Suaueary Packets List 0
Link State Request List 0
Link State Retransmission List 0
Neighbour Event: 2
Neighbour If Id :
❑ A. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.2.2. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.1.1.
❑ C. This router is a DROther router (Right Answers)
❑ D. This router and the router with Router-ID 10.5.3.3 cannot directly exchange link state information. (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
116. SRGB (segment routing global block). A local label set reserved for the global segment. In MPLS and IP,(6, SRGB is a collection of local labels reserved for global labels.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers )
Answer: B
117_ One of the reasons for the emergence of SR (Segment Routing) is that there are some factors that restrict the devebpment of traditional LOP. What are the correct descriptions about LOP of the following? (MullipP Choice)
❑ A. LOP calculation depends on ICP When IGP and LOP are not synchronized, it will cause black holes and affect the service (Right Answers)
❑ B LOP itself has 11 kinds of protocol packets, which greatly increases link bandwidth consumption and device CPU utilization. (Right Answers)
❑ C. LOP only supports IGP shortest path (minimum overhead) for path calculation, and does not support traffic engineering. (Right Answers)
▪ LOP cannot implement automatic label allocation
Answer: ABC
118_ The network administrator wants to be able to effectively use the IP address of the 192 168 176_0/25 network segment_ Now the company's marketing department has 20 mainframes, it is best to assign which of the following address
segment to the marketing depadment?
❑ A. 192_168_176_160/27
❑ B. 192.168.17696/27 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 192 168 176 0/25
❑ B. 192 168 176 4W29
Answer: B
119 When using gm ping command on the VRP platform, d you need to specify an IP address as the source address of the echo request message, which of the loemung parameters shouts be used/When using the sing command on Ihe VRP
platform, if you need lo specify an IP address as the source address of the echo request message, which of the following parameters should he used?
ID A. -s
❑ Ei -a (Right Answers)
❑ C4
❑ o_ -n
Answer. El
120. Which of the following types of addresses cannot be used as the IPv4 address of host?
❑ A. Class A address
❑ B. Class B address
❑ C. Class C address
❑ D. Class D address (Right Answers)
Answer: D
121. A company applies for a Class C IP address segment, but it is assigned to 6 subsidiaries. The largest subsidiary has 26 computers. Different subsidiaries must be in different network segments. So the network subnet mask of the largest
subsidiary should be, set to 0.
C A 255 255.255.224 (Right Answers)
17 B. 255.255.255.128
C C. 255.255.255.0
E 0. 255.255.255.192
Answer, A
122. Which of the following statement about the transport layer protocol is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. UDP uses the SYN and ACK flags to request to establish a connection and confirm the connection.
❑ B. Well-known port number range is 0-1023 (Right Answers )
❑ C. UDP is suitable for transmitting delay-sensitive traffic and can be reorganized according to the sequence number field in the message header.
❑ D. The establishment of a TCP connection is a three-way handshake process, and the termination of a TCP connection is subject to a four-way handshake. (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
123. Which of the following commands can modify the device name to huawei?
❑ A. rename huawei
❑ B. sysname huawei (Right Answers)
❑ C. do name huawei
❑ D. hostname huawei
Answer: B
124. The administrator wants to update the VRP of the AR2200 router. The correct method is (). (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The administrator configures the AR2200 as a TFTP server to transmit VRP software through TFTP.
❑ B. The administrator configures the AR2200 as a TFTP client to transmit VRP software through TFTP. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The administrator configures the AR2200 as an FTP server to transfer VRP software through FTP. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The administrator configures the AR2200 as an FTP client to transfer VRP software through FTP. (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
125. What are the command line views exsiting on the VRP operating platform?
❑ A. Interface view (Right Answers)
❑ B. User view (Right Answers)
❑ C. Protocol view (Right Answers)
❑ D. System view (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
126. Which bridge ID is not possible in the configuration BPDU sent by the switch?
❑ A. 4096 01-01-02-03-04-05 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 0 10-01-02-03-04-05
❑ C. 32768 06 01 02 03 04 05
❑ D. 0 00-01-02-03-04-05
Answer: A
127. In a switch networking, if a loop occurs, it may cause a broadcast storm.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
128. The loop protection function provided by the RSTP protocol can take effect only on the specified port.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
129. In the RSTP protocol, the edge port loses the edge port attribute when it receives the configuration BPDU message.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
130. When STP is running on Huawei Sx7 series switches ; the priority of the switch is 0 by default.
❑ A. 8192
❑ B. 32768 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 16384
❑ D. 4096
Answer: B
131. Which of the following statement about the role of the STP protocol Forward Delay is correct?
❑ A. Reduce the time interval for BPDU transmission
❑ B. Delay in the transition of Blocking state and Disabled state
❑ C. Improve the convergence speed of STP
❑ D. Improve the BPDU lifetime and ensure that the configuration BPDU can be forwarded to more switches.
❑ E. Preventing temporary loops (Right Answers)
Answer: E
132. What is the correct statement about the static MAC address table?
❑ A. The user is manually configured and delivered to each interface board. The entries cannot be aged. (Right Answers)
❑ B. By viewing the static MAC address entry, you can determine whether there is data forwarding between the two connected devices.
❑ C. Static MAC address entries are lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or the interface board is reset.
❑ D. You can obtain the number of users communicating on the interface by viewing the number of static MAC address entries.
Answer: A
133. Which parameter is used in the spanning tree protocol to erect the root bridge?
❑ A. Port ID
❑ B. The system name of the switch
❑ C. Root path cost
❑ D. Bridge ID (Right Answers)
Answer: D
134 The administrator finds that the two routers stay in the TWO-WAY state when establishing an OSPF neighbor, the correct description of the following is ()
❑ A. The router is configured with the same zone ID
❑ B. These two routers are DR Other routers in the broadcast network. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The router is configured with the wrong router ID
❑ D The router is configured with the same process ID
Answer: B
135 An AR2200 router barns the route entries to the same network through OSPF and RIPv2 The cost of the route learned through OSPF is 4882 The number of hops learned through 51552 is 4 The routing table of the router will have ()
❑ A OSPF and RIPv2 routing
❑ 8 OSPF routing (Right Answers)
❑ C Both do not exist
❑ D RIPv2 routing
Answer: B
136. When the router forwards the datagram ; the data link layer needs to be re-encapsulated every time a data link layer passed.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
137. Which of the following network types does the OSPF protocol support? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Broadcast type (Right Answers)
❑ B. Point to point (Right Answers)
❑ C. Point-to-point type (Right Answers)
❑ D. NBMA (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
138. Which of the following are the stable states of OSPF neighbor relationships? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Down (Right Answers)
❑ B. Full (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2-way (Right Answers)
❑ D. Attempt
Answer: ABC
139. Which of the following routing protocols are dynamic routing protocols? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. OSPF (Right Answers)
❑ B. BGP (Right Answers)
❑ C. Direct
❑ D. Static
Answer: AB
140 As shown in the figure, all routers run OSPF protocol, and the OSPF process number i5 1 and the area number is 0 Which of the following commands can implement this requirement on Router A? (Multiple Choice)
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24
O GO/0/1 O
Router A Router B
❑ A # ospf 1 area 00 0 0 network 10 0.12.1 0 0 00 # (Right Answers)
❑ B # ospf 1 area 0000 network 100.1200003#
❑ C. # ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 0 12 0 00 0 255 # (Right Answers)
❑ 0 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 ip address 10 0 121 255 255 255 0 ospf enable 1 area 0 0 0 0 # (Right Answers)
Answer: AGO
141. In the OSPF protocol, which of the following description of the DR is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The adjacency relationship must also be established between the DR and the BDR. (Right Answers)
❑ B. If the priority values of the two routers are equal. select the router with the large router ID as the DR (Right Answers)
❑ C if the priority values of the two routers are different, select the router with the smaller priority value as the DR_
❑ D By default, all routers in this broadcast network will participate in DR elections (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
142 As shown in the figure, after the Um routers are configured with OSPF, the administrator configures the <mlenhinterfaces0f0/1> command on the RTA. The correct description is O (Multiple Choice)
RTA RTB
SO/0/1 60/0/1
❑ A The RTA wit continue to receive and analyze the OSPF packets sent by the RTB.
❑ B_ The neighbor relationship of the two routers will be down_ (Right Answers)
❑ C_ RTA wit not send OSPF packets anymore_ (Right Answers)
❑ 0_ The neighbor relationship of the two routers wit not be affected
Answer: BC
143. A DHCP OFFER packet can wry a DNS address, but can only carry one DNS address..
❑ A. True
Answer: B
144 As hown in the following figure, host A logs in to Router A through Telnet, and then obtains the configuration file of Router B through FM on the remote interface_ How many TCP connections exist on Router A?
HOST A
IP :192.168.1.2/2
GW:192.168.1.1
❑ A.1
❑ B2
❑ 0.4
Answer: C
145 At present, the company has a network administrator. The AR2200 in the company network can be for remote management after directly enter the password through Telnet.
The company has two new network administrators, and wants to assign all administrators their respective usernames and passwords, as well as different permission levels. So what should doe (Multiple Choice)
❑ A When configuring each administrator's account, you need to configure different permission levels_ (Right Answers)
▪ R User authentication mode configured by Telnet must select AAA mode (Right Answers)
❑ C Configure three user names and their corresponding passwords in the AAA New. (Right Answers)
❑ CI Each administrator uses different public IP addresses of the device when running the Telnet command_
Answer: ABC
146. What is the role of the port trunk allow-pass vtan all command?
❑ A. The connected peer device can dynamically determine which VLAN IDs can pass.
❑ B. If the port default vian3 command is configured for the connected remote device, VLAN 3 between the two devices cannot communicate.
❑ C The peer port connected to the port must be configured with port trunk permit vlan all
❑ D. Allow all data frames of the VLAN to pass through the port. (Right Answers )
Answer: D
14T_ The Hybrid port can connect to both the user host and other switches_
I=1 A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False
Answer: A
148. The IP addresses of the VLANIF interfaces on the same switch cannot be the same.
❑ A. True (Right Answers )
❑ B. False
Answer: A
149. As shown in the following figure, the router uses the sub-interface as the gateway of the host. The P address of the gateway is 10 0.12 2 Which of the following commands can fu II this requirement? (Multiple Choice)
10.0.12.2/24
SWA
G 0/0/2 O
Access elan 20 Router A
ct
0
O
HOST A
11,1 10.0.12.1/24
MAC:MAC-A
❑ A interface GigabitEthemet0/0/43 10 dotlq termination yid 10 ip address 100_122 255255 255 0 arp broadcast enable #
❑ B. interface Gi gabitEthernot0/0/0 20 dotlq termination old 20 ip address 100_12 2 255255255 0 arp broadcast enable # (Right Answers )
❑ G. interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0.10 dotlq termination vid 20 ip address 10.0.12.2 255.255.255.0 arp broadcast enable # (Right Answers )
❑ a interface GigabitEthernet0/0/020 dotlq termination yid 10 ip address 10 0 12 2 255255 255 0 arp broadcast enable M
Answer: BC
150 The network administrator creates VLAN 10 on the Layer 3 switch and configures an IP address on the virtual interface of the VLAN_ When you use the command "<I>display ip interface brief</l,to check the status of the interface and
find that the VLANIF 10 interface is down, what operations should be taken to restore the VLANIF 10 interface?
❑ A Use the command "undo shutdown" on the VLANIF 10 interface.
❑ B. Incorporate a physical interface whose state must be Up into VLAN 10 (Right Answers)
❑ C Incorporate any physical interface into VLAN 10
❑ 0_ Incorporate an interface whose state must be Up and must be of the Trurk type into VLAN 10
Answer: B
151 As shown in the figure, the network administrator creates VLAN 2 on the SWA and SWB, and configures the ports connected to the host on the two switches as access ports and assigns them to VLAN 2 Configure GO/0/1 of the SA and
GO/0/2 of the SWB as trunk ports to allow all VLANs to pass. To achieve normal communication between the two hosts, he also needs 0
Hos, Host 13
VI Na VW
❑ A_ Create VLAN 2 on the SWC.

❑ B. Configure GO/0/1 on the SWC as the trunk port and allow VLAN 2 to pass.
❑ G Configure GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 on the SWC as trunk ports and allow VLAN 2 to pass.
❑ 0_ Create VLAN 2 on the SWC, configure GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 as trunk ports and alum VLAN 2 to pass (Right Answers )
Answer:
152 As shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows_ According to the network and configuration, which of the following statements are correct,(Multiple Choice)
Router B
interface Senal1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10 021 1 255.255 255 0
ospf 1 router-id 10021.1

area 0000
network 10 0 21_1 0_0_0_0
Router A
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10 012.1 255 255 255 0

area 0000
network 10 0_121 0 0 0_0
S 1/0/0 S 1/0/0
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.21.1/24
O
Router A Router B
❑ A_ Router A and Router B cannot team the MAC address of the other interface. (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Router A and Router B have ARP tables_
❑ C Two routers can establish OSPF adjacency (Right Answers)
❑ El There is no OR and BOR in the network (Right Answers)
Answer: AGO
153 The data link layer uses PPP encapsulation, and the iP addresses at both ends of the hnk may not he in the same network segment
❑ A True (Right Answers )
❑ B. False
Answer: A
154. The command to enable CHAP authentication in PPP is: ppp chap authentication.
❑ A. True
❑ False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
155. Apply the following ACL in SNMP: which of the following is wrong?
act number 2000
rule 5 permit source 192.168.1.2 0
rule 10 permit source 192.168 1_3 0
❑ A. The device with IP address 192_168_1.5 can use SNMP service. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device with IP address 192.168.1.3 can use SNMP service.
❑ C. The device with the [P address of 192.168.1.4 can use SUMP service.
❑ D. The device with IP address 192.168.1.2 can use SNMP service.
Answer: A
156. In the packet encapsulation format shown in the figure, which of the following fields will be encrypted by the ESP protocol of IPsec VPN?
❑ A_ ESP Header, TCP Header, Data

❑ B. ESP Header, TCP Header, Data, ESP Trailer
❑ C. ESP Header, Tam Header, Data, ESP Trailer, ESP Auth
❑ D. TCP Header, Data, ESP Trailer (Right Answers )
Answer: D
157 As shown in the figure below, what is the scope of AH protocol authentication in IPsec transmission mode?
IP Header AH Header CP Header Data

1
2
3
4 .
1=1 A. 1
ID B. 2
CI C. 3
❑ D. 4 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
158. When the data encapsulation mode of I Psec is tunnel mode, the IP address of the intranet host is hidden, which can protect the security of the entire original data packet.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
159. Which of the following commands configures the authentication mode to be HWTACACS authentication?
❑ A. authorization-mode hwtacacs
❑ B. authentication-mode local
❑ C. authentication-mode none
❑ D. authentication-mode hwtacacs (Right Answers )
Answer: D
160. During the establishment of the adjacency relationship, what is the role of DD packets in OSPFv3?
❑ A. Used to send the required LSA to the peer router
❑ B. Discover and maintain neighbor relationships
❑ C. To describe its own LSDB (Right Answers)
❑ D. Request missing LSA
Answer: C
161. ff the MAC address of an interface is OEEO-FFFE-OFEC, what is its corresponding EU1-64 address?
❑ A. 02E0-FCFF-FEEF-OFEC (Right Answers)
❑ B. OOEO-FCEF-FFFE-OFEC
❑ C. OOEO-FCFF-FFFE-OFEC
❑ D. 00E0-FCFF-FEEF-OFEC
Answer: A
162. Which field of the IPv6 header can be used for Q0S?
❑ A. Next Header
❑ B. Payload Length
❑ C. Traffic Class (Right Answers)
❑ D. Version
Answer: C
163. The simplest form of IPv6 address 3001:0DB8:0000:0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58 is?

❑ A. 3001:0D138::0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
❑ B. 3001:DB8::346:ABCD:42BC:8D58 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 3001:DB8:0346:ABCD:42BC:81358
❑ D. 3001:0DB8:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
Answer: B
164. The same interface of the router cannot be used as both a DHCPv6 server and a DHCPv6
❑ B. False
Answer: A
165. Which packet is sent by the DI ICPv6 client, requesting the DI ICPv6 server to assign an IPv6 address and network configuration parameters to it?
❑ A. Solicit (Right Answers)
❑ B. Advertise
❑ C. Discover
❑ D. Request
Answer: A
166. Segment routing (SR) is a protocol based on what idea to design for forwarding packets on the network?
❑ A. Routing strategy
❑ B. Destination routing
❑ C. Policy routing
❑ D. Source routing (Right Answers)
Answer: D
167. How many bytes are the packets using the MPLS label double-layer nesting technology more than the original IP packets?
❑ A. 4
❑ C. 16
❑ D. 32
Answer; B
168. Which of the following subnet routes can aggregate fron the route entry 10.0.0.24/29? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 10.0.0.24130 (Right Answers )
❑ B. 10.0.0.26130
❑ C. 10.0.0.28/30 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 10.0.0.23/30
Answer: AC
164. An IPv4 packet header length field is 20B. and the Iota[ length field is 1500B then what is the packet payload?
❑ A. 20B
❑ B_ 1520B
❑ C. 1480B (Right Answers )
❑ D. 95000
Answer: C
170. Which of the following is unlikely to be the 1l3v4 packet header length?
❑ A. 208
❑ 8. 64B (Right Answers)
❑ C. 608
❑ ❑. 328
Answer: B
171. The Ethernet optical interface can only work in the 0 mode.
❑ A. Full duplex (Right Answers)
❑ B. Half duplex
❑ C. Simplex
❑ D. Soft-negotiation
Answer: A
172 <Huawei>
Warning- Auto-Gonfig is working. Before configunng the device, stop Auto-Gonfigif you perform configurations when Auto-Gonfig is running, the DHCP routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost.
Do you want to stop Auto-config, [YIN]:
The administrator found that the above message popped up on the demo_ The correct statement about this information is (),
❑ A. If you need to enable automatic configuration, the administrator needs to choose
❑ B. If you do not need to enable automatic configuration, the administrator needs to select N
❑ G When the device is first started, the auto configuration function is enabled (Right Answers)
❑ D When the device is first started, the auto configuration function is disabled.
Answer: C
173. Which of the following commands can be used to query the configuration information of the OSPF protocol? (Mutliple Choice)
❑ A. dis ip routing-table
❑ B. display current-configuration (Right Answers)
❑ C. display ospf peer
❑ D. In OSPF protocol view display this (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
174. The output information of a certain device is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
<Huawei>display interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

ailiegitEthemet0/0/0 current state : DP
Line protocol current slate 7 LIFE
Route Port, The !axiom Transmit Unit is 1000
Internet Address is 10. 0.12. 2/29
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFIT_ETHNI_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc224fff
Port lode: FORCE COPPER
Speed : 100, Loosback: NOW
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: DISABLE
Ech : AUTO
Last 300 seconds input rate 24 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Lest 300 seconds output rate 24 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
❑ A. The MAC address of the interface is 00e0-fe22-4fff (Right Answers)
❑ B. The IP address of the interface is 10 0 122/24. (Right Answers)
❑ C The working speed of this interface is 1Gbps_
❑ D. The MTh value of this interface is 1000. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
175 What is the correct statement about the black hole MAC address table? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The saved entries are not lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or the interface board is reset (Right Answers)
❑ B. It is manually configured and delivered to each interface board. The entries cannot be aged (Right Answers)
❑ C. After the blackhole MAC address is configured, the packet which source MAC address or the destination MAC address is the MAC address will be discarded. (Right Answers)
❑ 0 You can filler out illegal users by configuring blackhole MAC address entries. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABC0
176. Which is the correct statement about the static MAC address table? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A After the interface is stabcaily bound to the MAC address, the other interface receives the packet whose source MAC address is the MAG address will be discarded. (Right Answers)
DB_ By viewing the static MAC address entry, you can determine whether there is data forwarding between the two connected devices.
❑ C. A static MAC address entry can be bound to only one outbound interface_ (Right Answers)
❑ B. The saved entries are not lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or the interface board is reset. (Right Answers)
Answer: AC0
177. In the RSTP protocol, when the root port fails, 0 will he quickly converted to the new root port and immediately enter the forwarding state.
❑ A. Backup port
❑ B. Edge port
❑ C. Forwarding port
❑ D. Alternate port (Right Answers)
Answer: D
1 78. Both the Alternate port and the Backup port in RSTP cannot forward user traffic in RSTP, but can receive, process, and send BPDUs.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
179. Al[ switches in the following figure have STP protocol enabled, if the path cost of all ports is 200_
What is the path cost value included in the configuration BPDU received by the GO/0/4 port of SWD?
SWA SWB
32768 00-01 02 03 04 AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-13E1
SWD
32168 00-01-02.03-04-CC 32768 00-01 -02-03-04- DI)
D A. 0
❑ B. 200 (Right Answers )
❑ G. 400
❑ D. €00
Answer: B
180 As shown in the figure, at four switches run SIP, and various parameters use default values. When a port on the root switch sends a lam and fails to send configuration BPOUs through the port, how bng before the bbcked port in the
network enters the forwarding state,
floor
hC
❑ A About 30 seconds
❑ B About 50 seconds (Right Answers)
❑ G About 15 seconds
❑ 0. About 3 seconds
Answer: B
1 81. By default, it takes at least 30 seconds for the port status in SW to be changed from ❑isabled to forwarding.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
182. There are multiple NextHops in the routing table that reach the same destination network. These routes are called?
❑ A. Equivalent routing (Right Answers)
❑ B. ❑efault route
❑ C. Multipath routing
❑ ❑ - Suboptimal routing
Answer: A
183. Which of the following network types does the OSPF protocol need to elect DR and BDR? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Point-to-point type
❑ B. Broadcast type (Right Answers)
❑ C. NBMA (Right Answers)
❑ D. Point to point
Answer: BC
184. The Router ID of the OSPF process takes effect immediately after being modified.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
185. When configuring OSPF on a router, you must manually configure 0. (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Enable OSPF process (Right Answers)
❑ B. Create an OSPF area (Right Answers)
❑ C. Configure the router ID
❑ D. Specify the network included in each zone (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
186. The priority of the static routing protocol cannot be specified manually.
O A. True
Answer: B
187. Which of the following statements about direct route is correct?

❑ A. Direct route priority is lower than dynamic route
❑ B. Direct route requires the administrator to manually configure the destination network and next hop address.
❑ C. Direct route has the highest priority (Right Answers)
O D. Direct route priority is lower than static route
Answer: C
188. The router in the backbone area has all the LSDBs in all its areas.
O A. True
Answer: B
189. Which of the following parameters does the OSPF protocol use for the master-slave relationship election?
O A. Process number of OSPF protocol
O B. Router ID (Right Answers)
O C. Sequence of startup protocols
❑ D. Interface IP address
Answer: B
190.According to the following DHCP flowchart, which statements are true? (Multiple Choice)
Client 08CP Server
DHG. oistaver
Slept
MCP Offer
Strp2
CHCP Request
Srep3
DliCP ACK
sup&
El A. In step 1, multicast packets are sent.

111 B. In step 2 ; unicast packets are sent. (Right Answers)
111 C. In step 3; broadcast packets are sent. (Right Answers)
El D. In step 4, unicast packets are sent. (Right Answers)
El E. In step 4, broadcast packets are sent.
Answer: BCD
191. The DHCP protocol interface address pool has a higher priority than the global address pool.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
192. As shown in the following figure, all links are Ethernet links, and all routers run OSPF. How many DR are elected in the entire network?
Router
0..
0 A. 1
O B. 2
O C. 3
Answer: D
193. How many member ports can be added to an Eth-Trunk interface on ARG3 series router and X7 series switch?
D A. 6
D C. 10
CI D. 12
Answer; B
194. A trunk port can send both tagged data frames and unlabeled data frames.
GA. TRUE (Right Answers)
Cl B. FALSE
Answer: T
195. As shown in the figure, if host A has host B ARP cache, host A can ping through host B.
Access vian Xo
SWA
G 0/0/2
Access vtan 20 SERVER B
tp 14;0 I/
ipodu 14.41A4
HOST A
IP 10.0.12.1.124
MAC:MAC
0 A. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)
Answer: F
196. Which of the following statements about one-arm routing is correct? (Multiple choice)
0 A. One physical connection per VLAN
O B. On the switch, configure the port connected to the router as a trunk port and allow the frames of the relevant VLAN to pass. (Right Answers)
O C. Need to create a sub-interface on the router (Right Answers)
O D. Only one physical link is used between the switch and the router. (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
197. Which of the following statements about link aggregation is correct? (Muitiple choice)
0 A. Eth-Truk interfaces cannot be nested (Right Answers )
O B. Ensure that the modes of link aggregation on the two devices are the same when the two devices are connected to each other_ (Right Answers)
O C. The GE interface and the FE interface cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk interface. (Right Answers)
O D. GE electrical interfaces and GE optical interfaces cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk interface. (Right Answers)
Answer; ABCD
198. NAPT uses the same public IP address but different port numbers to translate private IP addresses. Which statement regarding the port number is correct?
El A. It is necessary to configure port number mapping manually.
El B. It is only necessary to configure the port number range.
El C. It is not necessary to configure port numbers.
0 D. An access control list is needed to assign port numbers. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
199. Refer to the graphic.
RTA RTB
NDLC
Loopback 0 S1/0/1 S1/0/1
10.1.1.1132 I
10.1.1.2/24
On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command "ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0" has been configured.
Which following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
O A. The IP address of RTA interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/24.
O B. The IP address of RTA interface serial 11011 is 10.1.1.1/32. (Right Answers )
Ei C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in RTA's routing-table.
O D. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 does not exist in RTA's routing-table. (Right Answers)
Answer; BD
200. The data link layer is encapsulated in PPP. The IP addresses at both ends of the link cannot be in the same network segment.
O B. FALSE
Answer: T
201. Which of the following parameters are identified by the SA (Security Association)? (Multiple choice)
O A. Source IP address
O B. Security Parameter Index (SPI) (Right Answers)
O C. Destination IP address (Right Answers)
O D. Security Protocol (AH or ESP) (Right Answers)
Answer; BCD
202. As shown in the following figure, IPSec uses tunnel mode. What is the scope of ESP encryption?
New IP AH ESP IP TCP Data ESP ESP Auth

Header Header Header Header Header Tail Data
0 A. 1 (Right Answers)
O B. 2
O C. 3
O D. 4
Answer, A
203. The Router-ID of OSPFv3 can be automatically generated by the system.

OA. TRUE
0 B. FALSE (Right Answers)
Answer: F
204. The following about IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration and DHCPv6, which is correct? (Multiple choice)
O A. IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration uses RA and RS messages (Right Answers)
El B. DHCPv6 is more manageable than stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
O C. DHCPv6 can be divided into DHCPv6 stateful autoconfiguration and DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. (Right Answers)
O D. IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration and DHCPv6 can allocate related configuration information such as DNS address to the host.
Answer; ABC
205. Which of the following is the value of the IPv6 multicast address flag field indicates that the multicast address is a temporary multicast address?
O A. 0
0 B. 1 (Right Answers)
O C. 2
0 D. 3
Answer. B
206. Which of the following is the value of the IPv6 multicast address flag field indicates that the multicast address is permanent multicast address?
O B. 1
O C. 2
O D. 3
Answer. A
207. Based on tv1PLS labels, you can mark up to how many types of data streams with different service fevers?
❑ A. 2
❑ B. 4
El C. 8 (Right Answers)
El D. 16
Answer: C
208. Segment Routing encodes the segment sequence representing the forwarding path in the packet header_ As the packet is transmitted, the receiver parses the segment sequence after receiving the packet. If the top segment identifier of the
segment sequence is the local node, the identifier is displayed, and then the next step is processed. It it is not the local node, the packet is forwarded to the next node by using the ECMP (Equal Cost Muftiple Path) mode.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers )
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
209. The router interface output information is as follows ; which is correct? (Multiple choice)
(1-Turragei>dispIay ipv6 interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

GigabitEthernet0/0/0 curront state : UP
11)v6 protocol current state : UP
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is Irn0::210:FCFF:FF6F:41r36
Global unicast address (es) :
2001: :12:1, subnet is 2001: : /64
Joined group address( es)
'1702: :1 :EF12:1
FF02::2
FF02::1
FF02::1:FF6F:41,36
1111 is 1500 byt ,ts
---------------
O A. The global unicast address of this interface is 2001::12:1 (Right Answers)
O B. The MTU of this interface is 1500_ (Right Answers)
0 C. The link-local address of this interface is FE80: 2E0:FCFF FE6F:4F36 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The IPv6 protocol status of this interface is UP. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
210. The output information of a router is as follows. What is the tunneling protocol used by this interface?
tar Altilsplay interface-Tunnel 0/0/0

anns10/0/0 current state : UP
Lime protocol current state : Up
Last line protocol up time : 2019-03-06 11:03:15 11TC 0;::00
Descriptian:HUAWEI, AR Series, Tunne10/0/0 Interface
Mutes Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet Address is unnumbered. using address of Loopllack0(lu.o.1.1432)
Encapsulation is TUNNEL. ioopbnck not ■et
Tunnel source 10.0.12.1 OGisabitEthernet0/45/0. destination 10. O. 12. 2
Tunnel protacolltransport GRE/IP. key disabled
❑ A. MPLS
❑ B . I Psec
❑ C. LDP
❑ D. GRE (Right Answers)
Answer: D
211. What of the following statements is correct regarding Access Control List types and ranges?
❑ A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999.
❑ B. An advanced ACL value range from 3000-4000.
❑ C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999. (Right Answers)
❑ D. An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000.
Answer: C
212. The configuration information of router DHCP address pool is as follows. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
ip pool test
network 192. 168. 1. 0 mask 255. 255. 255. 0
excluded-ip-address 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.254
lease day 0 hour 12 minute 0
❑ A. The address pool has 199 available IP addresses. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The lease of the IP address is 12h. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The address pool has 55 available IP addresses.
❑ D. The IP address that the DHCP client may obtain is 192.168.1.2. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
213. The output information of router routing table is as follows. Which is correct? (Muitip[e choice)
cle10.41mp1 1p rondo.
Route Flaws: I - rr1 Yr. 11 - download to fn.
-------- ---
Maui Inc 1...O.1 c
Dime ince Iceno In Paw. tvp = $ 0
boas i nationfildeok Pro eel Ire

' Coal I ntl- Ne.sit. r irnr, r>r
ice. o- o.ors rn n I
: 1 /4 / I
,
10.6. 2_ /i2 51411.. In it r
D A. The NextHop of this router reaching 90.0.0.1 is 10.0.21.2_

❑ B. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop of this muter reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.12.2
❑ D. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.21.2 (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
214 The following figure shows a routing table. When this router meows a packet with a destination IP address of 9.1.1.1, the router forwards the packet based on the route 9 1_0 0/16 because the matched bit number in this route is the
largest
<Fluawei>display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, 0 - downloadto fib
Routing Tables: Public Destinations : 2 Routes:2

Destination/Mask Preto Pre Cost Flags NextFlop Interface
0.0.0.0/0 Static 60 0 0 120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
8.0.0.0/13 RIP 100 3 0 120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
9.0.0.0/g OSPF 10 50 0 20.0.0.2 Fthernet2/0/0
9.1.0.0/16 RIP 100 4 0 120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
11.0.0.0/8 Static 60 0 0 120.0.0.2 Seria12/0/0
20.0.0.0/g Direct 0 0 0 20.0.0.1 Fthernet2/0/0
20.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 0 127.0.0.1 loopback0
0 B FALSE
Answer: T
215. Router 1 routing table output information is as follows : which is correct? (Multiple choice)
.0111 -r4t.pl elf 1. p puttees-4.pm..

—
Route flat*: R - rya toy. D - download to fib
Sna Te.ble. PeAdite

: 13 Kr_mat rim . 1:1
P owe Pas e Poo toe or rasa

Prong Prc
, 10. IA, 14.4 et elearrpetteille
R 0
0.0.0.0/0 Slott , Fj•
ThermetO/o/
M. Firwrnall0/0rA
O. 0.0. IVO RIP 11., r.. T. 4
10. 0.2- 0/24 gel r..11 ▪ 1 ......0.10/1
R6
10.0.2. 2132 *Mr to 1, n. I '. 1 F. I twrrw T QInfo
1,
10.0.12-0/24 IA rle,t r. Ii.rITI.10/ 1.0
/Cc 9.12.1/92 Direc e
❑ A. There are two dynamic routing protocols in the routing table. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The mask length of the IP address of the Ethernet0/0 interface on the router is 24 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The IP address of the Etherneto/0/0 interface on the router is 10.0.12.1. (Right Answers)
El D. There is a dynamic routing protocol in the routing table.
Answer: ABC
216. Refer to the dispisy information.
CtLedwepchipley mac-address
MAC Address VIANNSI teamed-Frans Type
5439-38ec-1518 If- GE0/13(13 dynamic
Total terns displayed -1
A switch attempts to forward a frame to the MAC destination 54S9-98eo-1011

What operation will occur on the switch?
❑ A. The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
❑ B. The switch will report that the destination is unreachable and report this to the source.
❑ C. The switch wit flood the frame via ail ports, with exception of the port on which the frame was received. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The switch wit drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address table.
Answer: C
217 The current switch MAC address table is as follows, which is correct?
.1,4411-1D
10C-Twarl
❑ A. When the switch is resteded, the MAC address learned on pod Eth0/0/2 does not need to be re-learned.
❑ B. When the switch is restaded, the MAC address learned on pod Eth0/0/3 needs to be re-learned
❑ C The data frame with the source MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 and the destination MAC address of 5489-989d-1430 is received from the pod and forwarded from Eth0/0/2_
❑ 0_ The data frame with the source MAC address of 5489-98885-18a8 and the destination MAC address of 5489-989d-1d30 is received from the pod and forwarded from Eth0/0/1 (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
218. If the transport layer protocol is UDR the network layer Protocol field takes a value of 6_
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers )
Answer: F
219. Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. A system can determine whether conflicting EP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP packet. (Right Answers)
❑ B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet. (Right Answers)
❑ C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address
❑ D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.
Answer: AB
220. Which of the following flow control methods can be used in the transport layer of the OSI reference model? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A Source suppression message (Right Answers)
❑ B. Window mechanism (Right Answers)
❑ C. Confirmation technology
❑ D Cache technology (Right Answers )
Answer: ABD
221. The application data must carry the MAC address after being processed by the data link layer.
OA TRUE (Right Answers )
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
222. A network engineer prompts the following message when entering the command line: Error: Unrecognized command found atw'position.
Which is correct about this prompt message?
D A. The input command is incomplete
D B. No keywords found (Right Answers)
D C. Input command is not clear
LI D. Parameter type error
Answer: B
223. By default, the root path cost of the root bridge in the STP protocol must be 0.
0 B. FALSE
Answer: T
224. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which is correct?
-
0141Owei)display mac-address
MAC address table of slot 0:
MAC Address VLAN/ PEVLAN CRVLAN Port Type LSP/LSN-ID

VSI/SI MAC-Tunnel
5489-9885-18e8 blackhole -
5489-9811-0b45 1 Eth0/0/3 static -
Total matching items on slot 0 displayed - 2
O A. MAC 5489-9885-18a8 does not have corresponding port information, the switch appears BUG
0 B. All entries in the MAC address table are dynamically learned by the switch.
0 C. After the switch is restarted, MA C5489-9811-0b49 needs to be re-learned.
0 D. If the switch receives a data frame with a source MAC address or a destination MAC address of 5489-9885-18a8, the switch will discard the frame. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
SWA
Edge Port
GO/0/1 / GO/0/2 \ GO/0/3
C21!
14
' 4i>1
Host A Host S Host C
An administrator has configured the port interface G0/0/3 of Switch A as an edge port.
The user wishes to connect multiple devices to the network and connects his own managed switch to the network.
What effect will this have on the network?
111 A. Port interface GO/0/3 of switch A will shut down, as a BPDU has been received by the edge port.
❑ B. Port interface G0/0/3 of switch A will forward the data normally and drop the BPDU sent by the host to the switch.
CI C. Switch A will receive the BPDU and recaculate the port state of GO/0/3. (Right Answers)
0 D. Only Host A can send data out as before, the other devices linked cannot.
Answer: C
226. Which of the following protocols can be used to avoid loops in a redundant Layer 2 network?
El A. ARP
El B. STP (Right Answers)
CI C. UDP
CI D. VRRP
Answer: B
227 The static MAC address table is reset in the system, after the interface board is hot swapped or the interface board is reset, saved entries are not IosL
O B.FALSE
Answer: T
228 As shown in the following figure, assuming that the MAC address table of the SWA is as follows, now Host A sends a data frame whose destination AC address is MAG-11 Which is correct,
MAC
MAC-B 0.0/0/2
S A
G 0/0/ G I /0/2 G 0/0/3
[ZE
IP: 10.1.1.1/24 IP: 10.1.1.2/24
MAC:MAC A IP: 10.1.1.3/24
MAC:MAC-13 MAC:MAC-C
❑ A SWA discards data frames
❑ B Forward this data frame only from the GO/0/2 pod (Right Answers)
❑ G Forward this data frame only from the GO./0/3 pod
❑ a Generalize this data frame
Answer: B
229. As shown in the figure ; STP is disabled on both switches, and Host A sends an ARP Request. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
SWA
❑ A These two switches can achieve load balancing

O B. The CPU usage of these two switches wit be very high. (Right Answers )
O C. Repeated frames will appear in this network (Right Answers )
E D. The MAC address table of these two switches will frequently jitter (Right Answers )
Answer: BCD
230. What are the three ways for a router to establish a routing table? (Muitiple choice)
E A. Dynamic routing (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Static routing (Right Answers)
E C. Direct routing (Right Answers )
E D. Aggregate routing
Answer: ABC
231. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is wrong? (Muitiple choice)
<R1>dIsplay current-configuration configuration nspf
ospf 1 router-id 10.0.1.1

area 0.0.0.0
network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.255
N
return
<R1>display ospf peer
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.0.12.1

Neighbors
Area 0.0.0.0 interface 10.0.12.1(GigabitEthernet0/0/0)'s neighbors

Router ID: 10.0.2.2 Address: 10.0.12.2
State: Full Mode:Nbr is Slave Priority: 1
DR: 10.0.12.2 BOR: 10.0.12.1 NTU: 0
Dead timer due in 30 sec
Retrans timer interval: S
Neighbor is up for 00:01:48
Authentication Sequence: [ 0 1
❑ A. This router has enabled regional authentication. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device is faulty. The configured Router Id is inconsistent with the actual Router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The Router Id that is valid for this device is 10.0.12.1.
❑ D. The Router Id that is valid for this device is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
232. As shown in the figure below, which is correct?
Elm
HOST A HOST B
IP: 10.0.12.1/30 IP: 10.0.12.2/24
❑ A. Host A and host B have different IP address masks, so host A and host B cannot communicate.
❑ B. Host A and host B have the same broadcast address
❑ C. Host A and Host B can communicate only if the masks of Host A and Host B are set to be consistent.
❑ D. Host A can ping host B (Right Answers)
Answer: D
233. In which state does OSPF determine the master-slave relationship of DD packets?
❑ A. 2-way
❑ B. Exchange
❑ C. ExStart (Right Answers)
❑ D. Full
Answer: C
234. Which of the following VRP commands can be used to enter area 0 view? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. [Huawei]ospf area 0
▪ [Huawei-ospf-l]area 0 (Right Answers)
❑ C. [Huawei-ospf-t]area 0.0.0.0 (Right Answers )
❑ D. [Huawei-ospf-I]area 0 enable
Answer: BC
HOST A HOST B
IP: 10.0.12.1/30 IP: 10.0.12.2/24
❑ A. Host A and Host B cannot obtain the MAC address each other. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Host A ARP cache exists 10.0.12.5 MAC-B
❑ C. Host A can ping host B
❑ D. Host A and host B have the same broadcast address
Answer: A
236. All interfaces of the router running OSPF must belong to the same area.
OA. TRUE
B FALSE (Right Answers)
Answer: F
237. On Huawei devices, which of the following methods can be used in OSPF router ID selection? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. If a loopback interface is configured, the largest IP address of the loopback interface is selected as the router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ B. If loopback interfaces are not configured, the largest IP address of an interface is selected as the router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ C. A Huawei switch may use the largest IP address of VLANIF interfaces as the router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The default ID 127.0.0.1 is selected as the router ID.
❑ E. A valid router ID can be configured manually. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCE
238. Which of the following are the basic elements of configuring a static route? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Destination network segment (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC address of the outgoing interface
❑ C. lP address of the next hop (Right Answers )
❑ D. Outlet (Right Answers )
Answer: ACD
239. VRP operating platform, which of the following command can view the routing table?
❑ A. display ip routing-table (Right Answers)
❑ B. display current-configuration
❑ C. display ip interface brief
❑ D. display ip forwarding-table
Answer: A
240. The following two configuration commands can implement the router RTA to the primary and backup backups of the same destination 10.1.1.0:
[PTA] ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 12.1.1.1 permanent
[RTA] ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 13.1.1.1
OA. TRUE
O B. FALSE (Right Answers)
Answer: F
241. What is the default server port number used by the Telnet protocol?
1:1 A. 21
❑ B. 24
❑ C. 22
Answer: D
242. The maximum number of UTY user interfaces determines how many users can log in to the device through Telnet or STelnet.
0 B. FALSE
Answer: T
243. Which of the following network parameters can the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP assign? (Muitiple choice)
O A. Operating system
O B. DNS address (Right Answers)
O C. IP address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Gateway address (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
244. According to the topology and configuration shown in the figure, an Eth-Trunk link can be set up between the two switches on which LSW2 is the Actor.
LSW1 LSW2
GEO/0/2 GEO/0/2
31„te. -VA
Vev GEO/0/1 GEO/0/1
S
[LSW131acp priority 100 [LSW2]lacp priority 200
[LSW1Jinterface Eth-Trunk1 [LSW2]interface Eth-Trunk1

[LSW1-Eth-Trunkllmode lacp-static [LSW2- Eth-Trunkl]mode lacp-static
[LSW1-Eth-Trunklimax active-linknumber 2 [LSW2- Eth-Trunk1]max active-linknumber 2
a
[LSW11interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 [LSW2]interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/11eth-trunk 1 [LSW2- GigabitEthernet0/0/1]eth-trunk 1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/1]1acp priority 100 a
[LSW2]interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2
[LSW1linterface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 [LSW2- GigabitEthernet0/0/2]eth-trunk 1
ILSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/21eth-trunk 1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/2]1acp priority 100
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
245 Referring to the configuration of the one-arm route in the following figure, it can be judged that even if the ARP proxy is not enabled on the sub-interface of RI, the administrative department and the finance department can exchange visits.
LSW
'
, ,
00 HautrIce ..eno/o/o.0a.no vod
ate0111G1,0,,000/0/0.1,1pacuiresa 192.168.100056 255051.255.0
,7
i
t =
05.41 51011100001
5 :
0
70'073
7 7:01::000 ration 00110
/0/0.411.1,05 192.160200.250 255.255.215.0
OA TRUE
GB FALSE (Right Answers)
Answer: F
246. In the MAC address table of SWA and SWO, Ore MAC address, VLAN and port correspondence correct,
own
G 010/3
H051 B
❑ A SWA_ MAC Address VLAN Pon MAC-A 10 GE0/006. MA -B

20 GEO/013 MAC-C 100 GEOASIO
❑ B SWI3. MAC Address VLAN 10 GE0/02 MACLB 20
GE010/3 MAC-C 030 GENION plight Ammar.)
D C SWA: MAC Address VLAN Port MAC-A 10 GE011111 MAC-13 20
GEO/012 MAC-C 100 GE000I) Right Ansmer0
0 0. SW13: MAC Address \ CAN BOA MAC-A 10 000/0/3 MAC-B 20
GE0/043 MAC-C 11111 GE0/051
247. What is the value of the Flag field in the PPP frame format?
O A. OxFF
O B. Ox7E (Right Answers )
E C. OxEF
❑ 11. Ox8E
Answer: B
248. ICMP packets do not contain a port number . so NAPT cannot be used.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
249. If the network shown in the following figure requires the host A to access the Internet through Easy IP, which of the following ACL should be used on the G0/0/3 interface of Router A2
10.0.12.2/24
Router A
1
0.0.42/24 HOST R
19; 10.0.12 1/ 24
1=
.
j1
HOST A
0
IP; 1 .0.13.1/24
❑ A eel number 2000 rule 5 permit source 1111112_1 000
❑ B. acE number 2000 rule 5 pernit source 10.0.13.0 0.0 0.255# (Right Answers)
❑ G. act number 2000 rule 5 permit source 19 0_15_1 0 0_0_0
❑ fr act number 2000 rule 5 permit source 10 0 12 0 0 90 255#
Answer: B
250 As shown in the figure, the two private network hosts want to communicate with each other through the GRE tunnel. After the GRE tunnel is established, the network administrator needs to configure a static route on the RTA to import the
traffic from host A to host B The static routing channel can meet which of the following demand,
❑ A ip route-static 10 1.2 0 24 tunnel 0/0/1 (Right Answers)

❑ B ip route-static 10.1 2 0 24 200 1 1 1
❑ C ip route-static 10.1 2024 GmabitEthernet0/0/1
❑ D route-static 10.1 2.0 24 200 2 2.1
Answer: A
251 As shown in the figure below , which of the fol[owing locations should the AH header be inserted in the [Psec transport mode?
1 IP Header TCP Header 13 1 Dat

❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
❑ C. 3
❑ ❑ . 4 (Right Answers)
Answer: ❑
252. Which of the following remote login methods is the safest?

❑ A. Telnet
❑ B. Stelnet v100
❑ C. Stelnet v2 (Right Answers)
❑ D. Steinet vl
Answer: C
253. Which of the following default action business module ACL is permit?
❑ A. HTTP
❑ B. SNMP
❑ C. Telnet
❑ D. Flow strategy (Right Answers)
Answer: D
254. What is the Solicited-node multicast address corresponding to the IPv6 address 2019..8.AB?
El A. FF02::1:FF08:AB (Right Answers)
❑ B_ FF02::FF08:AB
E C. FF02 1 tE08.AB
❑ D_ FF 02:1:FF20: 19
Answer: A
255. What is the destination port number of the DHCPv6 request packet sent by the DHCPve chant?
D A. 546
E B. 548
E C. 547 (Right Answers)
D D 549
Answer: C
256. The OSPFv3 adjacency cannot be established. Which of the following reasons might be caused? (Multiple choice)
E A. Router-ID conflict (Right Answers)
E B. HELLO packet sending period is inconsistent (Right Answers)
E C. Inconsistent area numbers (Right Answers)
E D. Interface IPv6 address prefix is inconsistent
Answer: ABC
257_ Which field is added to the SNMP packet header than the IPv4 packet header?
El A. Version
El B. Flow Label (Right Answers)
El C Destination Address
LI D. Source Address
Answer: B
258 LOP penultimate hop pop-up mechanism (PHP), which allows the label to be ejected on the penultimate hop LS11 Thiscan
This reduce the packet processing complexity of which options,
0 A Last hop and penultimate hop device
0 B Penultimate hop device
0 C All MPLS network equipment
0 0 Last hop device (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
259. Which of the following MAC addresses cannot be used as the MAC address of the host NIG? (Multiple choice)
D A. 00-02-03-04-05-06
❑ E 02-03-04-05-06-07
D C. 01 02 03 04 05 06 (Right Answers)
D D. 03-04-05-06-07-08 (Right Answers )
Answer: CD
260_ Which of the following statements regarding the verification of IP connectmly are false? (Multiple Choice)
111 A The ping 12700_1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly inserted into the host's Ethernet port (Right Anowers
0B ping command with the host IP address as the destination can be used to verify that the TCPAP protocol suite is functioning correctly_ (Right Answers)
0 C. The ping command can be used to verify connectivity between the host and the local gateway.
111 D The command "ipconfig /release" can be used to check connectivity problems between the host and the local gateway (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
261. Now there are four network segments 10.24_0_0/24, 10.24.1_0/24, 10.24.2.0/24, 1024.3.0/24_ Which of the following network segments can be summarized? (Muitiple choice)
A. 10.24.0.0/23
B. 10.24.1.0/23
0 C. 10.24.0.0/22 (Right Answers)
0 D. 1 0.24,00/21 (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
262. The administrator wants to upgrade the configuration file for the AR2200 through the USB cable. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
E A. The AR2200 does not support the use of USB to update configuration files.
E B. Connect the USB interface of the PC and AR2200 with mini USB cable.
El C. After connecting the cable; the administrator needs to install the driver for the mini USB. (Right Answers)
E D. Connect the mini USB cable of the PC and AR2200 with mini USB cable. (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
263. The switch receives a micas' data frame. If the destination MAC address of the data frame can be found in the MAC local table, the data frame must be forwarded from the MAC corresponding port.
GA TRUE
rJ B FALSE (Right Answers)
Answer, F
264. The output information of switch SW port is as follows: Which is wrong with the following statement?
Diumeildisplay stp interface Ethernet 0/0/1

ECIST Global Info] iiodc SIN ----
CIST Bridge : 32768.4c1f -cc46-4618
Config Times : Hello 4s NaxAge 20s FwDly 15s JUL:Hop 20
Active Times :Hello 2s IlaxAge 20s FwDly 15s XaxHop 20
CIST Root/ERPC :0 . 4c1f -cci7-3214 / 200000
CIST RegRoot /WPC : 32768.4c1f -cc46-4618 / 0
❑ A. The switch is not a root bridge
❑ B. Forward-delay is 20s (Right Answers )
❑ C. Configure the MaxAge of the BPDU to be 20s.
❑ D. The period for sending BPDU on this port is 2s.
Answer: B
265 The network shown in the figure below, all switches open STP. Disable the sending function of the BPDU on the G0/0/2 port of the SWA. The GO/0/1 of the SWC re-converges to become the root port. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
SWA SWB
4096 00 01 02 03 04 AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-813
HOST A
10: 10 11/24
MACNIAC, SWC H
32768 00 01 02 03 04 CC
❑ A SWB sends TCN BPDUs to SWA (Right Answers)

❑ B. SWC sends TCN BPDUs to SWB (Right Answers)
❑ C. SWB sends configuration BPDU with TCA set to SWC (Right Answers)
❑ D. SWA sends TC set configuration BPDU (Right Answers)
Answer. ABCD
266. An existing switch directly connects to a designated port of peer device through a poet, but the port does not forward any message, but can receive the BPDU to monitor the network change. The role of the port should be?
CI A. Root port
O B. Designated port
0 C. Alternate port (Right Answers)
O D. Disable Pod
Answer. C
267. The switch MAC address table is as follows, which is correct?
Dittasteildis aac-address
'AC Address WAN/ PEVLAN MILAN Port Type L.SP/LSR -ID

VSI/SI NAC-Tunnel
5404-088S-18a8 1 b/aekbole -
5484-9811-0b49 1 Etb0/0/3
- static -
Total matching items on slat 0 displayed = 2
MAC address table of slat 0:
MAC Address IriAli/ PEVLAN CEVLMI Part Type LSP/LSR-ID

VSI/SI *AC-Tunnel
5489 -18%d -2d30 - Eth0/0/1 styrtaaric 0/ -
Te401. amain, it...s on slot 0 displayed
O A. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 will be discarded.
O B. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-9885-18a8 will be discarded. (Right Answers)
O C. The switch receives the data frame with the source MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 and will be discarded.
❑ D. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-989d-1d30 will be discarded.
Answer: B
268. The device running STP will discard when it receives the configuration BPDU of RSTP.
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
269. STP When the designated port receives a configuration BPDU that is worse than itself, it immediately sends its own BPDU downstream.
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
270. What message is sent when the SW downstream device notifies the upstream device of topology change?
O A. TCA message
O B. TC message
O C. Configure BPDUs
O D. TGN BPDU (Right Answers)
Answer: D
271. Which flag bits of the STP protocol are not used by the Flag field in the RSTP configuration BPDU? (Muitiple choice)
O A. Agreement (Right Answers)
❑ B. TCA
❑ C. TC
O D. Proposal (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
272. The backup port in RSTP can replace the failed root port.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
273. As shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A. The following statements which are correct? (Muitiple choice)
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.25510.0.21.2 preference 40
GO/0/1
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24 Loopback 0
10.0.2.2/32
O
10.0.21.1/24 10.0.21.2/24
Router A G0/0/2 Router B
0 A. If the G0/0/2 port is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is changed to GO/0/1. (Right Answers)
D B. If the GO/0/1 port is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is changed to G0/0/2.
0 C. the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/0/1.
0 D. the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/0/2. (Right Answers )
Answer: AD
274. VRP supports OSPF multi-process. If no process number is specified when OSPF is enabled, the default process number is?
El A. 0
El B. 10
El C. 1 (Right Answers )
P D. 100
Answer; C
275. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
1 >display ospf interface verbose

Interfaces
week: 0. 0. 0. 0 IRKS TE not enabled)
Interface: 10. 0.12, 1. (GisabilEthernet0/0/0)

=oat: 1 State: 5DR Type: Breadcast IITU: 1500
?riority: 1
Designated Router: 10.0.1.2. 2
Nackuv Designated Router: 10.0.12.1
Timers: Hello 10 Dead 40 . Poll 1.20 . Retransmit 5 , Transmit Delay 1
10 Statistics
Type Input Output
Hello 66 65
DB Description 2 3
Link-State Rto 0 1
-State Update '3 2
Link-State Mk 2 ."
MI GROUP
R GROUP
aqueId: 0 PrevState: Waiting
time cost: 1, enabled by OSP!, Protocol
1:1 A. The routing interface DR priority is 10.

ID B. Router ED is 10.0.1.1 (Right Answers)
El C. The value of this interface Cost is "I (Right Answers)
El D. This router is a BDR (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
216. ip route-static 10.0.12.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1 1
Which statement is true regarding this command?
❑ A. The configuration represents a static route to the 192.168 1.1 network.
❑ B. The configuration represents a static route to the 10.0.12.0 network (Right Answers)
❑ C. The preference value of this configured route is 100.
❑ D. If the router has learned the same destination network via a dynamic routing protocol, the static route will always take precedence.
Answer: B
277. Which state does OSPF use to indicate that a neighbor relationship has been established?
❑ A. 2-way (Right Answers)
❑ B. Down
❑ C. Attempt
❑ D. Full
Answer: A
278. By default, the period far sending OSPF HELLO packets on the broadcast network is?
❑ A_ lOs (Right Answers)
❑ B. 40s
❑ C. 30s
❑ 13. 20s
Answer: A
279. Which of the following problems may emerge when a loop exists on a router? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. tntinite packet forwarding.
❑ B. Increased CPU usage. (Right Answers)
❑ C. increased memory usage. (Right Answers)
❑ D. Continuous change of destination LP addresses of packets.
❑ E. Increased packet size.
Answer: BC
280. What are the roles of OSPF DR and BDR? (Muitipie choice)
❑ A. Reduce the number of exchanges of fink state information (Right Answers)
❑ B. Reduce the type of OSPF packets
❑ C. Reduce the time it takes far the adjacency to establish
❑ a Reduce the number of adjacencies (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
281 The Iwo routers are interconnected through the PPP lint The administrator configures OSPF on the Iwo routers and runs in the same area. If their router lOs are the same, which is correct?
❑ A. Two routers will establish a normal full neighbor relationship
❑ B. Two routers will not send helb information to each other
❑ C. Two routers will establish a normal full adjacency
▪ VRP will prompt the router ID conflicts of the Iwo routers. (Right Answers )
Answer: 0
282. Which of the following OSPF versions suit for IPv6?
❑ A. OSPFv1
❑ B. OSPFv3 (Right Answers )
❑ C. OSPFv4
❑ D. OSPFv2
Answer: B
283. The router R1 routing table output information is as follows, which is correct? (Muitiple choice)
<RI>display ip routing—table
Route Flags; R — seleY, D — download to fib
Routing Tables: Public-

Destinations : 13 Routes 13
nest into ion/Insk Prot o Pre Cost Flags Nestlioo Interface
0. 0. 0.0/0 Static 60 0 RD 10. 0.14. 4 Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0

10. 0. 0. 0/8 Stati c 60 0 RD 10.0.12.2 It kerne t 0/0/0
10. 0. 2. 0/24 Stat ic 00 0 RD 10. 0.13. 3 Et hernet0/0/2
10. 0. 2.. 2/32 OSPF 10 00 RD 10.0. 21. 2 Et berm t0/0/1
❑ A. The router forwards the packet with the destination network of 12.0.0.0/8. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The packet with the destination network of 12.0.0.0/8 will be forwarded from the Ethernet0/0/0 interface of the router.
0 C. The packet with the destination network of 11.0.0.0/8 will be forwarded from the GigabitEthernet0/0/0 interface of the router. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router will drop the packet with the destination network of 11.0.0.0/8.
Answer: AC
284. The following election statement about DR and BDR, which is correct? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. If an interface has a priority of 0, the interface will not participate in the election of DR or BDR. (Right Answers)
❑ B. DR must exist in the broadcast network (Right Answers)
❑ C. If the priorities are the same, the router ID is compared. The larger the value, the higher the priority is elected as the DR. (Right Answers )
❑ D. BDR must exist in the broadcast network
Answer: ABC
285. A Windows host is started for the first time. If the address cannot be obtained from the DHCP server, which of the following IP addresses may the host use?
❑ A. 127.0.0.1
0 B. 169.254.2.33 (Right Answers)
0 C. 255.255.255.255
❑ D. 0.0.0.0
Answer: B
286. What is the main role of the DHCP DISCOVER message?

❑ A. The client is used to find the DHCP server. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The DHCP server responds to the DFHCP DISCOVER packet, which carries various configuration information.
❑ C. The server responds to the confirmation of the REQUEST message.
❑ D. The client requests configuration or renews the lease term.
Answer: A
287 As shown in the figure, the two hosts implement inter-machine communication through a single-route. When the available GO/0/1 2 sub-interface receives the data frame sent by Host B to Host A, which of the following operations does the
RTA perform?
RIA
vlasda via.°
Gateway: 10.0_1254 Gateway. 10.0.2.254
❑ A RTA will discard the data frame
❑ fr RTA forwards the data frame directly through the GO/0/1.1 subinterface.
❑ C. After the RTA deletes the VLAN tag 20, it is sent out by the GO/0/1.1 interface_
❑ a The RTA first deletes the VLAN tag 20, then adds the VLAN tag 10, and then sends it out through the GO/0/1.1 interface (Right Answers)
Answer: D
288. What is the role of link aggregation? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. Implement load sharing (Right Answers)
❑ B. Facilitate analysis of data
❑ C. Increase bandwidth (Right Answers)
❑ D. Improve network reliability (Right Answers )
Answer: ACD
289. Which of the following is correct about link aggregation for LACP mode?
❑ A. The number of active ports cannot be set in LAGP mode.
❑ B. All active interfaces in LACP mode participate in data forwarding and share load traffic.
❑ G. There are only up to 4 active ports in LACP mode.
❑ D. In LACP mode, devices at both ends of the [ink send LACP packets to each other. (Right Answers )
Answer: D
290. The following statement about the Hybrid port, which is correct?
❑ A. Hybrid port does not require PVID
❑ B. Hybrid port only receives data frames with VLAN TAG
❑ C. Hybrid port must carry VLAN TAG when sending data frames.
❑ D. The Hybrid port can strip the TAG of certain VLAN frames in the outbound direction. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
291_ In the process of establishing PPP link, which phase can be directly converted into by the Dead phase?
❑ A. Authenticate
❑ B. Terminate
❑ C. Establish (Right Answers )
❑ D. Network
Answer: C
Which of the following values is used in the LengthlType field of the Ethernet data frame, indicating that the packet carrying the PPPoE session phase is carried?
292_
▪ 0x8863
❑ B Ox8864 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 0x0800
❑ D. Ox0806
Answer: B
293. On theVRP platform, which command can set the encapsulation type of the data link layer of the Serial interface to HDLC?
0 A. link-protocol hdlc (Right Answers)
O B. hdlc enable
O C. encapsulation hdlc
O D. link-protocol ppp
Answer: A
294. SNMPvl defines five protocol operations.

0 B. FALSE
Answer: T
295. How many domains can be configured when configuring AM authentication on Huawei ARG3 series routers?
❑ A. 33
O B. 31
❑ C. 32
Answer: D
296. After the GRE keepalive function is enabled, the local end of the GRE tunnel periodically sends a keepalive packet to the peer every 10s.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
297.A The AAA protocol is the RADIUS protocol.

3 A. TRUE
Answer: F
298. The router Radius information is configured as follows: Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The [13 address of the accounting server is 200.0.12.1 (Right Answers)

❑ B. The IP address of the authorization server is 200.0.12.1
❑ C. The source IP address of the router sending Radius packets is 200.0.12.2. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The IP address of the authentication server is 200.0.12.1 (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
299. Which of the following SNMP protocols supports encryption?
❑ A. SNMPv2c
❑ fr SNMPv3 (Right Answers)
❑ G_ SNMPv2
❑ D_ SNMPv1
Answer: B
3011 Which packets are used by the DHC1W6 client and the DHCR6 server to determine whether the client uses DFICPv6 stolenl autoconfigurabon or DHCRe stateless autoconfiguration7 (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DA (Right Answers )
❑ 13 NA
❑ C. NS
❑ D. RS (Right Answers )
Answer: AD
301. What is the destination port number of the DHCPv6 ADVERTISE packet sent by the DHGR/6 server?
❑ A. 548
❑ B. 547
❑ C. 549
Answer: D
302. When the DHCPv6 client receives the value of the 0 flag and the 0 flag in the RA message sent by the DHCP,e6 server, the DHCPN6 client uses the DHCP),6 stateful auto configuration to obtain the IPM address and other configuration
information
10
O B 11 (Right Answers)
El C. 1
O B.0
Answer: B
303_ 1/128 is the 1Pv6 Eoopbeck address.

CA. TRUE (Right Answers)
▪ Ili_ FALSE
Answer: T
304. On the network shown in the following figure, if the static route is configured on the RouterB, the NextHop corresponding to 2001::1/128 is in the routing table of RouterB.
ipv6 route•-static 2001::1 128 3001:12:1
❑ A. 3001::12:2
❑ B, Te80:1903:c3fb
❑ C. 3002::12:1
❑ D. 30011:12:1 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
305. SR (Segment Routing) is attracting more and more attention as a new anemative MPLS tunneling technology_ Many users hope to introduce SR technology to simplify network deployment and management and reduce CAPEX (Capital
Expenditure). As the current mainstream tunneling technology, SR is widely used in bearer networks.
OA. TRUE
Answer. F
306. The broadcast address is a special address in the network address where the host bits are all set to 1. It can also be used as a host address.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
307. As shown in the figure, if the administrator wants to improve the performance of this network, which of the following is the most appropriate?
❑ A. Use a switch to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to full duplex. (Right Answers )
❑ B. Use the Hub to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to half duplex.
❑ C. Use the Hub to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to full duplex.
❑ D. Use a switch to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to half duplex.
Answer: A
308. If the command is executed on the router: user-interface maximum-vty 0, the following statement which is correct?
❑ A. Support up to 4 users to access through VTY at the same time
❑ B. Support up to 15 users to access through VTY at the same time
❑ C. No user can log in to the router through Telnet or SSH. (Right Answers)
❑ D. Support up to 5 users to access through VTY at the same time
Answer: C
309. On the VRP operating platform, what is the command to display the current interface configuration in the interface view?
❑ A. display users
❑ B. display this (Right Answers)
❑ D. display version
Answer: B
310. Regarding the conflict domain and the broadcast domain, the description which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The device connected to a HUB belongs to a broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device connected to a switch belongs to a conflict domain.
❑ C. The device connected to a switch belongs to a broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The device connected to a router belongs to a broadcast domain.
❑ E. The device connected to a HUB belongs to a conflict domain. (Right Answers )
Answer: ACE
311. What is the priority of the bridge priority in the IEEE 802.1D standard?
❑ A. 8 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 4
O C. 16
❑ D. 2
Answer: A
312. In RSTP mode, interfaces in the Discarding state discard received data frames but maintain the MAC address table based on received data frames.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
313. As shown in the figure below, which port of the following switch will become the designated port?
❑ A. SWC G01012
❑ B. SWB GO/0/3
❑ C. SWC GO/0/1
❑ D. SVVA GO/013 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
314. The device port running STP is in the Forwarding state. Which is correct?
❑ A. The port only receives and processes BPDU and does not forward user traffic.
O B. The port forwards both user traffic and BPDU. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The port does not process BPDU and does not forward user traffic.
❑ D. The port will build a MAC address table based on the received user traffic but will not forward user traffic.
Answer: B
315 As shown in the network below, the host has an ARP cache which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ k The router needs to be configured with static routes, otherwise Host A and Host B cannot communicate in both directions.
❑ B. Host A has the following entries in the ARP cache. 1110.12.2 MAC-C (Right Answers)
❑ C Host A has the following entries in the ARP cache_ 11_0_12 1 MAC-8
❑ D. Host A and Host B can communicate in both directions (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
316 In the network shown in the following figure, all routers run the OSPF protocol, and the top of the link is the value of the Cost value_ What is the Cost value of the RA) routing table that reaches the network 100m 0/87
❑ A 70
❑ B 20
❑ C.60 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 100
Answer: C
317. As shown in the following figure, host A does not have a gateway configured. Host B has a gateway ARP cache. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. When the ARP proxy is enabled on G0/0/1 of the router, host A can communicate with host B.
❑ B. Host A and Host B cannot communicate in both directions (Right Answers)
❑ G Host B sends a packet with the destination IP address of 10 0 12 1 to he forwarded to host A (Right Answers)
❑ D Host A sends a packet with the destination IP address of 11_0 12 1 to be forwarded to host B
Answer: BC
318. In Huawei AR routers, by default, the value of the RIP priority is?
❑ A. 60
n B. 120
❑ C. 100 (Right Answers)
O D. 0
Answer: C
319. When OSPF establishes adjacency, which of the following must be consistent? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Router Priority
❑ B. Router ID
❑ C. Router Dead Interval (Right Answers)
❑ D. Area ID (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
320. What are the advantages of the OSPF protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. OSPF supports load balancing for equal-cost routes. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Supporting the division of regions (Right Answers)
❑ C. OSPF supports untyped inter-domain routing (CIDR) (Right Answers)
❑ D. OSPF supports packet authentication (Right Answers)
Answer; ABCD
321. What is the destination IP address of the DI-ICP DISCOVER packet?

❑ A. 224.0.0.2
❑ B. 127.0.0.1
❑ C. 224.0.0.1
❑ D. 255.255.255.255 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
322. If an Ethernet data frame has LengthiType=0x8100, then the payload of this data frame cannot be? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. ARP response packet
❑ B. OSPF packet
❑ C. RSTP data frame (Right Answers )
❑ D. STP data frame (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
323. The configuration information of an interface of a router is as follows. Which port can receive the data packets of this VLAN?

❑ B. 20
❑ C. 30
❑ D. 1
Answer: A
324. What should I do when the trunk port sends a data frame?
❑ A. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, the data frame is discarded.
❑ B. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, replace it with PVID forwarding.
❑ C. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, strip the TAG forwarding
❑ D. When the VLAN ID is the same as the PVID of the port and the VLAN ID is allowed to pass through the port, the tag is removed and the packet is sent. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
325. Which of the following features does HDLC have? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. HDLC protocol supports point-to-point links (Right Answers)
❑ B. HDLC protocol does not support FP address negotiation. (Right Answers)
❑ C. HDLC protocol supports point-to-multipoint links
❑ D. HDLC protocol does not support authentication (Right Answers )
Answer: ABD
326. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is correct? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. This interface is a synchronous interface (Right Answers)

❑ B. The IP address of the interface is 10.0.12.1124_ (Right Answers)
❑ C. The protocol used by the data link layer is PPP. (Right Answers)
❑ D. When the packet forwarded by this interface exceeds 1400 Byte, the packet needs to be fragmented.
Answer: ABC
327. The Protocol field in the PPP frame format is 0xCO23, indicating that the protocol is?
❑ A. PAP (Right Answers)
O B. LCP
❑ C. CHAP
❑ D. NCP
Answer: A
328. What is the default ACL step size on the G3 series routers?
0 A. 15
❑ B_ 10 (Right Answers)
❑ G. 10
❑ D. 20
Answer: 8
329. What is the range of advanced ACL?

❑ A. 6000-6031
❑ B. 4000-4999
❑ C. 3000-3999 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 2000-2999
Answer: C
330. Which of the following protocols is the IPsec VPN architecture?

❑ A. GRE
❑ B. ESP (Right Answers)
❑ C. IKE (Right Answers)
❑ ❑. AH (Right Answers)
Answer: BGD
331. About the matching mechanism of ACL, which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. If the ACL does not exist the result of returning the ACL is: no match (Right Answers)
❑ B. If the last rule is found and the packet still does not match, the ACL matching resuli is mismatch (Right Answers)
❑ C. Regardless of whether the result of the packet matching ACL is 'mismatch', "allow° or "roper, the packet is finally allowed to pass or refuse to pass, which is actually determined by each service module applying the ACL (Right
Answers)
❑ B. By default, the rule with the lowest number in the ACL stags searching. Once the rule is matched, the subsequent rule is stopped. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
332. The network management workstation manages the network device through the SNMP protocol. When the managed device has an abnormality, what kind of SNMP packet will the network management workstation receive?
❑ A. get-response message
❑ B trap message (Right Answers )
❑ C. set-request message
❑ D. get-request message
Answer. B
333_ The router does not need to re-encapsulate the data link layer when forwarding [RE packets.
0A. TRUE
Answer: F
334 There are 4 routers in a broadcast network, and all 4 routers run OSPFv3 protocol If all router DR priorities are not 0, how many adjacencies are there in the network?
❑ A. 6
❑ B.4
❑ C. 5 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 3
Answer: C
335. Which of the following statements about the Prefix Segment is wrong?
❑ A. Prefix Segment can be automatically assigned by IGP (Right Answers)
❑ B. Prefix Segment is spread to other network element through the IGP protocol. It is globally visible and globally valid.
❑ C. Prefix Segment requires manual configuration
❑ D. Prefix Segment is used to identify a destination address prefix in the network.
Answer: A
336. About the TTL field in the IPv4 header, which is correct?
❑ A. When a route has a loop, the TTL value can be used to prevent the packet from being forwarded indefinitely. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The TTL value is reduced by 1 for each Layer 3 device. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The TTL value is 8 bits long. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The range of TTL values is 0-255 (Right Answers )
Answer: ABCD
337. What is the value range of the DSCP field in the IPv4 header?
El A. 0-15
❑ B. 0-63 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 0-31
❑ D. 0-7
Answer: B
338. UDP is connectionless and must use which to provide the reliability of the transmission?
❑ A. Network layer protocol
❑ B. Application layer protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Transmission Control Protocol
❑ D. Internet Protocol
Answer: B
339. Because the TCP protocol uses three-way handshake mechanism when establishing and closing connections, TCP supports reliable transmission.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
340. Which method VRP does not support to configure the router?
❑ A. Configure the router through Telnet
❑ B. Configure the router through the mini USB port
❑ C. Configure the router through the console port.
❑ D. Configure the router through FTP (Right Answers)
Answer: D
341. In which view can the administrator modify the device name for the router?
❑ A. Protocol-view
❑ B. System-view (Right Answers)
❑ C. User-view
❑ D. Interface-view
Answer: B
342. Which of the following states does the STP protocol elect to perform port roles?
❑ A. Blocking
❑ B. Disabled
❑ C. Learning
❑ D. Listening (Right Answers)
Answer; D
343. What is the total length of the Rag field in the RSTP BPDU message?
❑ A. 6
❑ B. 4
❑ D. 2
Answer: C
344. Which of the following is not the reason that RSTP can improve the convergence speed?
❑ A. Introduction of edge ports
❑ B. Canceled Forward Delay (Right Answers)
❑ C. Fast switching of the root port
❑ D. PIA mechanism
Answer: B
345. Which of the following statements about the edge port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
❑ A. The edge port can be directly transferred from the Disable state to the Forwarding state. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The ports interconnected between the switches need to be set as edge ports.
❑ C. The edge pert discards the received configuration BPDU packet.
❑ D. Edge port participates in RSTP operation
Answer: A
346. A switch running STP can be converted to the Forwarding state after waiting for the forwarding delay in the Learning state.
B FALSE
Answer: T
347. In Huawei AR routers, what is the priority of the static routing protocol by default?
❑ B. 100
❑ C. 120
❑ D0
Answer: A
348. As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. Which device ABR?
❑ A. Router D
❑ 11 Router C
❑ C. Router A (Right Answers )
❑ D. Router B (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
349 As shown in the following figure, if the host has an ARP cache and host A sends a packet to host B, what is the destination MAC address and destination P address of the packet?
❑ A MAC-C 10 0 12 2
❑ B. MAC-A 11 0.12 1
❑ C MAC-C 11 0 12 1 (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC-B 11 0.12.1
Answer: C
350. What types of networks are supported by the OSPF protocol? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. Point-to-Multipoint (Right Answers)
0 B. Non-Broadcast Multi-Access (Right Answers)
❑ C. Point-to-Point (Right Answers)
❑ D. Broadcast (Right Answers)
Answer: ABM
351. How many types of OSPF packets are there?

O A. 3
❑ B. 4
O D. 2
Answer: C
352. When upgrading the router software using the FTP protocol, which transfer mode should be selected?
❑ A. Text mode
❑ B. Byte mode
❑ G. Streaming byte mode
❑ D. Binary mode (Right Answers)
Answer: D
353. Which message does the DHCP server use to confirm that the host can use the IP address?
❑ A. DHCP ACK (Right Answers)
❑ B. DHCP DISCOVER
❑ C. DHCP REQUEST
❑ D. DHCP OFFER
Answer: A
354. A Windows host is started for the first time. If the IP address is obtained by DHCP, what is the source IP address of the first packet sent by this host?
❑ A. 127.0.0.1
❑ B. 255.255.255.255
❑ C. 0.0.0.0 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 169.254.2.33
Answer: C
355. What is the range of VLAN [Ds that users can use?
❑ A. 0-4096
❑ B. 1-4096
❑ D. 0-4095
Answer: C
356 if a port has the following configuration information, which port does the VLAN TAG carry when transmitting data frames of the VLAN7
❑ A. 1,2,3,100
❑ B. 2,3,4,6,100
❑ C 2,3,100 (Right Answers)
❑ D 1,2,3,4,6,100
Answer: C
357. The load balancing modes of the two ends of the Eth-Trunk can be inconsistent.
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
358. For the network shown in the fotowing figure, the switch uses the sub-interface pair of the machine interface and the router. Which of the following configurations can fulfill this requirement?
❑ A. interface 10 ip address 10 0.12.1 255255255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type hybrid pod hybrid untag Nan 10 #
❑ B. interface Mandl 0 ip address 10 0.12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 # (Right Answers )
❑ C. interface Menai() ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type access port default Nan 10 #
❑ 0. interface Vlanif10 ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface GigabitEthemet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk paid 10 pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 #
Answer: B
359. In the following options, which is the necessary technology to enable a host with an IP address of 10 0 0 1 to access the Internet?
❑ A. Dynamic routing
❑ B. NAT (Right Answers)
❑ C. Route introduction
❑ D Static routing
Answer: B
360 As shown in the following figure, from the perspective of the security corner, Router A refuses to receive OSPF packets, GRE packets and IGMP packets received from GO/0/1 Which of the following commands can fulfill this requirement?
(Multiple choice)
❑ A act number 3000 rule 5 deny ere rule 10 deny ospf rule 15 deny icmp # interface GmabilEthemet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound act 3000 # (Right Answers)
❑ B act number 3000 rule 5 deny gre rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny icmp # interface GmabilEthernelf1/0/1 traffic-filter inbound act 3000 # (Right Answers)
❑ a eel number 2000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑ 13_ acl number 3000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabrtEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound ad 3000 # (Right Answers)
Answer: ABO
361_ As shown Ingle following figure, which of the folbwing configurations can be used Io preyentfiles1 A from accessing Host B HTTP service. Host B can not access which service of Host A HP? (Multiple choice)
❑ A acl number 3000 ride 5 deny top source 100.0.12 CI 0 GO 255 s.rec-port act woe destination 1030_1311 0 0.0 255# acInonter 3001 rule 5 deny top source 100.01300/0255 source-parrot( fto dean.. 100 0 12 0 0.00.255#
aderface GgabilEthemetll0/1 traffic-51er outbound act 30004 interface GgabitEtherrieffir002 trafrinffitar outbound ark 31031 a
▪ 10 eat number 2000 rule S deny tap source 180.0.13.0 0 0 0.255 desk rmtmn 160 O.12 0 0 0.6.255 deslinatontporl. votwe a ad number 31101 rule 5 deny tcp source 1130.0 12 6 (1,0..0 255 clesfinalion 100.0.13 0 0 0.0.255 dEshrehon-port eq
Ira M traerface GigabilEtheineignOM traPfic-filler inbound 1113000# interface GigabilEtheme100.2 tarts-film inbound eel 3001 # (Right Answers)
❑ G_ act number 3000 rule 5 deny.? rescue 100 0.13 000.055 doshnohon 103.0120 0 00 255 destioabon-pad. www # acl number 3001 rule 5 deny lop source 100 0 )2,0 000.255 d.briatorr 100.0 13 00 0.255 255 d.bnalon-porl aq
ftp if interface GigularlEthame10/0,1 beffic-Stier oulbconcl 101 3000 0 inlerface GigubitElharne100/2 traffic-filler outbound acl 3001 to
❑ D. scl number 3000 rule 5 deny leo source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255 source-poll op wino destination 100.0.13.0 0.0.0.255# ecl number 3001 nile 5 deny Hp source 100.0.13.0 0.0.0.255 source-port ei ftp destination 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.2550
Interface OlgerbilEthernet0/0,1 traffic-filter intbound 5013000#Interface GfigabilEthemat0,02 traffic-filter inbound eel 30015 (Right Artawars)
Answer, HD
362. 0 packets are carried over TCP.

()A. TRUE
Answer: F
363. The multicast address FF02:.1 represents all nodes in the link-focal range.
OA TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
365. In the estabFishment of adjacency relationship : what is the role of OD packets in OSPFv37
❑ A. Request missing LSA
❑ B. Used to send the required LSA to the peer router
❑a Discover and maintain neighbor relationships
❑ ❑. To describe your own LSDB (Right Answers)
Answer: D
366. The simplest form of IPv6 address 3001: ODB8: 0000: 0000: 0346: ABCD: 42BC: 8D58 is?
❑ A. 3001:0DB8::0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
❑ B. 3001: DB8::0346: ABCD: 42BC: 8058
❑ C_ 3001: D68::346: ABCD: 4260: 8058 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 3001:0DB8::0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
Answer: C
367. When the host adopts DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration, which DHCPv6 message is sent by the host to request configuration information?
❑ A. Information-Request (Right Answers)
❑ B. CONFIRM
❑ C. SOLICIT
❑ D. REBIND
Answer: A
368. What is the length of the IPv6 multicast address flag field?
❑ A. 3
❑ B. 2
❑ D. 5
Answer: C
36g. Which of the following statements about the Node Segment is wrong?
❑ A. The Node SID cannot be the same as the node Prefix SID. (Right Answers )
❑ B. Node Segment is used to identify a specific node
❑ C. Configure the IP address as the prefix on the loopback interface of the node. The Prefix SID of this node is actually the Node SID.
❑ D. Node Segment is a special Prefix Segment
Answer: A
370. Which of the following are the actions of the MPLS (Multiple choice)
❑ A. pop (Right Answers)
❑ B. switch
❑ C. swap (Right Answers)
❑ D. puch (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
371. If two Huawei S5710 switches are interconnected using a 10 Gigabit optical module, the working mode of the interconnect port defaults to full duplex.
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
372. On the Huawei ARG3 router, the -i parameter of the Ping command in the VRP is used to set ?
❑ A. Interface for sending Echo Request packets (Right Answers )
❑ B. Source IP address for sending Echo Request packets
❑ C. Interface for receiving Echo Reply packets
❑ D. Destination IP address of receiving Echo Reply packets
Answer: A
373. The following statement about the TTL field in the IP packet header, which is correct?
❑ A. TTL defines the number of packets that the source host can send.
❑ B. Whenever a packet passes through a router, its TTL value is decremented by 1. (Right Answers )
❑ C. TTL defines the time interval at which the source host can send packets.
❑ D. Whenever a packet passes through a router ; its TTL value will be increased by 1.
Answer: B
374. Which of the following statements about ICMP messages is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The length of the Type field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The length of the Checksum field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits.
❑ C. The value of the ICMP packet in the first protocol type field of IPv4 is 1. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The length of the Code field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits. (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
375. How does the VRP platform represent the third slot of the router, the sub-card No. 0 and the GE port No. 2.
❑ A. interface GigabitEthernet 3/2/0
❑ B. interface Ethernet 3/0/2
❑ C. interface XGigabitEthernet 3/0/2
❑ D. interface GigabitEthernet 3/012 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
376. Which of the following statements about the Spanning Tree Protocol Root Bridge election is correct?
❑ A. When the bridge priority is the same, the device with the large MAC address becomes the root bridge.
❑ B. When the bridge priority is the same, the device with a large number of ports becomes the root bridge.
❑ C. The device with a smaller bridge priority value becomes the root bridge. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The bridge with a higher priority value becomes the root bridge.
Answer: C
377. In standard STP mode, which of the following ports on non-root switches forward the BPDUs with TC bits set generated by the root switch?
❑ A. Root port.
❑ B. Backup port.
❑ C. Provisioning port
❑ D. Designated port (Right Answers)
Answer: D
378. The Message Age in the configuration BPDU sent by the root bridge in the STP protocol is 0.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
37g. Which of the following parameters should be considered when electing a root port in STP? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Duplex mode of the port
❑ B. Port priority (Right Answers)
❑ C. the cost of the port reaches the root switch (Right Answers)
❑ D. MAC address of the port
❑ E. Port slot number, such as GO/0/1 (Right Answers)
Answer; BCE
380. As shown in the following figure, assume that all routers run OSPF at the same time. Which kind of router is BDR in this network?
O A. Router A (Right Answers)

❑ B. Router B
❑ C. Router C
❑ D. Router D
Answer: A
381. The routing table shown below, which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The NextHop of the destination network 10.0.3.3/32 is not directly connected, so the router will not forward the packet with the destination IP address of 10.0.0.3.
❑ B. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.2.2 from Ethernet0/010. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.12.1 from Ethernet0/0/0.
❑ D. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.0.3 from Ethernet0/0/0. (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
382.As shown in the figure below, which network device can Host A and Host B use to communicate?
❑ A. Router (Right Answers)

❑ B. Hub
❑ C. HUB
❑ II Layer 2 switch
Answer: A
383. The router output information is as follows, which of the following statement is wrong?
❑ A. The MTU value of the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 1480. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The physical link of Ethernet0/0/0 is normal.
❑ C. The broadcast address corresponding to the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 10.0.12.255.
❑ D. The IP address of the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 10.0.12.1/24.
Answer: A
384. Which of the following is not included in the routing table?

❑ A. Next hop
O B. Routing cost
❑ C. Source address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Target network
Answer: C
385. Which of the following statement about the OSPF backbone area is correct?
❑ A. Area 0 is the backbone area. (Right Answers)
O B. All areas can be backbone areas
❑ C. The backbone area must be deployed when the number of routers running OSPF exceeds two.
❑ D. All routers in the backbone area are ABR
Answer: A
❑ B. OSPF supports Classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) (Right Answers)
❑ C. OSPF supports packet authentication (Right Answers)
❑ D. Supporting the division of areas (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
387 A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An administrator discovers however that some hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the DHCP servers address pool. What are
the possible reasons for this? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A Alf addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned. (Right Answers)
0 B. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the 169.254.0.0 address range. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is aliocating IP addresses to hosts that happen to be within a closer proximity than the authorized DHCP server (Right Answers )
o D. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the 127.254.0.0 address range.
Answer: ABC
388.[Huawei]user-interface vty 0 14
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] acl 2000 inbound
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] user privilege level 3
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] authentication-mode password
Please configure the login password (maximum length 16): Huawei
The configuration of vty is as shown above, and the user privilege level is set to level 3.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
389. The aggregation port of the router can be configured with a routing subinterface.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
390. Which VLAN partitioning method is most appropriate when the host frequently moves the location?
❑ A. Based on IP subnetting
❑ B. Based on NIAC address division (Right Answers)
❑ C. Basic strategy division
❑ D. Port-based partitioning
Answer: B
391. On the VRP platform, the role of the command "interface vlan <vlan-id>" is 0.
❑ A. Create or enter the VLAN virtual interface view. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Create a VLAN
❑ C. No such command
❑ D. Configure a VLAN for a port
Answer: A
392_ NAPT distinguishes the [P addresses of different users by protocol numbers in TCP or UDP or IP packets.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
393. Which message need to send when needing to terminate a PPPoE session?
❑ A. PADR
❑ B. PADT (Right Answers )
❑ G. PADO
❑ D. PADI
Answer: B
394. Which of the following are the advantages of the PPP protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. PPP protocol supports negotiation of link layer parameters (Right Answers)
❑ B. PPP protocol supports negotiation of network layer parameters (Right Answers)
❑ C. PPP protocol supports both synchronous transmission and asynchronous transmission. (Right Answers)
❑ D. PPP protocol supports authentication (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
395 The network shown below. Which of the following configurations enables all hosts to communicate with Host C, but Host A and Host B cannot communicate?
❑ A. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination mac 5439-93ea-4010 source•-mac 5489-9843-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound acl 4000 #
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98e8-4c7c source-mac 5489-98d3-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound act 4000 #
❑ C. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5439-98ca-4c7c source-mac 5489-9300-550e # interface GigabitEtherne10/0/1 traffic-filter inbound act 4000 # (Right Answers)
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-983a-400 source-mac 5489-98c0-550e # interface GigahltEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound acl 4000#
Answer: C
396. As hown in the figure: IPsec VPN is used to transfer data between two hosts. In order to hide the real IP address and ensure the security of data as high as possible, which mode and protocol of IPsec VPN is better, (Multiple choice)
❑ A. All
❑ B Tunnel mode (Right Answers)
❑ a Transmission mode
Answer: BD
397. Apply the following ACL in Telnet: which of the following statement is correct'?
acl number 2000
rule 5 deny source 172.16.105.30
rule 20 permit
❑ A. The device with IP address 172.16.105.6 can use the Telnet service. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device with IP address 172.16.105.3 can use the Telnet service.
❑ C. The device with IP address 172.16.105.5 can use the Telnet service.
❑ D. The device with IP address 172.16.105.4 can use the Telnet service.
Answer: A
398. Which of the following lPv6 addresses is a link-local address?

❑ A. FC00::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ B. FE80::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2000::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ D. FF02::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
Answer: B
399. Which field in the Fv6 header acts like the TTL field in the IPv4 header?
❑ A. Version
❑ B. Traffic Class
❑ C. Hop Limit (Right Answers)
❑ D. Next Header
Answer: C
400. What are the three main roles in the DHCPv6 basic protocol architecture? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DHCPv6 switch
❑ B. DHCPv6 relay (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCPv6 client (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCPv6 server (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
401. The value of the MO flag in the RA message sent by the DHCPv6 service is 01. Which of the following methods does the host use to automatically configure the address?
❑ A. Value does not make any sense
❑ B. DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCPv6 stateful autoconfiguration
❑ D. Stateless autoconfiguration
Answer: B
402. Which of the following statements about the S field in the MPLS packet header is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Is there any other label after marking this label, 1 means yes, 0 means no
❑ B. The S bit exists in each MPLS packet header. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Is there any other label after marking this label, 0 means yes. 1 means no (Right Answers)
❑ D. S bit has only 1 bit in frame mode and 2 bits in cell mode.
Answer: BC
403.<Huawei>reset saved-configuration
Warning: The action will delete the saved configuration in the device.
The configuration, will be erased to reconfi gure. Continue? [YIN]:
The administrator configured the above on the AR2200, and which of the following description about the configuration information is correct?
❑ A. The saved configuration file will be replaced by the running configuration file.
❑ B. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should select "Y" (Right Answers)
❑ C. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should select "N"
❑ D. The configuration file will be retained when the device starts up.
Answer: B
404. On the VRP interface, use the command startup saved-configuration backup.ofg to configure the backup.cfg file for the next startup.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
405. Which of the following states is the STP port converted between exist Forward Delay? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Forwarding-Disabled
❑ B. Blocking-Listening
❑ C. Disabled-Blocking
❑ D. Listening-Learning (Right Answers)
❑ E. Learning-Forwarding (Right Answers)
Answer: DE
406. Which of the following parameters should be considered when electing a root port in STP? (Multiple choice)
❑ B. Port slot number, such as GO/0/1
❑ C. Port MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Port priority (Right Answers)
❑ E. the cost of the port reaches the root switch (Right Answers)
Answer: CDE
407. Which of the following port states does not the RSTP protocol include?
❑ A. Blocking (Right Answers)
❑ B. Forwarding
❑ C. Discarding
❑ D. Learning
Answer: A
408. Which router is the BDR in this network, as shown in the figure below?
❑ A. Router B
❑ B. Router A
❑ C. no BDR (Right Answers)
❑ D. Router C
Answer: C
409. It is known that the routing table of a router has the following two entries:
If the router wants to forward a message with a destination address of 9.1.4.5, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. Select the second item as the best match because Ethernet is faster than Serialo
❑ B. Select the first item as the best match because the OSPF protocol has a higher priority value.
❑ G. Select the second item as the best match because the RIP protocol has a lower generation value.
❑ D. Select the second term as the best match because the route is a mare accurate match than the destination address of 9.1.4.5 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
410. The following is the routing table of router R1. If R1 sends a packet with the destination IP address of 10.0.2.2, which interface does it need to send from?
❑ A. Ethernet0/0/2
❑ B. Ethernet0/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ethernet0/0/0
❑ D. GigabitEthernet0/0/0
Answer: B
411. When routers are running in the same OSPF area, which of the following description of their LSDB and routing table is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The link state database obtained by each router is different.
❑ B. The routing table cf each router is different. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The link state database obtained by all routers is the same (Right Answers)
❑ D. The routing tables obtained by all routers are the same.
Answer: BC
412. Which of the following elements are included in the routing table? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Interface (Right Answers)
❑ B. Protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Destination/Mask (Right Answers)
❑ D. Cost (Right Answers)
❑ E. NextHop (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCDE
413. The output information of a router routing table is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.21.2.

❑ B. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.21.2. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.12.2. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.12.2.
Answer; BC
414. By default, how long is the lease time of the lP address assigned by the DHCP server?
O A. 1 h
❑ B. 24h (Right Answers)
❑ C. 12h
O D. 18h
Answer: B
415. Which of the following applications is based on the TCP protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. FTP (Right Answers)
❑ B. HTTP (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ping
❑ D. TFTP
Answer: AB
416 The DHCP server function is enabled on an interface of the router. Which of the following [P addresses may the DHCP client obtain?
ip address 11 0 1 1 255 255.255.0
dhcp select interface
dhcp server excluded-ip-address 11 0 1 2 11 0 1.127
❑ A 11 0 1 1
❑ B. 11.0.1.100
❑ C 11.0.1 254 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 11.0.1.255
Answer: C
417. ❑n the switch. which VLANs can be deleted by using the undo command? (MuttiNe choice)
❑ A. v[an 4094 (Right Answers)
❑ B. vian 1
❑ C. vlan 2 (Right Answers)
❑ D_ elan 1024 (Right Answers)
Answer: AGD
418 In the network shown in the following figure, the output information of switch A is as follows_ In the current MAC address table of itch A, which interlace dues the C address of host B correspond to'
❑ A GigabitEthernet0/0/2
❑ B. Eth-Trunk I (Right Answers)
❑ C GigabitEthemet0/0/1
❑ B. GigabitEthemet0/0/3
Answer: B
419. As shown in the following figure, the router configuration information is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct?
Router A interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0.100
dotlq termination vid 200
ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0
arp broadcast enable
Router B
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0.200
ip address 10.0.12.2 255.255.255.0
❑ A. 10.0.12.1 can ping 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)

❑ B. The sub-interface of Router A cannot learn the MAC address of the sub-interface of Router B.
❑ C. The sub-interface of Router B cannot learn the MAC address of the sub-interface of Router A.
❑ D. Router A and Router B cannot communicate because the sub-interface numbers of Router A and Router B are inconsistent.
Answer: A
420. Which of the following parameters does the LCP negotiation use to detect link loops and other anomalies?
❑ A. CHAP
❑ B. MRU
El C. PAP
❑ D. Magic word (Right Answers)
Answer; D
421. Static NAT can only implement one-to-one mapping between private addresses and public addresses.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
422. Which of the following does AAA not include?

❑ A. Accounting
❑ B. Authorization
❑ C. Audit (Right Answers)
❑ D. Authentication
Answer: C
423. Which authorization modes does W support on Huawei ARG3 series routers? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. HWTACACS authorization (Right Answers )
❑ B. Nat authorized (Right Answers )
❑ C. Authorization after successful RADIUS authentication (Right Answers)
❑ D. Local authorization (Right Answers )
Answer: ABCD
424. Which of the following about the function of the AH protocol in IPsec VPN is wrong?
❑ A. Support data integrity check
❑ B. Support anti-message playback
❑ C. Support packet encryption (Right Answers)
❑ D. Support data source verification
Answer: C
425 As hown in the following figure, the router functions as the DHCPy6 relay agent and Router B functions as the DHCPy6 server. Which of the following parameters must be configured on Router B? (Multiple choice)
❑ A Enable RA on port GO/0/1 of Router B

❑ B IPv6 address of the DHCPW relay
❑ C DHCR/6 DUD (Right Answers)
❑ D DHCPy6 address pool (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
426. How many times is the total length of an IPv6 address the length of an IPv4 address?
❑ B. 3
❑ C. 5
LI D. 2
Answer: A
427. Which of the following extended headers are supported by IPv6 packets? {Multiple choice)
❑ A. VLAN extension header
❑ B. hop-by-hop option extension header (Right Answers )
❑ C. Destination option extension header (Right Answers )
❑ D. Slice extension header (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
428. Which packet does the DHCPv6 server use to reply to Solicit packets?
❑ A. Request
❑ B. Advertise (Right Answers)
❑ C. Offer
❑ D. Reply
Answer: B
429. The MPLS architecture consists of a Control Plane and a Forwarding Plane. The forwarding plane mainly performs label switching and packet forwarding.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
430. What is the length of the Ethernet_ll frame that contains the Ethernet header?
❑ A. 64-15188 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 60-1560B
❑ C. 64-1500B
❑ D. 46-1500B
Answer: A
431. The Tracert diagnostic tool in Huawei routers uses UDP to encapsulate trace data.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
432. The broadcast address of the subnet 192.168.1.0125 is 192.168.1.128.

❑ A. True
Answer: B
433. Which memory saved configuration is used to select VRP version file when the device starts up?
❑ A. NVRAM (Right Answers)
❑ B. SD Card
❑ C. Flash
❑ D. USB
Answer: A
434. Which of the following parameter settings for terminal emulation are correct when configuring a router through the Console port?
❑ A.9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware flow control.
❑ B.19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control.
❑ C.4800bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no flow control.
❑ D.9600bps ; 8 data bits, 1 stop bits ; no parity check ; and no flow control. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
435. Which layer of the OSI reference model does the switch work on?
❑ A. Network layer
❑ B. Transport layer
❑ C. Data link layer (Right Answers)
❑ D. Physical layer
Answer: C
436. Which of the following statements about the Alternate port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
❑ A. The Alternate port serves as a backup for the specified port and provides another backup path from the root bridge to the corresponding network segment.
❑ B. Alternate port forwards user traffic and learns MAC address
❑ C. Alternate port does not forward user traffic but learns MAC address
❑ D. Alternate port provides another switchable path from the designated bridge to the root as the backup port of the root port (Right Answers )
Answer: D
437. Which of the following port states does the RSTP protocol not include?
❑ A. Discarding
❑ B. Blocking (Right Answers)
❑ C. Learning
❑ D. Forwarding
Answer: B
438. In the RSTP standard, in order to improve the convergence speed, the port directly connected to the terminal by the switch can be defined as 0.
❑ A. Fast port
O B. Root port
O C. Edge port (Right Answers )
O D. Backup port
Answer: C
439. VRP operating platform, which of the following commands can only view static routes?
❑ A. display ip routing-table verbose
❑ B. display ip routing-table statistics
❑ C. display ip routing-table protocol static (Right Answers)
❑ D. display ip routing-table
Answer: C
440. Which layer of the OSE reference model does the router work on?
❑ A. Data link layer
❑ B. Network layer (Right Answers)
❑ C. Application layer
❑ D. Transport layer
Answer: B
441. Which of the following description of static and dynamic routing is wrong?
❑ A. Dynamic routing protocols take up more system resources than static routes
❑ B. Static routing is simple to configure and easy to manage when applied in an enterprise.
❑ C. After a link fails, static routes can automatically complete network convergence. (Right Answers )
❑ D. After administrators deploy dynamic routing protocols in the enterprise network, post-maintenance and expansion can be more convenient.
Answer; C
442. Which of the following features does the OSPF protocol have?
❑ A. Easy to generate routing loops
❑ B. Calculate the shortest path in hops
❑ C_ Supporting the division of regions (Right Answers)
❑ D. Poor scalability
Answer: C
443. A router runs OSPF and does not specify a router ID. The P address of all interfaces is as follows. What is the router ID of the router OSPF protocol?
❑ A. 10.0.12.1
❑ B. 10.0.1.2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 10.0.21.1
❑ D. 10.0.1.1
Answer: B
444. What port number is used by the FTP protocol to control plane?
❑ A. 22
❑ C. 24
❑ D. 23
Answer: B
445_ An administrator cannot log in to the AR22013 router through Te!net However, other administrators can log in normally_ Which of the following are possible causes') (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The admin user account has been deleted (Right Answers )
❑ B. The admin user account has been disabled (Right Answers)
❑ C The privilege level of the admin user account has been modified to 0
❑ 0 The Telnet service of the AR2200 router has been disabled.
Answer: AB
446 The Eth-Truk port in manual link aggregation mode, whose transmission rate is related to 0 (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Bandwidth of member ports (Right Answers )
❑ B. Is the member port on the public or private network?
❑ C. is the IP address configured on the member port?
▪ Number of member ports (Right Answers )
Answer: AD
447. As shown in the followteg tigers the ports connected to De host of Switch A and Switch B belong to 10 end VLAN IC respectively. late port Ape of the switch Is Trunk and the PV1D is to and OIL Which on ale tolowing statements are
-
00013C ,
(Mubpla cuotuei
❑ A Host A and host B boke lodifrononl VANS ate cannot ping each cater
❑ e Hoc A and Host B can pas (Right Answers)
❑ c Host AS ARP ragtag Gavot ha -forwarded to host B
D. The switch does nce carry as VLMI TAG when forwerding tea frames sent by the host Wight Answer.)
Answo BD
448 The authentication scheme, authorization scheme, accounting scheme, HWTACAGS, or RADIUS server template created on the AR router can take effect only after it is applied in the domain.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
449. The router can assign a specified INC address to the host through a stateless address autoconfiguration scheme.
❑ A True
Answer: B
450_ Which multicast address is used in OSPFv3 to represent all routers?

❑ A. FF02: 6
❑ B. FF02:.8
❑ C. FF02:5 (Right Answers)
❑ D. FF02:1
Answer: C
451_ The OSPFv3 adjacency can be established only after the IP& address prefixes of the two ends are the same.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
452. Which of the following IPv6 addresses has a Solicited-node mutticast address of FF02::1 :FF12:12
❑ A. 2020::1200:1
❑ 2019::12:1 (Right Answers )
❑ 201g:112:1000
❑ a 2020:112ABI1
Answer: B
453. Which of the following statements about the Adjacency Segment is wrong?
❑ A. Adjacency Segment is used to identify a certain adjacency of a node in the network_
❑ B. Adjacency Segment is identified by Adjacency Segment ID (STD)
❑ G. Adjacency Sesnent spreads to other network elements through the IGP protocol, which is globally visible and valid locally.
❑ D. Adjacency Segment must be manually configured (Right Answers)
Answer: ❑
454. What levels are not included in the TCPIIPv4 model? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Session layer (Right Answers )
❑ B. Presentation layer (Right Answers )
❑ C. Network layer
❑ E. Application layer
Answer: AB
455. In the OSI reference model, which of the following has the ability to perform end-to-end error detection and flow control?
❑ A. Physical layer
❑ B. Data link layer
❑ G. Network layer
❑ ID_ Transport layer (Right Answers )
Answer: ❑
456 As shown in the figure, after the network administrator completes the Telnet configuration on the router, it is found that the host cannot establish a connection with the router through Telnet. Which of the following options can help solve this
problem? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Check if the switch has a default gateway address configured_

❑ B Use Ping to check the IP connectivity between the host and the router GO/0/0 interface (Right Answers)
❑ C Check if the Telnet configuration on the router is correct (Right Answers)
❑ 0_ Check if the host's ARP cache table overflows
Answer: BC
457. After receiving the BREW set by the TC, the switch running the RSTP protocol clears the MAC address learned by all ports.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
458. In the RSTP protocol, when the topology is stable, which port roles are in the Discarding state? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Backup part (Right Answers)
❑ B. Designated part
❑ C. Alternate port (Right Answers)
❑ D. Root port
Answer: AC
459. Which of the following statement about STP messages is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. During the initialization process ; each switch that enables STP protocol actively sends configuration BPDUs. (Right Answers)
❑ B. When the port is enabled with STP, the switch periodically sends TCN BPDUs from the specified port.
❑ C. The BPDU packet is encapsulated in an Ethernet data frame, and the destination MAC address is a multicast MAC address. (Right Answers)
❑ D. There are two types of packets in the STP protocol, configure BPDUs and TCN BPDUs. (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
460. What is the value of the Type field in the RSTP configuration BPDUs?
❑ A. Ox01
❑ B. 0x03
❑ C. Ox00
❑ D. 0x02 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
461. Which of the following cases will the switch running RSTP generate a configuration BPDU with TO set?
❑ A. A non-edge port migrates to the Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑ B. Backup port down
❑ C. Edge port migrates to Forwarding state
❑ D. Edge port migrates to Discarding state
Answer: A
462. Which of the following routing protocols can generate a default route? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. OSPFv3 (Right Answers)
❑ B. Direct
❑ C. OSPF (Right Answers)
❑ D. Static (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
463. The router running OSPF first reaches the FULL state, and then performs LSDB synchronization.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
464. As the network shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. The top of the link is the value of the Cost. What is the path of the RA to the network 10.0.0.8/8?
0 A. 70
0 B. 100
0 C. 60 (Right Answers)
0 D. 20
Answer: C
465. Which packet does OSPF use to acknowledge received LSU packets?
❑ A. LSACK (Right Answers)
❑ B. LSA
El C. LSR
❑ D. LSU
Answer: A
466 if the Proto of a routing information in the routing table is OSPF, the priority of this route must be 10.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
467. On the serial interface ; you can configure a static route by specifying the next hop address or outbound interface.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
468 If the network shown in the folbwmg figure is used to make the 1opbacko communication between Router A and Router B through static routes, which of the folbwing command need to enter on Router A?
❑ A p route-static 100 2 2 32 GigabitEthemet 0/0/0

❑ 13_ ip route-static 100 2 2 255255 255255 100 12 1
❑ a ip route-static 10 0 2 2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12 2 (Right Answers)
ip route-static 100220 GigebitEthemet 0/0/0
Answer: C
469. TFTP is based on the TCP protocol.

❑ A. True
Answer: B
470. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The user manually created 4 VLANs. (Right Answers)

❑ B. When the GE0/0/1 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 10, it does not carry the VLAN TAG_ (Right Answers )
❑ C. When the GEO/0/2 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 20, it carries the VLAN TAG.
❑ D. When the GEO/0/1 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 20, it does not carry the VLAN TAG.
Answer: AB
471. A trunk part and a Hybrid port are handled in the same way when receiving data frames.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
472. Which of the following PPPoE messages are sent non-unicast?
❑ A. PADS
❑ B. PADI (Right Answers)
❑ C. PADO
❑ ❑. PADR
Answer: B
473. Which of the following fields does the HDLC frame consist of? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Control field (C) (Right Answers)
❑ B. Frame Check Sequence Field (FCS) (Right Answers)
❑ C. Address field (A) (Right Answers)
❑ ❑ _ Flag field (F) (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
474_ The following figure shows the encapsulation formal of the data packet n IPsec VPN_ Which formal is the type of data packet used toencapsulate in IPsec V1417
❑ A. Tunnel mode (Right Answers )

❑ B. Universal mode
❑ C. Transmission mode
❑ ID_ This encapsulation is error
Answer: A
475. Which of the following SNMP messages is sent to the NMS by the agent on the managed device?
❑ A. Gel-Next-Request
❑ B Get-Request
❑ C. Set-Request
❑ ❑. Response (Right Answers)
Answer: ❑
476 The AOL does not filter the traffic that the device itself generates to access other devices. Only the forwarded traffic is fiItered The forwarded traffic ncludes traffic that other devices access the device.
❑ B False
Answer: A
477. What is the number range of the Layer 2 ACL?

❑ B. 6000-6031
❑ C. 2000-2999
❑ ❑. 3000-3999
Answer: A
478. Which of the following statement about ilpv6 address configuration is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. IPv6 address supports multiple ways of automatic configuration (Right Answers)
❑ B. IPv6 supports DHCPv6 format for address configuration (Right Answers)
❑ C. IPv6 addresses can only be manually configured.
❑ D. IPv6 supports stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
479. The OSPFv3 protocol itself does not provide authentication.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
480. The Flow Label Field, Source Address Field, and Destination Address field in IPv6 together specify a forwarding path in the network for a particular data stream.
D B. False
Answer: A
481. Which of the following IPv6 addresses is a multicast address?

❑ A. FF02::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC (Right Answers)
❑ B. FE80::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ D. FC00.:2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
Answer: A
482. Which technology does the shared medium network use for data forwarding?
❑ A. CDMAtCD (Right Answers)
❑ B. CSMAIAC
❑ C. TDMA/CD
❑ D. CSMA1CD
Answer: A
483. Which of the following IPv4 addresses is a Class A address?

❑ A. 100.1.1.1
❑ B. 172.16.1.1
❑ D. 192.168.1.1
Answer: C
484. How many ways does VRP support to configure router? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Configure the router through Telnet (Right Answers)
❑ B. Configure the router through FTP
❑ C. Configure the router through the mini USB port (Right Answers)
❑ D. Configure the router through the console port. (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
485.
The above is the display startup information of the AR2200 router. For this information, which of the following statements is wrong?
❑ A. The running configuration file is not saved
❑ B. The system file used for starting the device is ar22204200r003c0Ospc200.cc
❑ C. The system file of the next startup of the device can be modified by using the command "startup system software <atartup-software-name>".
❑ D. The system file cannot be modified when the device starts next time. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
486. In the VRP system, which of the following functions does the Ctrl +Z combination key have? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Exit the console interface view.
❑ B. Return to the user view from the system view (Right Answers)
❑ C. Exit interface view
❑ D. Return to the user view from arty view (Right Answers)
❑ E. Exit the current view
Answer: BD
487. Which of the following description of the Forwarding state in the spanning tree protocol is wrong?
❑ A. port in Forwarding state can send BPDUs.
❑ B port in Forwarding state does not learn the source MAC address of the packet. (Right Answers)
❑ C. port in Forwarding state can forward data packets
❑ D. port in Forwarding state can receive BPDUs.
Answer: B
488. The bridge ID of the STP protocol in the switching network is as follows. Which of the following bridge ID owned by switch will become the root bridge?
❑ A. 32768 00-01-02-03-04-AA
❑ B. 32768 00-01-02-03-04-BB
❑ C. 32768 00-01-02-03-04-CC
❑ D. 4096 00-01-02-03-04-DD (Right Answers)
Answer: D
489. The RSTP protocol uses the PIA mechanism to speed up the speed at which the upstream port goes to the Forwarding state, but the loop is not available, what is the reason?
❑ A. Introduced edge ports
❑ B. Shortened the time of Forward Delay
❑ C. Ensure that loops do not occur by blocking its own non-root ports (Right Answers)
❑ D. Speed up the port role election
Answer: C
490. Which of the following statement about the dynamic MAC address table is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The interface learns by using the source MAC address in the packet. The entry can be aged. (Right Answers)
CI B. Dynamic entries are lost after system reset, hot swappable interface board, or interface board reset
❑ C. can obtain the number of users communicating on the interface by viewing the number of dynamic MAC address entries. (Right Answers)
O D. The saved entries are not lost after the system reset, hot swappable interface board, or interface board reset. (Right Answers)
Answer, ACD
491. Which of the following protocols is dynamic IGP routing protocol?

❑ A. Static
❑ B. BGP
❑ D. Direct
Answer: C
492. The router needs to modify the destination IP address in the data packet when forwarding the data packet.
❑ A. True
El B. False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
493. route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2 preference 20, which of the following statement about this command is correct?
❑ A. The route must appear in the routing table.
❑ B. The destination network of the route is 10.0.12.2/32
❑ C. The priority of this route is 100.
❑ ID. The mask length of the route destination network is 32 bits. (Right Answers)
Answer:
494. Which of the following statement about the OSPF protocol DR is correct?
❑ A. DR must be the highest priority device in the network
❑ B. DR election is preemptive
❑ C. Router ID. The larger the value, the higher the priority is elected as DR.
❑ D. An interface priority is 0, and then the interface cannot be a DR (Right Answers )
Answer: D
495_ Which of the following statement about the priority of static routes in Huawei devices is incorrect?
❑ A. The default value of static route priority is 60.
❑ B. The priority value of the static route is 255, indicating that the route is unavailable.
❑ G. The static route priority value ranges from 0 to 255. (Right Answers)
❑ 0. The priority of static routes is divided into internal priority and external priority. Administrators can modify external priority
Answer: C
496_ The router starts the FTP service_ The username and password are both huawei, and the root directory of the FTP is set to flash,/dhcp/. Which of the following commands must be configured? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. local-user huawei password cipher huawei (Right Answers)
❑ B. lip sewer enable (Right Answers)
❑ G. local-user huawei service-type lip (Right Answers)
❑ B_ focal-user huawei flp-directory flash:/dhcp/ (Right Answers )
Answer: ABCD
497 The priority of the LAGP protocol is as shown in the figure. Switch A and Switch B adopt link aggregation in LAGP mode, and all interfaces loin the link aggregation group. The maximum number of active ports is set to 3. Which port of
switch A is not the active port?
❑ A. G0/0/2
❑ 11 GO/0/3 (Right Answers)
❑ a GO/0/0
❑ D. GO/0/1
Answer: B
498. If an Ethernet data frame has LengthiType=0x8100, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. This data frame must carry VLAN TAG (Right Answers)
❑ B. The TCP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.
❑ C. The UDP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.
❑ ❑. The IP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.
Answer: A
49.9. Which of the fat/owing description about the trunk port and the Access port is correct?
❑ A. The Trunk port can only send tagged frames.
❑ B. The Trunk port can only send untagged frames.
❑ C- The Access port can only send tagged frames.
❑ ❑ - The Access part can only send untagged frames. (Right Answers)
Answer: ❑
500 As shown In the following figure, Switch A and Router Aare connected through two Inks_ The two links ere in the manual ead balancing made The a/minimal-ion pert number is I, and the data is forwarded through the aggregation {ink which
needs to carry VLAN TAG 100, which configuration does Router A need to use? (Mottfpla choice)
100$
❑ A interlace Elh-Tuenskl port tune, pert trunk Wow-pass vlan interface GigabilEllownatCgatt athttrunk 1 g interlace Gigab0Elharnet0.0/2 athdrunk 1 a
❑ B. interlace Eth-Trunkl undo ponswitch # interface Elh-Trunki.100 dolgiemitnation red 100 to address 10.0.12.2255.255.255 0 arp broadcast enable -et (Right An...re 7
El C. inlerfeee Eds.Trunkl mode lamp-sleet port tinkeype trued( port think eked pass vtan 1004 tri.rface GtgabdEthanialtlf0f1 att,lrunk 1 u interface GgebilEthernetc/0,2 ath.lrunk I a
Et G. interface 0mabilEtheroato221 ant-trunk t 0 Interlace GigabrtElhernet0312 elh-trunk I tl (Right Answers)
Answer. BB
501_ Which of the following functions are supported by the LCP protocol in the PPP protocol? {Multiple choice)
❑ A. Negotiate the maximum receiving unit MRU (Right Answers )
❑ B. Negotiate the authentication protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Negotiate the network layer address
❑ D. Detect link loops (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
502 A company has 50 private IP addresses. The administrator uses NAT technology to connect the company network to the public network_ However, the company has only one public network address_ Which of the following NAT conversion
methods meets the requirements,
❑ A easy-ip (Right Answers)
❑ NAPT
❑ G Dynamic conversion
❑ a Static conversion)
Answer: A
503 As shown in the figure, there is a Web server in the private network that needs to provide HTTP services to public network users. Therefore, the network administrator needs to configure NAT on the gateway muter RTA to implement the
requirements. Which of the following configuration can meet the requirements,
❑ A [RTA-Serm11/0/1Inat server protocol top gbbal 202 10.101 wnw inside 192.168.1.1 8080 (Right Answers)
❑ [RTA-Senal1/0/1]na1 server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 20210_101 8080
❑ G [RTA-Gmabitetherne10/0/1]nat server protocol top global 20210.101 WNW inside 192_168 1_1 8080
❑ El_ [RTA-Gmabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol top global 192168_11 anew inside 20210101 8080
Answer: A
504 When deploying an ACL on a Huawei device, which of the following description is correct? (Whale choice)
❑ k When AGLs define rules, they can only be advanced in the order of 10, 20, and 30
❑ B. The same ACL can be calked under mufti& interfaces (Right Answers)
❑ C. Can only be applied to the outbound direction when the ACL is called an the interface.
❑ D. AGLs cannot be used to filter OSPF traffic because OSPF traffic is not encapsulated using UDP protocol.
❑ E. The AGL can match the TGP/UDP port number of the packet, and can specify the range of the port number. (Right Answers)
Answer: BE
505. Which of the following message types does RADIUS use t❑ indicate authentication rejection?
❑ A. Access-Reject (Right Answers)
❑ B. Access-Request
❑ G. Access-Challenge
❑ D. Access-Accept
Answer: A
506. Which authentication modes does AAA support on Huawei AR G3 series routers? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. 802.1x
❑ B. None (Right Answers)
❑ C. HWTACACS (Right Answers )
❑ D. Local (Right Answers )
Answer: BCD
507 if the maximum number in Ihe ACL rule is 12, by default, when the user configures a new rule without specifying a number, what is the number assigned In the new rule by the system?
❑ A 14
❑ B. 16
❑ D. 13
Answer: C
508. If two IPsec VPN peers want to use both AH and ESP to ensure secure communication, how many SAs (Security Associations) do the two peers need to build?
❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
0 C. 3
Answer: D
509. DHCPve belongs to a stateful address autoconfiguration protocol.

O B. False
Answer: A
510. The DHCPv6 server includes the management address configuration flag (M) in the RA message. If the value is 1, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. Indicates that the client enables DHCPv6 stateful address configuration. (Right Answers )
❑ B. Indicates that the client needs to obtain other network configuration parameters through stateless DHCPv6.
❑ C. Indicates that the client enables IPv6 stateless address automatic allocation scheme
❑ D. Indicates that the client needs to cbtain other network configuration parameters through stateful DHCPv6.
Answer: A
❑ A. Transport layer (Right Answers)
❑ B. Network layer
❑ C. Data link layer
O D. Physical layer
Answer: A
512. After application data is processed through the data link layer, what does it call?
❑ A. Segment
❑ B. PDU
❑ C. Frame (Right Answers )
❑ D. Packet
Answer: C
513.<Huawei>system-view
[Huawei] user-interface console 0
[Huawei-ui-console0] history-command max-size 20
Regarding the above configuration, which of the following statement is correct?
O A. history-command max-size 20 is to adjust the size of the history command cache to 20 (Right Answers)
❑ B. The default size of the history command cache is 5
❑ C. The default size of the history command cache is 5 bytes.
❑ D. After the above configuration is completed, the history command cache can save 20 bytes of commands.
Answer: A
514. What is the destination MAC address of the BPDU in the STP protocol?
❑ A. 01-80-C2-04-05-06
❑ B. FF -FF
- - - FF
- - - -FF
- - -FF
- - - FF
❑ C. 00-80-C2-00-00-00
❑ D. 01 -80
- - -C2
- - - 00
- - - -00
- - 00 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
515. As shown in the figure, if the switch runs STP with default parameters, which of the following ports will be elected as the designated port?
El
O A. GO/0/1 port of Switch A (Right Answers)

❑ B. G0/0/2 port of switch A
❑ C. HUB's E0/0/2 port
❑ D. HUB's E0/0/1 port
Answer: A
516. The router has the longest matching principle when looking up the routing table. Which of the following parameter is the length?
❑ A. The size of the NextHoplP address
❑ B. Priority of the routing protocol
❑ C. Cost
❑ D. The length of the mask (Right Answers)
Answer: D
517. Which packet does OSPF use to describe its own LSDB?
❑ A. LSR
❑ B. HELLO
❑ C. DD (Right Answers)
❑ D. LSU
Answer: C
518. HhaweiGigabitEthernet0/011 ] port link-type access

[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port default vlan 10
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] port link-type trunk
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/012] port trunk allow-pass vlan 10
According to the command shown above, which of the following descriptions is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/2 port is 1. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The PVID of GigabitEthernet010/2 port is 10
❑ C. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port is 1.
❑ D. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port is 10. (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
519 As shown in the foleiving gap-AM. Nye switches are connected through four links COPPER refers mine efectneall interfacs, and FISH refers m the optical interlace. Which oil the foilanng Iva interfaces can implement link aggregation,
1
Lff A 0010 3 and FEC/I0I3
El 0 001013 and 00/13/2
❑ C 001012 end FE0/0/3
n 0. 0010:2 and 001011 (Right gnawers)
Answer. Li
520 if a rmsanys network administrator wants to divide users who frequently change office locations and °flan access different nahvorks from tie conch to be cotporata nalwisair to MANIC, which of the following methods should Ice used to
diridaVLAkts?
'LI A drvide MAN based on protocol
:11 d. dads ?DUI based on MAC address (Right Answers)
D C divide VLAN based on Port
71 0 diode WAN based an grlanals
Answer= ft
521. Which two stages can the PPPoE session establishment process be divided into? (Multiple choice)
O A. PPP connecting stage
❑ B. Discovery stage (Right Answers)
O C. PPPoE Session stage (Right Answers)
O D. DHCP stage
Answer: BC
522 IOTA] aaa

IRTA-aaal domain Huawei
[RTA-aaa-domain-Huawei] authentication-scheme alt
]RTA-aaa-domain-Huawei] authentication-scheme au2
The network administrator performs the above configuration on the Huawei router RTA. If a user needs to be authenticated in the authentication domain "Huawei", which of the following description is correct?
CI A will use "authentication-scheme all" authentication, if "aul" is deleted, "au2" authentication will be used
❑ B will use "authentication-scheme au2" authentication, if "au2" is deleted, "aul" authentication will be used
❑ C Will use the "authentication-scheme 002" authentication (Right Answers )
CI B. Will use the "authentication-scheme out" authentication
Answer: C
523. Huawei ARG3 series routers enable all versions of SNMP (SNMPvl, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3) by default.
El B. False
Answer: A
524. Which of the following encapsulation modes does lPsec VPN support? (Multiple choice)
O A. Tunnel mode (Right Answers)
O B. Exchange mode
O C. Transmission mode (Right Answers)
O D. Routing mode
Answer: AC
525 Two authentication domains "Area I" and "Area 2" are configured on a router Mel serves as the authentication server. FM:tit.er arrgentrealm wrIf the correct usemamelivatwer" and passauml "heir Wrieh authunlicalon Wraith wig the
0...signed to?
D A. Authentication domain 'Areal"
▪ 0 Aurvenhcalion domain 'Area?"
❑ C Authenticalsn domain 1default_admin domain"
❑ 0 Authentication Minim "defaull domain" (Right Answers)
Maw, 0
526. If the EUI-64 address 78BC-FEFF-FFFE-EFAB is calculated based on the MAC address, what should its corresponding MAC address be?
❑ A. 7ABC-FEFE-EFAB (Right Answers)
❑ B. 78BC-FFFE-EFAB
❑ C. 7ABC-FFFE-EFAB
❑ D. 78BC-FEFE-EFAB
Answer: A
527. The DHCPv6 client must obtain both IPv6 addresses and another configuration information from the DHCPv6 server.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
528. When the network device sends the IPv6 packet, the packet length is compared with the NTU value. If the value is greater than the MTU value, the packet is directly discarded.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
529. The output information of the router interface is as follows. Which mufticast address data can the interface receive? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. FF02::2 (Right Answers)

❑ B. FF02::1: FF12:1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. FF02::1: FF6FAF36 (Right Answers)
❑ D. FF02::1 (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
530. Which of the following statement about the IPv6 anycast address is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The packet whose destination address is anycast address will be sent to the network interface in the meaning of the route. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Implement load sharing of services (Right Answers)
❑ C. Provide redundancy for services (Right Answers)
❑ D. Anycast address and unicast address use the same address space (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
531. The MPLS label header is encapsulated between the data link layer header and the network layer header of the message.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
532. When using the Traced program to test the path through which the target node passes, the default TTL value for Traceroute is measured 0 times.
❑ A.3 (Right Answers)
❑ fr 8
❑ fr 6
❑ D.4
Answer: A
533. Which of the following description of the role of the free ARP message is wrong?
❑ A Used to advertise the active/standby switchover in the VRRP backup group.
❑ B Used to advertise a new current AC address_ The sender replaces the NIC and the AC address changes. In order to notify all hosts before the AP entry ages, the sender can send a free ARP_
❑ G Used to check duplicate IP addresses. Nommlly, no ARP response will be received. If received, it indicates that there is an address in the network that is duplicated with its own IP address.
❑ 0 Free ARP packets are used to keep active with the gateway device when the host is idle. (Right Answers )
Answer: 0
534. Which of the following statement about the ARP message is wrong?
❑ A. The ARP reply message is sent by the unicast party.
❑ B. Any network device needs to obtain the data link layer identifier by sending ARP packets. (Right Answers)
❑ C. ARP request message is sent by broadcast
❑ ID ARP packets cannot traverse the router and cannot be forwarded to other broadcast domains.
Answer: B
535. Using the command mkdir test in the VRP operating platform, the system will create a folder named test.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
536 When the switch receives a unicast data frame, it will look up the destination MAC address in the MAC table. Which of the following statement is wrong?
❑ A. If the MAC address is found, and the corresponding port of the MAC address in the MAC address table is not the one that enters the switch, the switch performs the forwarding operation
❑ B If the MAC address is found, and the corresponding port of the MAC address in the MAC address table is the port that the frame enters the switch, the switch performs the discard operation
❑ C. If the MAC address is not found, the switch performs the flooding operation_
❑ D. tf the MAC address is not found, the switch performs the discard operation. (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
537. The default route can be derived from (). (Multiple choice)
❑ A Manua[ configuration (Right Answers)
❑ B. Dynamic routing protccof generation (Right Answers)
❑ G. The router itself has
❑ a Link layer protocol generation
Answer: AB
538. Which of the following packets belong to the OSPF protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. LSU (Right Answers)
❑ B. LSA
❑ C. LSR (Right Answers)
❑ D. HELLO (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
539. On the broadcast network, both the DR and the BDR use the mutticast address 224.0.0.6 to receive the link status update packet.
0 B. False
Answer: A
540. As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. Which device is ABR? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Router B (Right Answers)

❑ B. Router D
❑ C. Router C
❑ D. Router A (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
541. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which of the following interfaces can forward data frames with a VLAN ID of 40 and does not carry labels when forwarding?
❑ A. GEO/0/4
❑ B. GEO/0/2
❑ C. GEO/0/3
❑ D. GEO/0/5 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
542. As shown in the figure, which of the following configuration of the VLAN on the Huawei switch is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Clientl belongs to VLAN 10, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Client2 belongs to VLAN 20, and the command for dividing VLAN based on MAC address on the switch is correct. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Client3 belongs to VLAN 30, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct.
❑ D. Client4 belongs to VLAN 40, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct.
❑ E. Client4 does not belong to VLAN 40, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is incorrect. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABE
543. In the link aggregation technology, which parameters can the Eth-Trunk use to implement load balancing? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Same source IP address or destination IP address (Right Answers)
❑ B. Same source port number or destination port number
❑ C. Same source MAC address or destination MAC address (Right Answers )
❑ D. The same protocol type
Answer: AC
544. The Truk port can allow multiple VLANs to pass, including VLAN4096.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
545 As shown in the figure, the administrator wants all hosts to access the Tnternet from 8.00 to 17- 00 every day. In the interface configuration of GO/0/l, h h AGL rule should be bound to traffic-filter outbound?
❑ A time-range am9topm5 08 - 00 to 11:00 working-day # acl number 2003 rule 5 deny time-range am9topm5
❑ B time-range am91opm5 08:00 to 17:00 daily # acl number 2002 rule 5 permit time-range an-e1opm5 #
❑ C. lime-range amgtopm5 08_00 to 17:00 daily # acl number 2001 rule 5 deny time-range am9topm5 # (Right Answers )
❑ D. time-range am9topm5 08:00 to 17-00 off-day # acl number 2004 rule 5 permit time-range am91opm5
Answer: C
546. The router output information is as follows. What is the IPv6 address obtained by this interface?
❑ A. 3000::3000/64
❑ B. 3000::1/64
❑ C_ 3000::2/64 (Right Answers)
❑ D_ 2000::1/64
Answer: C
54T Which of the following features is no longer supported by ❑SPFv3 on an EPv6 network?
❑ A. Router-1D
❑ B. Multi-regional division
❑ C_ Authentication function (Right Answers )
❑ D_ Send protocol packets in mutticast mode
Answer: C
548. Which packet is sent by the DHCF've client in response to the Advertise packet sent by the DHCPv€ sewer?
❑ A. Offer
❑ B. Request (Right Answers)
❑ G. Reply
❑ D Advertise
Answer: B
549 The configuration information of a routers [MGM address pool is as folbws if the host adopts [MGM doleful autoconfiguration, which IPM addresses can the host obtain? (Multiple choice)
dhcps6 pod test

address prefix 3000:164
excluded-address 3000:1
dns-server 2000:1
dns-domain-name huawei dns-domain-name huawercom
❑ A 30002/64 (Right Answers)

❑ 13- 30900/64
❑ C 3000.3000/64 (Right Answers)
❑ 0 2000- 1/64
Answer: AC
550 Segment Routing (SR) is a protocol for extending the existing IGla protocol, based on the MPLS protocol, using source routing technology to forward data packets on the network_
❑ A_ True (Right Answers)
▪ False
Answer: A
551 if the routers Ethernet interface needs to forward a 1600B packet, which of the fallowing statement is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A The value of the Flags field of the first packet is 1 (Right Answers )
❑ B The first message contains the payload 14808 (Right Answers )
❑ G The slice offset field value of the second fragmented packet is 1480 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The value of the Flags field of the second packet is a
Answer: ABC
552. There is a TTL field in the header of the 1P packet. Which of the following statement about this field is correct?
❑ A. This field is used to indicate the priority of the packet.
❑ B. The length of this field is 7 digits.
❑ C. This field is used for packet anti-ring. (Right Answers)
❑ D. This field is used for packet fragmentation.
Answer: C
553. After the network administrator uses the TracedRoute function on the router device, what is the value of the Protocol field of the IPv4 header in the data packet sent by the router?
❑ A6
❑ B.1 (Right Answers)
❑ C.17
▪ 2
Answer:
554 As shown in the following figure, host C is ony required to communicate with one of host A or host B_ Then, which Gourmand can be configured to implement the requirement under the G0/013 port of SWB?
❑ A mtu 2000
❑ B port link-type trunk
❑ C speed 100
▪ mac-limit maximum 1 (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
555_ As shown in the following figure, the MAC address table of the SWA is as follows. The h can never learn the MAC address of the HOST A Which of the following reasons not possible,
❑ A HOST A did not send any data frames

❑ B The GO/0/1 port of the switch is set to ACCESS mode (Right Answers )
❑ C_ The MAC address learning function is disabled on GO/0/1 of the switch.
❑ 0. Turn off the MAC address learning function of the LAN to which HOST A belongs.
Answer. B
556 The network administrator finds that a port on the switch has learned the MAC address, but cannot forward the data frame. Which of the following working states is the port in?
❑ A Disabled
❑ B Blocking
❑ C Listening
❑ D Learning (Right Answers)
Answer,
557_ As shown in the following figure, host A does not have a gateway configured_ Host B has a gateway ARP cache. In host A, the command ping 110 12_1 is used. Which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A The destination MAC address of the data frame sent by Host A is MAC-B.
❑ B The destination MAC address of the data frame sent by Host A is MAC-A.
0 C_ The destination IP address of the packet sent by host A is 11 0.12.1.
❑ 0_ No packets will be sent from host A (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
558. In Huawei AR routers, what is the default OSPF priority value?

❑ A. 20
❑ a 30
❑ ❑_ 0
Answer: B
559. When configuring a static route on a broadcast interface, you must specify the next hop address.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
560. In the OSPF broadcast network, which routers do the DR other routers exchange link state information with? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DR (Right Answers)
❑ B. BDR (Right Answers)
❑ C. All OSPF neighbors
❑ D. DR Other
Answer, AB
561. What is the value of the direct routing protocol priority?

❑ B. 30
❑ C. 10
❑ D. 20
Answer: A
562. The configuration information of the GO/0/1 port of the switch is as follows. Which VLAN data frame does the switch forward not carry the VLAN TAG?
❑ B. 30
0 C. 40
❑ D. 20
Answer: A
563. Referring to the following topology and configuration. routers Ri and R2 are connected through a Serial low-speed cable, and the data link layer encapsulation uses PPP. When the Holdtimes of Ri and R2 are inconsistent, PPP negotiation
fails and communication cannot be performed.
C A True
C B False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
564. PPP is more secure and reliable than HDLC because PPP supports (). (Multiple choice)
❑ A. SSH B. PAP C. MD5 D. CHAP
Answer: BD
565. The configuration information of GO/0/1 interface of Router A is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
acl number 3000
rule 5 deny 17
rule 10 deny 89
rule 15 deny 6
traffic-filter inbound acl 3000
❑ A. This interface does not forward ICMP packets.

❑ B. This interface does not forward received SNMP packets. (Right Answers)
❑ C. This interface does not forward received FTP packets. (Right Answers)
❑ D. This interface can establish OSPF neighbor relationships with other routers.
Answer: BC
566. Layer 2 ACL can match source MAC, destination MAC, source IP ; and destination IP, etc. information.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
567. What is the value of the protocol type field in the FP packet, indicating that the protocol is GRE?
❑ B. 48
❑ C. 2
❑ D. 1
Answer: A
568. OSPFv2 supports lPv6 by adding new types of LSAs.

❑ A. True
Answer: B
569. Which of the following parts does the global unicast address consist of? (Multiple Choice)
El A. Protocol ID
❑ B. Interface ID (Right Answers)
❑ C. Subnet ID (Right Answers)
❑ D. Global Routing Prefix (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
570. The output information of Router C is as follows. How many global unicast address prefixes does Router C advertise?
❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
❑ D. 4
Answer: C
571. What are the values of the currently used IPv6 multicast address flag field (Flag)? (Multiple Choice)
❑ C. 2
❑ D. 3
Answer: AB
572. Which of the following statements about the TTL field in the IP packet header is correct?
❑ A. Whenever a IP packet passes through a router, its TTL value is decremented by 1. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Whenever a IP packet passes through a router, its TTL value will be increased by 1.
❑ D. TTL defines the number of packets that the source host can send.
Answer: A
573. Which of the following is not included in the VRP system login method?
❑ A. Telnet
❑ B. SSH
❑ C_ Netstream (Right Answers)
❑ D. Web
Answer: C
574. Which of the following information is used to prompt by the VRP operating platform for incomplete input commands?
❑ A. Error: Wrong parameter found at w position
❑ B. Error: Incomplete command found at wposition (Right Answers)
❑ G_ Error. Too many parameters found at w position
❑ D. Error Ambiguous command found at "'position
Answer: B
575. Which of the following descriptions about the specified port of the spanning tree is correct?
❑ A. The part en the root switch must not be the designated port.
❑ B. The designated port can forward configuration BPDUs to the network segment connected to it. (Right Answers)
❑ G. Each switch has only one designated purl
❑ D. Specify the porno forward configuration BPDUs from this switch to the root switch.
Answer: B
576 Which of the following statements about the handling of RSTP configuration BPDU are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A After the topology is stable, the non-root bodge device sends configuration BPDUs at the interval specified by the Hello timer, regardless of whether the configuration BPDUs are received from the root bodge_ (Right Answers)
❑ B After the topology is stable, the non-root bridge demo sends the configuration BPDU after receiving the configuration BPDU sent by the upstream device.
❑ C The root port must wait for the BPDU Max Age timeout to re-top the topology calculation.
❑ 0 When a port receives a sub-optimal RST BPDU from the upstream designated bridge, the port immediately responds to its stored RST BPDU, (Right Answers )
Answer: AD
577. Which of the following statements are incorrect? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. By default, the order of route priorities is that direct routes are higher than OSPF.
❑ B. In VRP, the greater the priority value of the routing protocol, the higher the priority of the route_ (Right Answers )
❑ C. The priority of each static route can be different
❑ D. If the cost of the route is larger, the higher the priority of the route. (Right Answers )
Answer: BD
578 Which of the following descriptions are incorrect about the OSPF Router ID? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The prerequisite for the normal operation of OSPF protocol is that the router has a router ID_
❑ B. The router ID must be the LP address of an interface of the router. (Right Answers)
❑ G. The router ID must be specified by manual configuration. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router Ins must be the same in the same area. The router Ins in different areas can be different. (Right Answers )
Answer: BCD
579 When a router forwards a packet, if it does not match the corresponding detail route and there is no default route, the router will discard the packet directly.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
580 After the administrator successfully logs in to the router through Telnet, it is found that the IP address of the interface can not be configured on the muter. So what is the possible reason?
❑ A SNMP parameter configuration error
❑ B The Telnet terminal software used by the administrator prohibits the corresponding operation.
❑ C The Telnet user level is incorrectly configured (Right Answers)
❑ 0 The authentication mode of the Telnet user is incorrectly configured.
Answer: C
581 In the network shown in the following figure, the switch uses the VLANIF interface to connect to the sub-interface of the muter. Which of the following configurations can fulfill this requirement?
111
❑ A interface Mandl° ip address 100 12 1 255255 255 0 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type hybrid pod hybrid untag Nan 10 #
❑ B interface Vbnif10 ip address 100.121 255 255 255.0 # interface GigabitEtherneto/0/2 pod link-type access pod default Nan 10 #
❑ C interface Vlanifl D ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255.255.0 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 # (Right Answers)
❑ 0 interface Vbnif10 ip address 10 a12:1 255 255 2550 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk pvid 10 pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 #
Answer: C
582. If an Ethernet data frame Lengthrrype=0)(8100, which of the following ports might this data frame be sent from? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Switch Hybrid type port (Right Answers)
❑ B. Switch Access type port
❑ C. Serial interface of the router
❑ D. Switch Trunk type port (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
583 As shown in the figure, the two ports of switch GE0/0/1 and GEO/0/2 perform different Hybrid configurations. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The data frame sent by the finance department carries the tag in the switch as VLAN20. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The administrative department and the finance department cannot visit each other because the VLANs belonging to the two depadments are different.
❑ C. If both ports GEO/0/1 and GEO/0/2 of the switch are modified to be trunk pods, the two departments can communicate normally.
❑ 0 The data frame sent by the administrative department carries the tag in the switch as VLAN20
❑ E The switch here can be a Layer 2 switch or a Layer 3 switch because communication does not need to go through a Layer 3 gateway (Right Answers)
Answer: AE
584 In the LPP negotiation phase of lhe PPP protocol, if the parameters sent by the other party are completely accepted, which of the following packet will be sent?
❑ Configure-Reject
❑ B. Configure-Ark (Right Answers )
❑ C. Configure-Request
❑ Configure-Nak
Answer: B
585 As shown in the following figure, which of the following configurations can be used to make Host A and Host B unable to communicate with each other? (Multiple Choice)
▪ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100 0 12_0 0 0 0255 # interface GmabitEthernet0.10/3 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑ B_ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100.0.120 0.0 0255 # interface GigabitEthemet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound net 2000 # (Right Answers )
❑ C_ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100 0.12 0 0.0.0255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑ fr act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000.120 0.0.0_255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 traffic-liter inbound eel 2000 # (Right Answers)
Answer: BB
586. The output information of Router C is as follows: what is the source IPv6 address of Router C sending OSPFv3 LSU packets?
111
❑ A. 2603:1/64
❑ B. FE80::2E0:FGFEFE48:4EC8 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2005: 1/64
❑ 0. 2009-1/64
Answer: B
587. Which of the following message types is used for the RA message that is used for IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration?
❑ A. IGIv1Pv6
❑ El I Clv1Pv5 (Right Answers)
❑ C. UPv5
❑ D. TCPv6
Answer: B
588 The FEC (Forwarding Equivalence Class) is a set of data streams with certain commonalities; the FEC can be divided according to the add but cannot be divided according to the service type, CloS, etc.
❑ A True
Answer: B
589 Which statement is correct about the function of the network layer in the 081 reference model?
111 A. The closest layer to the user in the OSI reference model, providing network services for applications
❑ B Transmit bitstreams between devices, specifying levels, speed, and cable pins
O C. Provide connection-oriented or non-connection-oriented data transfer and error detection before retransmission
0 a Provide a logical address for the router to determine the path (Right Answers)
❑ E. Combine the bits into bytes, combine the bytes into frames, use the link layer address (the Ethernet uses the MAC address) to access the medium, and perform error detection.
Answer: D
590 UDP does not guarantee the reliability of data transmission_ It does not provide functions such as packet sorting and flow control. It is suitable for traffic with low transmission reliability requirements but high transmission speed and delay.
El A True (Right Answers)
❑ B False
Answer: A
591. If the application layer protocol is Millet ; what is the value of the Protocol field in the IPA header?
❑ A. 17
❑ B. 67
E C. 53
Answer: D
592. The MAC address table of the existing switch is as follows. The switch receives a data frame with a source MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 and a destination MAC address of 5489-989d-I d30. Which of the following statements are
correct? (Multiple Choice)
111
0 A. If this data frame is received from Eth0/0/1, the switch will discard this data frame (Right Answers)
0 B If the data frame is received from Eth0/0/1, the switch forwards the data frame from the Eth0/0/3 port.
0 C If the data frame is meowed from Eth0/0/1, the switch floods the data frame.
❑ D If the data frame is received from the Eth0/0/3 pod, the switch forwards the data frame from the Eth0/01 port (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
593. SWA and SWB run the RSTP protocol. Which of the fo[lowing statements are correct? (Muth* Choice)
❑ A. The G01013 port of SWA is the designated port. (Right Answers )

❑ B. The GO/0/3 port of SWB is the alternate port. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The G0/0/3 port of SWB is the Backup part.
❑ D. The G01012 part of SWA is the designated part. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
594. On the VRP platform, what is the order of the default protocol priorities of direct route, static route, RIP, and OSPF from high to low?
❑ A. Direct route, OSPF, static route, RIP (Right Answers)
❑ B. Direct route, OSPF, RIP, static route
❑ C. Direct route, RIP, static route, OSPF
❑ D. Direct route, static route, RIP, OSPF
Answer: A
595. As shown in the following figure, assume that all routers run OSPF at the same time. Which router is the DR in this network?
❑ A. Router A
❑ B. Router B (Right Answers )
❑ C. Router C
❑ D. Router ID
Answer: B
596. The OSPF router ID must be the same as the IP address of an interface on the router.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
597. What are the functions of OSPF hello packets? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Publish parameter information such as Router ED and Router Priority. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Synchronous router LSDB
❑ C. Neighbor discovery (Right Answers)
❑ D. Maintaining neighbor relationships (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
598. By default, what is the OSPF protocol Deadtime on the broadcast network?
❑ A. 20s
❑ B. 40s (Right Answers)
❑ C. lOs
❑ D. 30s
Answer: B
599. When two OSPF routers form a TWO-WAY neighbor relationship, the LSDB has completed synchronization, but the SPF algorithm has not been run.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
600. Which of the following protocol does not belong to the File Transfer protocol?
❑ A. TFTP
❑ C. FTP
❑ D. SFTP
Answer: B
601. Which of the following is correct about the VLANIF interface?

❑ A. The VLANIF interface does not need to learn the MAC address.
❑ B. Different VLANIF interfaces can use the same IP address.
❑ C. The VLANIF interface does not have a MAC address.
❑ D. The VLANIF interface is a Layer 3 interface. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
602. The rule for creating a VLAN on a Huawei switch is that VLAN4095 cannot be created and VLAN 1 cannot be deleted.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
603. As shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
port hybrid pvid vlan 20
interface GigabitEtherneto/0/2
❑ A. Host A and Host B can ping each other. (Right Answers)

❑ B. Data frames on both links do not contain VLAN TAG (Right Answers)
❑ C. Host A and Host B cannot ping
❑ D. The PVID of the port GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 is 20 (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
604. Which of the following protocol does the PPP protocol consist of? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Certification Agreement (Right Answers)
❑ B. NCP (Right Answers)
❑ C. LCP (Right Answers)
❑ D. PPPOE
Answer: ABC
605. Which of the following value is used in the Protocol field in the PPP frame to indicate that the core is an IP packet?
❑ A. 0x8821
❑ B. 0x0021 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ox8021
❑ D. 0x8863
Answer: B
606 As shown in the following figure, ail the hosts can communicate with host C through which of the following configuration?
But host A and host B cannot communicate.
❑ A_ acl number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98d3-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound eel 4000
❑ B. eel number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-93ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98c0-550e # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filler inbound eel 4000 4 (Right Answers)
❑ C act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98c0-550e # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound eel 4000
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98d3-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound act 4000
Answer: B
607. As shown in the following figure, which of the following configurations can be used to make Host A and Host B unable to communicate with each other? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A_ act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000_12 0 00 0 255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound ad 2000 It
❑ B lad number 2000 rub 5 deny source 100 0.12 0 00 0255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/3 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 4
❑ C. act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000.12 0 0.0.0.255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic -finer outbound eel 2000 4 (Right Answers)
❑ D. act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255 # interface GigabitEthemet 0/0/2 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 # (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
608. As shown in the following figure, the administrator wants that all the hosts cannot access the Web service (port number is 80) and other services are accessed normally, what AGL rule should be bound to traffic-filter outbound in the
interface configuration of GO/0/1,
El
❑ A. act number 3001 rule 5 deny udp destination-port eq www rule 10 porn,'
❑ B act number 3003 rule 5 permit ip rule 10 deny udp destination-port eq www #
❑ G act number 3000 rule 5 deny top clestmation-port eq www rule 10 permit ip # (Right Answers)
❑ act number 3002 rule 5 permit ip rule 10 deny tcp destination-port eq www #
Answer, C
609. What is the decimal value of the OSPFv3 packet in the Protocol field in the IPv6 packet header?
❑ A. 69
❑ G. 92
❑ D. 59
Answer: B
610. Which of the following ll3v6 address Solicited-node mudicast addresses are F02:1:FFAB:FECA? (Multiple Choice)
0 A. 2030::BBAB:FECA (Right Answers)
I=1 B. 2020::EEAB:FECA (Right Answers)
El C. 2020::FFAB:FECA (Right Answers)
❑ D. 2020::FFBA:FECA
Answer: ABC
611. Which of the following IPv6 addresses are link-wide multicast addresses? (Multiple Choice)
El A. FF02 . :2 (Right Answers)
CI B. FF02::1 (Right Answers)
El C. FF12::1 (Right Answers)
CI ID_ FF12::2 (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
612. What is the total length of the interface identifier of the link-local unicast address?
CI A. 48bit
I=1 B. 32bit
CI C. 64bit (Right Answers)
1:1 D. 96bit
Answer: C
613. The LER in the MPLS domain is called the Label Egress Router.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
614. If the value of the Type/Length field of an Ethernet data frame is 0x0800, the header length of the upper packet carried by the data frame ranges from 20 to 60B.
El A. True (Right Answers)
0 B. False
Answer: A
615. On the VRP platform, which of the following methods can you access the previous history command? (Multiple Choice)
O A. Left cursor
O B. Ctrl+U
El C. Ctrl+P (Right Answers)
El D. Upper cursor (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
616. What is the full name of VRP?
❑ A. Virtual Routing Platform
❑ B. Versatile Redundancy Platform
❑ C. Versatile Routing Protocol
❑ D. Versatile Routing Platform (Right Answers)
Answer: D
617 As shown. the figure, three Layer 2 switches ere interconnected wrgi one HUB, and the switch is enabled web SIP. For the budge ID setting of the switch SIP, refer to the following Figure_ Others ere default configurations. Which of the
foaming statement is wrong?
❑ A After the bridge 10 comparison, LSWI is the mat bridge

❑ 130/0/1 purl of LSW3. is an PP port and is blocked
Li C Both pods of LSW1 era designated ports and are in Ina forwarding state Might Answer)
11 D. poll of LSW1 is blacked_
Answer, C
618 As shown in the following figure, all switches run the SIP protocol_ After the topology is stable, modify the sending period of the configuration BPDU on which of following switch can affect the sending period of the SWD configuration
BPDU?
❑ A SWD
❑ B_ SWG
❑ a SWB
❑ D SWA (Right Answers)
Answer:
619. As shown in the network below, the MAC address of the switch is marked. Enter the command stp root secondary on the SWD switch. Which of the following switche will be the root bridge of this network?
❑ A SWD (Right Answers)

❑ B SWB
❑ C SWC
▪ SWA
Answer: A
62D. The company has users who report !hal when using SIss network to transfer files, the speed is very taw. The administrator uses Wireshark software to capture packets m the nelerork and hods some Ouphcale frames. Which of 11e honosiiing
descrkhion is correct ebonite reason or solution?
❑ A The switching equipment of he company network must be upgraded
❑ B. The network nos a loop on the second floor (flight Answers)
ci a No PLAN is configured In the network
❑ D. When the switch fennel find the destination MAC address of the data frame in the MAC address tribe, the swath wIt Rood the dais frame.
Answer, 0
621. Dynamic routing protocols can automatically adapt to changes in network topology.
❑ 11 False
Answer: A
622. The output information of the router R1 routing table is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.2.2 is forwarded through Ethernet0/0/1 . (Right Answers)
❑ B. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.1.1 is forwarded through the Ethernet0/0/0 interface. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The packet with the destination address of 10.1.1.1 is forwarded through the GigabitEthernet0/0/0 interface.
❑ D. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.2.1 is forwarded through the Ethernet0/0/2 interface. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
623. All interfaces of the router belong to the same broadcast domain.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
624. Which of the following is correct about the command configured for the default route?
❑ A. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.11 (Right Answers )
❑ B. [Huawei-Serial0] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
❑ C. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 192.168.1.1
❑ D. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.00.0.0.0
Answer: A
625. What are the advantages of using DHCP to allocate IP addresses using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Can achieve IP address reuse (Right Answers)
❑ B. Avoid IP address conflicts (Right Answers)
❑ C. Heavy workload and poor management
❑ D. The configuration information changes (such as DNS), only the administrator needs to modify it on the DHCP server to facilitate unified management. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
626_ As shown in the following figure, Router A has passed the IP address 10 0_122 Telnet Router B In the current interface, which of the following operations will cause the Telnet session of the router to be interrupted with router, (Multiple
Choice)
❑ A Close GO/0/1 interface (Right Answers)

❑ B Modify the IP address of GO/0/1 interface (Right Answers)
❑ C Enable OSPF protocol on GO/0/1 interface
❑ D Configure static router
Answer: AB
627. When a port of a switch receives a non-carried VLAN TAG data frame, it must add a PVID.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
628_ Which of the following parameter cannot be used for advanced access control lists?
❑ A. Physical interface (Right Answers)
❑ B. Time range
❑ C. Destination port number
❑ D. Agreement number
Answer: A
629 The AGL does not filter the traffic that the device itself generates to access other devices. Only the forwarded traffic is filtered. The forwarded traffic includes traffic that other devices access the device.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
630. An AGL rule is as foIlows: Which of the following IP addresses can be matched by the permit rule? (Multiple Choice)
Rule 5 permit ip source 10.9.1.0 255.0.254.255
❑ A. 7_1.2.1
❑ B_ 6.1.3_1 (Right Answers)
❑ a 8.2.2_1
❑ D_ 9.9_1_1 (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
631. The router output information is as follows. Which IPv6 address is obtained by this interface?
❑ A. 2000..1/64
❑ B. 3000::2/64 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 3000::3000164
❑ D. 3000::1/64
Answer: B
632. The router's Router ID neighbor relationship is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The router and the router with Router-ID 10.5.3.3 cannot exchange the link status information. (Right Answers)
❑ B. This router is a DR Other router (Right Answers)
❑ C. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.0.2. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
633. Which area number does OSPFv3 use to identify the backbone area?
❑ B. 3
❑ C. 1
❑ D. 2
Answer: A
634. A router OSPFv3 adjacency relationship is as follows. The router is an ABR.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
635. Which of the following type of addresses are not included in the IPv6 address?
• A. Anycast address
O B. Broadcast address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Multicast address
O D. Unicast address
Answer: B
636. If the network address of a network is 10.1.1.0/30, what is its broadcast address?
O A. 10.1.1.4
O B. 10.1.1.2
❑ C. 10. 1. 1.3 (Right Answers)
O D. 10.1.1.1
Answer: C
637. If the network address of a network is 192.168.1.0, then its broadcast address must be 192.168.1.255.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
638. Which of the following are correct about the analysis of ICMP packets? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. ICMP packets are encapsulated in IP packets and are not encapsulated in the transport layer. (Right Answers )
❑ B. ICMP packets cannot be used to detect MTUs in a path.
❑ C. ICMP messages can record time, including original time, receiving time, and sending time. (Right Answers)
❑ D. ICMP protocol does not support redirection function
❑ E. ICMP packets contain ICMP error packets, control packets, request/response packets, and refresh packets.
Answer: AC
639. When the router is powered on, the configuration file is read from the default storage path for initialization of the router.
If there is no configuration file in the default storage path, what does the router use for initialization?
❑ A. Current configuration
O B. New configuration
O C. Default parameters (Right Answers)
O D. Initial configuration
Answer: C
640. In the STP protocol, which of the following factors will affect the election of the root switch? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Switch interface ID
O B. Switch interface bandwidth
❑ C. IP address of the switch
O D_ The current MAC address of the switch (Right Answers)
❑ E. Switch priority (Right Answers )
Answer: DE
641. As shown in the following figure, all switches run STP, when the topology is stable.
The SWA device is powered off. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
Cl
❑ A. SWB still periodically sends configuration BPDUs from port GO/0/1.

❑ B. The SWC sends configuration BPDUs from port GO/0/1 after the current Max Age time.
❑ C. SWC immediately sends TC-BPDUs from port GO/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑ D. SWC and SWB immediately re-elected the root bridge (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
642. As shown in the figure, all four switches run STP, and each parameter adopts the default value.
When a port on the root switch is blocked and cannot be sent through the port, how long will the port in the network enter the forwarding state?
❑ A. About 15 seconds
❑ B. About 50 seconds (Right Answers)
❑ C. About 30 seconds
❑ D. About 3 seconds
Answer: B
643. Which of the following port states does the RSTP protocol include? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Forwarding (Right Answers)
❑ B. Discarding (Right Answers)
❑ C. Listening
❑ D. Learning (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
644. As shown in the figure below, all hosts can communicate normally. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. SWB's 301013 learned 2 MAC addresses (Right Answers)

❑ B. SWA's G01013 learned 3 MAC addresses
❑ C. SWA's G010/3 learned 1 lvlAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. SWA's GO/0/3 learns 2 MAC addresses
Answer; AC
645 The Layer 2 switch belongs to the data link layer device and can identify the MAC address information in the data frame, forward the data according to the MAC address, and record the MAC address and the corresponding pod information
in its own internal MAC address table.
JA True (Right Answers)
rl B. False
Answer, A
646. Which of the following description is wrong about the Layer 2 Ethernet switch?
❑ A. Layer 2 Ethernet switch works at the data link layer
❑ Et. Ability to learn MAC address
❑ C_ Forward according to the Layer 2 header information of the Ethernet frame
❑ fr It is necessary to make certain modifications to the three-layer header of the forwarded message, and then forward it_ (Right Answers )
Answer: D
647_ if the network shown in the folbwmg figure is used to enable loopback 0 communication between Router A and Router B through static routes, which of the following command should be entered in Router A?
❑ A_ ip route-static 10 0 22 32 GmabitEthemet 0/0/0

❑ l Et_ ip route-static 10 0 22 0 GmabitEthernet 0/0/0
❑ C ip route-static 10 0 2 2 255 255 255 255100 12 2 (Right Answers)
❑ a ip route-static 10 02 2 255 255 255 255100 12 1
Answer: C
648_ As shown in the figure, regarding OSPF topology and configuration, which of the folbwing statement is correct?
❑ A Compared RI with R2, R2 has a better chance of becoming a OR because its interface OR priority value is smaller
❑ B RI and R2 can establish stable neighbor relationships as long as the interface network type of RI is restored to the default broadcast type.
❑ C_ As long as the interface network type of RI is restored to the default broadcast type, and the hello time is adjusted to 10s, RI and R2 can establish a stable neighbor relationship (Right Answers)
❑ CI RI and R2 can establish stable OSPF neighbor relationships
Answer: C
E49 As shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
ip mute-static 10 02 2 255 255.255 25510 0.12 2
ip route-static 10_0 22 255 255 255 255 10 0 21 2 preference 40
❑ A. if the port GO/0/1 is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is changed to GO/0/2.
❑ B_ if the GO/0/2 port is Down, the interface that reaches 100 22 in the routing table of Router A is changed to GO/0/1_ (Right Answers)
❑ C_ The interface that reaches 10 02 2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/0/1
❑ D. The interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/012. (Right Answers )
Answer: BD
650 As shown in the broadcast network, OSPF mns on four routers and in the same area and on the same network segment. OSPF automatically elects a OR Multiple BORs to achieve better backup results.
❑ A True
❑ B_ False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
651. When logging in to the router through Telnet, which authentication methods can choose? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. AAA local authentication (Right Answers)
❑ B. Not certified
❑ C. password authentication (Right Answers)
❑ MD5 ciphertext authentication
Answer: AC
652. The packet that the DHCP server responds to the client must be a unicast packet.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
653. Link aggregation is a common technique in enterprise nehvorks. Which of the following descriptions are the advantages of link aggregation technology? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A Improve reliability (Right Answers)
❑ B Improve safety
❑ D Implement load sharing (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
654 A switch receives a data frame with a VLAN tag, tut finds that the destination MAC address of the data frame is not queried in its MAC address table which is the processing behavior of the switch for the data frame ,
❑ A The switch will drop this data frame
❑ B The switch broadcasts this data frame to all Access ports.
❑ C The switch broadcasts this data frame to all ports (except the receiving part) in the VLAN that belongs to the data frame (Right Answers)
❑ El The switch broadcasts the data frame to all ports
Answer: C
655 In order to check whether the serial port SO/D/1 on the router is a DTE interface or a BCE interface, which of the following commands should he used?
❑ A. display interface 80/0/1 (Right Answers )
❑ B. display current-config
❑ C. display saved-config
❑ D display controller serial
Answer: A
656. Which of the following types of ACLs can match the transport layer port number?
❑ A. Intermediate ACL
❑ B. Advanced ACL (Right Answers)
❑ C. Layer 2 ACL
❑ D. Basic ACL
Answer: B
657. What is the total length of an 1Pv€ address?

❑ A. 32
❑ B. 64
I=1 D. 96
Answer: C
658. Which protocol packet is required to bear for DHCPv6 packets?
O A. FTP
O B. TCP
O C. UDP (Right Answers)
O Di_ HTTP
Answer: C
659. Which statements are correct about IPv6 address configuration? (Multiple Choice)
O A. FRC addresses can only be manually configured.
O B. IPv6 supports DHCPv6 format for address configuration (Right Answers)
I=1 C. fPv6 supports stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
O D. [Pv6 address supports multiple ways of automatic configuration (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
660. The multicast address of the requested node corresponding to 2001 . •12:1 is FF02::1:FF12:1.
E B. False
Answer: A
661 The client has an error accessing the FTP server. Checking that there is no problem with the connectiviy between the server and the client is it possibly caused by which of the following server ports are blocked? (Multiple Choice)
El A 21 (Right Answers)
❑ B 20 (Right Answers)
❑ C 50049
❑ D 80
Answer: AB
662. Which fields are not included in the network layer header format?
D A. TTL
LI B. Source IPv4 Address
LI C. Sequence Number (Right Answers)
❑ D_ Destination IPv4 Address
Answer: C
663. Which of the following descriptions are correct if en AR2200 router needs to be restored to its initial configuration? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Re-specify the configuration file to be loaded next time
171 B. Reset the saved configuration (Right Answers)
171 C. Clear current configuration
171 D. Restart the AR2200 muter (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
664. The administrator wants to completely delete the old device configuration file config.zip›, then which of the following command is correct?
❑ A. delete /unreserved config.zip (Right Answers)
❑ B. delete /force config.zip
❑ C. clear config.zip
❑ D. reset config.zip
Answer: A
665. In which of the folowing cases does the switch generate configuration BPDUs? (Multiple Choice) A. During the initialization process, as tong as the port is enabled with STP, the configuration BPDU wit be sent from the designated port
according to the interval specified by the Heto Time timer B. When the root port receives the configuration BPDU, the device where the root port resides sends configuration BPOUs from each of its designated ports. C. When a non-designated
port receives a configuration BPDU that is worse then itself, it immediately sends its own BPDU to the downstream device. D. When the designated port receives a configuration BPDU that is worse then itself, it will immediately send its own
BPDU to the downstream device. Answer ABD
❑ A.select this to commit (Right Answers)
Answer. A
666The port cost calculated by STP has a certain relationship with the port bandwidth, that is, the larger the bandwidth, the () the overhead.
❑ A. Consistent
❑ B. Not necessarily
❑ C. bigger
❑ D. smaller (Right Answers)
Answer: D
667. In the RSTP protocol, the PIA mechanism requires that the link between two switching devices be in point-to-point full-duplex mode.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
668. The output information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. This router is DR (Right Answers)

❑ 13. Router Router ID is 10.0.1.1
❑ C. Router Router ID is 10.0.2.2 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The interface address of this router is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)
Answer: ACID
669. Which of the following commands can enable the DHCP relay function of the router interface?
❑ A. dhcp select server
❑ B. dhcp select global
❑ C. dhcp select interface
❑ dhcp select relay (Right Answers)
Answer: DI
670 As shown in the following figure, Switch A and Router A are;connected through two link, The two links are in the manual load balancing mode_ The aggregation port number is 1, and the aggregation link needs to forward data. Carrying
VLAN TAG 100, which configuration does Router A need to use? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. interface Eth-Trunkl port ImIk-type trunk port trunk allow-pass Nan 100 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/1 eth-trunk 1 #
❑ El_ interface GmabilEtherneta/0/1 eth-trunk 1 4 interface GmabilEthernet0/0/2 eth-trunk 1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. interface Eth-Trunkl mode lacp-static port link-type trunk port trunk allow-pass Nan 100 4 interface GmabilEthernell)/0/1 eth-trunk 1 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/2 eth-trunk 1 4
0 B. interface Eth-Trunkl undo portswitch # interface Eth-Trurnkl _100 doll q termination vrd 100 ip address 10 0 122 255 255 2550 arp broadcast enable # (Right Answers)
Answer: B0
071 As shown in the figure, the network administrator creates VLAN 2 on the SWA and SWB, and configures the pods connected to the hosts on the two switches es access ports and assigns them to VLAN 2 Configure 60/0/1 of SWA and
61:11012 of SWB as trunk pods to allow ail VLANs to pass_ To achieve normal cornmunIcehon between the two hosts, what do you need led do,
VI
A. ConTguro G0011 On the SWC as the monk pad and Way AII 2 1a pass. GArO1porl is se,as the amass pal and PVID 2
0 13. Create VLAN 2 on the SWC, configure 60.10/1 arid G0,012 as trunk pods, and alp," VLAN 210 pass. Might Amax.)
0 C. Create VLAN2 on the SWC.
D Configure .30.31,1 on the SWC as the trunk port and aBow VLAN 2 to pass.
Answer , B
672 If the Authenticator sends the wrong username and password to the Authenticator during The PPP authentication process, what type of message will the Authenticator send to the Authenticator?
0 A Authenticate-Reject
0 B. Authenticate-Ack
0 G. Authenticate-Nak
0 D. Authenticate-Reply
673. An ACL is a packet filter. The ACL is applied to the service module. The ACL takes effect_
1=I A. True (Right Answers )
I=1 B. False
Answer: A
674. An ACL rule is as follows: Which of the following iP addresses can be matched by the permit rule? (Multiple Choice)
rub 5 permit ip source 10.0.1.0 0.0.254.255
❑ A. 10.0.4.5
El B. 10_0.3.4 (Right Answers)
0 C_ 10_0_1 2 (Right Answers)
El D. 10.0.2.3
Answer: BC
675. When an iPv6 interface receives a packet whose Hop Limit class has a value of 1, the packet is not forwarded.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
676_ By default ; how many seconds is the ❑SPFv3 adjacency Deadtime on a P2P link?
❑ B. 10
❑ C. 20
❑ D. 30
Answer: A
677 An explicit path can be easily defined by SR (Segment Routing), and nodes in the network only need to maintain Seament Routing information. It can respond to the real-time rapid development of business.
What are the following characteristics of Segment Routing? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A Support both the centralized control mode of the controller and the distributed control mode of the repeater. Provides a balance between centralized control and distributed control (Right Answers)
❑ B SR (Segment Routing) uses IP forwarding without additional maintenance of another label forwarding table.
❑ C A better smooth evolution of existing networks by extending existing protocols such as IGP (Right Answers)
❑ D Using source routing technology to provide rapid interaction between the network and upper-layer applications (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
678. Which of the following statement about MPLS Label tags is wrong?
❑ A. The tag is encapsulated between the network layer and the data link layer (Right Answers)
❑ B. The label is used to uniquely identify the forwarding equivalence class FEC burned by a packet.
❑ C. The label is carried by the header of the packet and does not contain topology information.
❑ D_ The tag is a short identifier with a fixed length and only local significance.
Answer: A
679. Which statement is correct about the VRP operating platform shortcuts? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. CTRL+Z returns to the user view (Right Answers)
❑ B. CTRL+C stops the running of the current command (Right Answers)
❑ C. Move the left cursor key (<--) to the left by one. (Right Answers)
❑ D. TAB prompts for the most recently entered command
Answer: ABC
[Huaweiluser-interface console 0
[Huawei-ui-console0] user privilege level 15
[Huawei-ui-consoleOlauthentication-mode password
[huawei-ui-console0] set authentication password cipher huawei2012
[Huawei-ui-consoleO]guit
Which statement is wrong about the above configuration command?
❑ A. The user who logs in to the device through the console has the highest user prMlege level.
❑ B. The administrator wants to log in and manage the device through the console port.
❑ C. After the configuration is completed, the administrator cannot implement device management through remote login.
❑ ❑ The password of the user who logs in to the device through the console is cipher huawei2012 (Right Answers)
Answer:
681. In the switch, which of the following is the technology of port and MAC binding?
❑ A. SEP
❑ B. NAT
❑ C. ACL
❑ D. Port Security (Right Answers)
Answer: D
682. Which of the following information does the switch MAC address table not include?
❑ A. MAC address
❑ B. Port number
❑ C. IP address (Right Answers)
❑ D. VLAN
Answer: C
683. What port states might exist on a switch with standard STP protocol enabled? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Discarding
❑ B. Listening (Right Answers)
❑ C. Disabled (Right Answers)
❑ D. Forwarding (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
684. Which of the following routing protocols has the highest priority?
❑ A. Direct (Right Answers)
❑ B. RIP
❑ C. OSPF
❑ D. Static
Answer: A
685. Referring to the output result shown in the figure, it can be judged that the routing table of the router is composed of a direct route and a static route.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
686. Which of the following description is correct about the display information?
❑ A. GigabitEthemet 0/010 interface was manually closed by the administrator. (Right Answers)
❑ B. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface is not configured with an lP address.
❑ C. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface does not enable dynamic routing protocol
❑ D. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface is connected with a wrong cable.
Answer: A
687. The output information of a link aggregation port of a switch is as follows. If you want to delete Eth-Trunk 1, which of the following command is correct?
❑ A. undo interface Eth-Trun< 1

❑ B. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 undo eth-trunk quit undo interface Eth-Trunk 1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. inte GigabitEthernet 0/01 undo eth-trunk quit inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/2 undo eth-trunk quit undo interface Eth-Trunk!
❑ D. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0;2 undo eth-trunk quit undo interface Eth-Trunk 1
Answer: B
688. If an Ethernet data frame Length/Tyme=0z8100, which may be the payload of this data frame? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. TCP data segment (Right Answers)
❑ B. UDP data (Right Answers)
❑ C. ICMP packet (Right Answers)
❑ D. ARP packet (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
689. As shown in the figure, a static NAT command is deployed on the router R1. When the PC accesses the Internet, the destination address in the packet will not change.

0 B. False
Answer: A
690. What level of encapsulation format is defined by the PPP protocol in the OBI reference model?
❑ B. Data link layer (Right Answers )
❑ C. Presentation layer
❑ D. Application layer
Answer: B
691. Which of the following authentication methods does not require to input a username and password?
❑ C. authentication-mode hwtacacs
❑ D. authentication-mode none (Right Answers)
Answer: D
692. When forwarding a IPv6 packet, the router needs to find the routing table based on the source FP address of the [P6 packet.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
693. Which order is the 081 reference model from the upper layer to the lower layer?
❑ A. Application layer, session layer, presentation layer, transport layer, network layer, data link layer, physical layer
❑ B. Application layer, transport layer, network layer, data link layer, physical layer
❑ C. Application layer ; presentation layer, session layer ; transport layer ; network layer, data link layer, physical layer (Right Answers)
❑ D. Application layer, presentation layer, session layer, network layer, transport layer, data link layer, physical layer
Answer: C
694. Network administrators use Ping to test network connectivity. Which of the following protocols might he used in the process? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A ARP (Right Answers)
❑ B. TCP
❑ C ICMP (Right Answers)
❑ D. UDP
Answer: AC
695. As shown in the figure, it can be judged that 00e0-fc99-999 is a specific host MAC address learned by the switch through ARP, and the host has changed the IP address three times.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
696.<Huawei>system-view [Huaweilcommand-privilege level 3 view user save

Which statement is correct about the above configuration command?
❑ A. Modify the user view command to a permission level of 3. and save the configuration.
❑ B_ Modify the users permission level to 3, and save the configuration.
❑ C. Modify the permission level of the save command in the user view to 3. (Right Answers)
❑ D_ Modify the permission level of the save command used by a user to 3
Answer: C
697. Which of the following OSPF protocol packets can ensure the reliability of the LSA update?
❑ A. [SACK (Right Answers)
ID B. LSR
❑ C. DD
❑ D. LSU
Answer: A
698 Which of the following protocols does not belong to the file transfer protocol?
❑ A. SFTP
❑ B TFTP
❑ C. FTP
❑ D. HTTP (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
699. Apply the following ACL to Telnet:
Aci number 2000
Rure 5 permit source 172.16.105.20
Only devices with an IP address of 172.16.105.2 are allowed to log in remotely.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
700.[RTA] ac12002
[RTA-acl-basic-2002] rule deny source 172.16.1.1 0.0.0.0
[RTA-acl-basic-2002] rule deny source 172.16.0.0 0 255.0.0
Using the ACL matching route entry shown above on the router RTA, which of the following entries will be matched? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 192.17.0.0/24
❑ B. 172.16.1.1/32 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 172.16.1.0/24
❑ D. 172.48.0.0/16 (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
701. Which type of ACL does the following command belong to?
rule permit 8021p 7
D B. Basic ACL
❑ C. Advanced ACL
❑ D. Intermediate ACL
Answer; A
702. How many bits does the total length of an IPv6 address increase over IPv4?
❑ A. 32
❑ C. 64
❑ D. 128
Answer: B
703. What kind of IPv6 address is FE80::2E0:FCFF:FE6F:4F36?

❑ A. Multicast address
❑ B. Anycast address
❑ C. Link-local address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Global unicast address
Answer; C
704. If the 1171v6 host wants to send packets up to 10 routers, which parameter should be modified in the Pve header?
❑ A. Next Header
❑ B. Version
❑ C. Hop Limit (Right Answers )
❑ D. Traffic Class
Answer: C
705_ There are two routers RTA and RTB between the source device and the destination device. Use the Traced command to detect the path. When the first hop RTA is detected, the source device sends a UDP packet with a TTL of 1 to a larger
port of the destination device. When the packet reaches the RTB, the TTL becomes 0, and the RTA responds to the source device. ICMP message.
A Echo Request
B. Port Unreachable
o C. Time Exceeded (Right Answers)
LI D. Echo Reply
Answer: C
706. This is the three packets that the administrator has captured on the network. Which of the following statements is incorrect?
❑ A. These three packets represent the three-way handshake process of TCP.

❑ B. Application layer data is not included in all three packets
D C. The IP address of the Telnet server is 10.0.12.1; and the IP address of the Telnet client is 10.0.12.2. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The Telnet client uses the 50190 port to establish a connection with the server.
Answer: C
707. The administrator needs to configure the IP address on the G0f0/0 interface of the router. Which of the following address is correct to use?
❑ A. 145.4.2.55/26 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 237.6.1.2124
❑ C. 127.3.1.4128
❑ D. 192.168.10.112130
Answer: A
708. The subnet mask of a network segment 150.25.0.0 is 255.255.224.0, then which is the valid host address in the network segment? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 150.25.2.24 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 150.15.3.30
❑ C. 150.25.0.0
❑ D. 150.25.1.255 (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
709. How many port states does the RICMP protocol have?
O A. 2
O B. 4
O D. 1
Answer: C
710. A router running OSPF can reach the FULL state after completing the LSDB synchronization.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
❑ A. MAC (Right Answers)
❑ B. Destination/Mask
❑ C. Cost
❑ D. NextHop
Answer: A
/12. Which descriptions are correct about DD packets and LSA in OSPF? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The head of the LSA can uniquely identify an LSA. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The DO packet contains only the header information of the LSA. (Right Answers)
❑ C. DO packet contains LSA details
❑ D. LSA head is only a small part of the LSA (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
713. As shown in the figure, the network administrator wants to manually aggregate the two physical links between SWA and SWB into one Eth-trunk link; which of the following description is correct?
❑ A. Cannot be aggregated (Right Answers)

❑ B It works normally after aggregation
❑ C. It can be aggregated. Only GE ports can send and receive data after aggregation
❑ 0. It can be aggregated_ Only Ethernet ports can send and receive data after aggregation_
Answer: A
114. Which descriptions are correct about the Ethernet subinterface? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The subinterface cannot be configured with an IP address.
❑ B. A subinterface can be bound to multiple VLANs (Right Answers)
❑ C. The [P address of the sub-interface cannot belong to the same network segment. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The subinterface ID should be the same as the VLAN 10
Answer: BC
115. Ethernet frames are processed and forwarded in the form of ULAN TAGs inside the switch .
❑ B. False
Answer: A
716_ As shown in the following figure, from the security point of new, Router A refuses to receive OSPF packets, GE packets, IGMP packets from G0/0/1 Which of the following command can funl this requirement?
❑ A act number 3000 mle 5 deny are rule 10 deny 89 rulc15 deny icmp # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-fitter inbound act 3000 #
❑ B acl number 2000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filler inbound act 2000 # (Right Answers)
❑ G acl number 3000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-fitter inbound acl 3000 #
❑ B. acl number 3000 rule 5 deny are rule 10 deny ospf rule 15 deny icmp # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-fitter inbound acl 3000 #
Answer: B
117. What is the length of the Traffic Class field in the [Pv€ packet header?
O A. 4
❑ C. 2
❑ D.6
Answer: B
718. How many ways to generate a DHCP device unique identifier DUID?
❑ A. 3
❑ C. 4
❑ D_ 1
Answer: B
719 Which of the following descriptions are correct about IPv6? Choice)
❑ A. IPv6 address length is 128 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ B. !RC address length is 64 bits
❑ C. When an IPA packet has multiple extension headers the extension header must appear in an orderly manner (Right Answers)
❑ a When an IPv6 packet has multiple extension headers, the extension header can appear randomly
Answer: AC-
720 The packet capture tool captures an Ethernet frame and finds that the value of the Type/Length field of the frame is 0x0800 Which of the following descriptions are correct about the frame? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The frame carves an IPX message.
❑ B The frame carries an IP packet (Right Answers)
❑ G The frame structure of the frame is the Ethernet_11 format (Right Answers)
❑ B. The frame structure of the frame is 802 3 format
Answer: BC
721 The MAC address table of a switch is as follows lithe switch receives a data frame with the destination AC of 5489-985-I8a 8 from the EthO/0/2 port, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A Forward this data frame front the Eth0/0/2 port

❑ B Forward this data frame from the Eth0/0/1 pert_
❑ C Discard this data frame (Right Answers)
❑ D Flood this data frame out
Answer: C
722. The administrator plans to implement a route backup by configuring a static floating route. Which is the correct implementation method?
❑ A. The administrator needs to configure different protocol priority values for the primary static route and the alternate static route. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The administrator needs to configure different metrics for the primary static route and the standby static route.
❑ C. The administrator needs to configure different TAGs for the primary static route and the standby static route.
❑ D. The administrator only needs to configure two static routes.
Answer: A
723. Regarding the main function of the router; which of the following statements are wrong? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Establish routing tables through multiple protocols
❑ B. Guide data forwarding according to the routing table
❑ C. Forward according to the source IP address of the received packet (Right Answers)
❑ D. Realize communication between devices on the same network segment (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
724. The administrator finds that the file cannot be transferred to the Huawei AR200 router through TFTP. What is the possible cause?
0 A. TCP port 69 of the TFTP server is disabled
❑ B. The username on the TFTP server does not exist.
O C. The username and password on the TFTP server have been modified.
O D. UDP port 69 of the TFTP server is disabled (Right Answers)
Answer: D
❑ A. Host B and host C can ping each other (Right Answers)

❑ B. Host A and Host B cannot ping (Right Answers)
❑ C. Host A and Host C can ping each other (Right Answers)
❑ D. All hosts can ping each other
Answer: ABC
726. Which of the following descriptions are correct about the PPP? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A PPP supports bundling multiple physical links into logical links to increase bandwidth (Right Answers)
❑ B. PPP supports plaintext and ciphertext authentication (Right Answers)
❑ C. PPP is not scalable and cannot be deployed on an Ethernet link.
❑ 0. For the physical layer, PPP supports asynchronous links and synchronous links. (Right Answers)
❑ E. PPP supports multiple network layer protocols such as 'PCP and IPXCP. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABDE
727. The PPPoE client sends a PADI message to the server, and the server replies with a PADO message. What frame is the PADO packet?
❑ A. Multicast
❑ B. Broadcast (Right Answers)
❑ C. Unicast
❑ D. Anycast
Answer: B
728. The following rules exist in an ACL of the router: rule deny tcp source 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 destination 172.16.10.1 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 21
Which of the following statement is correct?
o A. The source IP address is 192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.1, and all TCP packets with the destination port number 21 match this rule. (Right Answers)
o B. The source IP address is 192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.2, and all TCP packets with the destination port number of 21 match this rule.
o C. The source IP address is 192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.3, and all TCP packets with the destination port number 21 match this rule.
o D. The type of ACL is basic ACL.
Answer: A
729. Which of the following IPv6 extension headers can appear twice?
❑ A. Destination option extension header (Right Answers)
❑ B. Fragment extension header
❑ C. Upper layer protocol data message
❑ D. hop-by-hop option extension header
Answer: A
730. When the host uses the stateless address autoconfiguration scheme to obtain an IPv6 address, the DNS server address information cannot be obtained.
❑ B. False
Answer. A
731 Which of the following packets is sent by the DHCPv6 client before sending a request packet to the DHCPv6 server?
P A RA
❑ 6 RS (Right Answers)
❑ C. NA
❑ 0. NS
Answer: B
732. Which type does the IPv6 address FE80::2E0TCFF:FE6F:4F36 belong to?
❑ B. Link-local address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Global unicast address
❑ D. Anycast address
Answer: B
733. In the DHCPv6 stateless automatic allocation scheme, the host does not need to send any DHCPv6 packets.
❑ A. True
Answer, B
734. The last option field of IPv4 is variable length optional information. What is the maximum Length of this field?
❑ A. 40B (Right Answers)
❑ B. 20B
❑ C. 60B
O D. 10B
Answer: A
735. Regarding the role of ARP protocol and packet encapsulation, which description is correct?
❑ A. The MAC address of the destination and the address of the UUID can be obtained through the ARP protocol.
❑ B. ARP protocol supports deployment on PPP links and HDLC links.
❑ C. ARP protocol is based on Ethernet encapsulation (Right Answers)
❑ D. Inverse ARP in ARP is used to resolve device names
Answer: C
736. The STP root switch is elected based on the priority of the switch. In RSTP, the switch priority and MAC address are compared at the same time.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
737. Which of the following statement is correct?

❑ A. The switch works at the network layer.
❑ B. The router works at the physical layer.
❑ C. The switch works at the physical layer
❑ D. The router works at the network layer. (Right Answers)
Answer:
738. A router learns routes to the same destination address through RIP, OSPF, and static routes. By default, VRP will ultimately choose which protocol to learn the route through?
❑ A. The routes learned by the three protocols are selected.
❑ B. Static routing
❑ D. RIP
Answer: C
739. If the network administrator does not configure a backbone area, the router automatically creates a backbone area.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
740. What modes does device link aggregation support? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A_ Mixed mode (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Manual load sharing mode (Right Answers )
❑ C. Manual master mode
❑ D. LACP mode
Answer: AB
741. The output information of a sub-interface of a router aggregation port 1 is as follows. According to this information, which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The sub-interface of the aggregation port carries the VLAN TAG 100 when forwarding the data frame.
❑ B. The IP address of the subinterface of the aggregation port is 10.0.12.2/24. (Right Answers)
❑ C. There are two links in the aggregation port. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The subinterface number of the aggregation port is 100. (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
742. As shown in the figure, the RTA uses NAT technology and implements a many-to-many non-NAPT address translation by defining an address pool, so that hosts on the private network can access the public network. Assume that Mere are
only two public IP addresses in the address pool, and the addresses have been assigned to hosts A and B. If host C also wants to access the public network, which of the following description is correct?
- I A RTA assigns the last public network address to host C. and host B is kicked off the line.
0 B. Al hosts can use the public network address in turn to access the public nehvork.
0 C Host C cannot be assigned to the public network address and cannot access the public network. (Right Answers )
0 D. RTA assigns the first public network address to host C, and host A is kicked off the line.
Answer. C
743. The OSPFv3 interface information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The network type of this interface is P2P. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The Router-ID of this interface is 10.0.0.6. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The interface does not establish an adjacency relationship.
❑ D. The interface area number is 1 (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
744. Which type of network does OSPFv3 need to elect DR?

❑ A. P2P network
❑ B. P2MP network
❑ C. CLNP Network
❑ D. Broadcast network (Right Answers)
Answer: D
745. Compared to IPv4 ; there is no IHL field in the IPv6 header.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
❑ A. OSPFv3 process number is 1. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The DR priority of this router is 1. (Right Answers)
❑ C. This router is BDR
❑ D. The router-ID of the neighboring router is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
747 A company applying for a Class C IP address segment needs to be evenly distributed to 8 subsidiaries. The largest subsidiary h. 14 computers. Different subsidiaries must be in different network segments. What should the subnet mask
be set to,
❑ A 255 255 255 240
❑ B 255 255 255.192
❑ C 255 255 255 0
❑ D 255 255 255 128 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
748. Which of the following commands can be used to check the session status of a PPPoE client?
❑ A. display ip interface brief
❑ B. display pppoe-client session packet (Right Answers)
❑ C. display pppoe-client session summary
❑ ❑. display current-configuration
Answer: B
749. Which of the following configurations belong to Layer 2 ACL?

❑ A. rule 10 permit 12-protacol arp (Right Answers)
❑ B. rule 25 permit source 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0
❑ C. rule 20 permit source-mac 0203-0405-0607
❑ ❑. rule 15 permit vlan-id 100
Answer: A
750. The MPLS label header is encapsulated between the data link layer header of the message and the network layer header.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
Questions & Answers PDF P-1
Huawei
H12-211 Exam
Huawei Network Technology and Device Exam
https://www.dumpsacademy.com
Product Questions: 527

Version: 10.0
Question: 1
An administrator currently manages AR2200 devices in the network through a single password, however
the company wishes to introduce another two administrators and provide unique user credentials and
privilege levels for telnet access to the network devices. What action can be taken? (Choose three)
A. Configure three users under the AAA-view, and assign each a different password.
B. The authentication mode must be changed to AAA.
C. Each administrator must be assigned a privilege level.
D. A public IP address must be assigned to each user for telnet access
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 2
Which of the following authentication methods are supported for Telnet users? (Choose three)
A. Password authentication
B. AAA local authentication
C. MD5 authentication
D. No authentication
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 3
Which authentication modes does AAA support? (Choose three).
A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 4
[RTA]aaa
[RTA-aaa]domain huawei
[RTA-aaa-domain-huawei]authentication-scheme au1
Refer to the configuration output. RTA has been configured using AAA as shown, and associated with the
“huawei” domain. For users in the huawei domain, which authentication-scheme will be used
A. au1
B. au2
C. au1 will be used. When au1 is deleted, users will use au2
D. au2 will be used. When au2 is deleted, users will use au1
Answer: B
Question: 5
A user accesses a server supporting AAA, for which the authorization mode on the AAA server has been
configured using the command “authorization-mode hwtacacs if-authenticated”. Which of the following
statements regarding this command are true? (Choose three).
A. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authenticated using local authentication.
B. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authenticated using remote authentication.
C. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will bypass authentication.
D. The hwtacacs server will authorize the user.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 6
Which of the following descriptions regarding eSight is not correct?
A. eSight is used to monitor and manage enterprise networks.

B. eSight supports only Huawei devices
C. eSight supports WLAN management and monitoring of hotspot coverage.
D. eSight supports the backup of configuration files and network traffic analysis.
Answer: B
Question: 7
What of the following statements is correct regarding access control list types and ranges?
A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999

B. An advanced ACL value ranges from 3000-4000
C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999
D. An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000
Answer: C
Question: 8
Which of the following parameters is not used by Advanced ACL?
A. Source interface
B. Destination port number
C. Protocol number
D. Time-range
Answer: A
Question: 9
[RTA]acl 2001
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule permit source 10.0.1.0 0.0.0.255
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 10.0.1.0 0.0.0.255
Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements regarding ACL 2001 is correct?
A. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be denied.

B. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be permitted.
C. Packets destined for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets destined for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be permitted.
Answer: B
Question: 10
[RTA]acl 2002
[RTA-acl-basic-2002]rule permit source 20.1.1.1 0
[RTA-acl-basic-2002]rule permit source 30.1.1.1 0
Refer to the configuration output. A network administrator configured the ACL on router RTA, as shown.
Which of the following statements regarding the rule order are correct? (Choose two).
A. The rule-number of the first rule is 1

B. The rule-number of the first rule is 5
C. The rule-number of the second rule is 2
D. The rule-number of the second rule is 10
Answer: B, D
Question: 11
Refer to the graphic. The network administrator has configured ACL 2000 to filter packets on RTA, as
shown.
Which of following statements regarding the subsequent behavior are correct? (Choose two).
A. RTA will forward packets received from Host A.

B. RTA will drop packets received from Host A.
C. RTA will forward packets received from Host B.
D. RTA will drop packets received from Host B.
Answer: B, C
Question: 12
Refer to the graphic. The network administrator wishes to deny Host A access to the HTTP server but
allow access to all other servers. Which of the following ACL rules will achieve this?
A. Rule deny tcp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 21

B. Rule deny tcp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 80
C. Rule deny udp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 21
D. Rule deny udp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 80
Answer: B
Question: 13
Following a failure of services in the network, an administrator discovered that the configuration in one
of the enterprise routers had been changed. What actions can be taken by the administrator to prevent
further changes? (Choose three)
A. The administrator should limit access by setting the login privilege of users to 0.
B. The administrator should configure AAA to manage user authorization on the router.
C. The administrator should configure an ACL to allow only the administrator to manage the router.
D. The administrator should configure port-security on the router
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 14
[RTA]acl 2001
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 20 permit source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 10 deny source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements is correct regarding the
configuration of the ACL on RTA?


Answer: A
Question: 15
[RTA]acl 2001
Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are correct regarding the
configuration of the ACL on RTA? (Choose two).
A. Packets from network 172.16.1.1/32 will be denied.

B. Packets from network 172.16.1.0/24 will be denied
C. Packets from network 172.17.1.0/24 will be denied
D. Packets from network 172.18.0.0/16 will be denied.
Answer: A, D
Question: 16
The network administrator wants to improve the performance of network transmission, what steps can
the administrator take? (Choose two)
A. Change the work mode to full duplex of each end station.

B. Link the end stations together using a switch.
C. Change the work mode to half duplex of each end station.
D. Link the end stations together using a hub.
Answer: A, B
Question: 17
On Huawei switch, which of the following commands can be used to set port duplex mode as "auto
negotiation"? (Choose two)
A. duplex negotiation auto

B. duplex auto-negotiation
C. duplex auto
D. undo duplex
Answer: C, D
Question: 18
The network administrator wishes to transmit data between two end stations. The network interface
cards of both devices operates at 100Mbps however one supports half duplex while the other uses full
duplex mode.
What will occur as a result?
A. The end stations cannot communicate.

B. The end stations can communicate, but data may be lost during transmission of large amounts of
traffic.
C. The end stations will operate normally
D. The end stations can communicate, but speed is different during transmission of large amounts of
traffic.
Answer: B
Question: 19
An Ethernet port can work one of three duplex modes, whereas an Optical Ethernet port only supports
one single mode. Which of the following represents this mode?
A. Full-duplex
B. Half-duplex
C. Auto-negotiation
D. Simplex
Answer: A
Question: 20
While inspecting packets in the network, a network administrator discovers a frame with the destination
MAC address of 01-00-5E-A0-B1-C3. What can the administrator determine from this?
A. The MAC address is a unicast address.

B. The MAC address is a broadcast address
C. The MAC address is a multicast address.
D. The MAC address is incorrect
Answer: C
Question: 21
According to OSI reference model, which layer is responsible for end to end error checking and flow
control?
A. Physical layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer
Answer: D
Question: 22
Which of the following mechanisms are used for flow control? (Choose three)
A. Acknowledgement
B. Buffering
C. Source quench messages
D. Windowing
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 23
Source Destination Protocol Info

10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [SYN] Seq=0 Win=8192 Len=0 MSS=1460
10.0.12.2 10.0.12.1 TCP telnet> 50190 [SYN, ACK] Seq=0 Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=0 MSS=1460
10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [ACK] Seq=1 Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=0
Refer to the capture output.The administrator has captured three packets in the network. Which
statement regarding the capured packets is incorrect?
A. This packets represent a TCP three-way handshake process.

B. 10.0.12.1 is the telnet server, while 10.0.12.2 is the telnet client.
C. The three packets contain no application data.
D. 10.0.12.1 uses port 50190 to buid the telnet connection.
Answer: B
Question: 24
An Ethernet frame is captured by network protocol analyzer tool and the value of Type/Length field is
0x0800. Which of the following statements about the frame are correct? (Choose two)
A. The frame structure of the frame is Ethernet_II

B. The frame structure of the frame is 802.3
C. Its upper layer protocol is IP
D. Its upper layer protocol is IPX
Answer: A, C
Question: 25
Which of the following descriptions regarding the TTL field of the IP packet is correct?
A. The TTL defines how many packets the source can send.
B. The TTL defines the duration during which the source can send packets.
C. The TTL value will decrement by 1 each time the packet is routed.
D. The TTL value will increment by 1 each time the packet is routed.
Answer: C
Question: 26
Which of the following statements are correct about TTL field in IP packet? (Choose two)
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">
A. The maximum value of TTL is 65535

B. Normally, it's impossible for a router to receive a packet whose TTL is zero.
C. The main purpose of TTL is to prevent IP packets from circulating endlessly in a network which can
consume a lot of bandwidth
D. TTL value will be decremented as a packet is passed through the network devices such as hub, LAN
switch and router.
Answer: B, C
Question: 27
In the case of Huawei router, what is the "-i" parameter in a Ping command issued on a VRP operating
system used to set?
A. Interface for sending an Echo Request packet

B. Source IP address for sending an Echo Request packet
C. Interface for receiving an Echo Reply packet
D. Destination IP address for receiving an Echo Reply packet
Answer: A
Question: 28
To provide the information about the IP addresses that a user packet traverses along the path to the
destination, which of the following does Tracert record in each expired ICMP TTL packet?
A. Destination port
B. Source port
C. Destination address
D. Source address
Answer: D
Question: 29
Which of the following statements regarding the verification of IP connectivity are false? (Choose three)
A. The ping 127.0.0.1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly inserted
into the host’s Ethernet port.
B. The ping command with the host IP address as the destination can be used to verify that the TCP/IP
protocol suite is functioning correctly.
C. The ping command can be used to verify connectivity between the host and the local gateway.
D. The command “ipconfig /release” can be used to check connectivity problems between the host and
the local gateway.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 30
A network administrator uses the ping command to check for points of failure in the network. Which
protocols will be used during this process? (Choose two)
<choice ident=“A”>
<choice ident=“B”>
<choice ident=“C”>
<choice ident=“D”>
A. ICMP
B. TCP
C. ARP
D. UDP
Answer: A, C
Question: 31
A network administrator recently used tracert to trace the path to the destination IP address of an
external website, however the trace path displayed only a timeout result. Which of the following
statements correctly explains the reason for this? (Choose two)
A. The source router had shutdown the ICMP function.

B. This destination IP address does not exist.
C. The gateway canot find a route to the destination.
D. This is a normal phenomenon.
Answer: B, C
Question: 32
Ping 10.0.0.2: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break

Reply from 10.0.0.2: bytes=800 Sequence=1 ttl=255 time=2 ms
--- 10.0.0.2 ping statistics ---
2 packet(s) transmitted
2 packet(s) received
0.00% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 2/6/10 ms
A network administrator uses the ping command to test connectivity to the destination 10.0.0.2 on a
Huawei AR series router. Which statement regarding the output is correct?
A. The network administrator used the command ping -c 2 -s 800 10.0.0.2

B. The network administrator used the command ping -a 2 -v 800 10.0.0.2
C. The path between the source and destination is not OK.
D. The network administrator changed the default TTL value.
Answer: A
Question: 33
Which of the following statements explains the behavior of the ICMP redirect function? (Choose two)
A. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the
source is on the same segment as the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to
the source.
B. When a router receives data on an interface, and the router’s IP address matches the destination IP of
the data, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the source.
C. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the
source is on the same segment as the next hop, an ICMP Redirect message will be sent by the source to
the router.
D. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the
source is on a different segment from the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router
to the source
Answer: A, D
Question: 34
Host A wishes to send data to host C, and generates an ARP request to obtain the destination MAC
address.
Which statement is true?
A. The destination IP address of the ARP request is Host C

B. The destination MAC address of this ARP request is Host C
C. The destination IP address for the ARP request is a broadcast IP address.
D. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of G0/0/0 on RTA.
Answer: A
Question: 35
An ARP request is sent by host A to obtain the destination MAC address of host D. Which statement is
true about regarding the ARP reply?
A. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Switch A.
B. The destination IP address of this packet is the VLANIF1 IP address of Switch A.
C. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Host A.
D. The destination IP address of this packet is a broadcast IP address.
Answer: C
Question: 36
Which of the following applications can be used to detect the path along which the data packets are
transmitted from the source to the destination?
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">
A. Route
B. Netstat
C. Tracert
D. Send
Answer: C
Question: 37
How many probe packets are sent for each TTL value by default when "tracert" is used to detect the path
along which packet is sent from source to destination?
A. 3
B. 4
C. 6
D. 8
Answer: A
Question: 38
Which of the following types can ICMP packets be classified into? (Choose two)
A. ICMP transport packet

B. ICMP error reporting packet
C. ICMP query packet
D. ICMP application packet
Answer: B, C
Question: 39
On VRP platform, which of the following parameters can be used together with the "ping" command to
specify the source address of an echo request message?
A. A
B. S
C. D
D. N
Answer: A
Question: 40
A router functioning as a Proxy receives an ARP request packet, but finds that the destination address in
the packet is not intended for itself. In this case, what will the router do? (Choose two)
A. Discard the packet.

B. Check for a route that matches the destination address.
C. Forward its MAC address to the ARP request sender after finding that a route to the destination
address is available.
D. Broadcast the ARP request packet.
Answer: B, C
Question: 41
Two end stations in a point-to-point network perform address resolution. Which of the following
statements is correct?
A. The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a unicast MAC address.
B. The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a broadcast IP address.
C. The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a unicast MAC address
D. The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a broadcast MAC address.
Answer: C
Question: 42
What will the destination MAC address be at the moment a frame is transmitted by the host, when the
router is the IP destination?
A. The MAC address of the switch.

B. The MAC address of the router interface G0/0/0.
C. The MAC address of the host.
D. The destination MAC address will be a broadcast MAC address.
Answer: D
Question: 43
Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Choose two)
A. A system can determine whether conflicting IP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP packet
B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet.
C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address.
D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.
Answer: A, B
Question: 44
UDP is connectionless oriented, which of the following must be used in order to ensure reliability?
A. Internet Protocol
B. Application Layer Protocol
C. Network Layer Protocol
D. Transmission Control Protocol
Answer: B
Question: 45
The administrator has configured an IP address for Host A and Host B, but had forgotten to configure a
default gateway. What effect will this have on the hosts?
A. Neither host will be affected, and therefore will be able to communicate with the peer.
B. Host A will be unable to connect to the router’s G0/0/0 interface.

C. Hosts will be unable to comminicate unless arp-proxy is enabled on the router.
D. The host will be unable to reach neither the local nor remote network destinations .
Answer: C
Question: 46
A host has established a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0. Which of the
following statements are correct? (Choose two)
A. The destination address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of the router interface.
B. The destination address of a frame will be the MAC address of the switch interface.
C. The destination port number in a segment header will have a value of 80.
D. The destination IP address of a packet will be the IP address of the network interface of the router.
Answer: A, D
Question: 47
The administrator uses the ping command on the host to test connectivity to the website
www.huawei.com.
The command line shows a request time out. The administrator displays the ARP entries for the host.
Which entry will be found in the ARP cache table of the host?
A. The MAC address of the destination www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
B. The MAC address of the switch will exist in the ARP cache.
C. The IP address of the destination www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
D. The MAC address of router interface G0/0/0, will exist in the ARP cache.
Answer: D
Question: 48
When R2 forwards data to R3 from R1, which of the following items will change? (Choose two)
A. The source MAC address

B. The destination MAC address
C. The source IP address
D. The destination IP address
Answer: A, B
Question: 49
If Host B also configured the IP address as “192.168.1.1/24”, an IP address confict will occur. What will
happen as a result?
A. Host B will send an ICMP request to the destination with the configured IP address. If a reply is
received, the host will notify of an address conflict.
B. Host A will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destination 192.168.1.1,
for which Host B will reply.
C. Host B will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destination 192.168.1.1,
for which Host A will reply.
D. Host A will ignore any received ARP request intended for destination 192.168.1.1.
Answer: C
Question: 50
<Quidway>display mac-address
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MAC Address VLAN/VSI Learned-From Type
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5489-98ec-f018 1/- GE0/0/13 dynamic
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total items displayed = 1
Refer to the graphic. A switch attempts to forward a frame to the MAC destination 5489-98ec-f01. What
operation will occur on the switch?
A. The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
B. The switch will report that the destination is unreachable and report this to the source.
C. The switch will flood the frame via all ports, with exception of the port on which the frame was
received.
D. The switch will drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address table.
Answer: C
Question: 51
Host A has been connected to switch A and configured with an IP address. When Host A initially forwards
a frame, what action will be taken by Switch A?
A. Switch A will drop this frame.

B. Switch A will attempt to flood the frame to all ports except for the G0/0/1 interface.
C. Switch A will forward the frame via ports G0/0/1, G0/0/2 and G0/0/3.
D. Switch will receive this frame before returning the frame to G0/0/1.
Answer: B
Question: 52
Which of the following statements describes the network shown? (Choose two)
A. There are 6 collision domains in the network.

B. There are 2 broadcast domains in the network.
C. There are 4 collision domains in the network.
D. There are 6 broadcast domains in the network.
Answer: B, C
Question: 53
A server is linked to port interface G0/0/1 of a switch. The administrator wishes to allow only this server
to be linked to this interface on the switch. Which method can be used to achieve this?
A. Configure a static ARP entry using the server’s IP address and MAC address in the switch.
B. Configure a static MAC address binding entry of the server’s MAC address and the interface in the
switch.
C. Configure the default gateway of the switch to be the same as the server’s IP address.
D. It is not possible to enable a single device to be associated with an interface.
Answer: B
Question: 54
An administrator connects two switches together in a local enterprise network. The ports of one switch
support Fast Ethernet, while the ports of the other switch support Gigabit Ethernet. Hosts connected to
one switch are able to communicate, however communication between the two switches fails. What is
the possible reason for this?
A. The ports have disabled auto-negotiation.

B. One port is supporting auto-negotiation, while auto-negotiation is disabled on the port of the other
switch.
C. The port of one switch is operating using half duplex mode, while the port of the other switch is using
full duplex mode.
D. A Fast Ethernet port cannot communicate directly with a Gigabit Ethernet port.
Answer: A
Question: 55
A layer 2 LAN switch generates CAM table entries according to the ( ) of the received frame.
A. Source MAC address

B. Destination MAC address
C. Source IP address
D. Destination IP address
Answer: A
Question: 56
Which of the following statements about collision domains and broadcast domains are correct? (Choose
three)
A. Devices connected to the same hub form a collision domain

B. Devices connected to the same hub form a broadcast domain
C. Devices connected to the same bridge form a collision domain
D. Devices connected to the same bridge form a broadcast domain
E. Devices connected to the same router form a broadcast domain
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 57
Which of the following statements regarding layer-2 switch is incorrect?
A. The switch learns MAC addresses automatically

B. The layer-3 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted
C. The layer-2 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted.
D. The layer-2 LAN switch operates at data link layer
Answer: B
Question: 58
[R1]display interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0

GigabitEthernet0/0/0 current state : Administratively DOWN
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Refer to the display output. What can be determined based on the output of the display command?
A. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is connected to a wrong cable

B. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with an IP address
C. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with a dynamically defined route.
D. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 has been manually shut down by an administrator.
Answer: D
Question: 59
Which of the following statements regarding static and dynamic routing is incorrect?
A. The static route can be easily configured and managed on the enterprise network.
B. The use of dynamic routing is more convenient for the administrator to manage the network following
network convergence.
C. The static route can automatically recover when a link failure is encountered.
D. Dynamic routing will use more resources than static routes.
Answer: C
Question: 60
Which of the following are routed protocols? (Choose two)
A. IP
B. OSPF
C. BGP
D. IPX
Answer: A, D
Question: 61
Which of the following statements regarding the routing table are correct? (Choose two)
A. The next hop in the routing table is redundant because the outgoing interface can be used for packet
forwarding.
B. The routes from generated by different protocols have different preferences.
C. The metrics of different routing protocols are comparable.
D. The metrics of different routing protocols are not comparable
Answer: B, D
Question: 62
Which of the following commands can be used to display the routing table on a Quidway router?
A. display ip path
B. display ip routing-table
C. display interface
D. display current-configuration
Answer: B
Question: 63
Which of the following entries is not included in the routing table?
A. source address
B. next hop
C. destination address
D. cost
Answer: A
Question: 64
Which of the following problems are caused by routing loops? (Choose three)
A. Slow convergence
B. Packets circulate between routers
C. Router restarting
D. Inconsistency of routing information
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 65
An administrator wishes to manage the router in the remote branch office, which method can be used?
A. Telnet
B. FTP
C. Console Connection
D. DHCP
Answer: A
Question: 66
The network administrator has configured the router as shown. Which statement is false?
A. The configuration manages the user login through the console interface.
B. The user login through vty 0 has the privilege to run level 2 commands.
C. The user login through telnet has the privilege to run level 2 commands.
D. The configuration manages the telnet user login.
Answer: A
Question: 67
The administrator cannot use telnet to manage the AR2200. The administrator is able to verify
connectivity to the router and has been informed that other administrators have no difficulties using
telnet. Which statements describe the possible reasons for this problem? (Choose two)
A. The user’s status has been blocked

B. The user’s priviledge level has been changed to 0.
C. The user has been deleted.
D. The telnet service in the AR2200 router has been disabled.
Answer: A, C
Question: 68
A user logged into a VRP supported device through telnet, but when attempting to configure the device,
found that he is unable to use the sytem-view command to enter the system-view. What are the possible
reasons for this? (Choose two)
A. The device’s VTY interface only provides permission for some telnet users to run the sytem-view
command.
B. The user’s telnet software restricts use of this command.
C. The user’s privilege level is lower than the level associated with the system-view command.
D. The system-view command privilege level is lower than the level associated with the user.
Answer: A, C
Question: 69
The users who log on the router through Telnet are not permitted to configure IP address. What is the
possible reason?
A. Communication failures occur between the user and the router.

B. The authentication mode of Telnet is set incorrectly.
C. Privilege level of Telnet is set incorrectly.
D. SNMP parameters are set incorrectly.
Answer: C
Question: 70
Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two)
A. A single collision domain exists between RTA and SWC.

B. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWB.
C. A single collision domain exists between SWA and SWC.
D. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWC.
Answer: C, D
Question: 71
On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command “ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0” has
been configured. Which following statements are correct? (Choose two).
A. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/24

B. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/32
C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in RTA’s routing-table
D. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 does not exist in RTA’s routing-table
Answer: B, D
Question: 72
Refer to the graphic. The host has a problem establishing a telnet connection with the router attached to
interface G0/0/0. Which of the following steps can be used to help the administrator identify the
problem? (Choose two)
A. Check whether the host has configured the gateway IP address.

B. Check whether the switch has configured the gateway IP address.
C. Use the ping tool to check connectivity between host and router.
D. Check the telnet server configuration is right on the router.
Answer: C, D
Question: 73
Which of the following methods are supported by VRP platform to configure the router? (Choose three)
A. Through the Console port

B. Through Telnet
C. Through the AUX port
D. Through FTP
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 74
The administrator wishes to update the configuration file of an AR2200 router using a USB cable. How
can this be achieved? (Choose two)
A. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the mini USB port of the
AR2200 router.
B. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the USB port of the
AR2200 router.
C. The AR2200 router cannot support configuration updates through a USB cable.
D. The administrator should install the mini USB drivers on the terminal after connecting the USB.
Answer: A, D
Question: 75
The administrator wishes to manage a network through telnet from a user's terminal to a router. How
can this be achieved?
A. A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the console port of
the router.
B. A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the ethernet port
of the router.
C. A connection should be established between the console port of the terminal and the ethernet port of
the router.use console cable connect pc’s ethernet port and router’s console port.
D. A connection should be established between the COM port of the terminal and the console port of the
router.
Answer: B
Question: 76
Whilst configuring a device, an administrator experiences trouble remembering certain commands.

Which of the following will help support the administrator? (Choose two)
A. TAB
B. question mark
C. ctrl+b
D. ctrl+c
Answer: A, B
Question: 77
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei-ui-console0] authentication-mode password
[Huawei-ui-console0] set authentication password cipher huawei2012
[Huawei-ui-console0] quit
Refer to the configuration output. The administrator configured the device using the commands in the
configuration output. Regarding these commands, which statement is false?
A. The administrator wishes to enable management through the console interface.

B. Following configuration, the administrator cannot manage the device remotely.
C. A user that logs-in through the console interface is assigned the highest privilege level.
D. The password of a user logged in through console is ‘cipher huawei2012’
Answer: D
Question: 78
Which of the following is abbreviation of VRP?
A. Versatile Routine Platform

B. Virtual Routing Platform
C. Virtual Routing Plane
D. Versatile Routing Platform
Answer: D
Question: 79
Which of the following must be used to establish the configuration environment when a router is
powered on for the first time?
A. SSL
B. SSH
C. Console port
D. Telnet
Answer: C
Question: 80
Which of the following parameter settings for terminal emulation are correct when configuring a Huawei
router through the Console port?
A. 4800bps, 8 data bits,1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no flow control
B. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control
C. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware flow control
D. 19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control
Answer: B
Question: 81
Which of the following commands is used to enter the system-view from the user view on a Huawei
router?
A. system-view
B. enable
C. configure terminal
D. interface system
Answer: A
Question: 82
On VRP platform, the command lines are classified into four levels in increasing priority: Visit level,
Monitoring level, Configuration level, and Management level. At which level, the operator is permitted
to configure service but is not permitted to operate the file system?
A. Visit level
B. Monitoring level
C. Configuration level
D. Management level
Answer: C
Question: 83
On Huawei VRP platform, which of the following can be used to invoke the history command saved by
the command line interface? (Choose two)
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">
A. Up cursor key < >

B. Left cursor key < >
C. Ctrl+P
D. Ctrl+U
Answer: A, C
Question: 84
Which of the following commands can be used to view the current configurations on a Huawei router?
A. display current-configuration
B. display saved-configuration
C. view saved-configuration
D. show startup-configuration
Answer: A
Question: 85
The administrator wishes to change name of the router. Under which view should the administrator be in
order to achieve this?
A. User-view
B. System-view
C. Interface-view
D. Protocol-view
Answer: B
Question: 86
[Huawei]command-privilege level 3 view user save
Refer to the command output. What is the result of the shown command?
A. The command adjusts the save command of a user to privilege level 3.

B. The command adjusts the save command in the user view to privilege level 3.
C. The command adjusts the user view command privilege level to 3, and saves the configuration.
D. The command adjusts the privilege level of a user to 3, and saves the configuration.
Answer: B
Question: 87
<Huawei>system-view
[Huawei]history-command max-size 20
Refer to the command output. Which statements regarding the shown command are true? (Choose two)
A. The command is used to adjust the size of the history command buffer
B. The default value of the history command buffer is 5.
C. The command should be configured in the user-interface view.
D. Once configured, commands totalling up to 20 bytes can be saved in the buffer.
Answer: A, C
Question: 88
An AR2200 router is required to be reconfigured from scratch. Which steps are needed to achieve this?
(Choose two)
A. Reset the saved configuration

B. Clear the current configuration
C. Reboot the AR2200.
D. Assign the configuration file to be used at next startup.
Answer: A, C
Question: 89
An adminstrator has been requested to replace the configuration file of a router in the network. The
administrator has been instructed that after logging into the router, he must first permenantly erase the
current configuration file config.zip from the system. Which command should he use to achieve this?
A. delete /force config.zip

B. delete /unreserved config.zip
C. reset config.zip
D. clear config.zip
Answer: B
Question: 90
Which of the following commands can switch a view from the system view to the user view?
A. System-view
B. Router
C. Quit
D. User-view
Answer: C
Question: 91
Which of the following storage devices are supported by Huawei router? (Select 4 Answers)
A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. Hard Disk
E. CF Card
Answer: A, B, C, E
Question: 92
Which of the following storage devices is used to store the startup configuration files in a router?
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">
A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. BootROM
Answer: B
Question: 93
<Huawei>reset saved-configuration
The configuration will be erased to reconfigure. Continue? [Y/N]:
Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are true? (Select two answers)
A. A user should enter ‘Y’ when wishing to clear the saved configuration file.
B. The saved-configuration file that the device starts with can be erased.
C. The saved-configuration will be deleted after typing N
D. The saved-configuration file will be replaced with the current-configuration.
Answer: A, B
Question: 94
When a router is powered on, the router reads the configuration file saved in the default save directory
to get itself initialized. If the configuration file does not exist in the default save directory, what does the
router use to initialize itself?
A. New configuration file

B. Initial configuration file
C. Default parameters
D. Current configuration file
Answer: C
Question: 95
MainBoard:
Startup system software: sd1:/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
Next startup system software: sd1:/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
Startup saved-configuration file: null
Next startup saved-configuration file: null
Startup patch package: null
Refer to the display output. Which statement is false?
A. The current configuration file has not been saved.

B. The current startup system software is ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
C. The next startup system software cannot be changed.
D. The next startup system software can be changed by using the “startup system software <startup-
softwarename>.cc” command.
Answer: C
Question: 96
<Huawei>
Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you perform
configurations when Auto-Config is running, the DHCP, routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost.
Do you want to stop Auto-Config? [y/n]:
When an administrator first initializes the router, a warning is displayed. Which statement regarding this
warning is correct?
A. If Auto-Config is required, the administrator should select ‘y’

B. If Auto-Config is not required, the administrator should select ‘n’, for which subsequent configuration
of the
DHCP server, routing, DNS server and VTY user configuration is lost
C. When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is active.
D. When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is inactive.
Answer: C
Question: 97
An AR2200 router in the company network cannot boot. In order to resolve this, the administrator
wishes to update the VRP software. What should he/she do?
A. The administrator should use a console cable to connect the router and host, and directly upgrade the
device.
B. The administrator should use FTP to transfer the VRP software, by configuring the AR2200 router as an
FTP client.
C. The administrator should use DHCP to boot the AR2200, and then use the AR2200 router as a TFTP
client to download the VRP software from the server.
D. The administrator should use the telnet command on the client to remote access the device, and
upgrade the VRP software.
Answer: B
Question: 98
<Huawei>
Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you perform
configurations when Auto-Config is running, the DHCP, routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost.
Refer to the output. When the administrator first starts the router, a system notice is displayed, however
after rebooting this router, the notice disappeared. What is the reason for this? (Choose two)
A. This notice only appears during the very first device startup.
B. The administrator has configured the device and saved the configuration, causing the notice to
disappear.
C. The administrator selected ‘n’ and did not save the configuration
D. The administrator selected ‘y’ and saved the configuration.
Answer: B, D
Question: 99
An end system is unable to communicate with a DHCP server following the startup process. Which IP
address may be used by the client?
A. 0.0.0.0
B. 127.0.0.1
C. 169.254.2.33
D. 255.255.255.255
Answer: C
Question: 100
[Huawei]ip pool pool1
Info: It's successful to create an IP address pool.

[Huawei-ip-pool-pool1]network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Huawei-ip-pool-pool1]gateway-list 10.10.10.1
Refer to the configuration output. The administrator wishes to configure the DHCP server pool in order
to assign an IP address to the customer’s terminal device.
Which command should be included in the configuration to provide the minimal lease period for IP
addresses?
A. dhcp select relay

B. lease day 1
C. lease 24
D. lease 0
Answer: B
Question: 101
A DHCP server has been established in the enterprise network. After the client has obtained an IP
address from the DHCP server, the user decided to modify the IP address manually. In what way may this
affect the enterprise network? (Choose two).
A. The client may experience an IP address conflict.

B. The client may access the network normally.
C. The client’s interface connection will shutdown.
D. The client will associate with another DHCP server.
Answer: A, B
Question: 102
Refer to the graphic. Two switches have been connected as shown and both support STP. The
administrator has configured switch A as a DHCP server and set interface VLANIF1 of switch B to obtain
an IP address from switch
A. A link failure occurs on port interface G0/0/1 of switch B. What action will occur as a result?
A. The two switches will be unable to communicate.
B. Switch B will send a DHCP Discovery message to obtain a new IP address.
C. Swich B will continue to use the IP address obtained from Switch A
D. Switch B will send a DHCP Release message to release the IP address.
Answer: C
Question: 103
A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An
administrator discovers however that some hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the
DHCP server’s address pool. What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose three).
A. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is allocating IP addresses to hosts that happen to be
within a closer proximity than the authorized DHCP server
B. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the
169.254.0.0 address range.
C. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the
D. All addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 104
Router] ip pool pool1

[Router-ip-pool-pool1] network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-pool1] gateway-list 10.10.10.1
[Router-ip-pool-pool1] quit
[Router] ip pool pool2
[Router-ip-pool-pool2] network 10.20.20.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-pool2] gateway-list 10.20.20.1
[Router-ip-pool-pool2] quit
[Router] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[Router-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ip address 10.10.10.1 24
[Router-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] dhcp select global
Refer to the configuration output. Following configuration, a host is connected to the interface Gigabit
Ethernet 0/0/1 of the router. Which IP address will the client obtain?
A. An IP address from network 10.10.10.0/24 will be assigned.

B. An IP address from network 10.20.20.0/24 will be assigned.
C. The host will be unable to obtain an IP address.
D. An IP address may be assigned from either 10.10.10.0/24 or 10.20.20.0/24.
Answer: A
Question: 105
The IP addresses of clients in the network are deployed via a DHCP server. When a host reboots, which
message will the host first send to the DHCP server?
A. DHCP DISCOVER
B. DHCP REQUEST
C. DHCP OFFER
D. DHCP ACK
Answer: B
Question: 106
A DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) in DHCPv6 can be configured in VRP using which formats? (Choose
two).
A. DUID-LL
B. DUID-LLT
C. DUID-EN
D. DUID-LLC
Answer: A, B
Question: 107
Which of the following statements about the information contained in a Database Description packet are
true? (Choose three)
A. A Database Description packet contains all information about each LSA.

B. A Database Description packet contains only the header of an LSA.
C. The header of an LSA is the unique identifier of the LSA.
D. The header of an LSA is only a small portion of all the data of the LSA.
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 108
What is the default authentication mode for the default_admin domain?
A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X
Answer: B
Question: 109
How many domains can be configured on a Huawei router?
A. 30
B. 31
C. 32
D. 33
Answer: A
Question: 110
An authenticator router has been configured with two domains named “Area1” and “Area2”, following
which a user is created with the username “huawei” and the password ”hello” for authentication. Which
domain does this user belongs to?
A. Area1 domain
B. Area2 domain
C. default domain
D. default_admin domain
Answer: C
Question: 111
In order to check if the interface serial 1/0/0 is working in either DCE or DTE mode, command ( ) is used.
A. display mode serial 1/0/0

B. display controller
C. display interface serial 1/0/0
D. display current-config
Answer: C
Question: 112
How is mapping performed on a DTE device in a Frame Relay network?
A. The local DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

B. The local IP address is mapped to a remote DLCI number.
C. The local DLCI number is mapped to a local IP address.
D. The remote DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.
Answer: A
Question: 113
If Frame Relay implements dynamic address mapping for the PVC, which protocol will be used?
A. LMI protocol.
B. ARP protocol.
C. RARP protocol.
D. InARP protocol
Answer: D
Question: 114
Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements correctly describe the Frame Relay devices?
(Choose two)
A. RTA is a DTE device.

B. FRA is a DTE device.
C. FRB is a DCE device.
D. The interface on RTA is a DCE interface
Answer: A, C
Question: 115
Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are connected over a Frame Relay network using a DLCI, as shown.
Static mapping is required on RT
A. Which of the following commands will achieve this?
A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.1.1 30
B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.1.1 31
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.2.1 30
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.2.1 31
Answer: C
Question: 116
Refer to the graphic. RTA is a DTE device connected to a Frame Relay switch, and uses dynamic address
mapping to establish the PVC. With regards to the configuration, which of the following commands are
not necessary? (Choose two).
A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]ip address 172.16.1.1 24

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]link-protocol FR
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr interface-type dte
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr inarp
Answer: C, D
Question: 117
Which command should be used to check the mapping between protocol addresses and frame relay
addresses?
A. display fr interface
B. display fr map-info
C. display fr inarp-info
D. display interface brief
Answer: B
Question: 118
Which of the following protocols is used in Frame Relay to map the address to DLCI dynamically?
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">
A. ARP protocol
B. RARP protocol
C. InARP protocol
D. Map protocol
Answer: C
Question: 119
Which of the following parameters must be specified when configuring static mapping for Frame Relay
network? (Choose two)
A. Local DLCI
B. Remote DLCI
C. Local network layer protocol address
D. Remote network layer protocol address
Answer: A, D
Question: 120
Which of the following regarding Frame Relay DLCI are correct? (Choose three)
A. DLCI is locally significant

B. DLCI is allocated by DTE
C. The range of DLCI value that can be used is from 16-1007
D. The same DLCI can be configured on different physical interfaces
Answer: A, C, D
Question: 121
Which of the following commands is used to enable dynamic address mapping protocol in the interface
encapsulated with Frame Relay?
A. fr inarp
B. fr reverse-arp
C. inverse-arp
D. reverse-arp
Answer: A
Question: 122
What is the meaning of 200 in the command "fr map ip 10.1.1.2 200"?
A. remote logical channel ID

B. local DLCI
C. remote interface ID
D. remote node ID
Answer: B
Question: 123
Refer to the graphic.RTA and RTB connect to a Frame Relay switch and use dynamic address mapping.
The command “fr map ip 10.0.1.1 32” is then configured on RTB, without using the undo inarp
command. What will occur as a result? (Choose two).
A. RTB will be unable to communicate with RTA

B. 10.0.1.1 will still be mapped to DLCI 31 on RTB
C. 10.0.1.1 will still be mapped to DLCI 32 on RTB
D. DLCI 32 will be activated on RTB
Answer: A, C
Question: 124
Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are connected to the same Frame Relay switch and use same DLCI
number, which following is correct? (Choose two).
A. RTA and RTB must be associated with the same PVC

B. RTA and RTB can be associated with different PVC’s
C. The DLCI on the different physical interfaces can be the same
D. The DLCI on the different physical interfaces cannot be the same
Answer: B, C
Question: 125
Which of the following commands can be used to display mapping relationship between network
address and DLCI?
B. display fr
C. display fr map-info
D. display fr brief
Answer: C
Question: 126
Which of following may be the reasons that cause Frame Relay PVC to work abnormally? (Choose three)
A. Same DLCI number is configured on the same router

B. LMI type mismatch
C. Frame Relay encapsulation type mismatch
D. Incorrect configuration of the DLCI number
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 127
An administrator wishes to update the VRP software of company’s AR2200 router. How can this be
achieved? (Choose three)
A. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the FTP client.
B. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the FTP server.
C. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP
server.
D. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP
client.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 128
An administrator wishes to implement new features in the network, but the VRP version of one AR2200
router is out of date. The administrator needs to upgrade the VRP software. Which of the following
options regarding file transfer is false?
A. The AR2200 router can function as a TFTP client to support the upgrade.
B. The AR2200 router can function as the TFTP server to support the upgrade.
C. The AR2200 router can function as the FTP server to support the upgrade.
D. The AR2200 router can function as an FTP client to support the upgrade.
Answer: B
Question: 129
FTP and TFTP can be used to update the system file on Huawei routers. Which of the following
statements are correct? (Choose three)
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">
A. Huawei router can be configured as FTP Client

B. Huawei router can be configured as FTP Server
C. Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Client
D. Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Server
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 130
An administrator discovered he/she was unable to use TFTP to transfer files to the router. Which of the
following describes the likely reason for this?
A. The TFTP service had been disabled on the router.

B. TCP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
C. UDP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
D. The username and password had been modified.
Answer: C
Question: 131
FTP may be used to upgrade a router's VRP image. Which of the following transmission modes should be
used to achieve this?
A. binary mode
B. ASCII mode
C. byte mode
D. letter mode
Answer: A
Question: 132
A client failed to transfer a file to the FTP server, but found the IP connectivity was without problem. The
client assumed that the problem was with the port configuration. The blocking of which ports would
likely cause this problem? (Choose two)
A. 21
B. 80
C. 20
D. 50649
Answer: A, C
Question: 133
Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB have established a GRE tunnel, but only RTA has enabled the keepalive
function. When RTB receive a keepalive message from RTA, how will RTB respond?
A. RTB will discard the keepalive message.

B. RTB willl record receipt of the keepalive message but won’t reply
C. RTB will send a keepalive in response.
D. RTB will send a keepalive reply and begin to actively send keepalive messages.
Answer: C
Question: 134
Refer to the graphic. Two hosts communicate through a GRE tunnel. When the GRE tunnel is up, the
network administrator configures a static route on RTA to route packets to Host B. Which of the following
commands will achieve this?
A. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 GigabitEthernet0/0/1

B. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 200.2.2.1
C. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 200.1.1.1
D. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 tunnel 0/0/1
Answer: D
Question: 135
When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the data link layer encapsulation
type of a serial interface as HDLC?
A. encapsulation hdlc
B. link-protocol hdlc
C. hdlc enable
D. link-protocol ppp
Answer: B
Question: 136
Refer to the graphic. Packet encapsulation in the IPsec architecture is performed as shown. Which IPsec
mode is being used to encapsulate the packet?
A. normal mode
B. transport mode
C. tunnel mode
D. this encapsulation is wrong
Answer: C
Question: 137
Refer to the graphic. IPsec VPN uses ESP to encrypt which fields?
A. TCP, Data and ESP Trailer

B. ESP, TCP and Data
C. ESP, TCP, Data and ESP Trailer
D. ESP, TCP, Data, ESP Trailer and ESP Auth
Answer: A
Question: 138
Refer to the graphic. In order to improve security, the two hosts use IPsec VPN to transmit dat
a. Which IPsec mode and protocol can be used to hide the host’s IP address? (Choose two).
A. AH
B. transport mode
C. tunnel mode
D. ESP
Answer: C, D
Question: 139
If AH and ESP are both required to protect data streams between IPsec peers, how many Security
Associations (SA) are required in total?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
Answer: D
Question: 140
Refer to the graphic. The data is transmitted using IPsec tunnel mode. The fields of which headers will be
authenticated?
A. TCP and Data

B. Origin IP, TCP and Data
C. AH, Origin IP, TCP and Data
D. The fields of all headers
Answer: C
Question: 141
Two routers establish an IPsec tunnel, which of the following does not need to be the same on both
peering devices?
A. Encapsulation mode
B. Transform mode
C. Proposal name
D. authentication algorithm
Answer: C
Question: 142
Which of the following formats represent an accurate condensing of the IPv6 address
2031:0000:720C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:130B? (Choose two).
A. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E0:839A:130B
B. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B
C. 2031::720C::9E0:839A:130B
D. 2031:0:720C::9E0:839A:130B
Answer: A, D
Question: 143
Which of the following IPv6 addresses can be configured on a router’s interface? (Choose two).
A. fe80:13dc::1/64
B. ff00:8a3c::9b/64
C. ::1/128
D. 2001:12e3:1b02::21/64
Answer: A, D
Question: 144
The IPv6 address achitecture does not include which of the following address types?
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast
Answer: C
Question: 145
Which of the following descriptions regarding IPv6 addresses are correct? (Choose two)
A. IPv6 addresses are 64 bits in length.

B. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits in length.
C. IPv6 extension headers are processed in order.
D. IPv6 extension headers are processed randomly.
Answer: B, C
Question: 146
Interface G0/0/1 on RTA contains a MAC address of 00e0-fc03-aa73 and is configured with the IPv6
address 2001::2E0:FCFF:FE03:AA73. Which method is most likely to have been used to configure the
interface IPv6 address?
A. DHCPv6
B. Auto-link
C. ARP
D. EUI-64
Answer: D
Question: 147
In a small network suppporting IPv6, a network administrator wishes implement RIPng. Which of the
following commands should be used to enable this protocol?
A. [RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]ripng 1 enable
B. [RTA]ripng 1 enable
C. <RTA>ripng 1 enable
D. [RTA-ripng-1]ripng 1 enable
Answer: A
Question: 148
In a network supporting IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?
A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentication
D. multicast updates
Answer: C
Question: 149
Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB have established an IPv6 network for which an IPv6 address has been
configured only on the G0/0/1 interface. RTA is unable to ping RTB. The administrator then configures v3
along with a router-id on both routers, and enables OSPFv3 on G0/0/1 of both RTA and RTB. Which of the
following statements are correct? (Choose two).
A. RTA and RTB can establish an OSPFv3 neighbor relationship.

B. RTA and RTB cannot establish an OSPFv3 neighbor relationship.
C. RTA can ping RTB.
D. RTA cannot ping RTB.
Answer: A, D
Question: 150
The network administrator has decided to configure link aggregation in the enterprise network. Which of
the following represent advantages of link aggregation? (Choose three)
A. Load balancing.
B. Improved bandwidth.
C. Enhanced reliability.
D. Improved security.
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 151
In port aggregation, “multiple” ports are aggregated to form a port aggregation group so that all the
member ports in the group share the outgoing/incoming load. At which layer is port aggregation
implemented?
A. Physical Layer
B. Data Link Layer
C. Network Layer
D. Transport Layer
Answer: B
Question: 152
What benefits does port aggregation yield? (Choose three)
A. Improves link bandwidth

B. Implements load sharing
C. Improves network reliability
D. Facilitates data copy for analysis
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 153
Refer to the graphic. The network administrator wishes to aggregate the two links as member interfaces
of Ethtrunk
Which statement is correct?
A. The interfaces will be aggregated with load balancing.

B. The interfaces will be aggregated, but only interface GE0/0/1 will send data flow.
C. The interfaces will be aggregated, but the Eth-trunk will not be active.
D. The interfaces cannot be aggregated.
Answer: D
Question: 154
What is the maximum number of member interfaces supported by a single Eth-Trunk?
A. 6.
B. 8.
C. 10
D. 12.
Answer: B
Question: 155
The Eth-Trunk frame forwarding mechanism used to prevent changes in the data sequence forwards
frames based on which of the following parameters?
A. The same source or destination IP address

B. The same source or destination MAC address.
C. The same protocol type.
D. The same source or destination port number.
Answer: A, B
Question: 156
In Layer 2 mode, the transmission rate of an Eth-Trunk interface is determined by which of the following?
A. Maximum number of Up member links

B. Minimum number of Up member links
C. Number of Up member interfaces
D. Number of interfaces.
Answer: A, C
Question: 157
The network administrator wishes to forward data over an Eth-trunk, however associated member
interfaces operate at different rates. In terms of the resulting behavior, which of the following is true?
A. The two switches will not be able to communicate.

B. The higher rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.
C. The Eth-Trunk will work normally.
D. The lower rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.
Answer: D
Question: 158
The network administrator attempts to add interface G0/0/1 on Switch A to Eth-trunk 1, however the
command fails. Which of the following may cause this?
A. The interface is operating in half-duplex mode.

B. The interface has been shutdown.
C. The interface is already associated with another Eth-trunk.
D. The interface is an access port.
Answer: C, D
Question: 159
A network requires a solution to allow 50 private IP addresses to be translated, however only a single
public address is available for use. Which translation method can be used to support this requirement?
A. Static NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT
Answer: C
Question: 160
NAPT allows for multiple internal addresses to be mapped to a single public address. How does NAT
distinguish between the different private addresses when mapping to the same public address?
A. The source MAC address is used.

B. The destination MAC address is used.
C. The source port number is used.
D. The destination port number is used.
Answer: C
Question: 161
Refer to the graphic. Host A is located in a private network. It is required that Host A not only be capable
of routing traffic over the public network, but also that public users are able to actively communicate
with Host A.
Which NAT translation method should be configured on the gateway?
A. Static NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT
Answer: A
Question: 162
Refer to the graphic. In the private network, RTA dynamically assigns a public address from the address
pool to hosts without port translation. Host C wishes to access the public network while pool addresses
are assigned to Host A and Host B. What will occur as a result?
A. The first public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host A will be forced offline.
B. The last public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host B will be forced offline.
C. Host C will be unable to forward traffic over the public network.
D. All hosts will have access to the public network through pool address swapping.
Answer: C
Question: 163
A web server in a private network is required to provide HTTP services to public users. The network
administrator is required to configure NAT on RT
A. Which configuration should be used?
A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
B. [RTA-Serial0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080
C. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
D. [RTA- Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080
Answer: A
Question: 164
The network administrator needs to configure static NAT on RTA, in order to allow Host A to
communicate with Host C. Which command is correct?
A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat outbound 200.1.1.10

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.0
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 192.168.1.1 inside 200.1.1.10
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.1
Answer: D
Question: 165
[RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]nat outbound 2000 address-group 1

Refer to the configuration output. What does the value “2000” refer to?
A. It represents the ACL number.

B. It represents the NAT number.
C. It represents the translated port number.
D. It represents the number of bytes that can be translated before the address is returned to the public
address pool.
Answer: A
Question: 166
NAPT uses the same public address but different port numbers to translate private addresses. Which
statement regarding the port number is correct?
A. It is necessary to configure port number mapping manually.

B. It is only necessary to configure the port number range.
C. It is not necessary to configure port numbers.
D. An access control list is needed to assign port numbers.
Answer: C
Question: 167
A configured internal host of a private network wishes to access the internet. What must be configured
on the enterprise network’s edge router in order to achieve this? (Choose two)
A. NAT EasyIP
B. DHCP
C. BGP
D. Default route
Answer: A, D
Question: 168
Which of the following statements are correct about NAT? (Choose three)
A. NAT is the abbreviation for "Network Address Translation"

B. NAT is used for translation between private and public network addresss.
C. When hosts inside a private network access the outside network, NAT is not required.
D. NAT provides an effective way to solve the problem of insufficient IP addresses.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 169
Which of the following technologies can allow a host with IP address 10.0.0.1 to access the internet?
A. Static route
B. Dynamic route
C. Route import
D. NAT
Answer: D
Question: 170
Which of the following items can be translated by NAPT?
A. MAC address + port number

B. IP address + port number
C. Only MAC address
D. Only IP address
Answer: B
Question: 171
Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multicast mode are true?
(Choose three)
A. The port receives only RIPv2 multicast packets.

B. The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
D. The port receives only RIPv1 multicast packets.
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 172
Which of the following statements regarding the router ID in OSPF are incorrect? (Choose three)
A. The router IDs of OSPF routers in the same area must be the same, but can be different in different
areas.
B. The router ID must be the IP address of an OSPF router interface.
C. The router ID must be configured manually.
D. A router running OSPF must have a router ID for it to operate properly.
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 173
Which of the following statements regarding Designated Routers in OSPF are correct? (Choose three)
A. DR is elected by all the routers in the same network segment.

B. If the priorities of two routers are different, the router with the lower priority will be elected as DR.
C. If the priorities of two routers are equal, the router with the higher Router ID will be elected as DR.
D. DR and BDR must be adjacent.
Answer: A, C, D
Question: 174
On the VRP platform, which of the following commands is used to configure the Router ID of a router as
1.1.1.1?
A. <Huawei>router id 1.1.1.1
B. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1
C. [Huawei]router-id 1.1.1.1
D. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255
Answer: B
Question: 175
Which of the following OSPF versions is specific to IPv6?
A. OSPFv1
B. OSPFv2
C. OSPFv3
D. OSPFv4
Answer: C
Question: 176
The administrator wishes to configure OSPF on a router in the network however the router has no
loopback interface. Which value will be used as the router ID?
A. The lowest IP address of the router’s active interfaces.

B. The highest IP address of the router’s active interfaces.
C. The IP address of the management interface

D. The priority value of the router.
Answer: B
Question: 177
An administrator of a company supporting a large enterprise network wishes to implement OSPF on the
network as opposed to RIP. Which of the following points should the administrator use to support his
reasoning for this change? (Choose three)
A. OSPF has no hop count limitation

B. OSPF has a lower routing update overhead
C. OSPF has a simpler configuration.
D. OSPF supports faster convergence.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 178
Which of the following statements regarding single area OSPF are correct? (Choose three)
A. An IP address needs to be configured on a loopback interface of each router before configuring an

OSPF area.
B. The value of an area can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
C. A single area can be configured using any supported area number.
D. All of the links of the network need to be advertised in Area 0.
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 179
10.0.1.0/24 O_ASE 150 2 D 10.0.23.3 Serial2/0/0

Refer to the display output. Which of the following statements regarding route shown are true? (Choose
two)
A. The address 10.0.23.3 has been configured on the peer’s serial 2/0/0 interface.
B. The route preference has been changed by the adminstrator.
C. The metric for the route 10.0.1.0 indicates that two hops are needed.
D. The route has been learned via the OSPF protocol.
Answer: A, D
Question: 180
Which of the following statements regarding link-state database and routing-table of a “single” OSPF
area are correct? (Choose two)
A. The link-state databases that all routers build are identical.

B. The link-state databases that all routers build are different.
C. The routing-tables that all routers calculate are different.
D. The routing-tables that all routers calculate are identical.
Answer: A, C
Question: 181
Which of the following steps are necessary to configure OSPF on a Huawei router? (Choose three)
A. Configuration of a router ID
B. Enabling of an OSPF process
C. Specifying an OSPF area
D. Configuration of the network segments within each area
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 182
Which of the following statements regarding the DR in an OSPF network are correct? (Choose two)
A. There must be at least one DR in an OSPF area.

B. A DR must be elected among the routers through the negotiations that are defined by OSPF protocol.
C. Only the router with highest priority will be elected as DR.
D. Only NBMA or Broadcast networks need to elect DR
Answer: B, D
Question: 183
Which of the following VRP commands can be used to enter area 0 view? (Choose two)
A. [Huawei]ospf area 0
B. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0
C. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0.0.0.0
D. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0 enable
Answer: B, C
Question: 184
Which of the following commands is used to display the OSPF neighbor relationship establishment?
A. display ospf neighbor

B. display ospf brief
C. display ospf peer
D. display ospf interface
Answer: C
Question: 185
With what kind of routers does a DRother router exchange link state information and route information?
(Choose two)
A. DR
B. BDR
C. DRother
D. All OSPF neighbors
Answer: A, B
Question: 186
An OSPF area is a collection of a group of routers and networks. OSPF defines that routers that have the
same ( ) belong to the same OSPF area.
A. neighbors
B. LSDB
C. LSA
D. adjacency
Answer: B
Question: 187
Which of the following statements about router IDs are true? (Choose two)
A. The routers contained in the same LSDB have the same router ID.
B. Each router in an OSPF network must have a unique router ID.
C. Two routers in different OSPF areas can have the same router ID.
D. A router ID is expressed in a 32-bit dotted decimal format.
Answer: B, D
Question: 188
OSPF allows for “multiple” processes. By default, OSPF selects a process whose number is ( ).
A. 0
B. 1
C. 10
D. 100
Answer: B
Question: 189
A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentication
Answer: C
Question: 190
Two routers are configured with OSPFv3. OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces of each router. Which of the
following is true in the event that the network administrator does not configure a Router-ID?
A. The IP address of the loopback 0 interface will be used as the router ID

B. The IP address of the loopback 1 interface will be used as the router ID
C. The IP address of interface G0/0/0 will be used as the router ID
D. No router ID will be assigned to the router.
Answer: D
Question: 191
Destination/Mask protocol pre Cost Nexthop Interface

9.0.0.0/8 OSPF 10 50 1.1.1.1 Serial 1/0/0
9.1.0.0/16 RIP 100 5 2.2.2.2 Ethernet 0/0/1
Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements is correct when this router forwards the packet
to the destination host 9.1.4.5?
A. The router selects the first entry to match the destination address of the packet because the
preference of OSPF is higher than the preference of RIP.
B. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the cost of
RIP is lower than that of OSPF.
C. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the
outgoing interface is an Ethernet interface. The forwarding speed of an Ethernet interface is faster than
the forwarding speed of a serial interface
D. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the router
will match the most specific address.
Answer: D
Question: 192
According to the default value of route preference on the VRP platform, which of the following represent
the correct sequence for direct route, static route, RIP and OSPF if they are listed from high preference to
low preference?
A. Direct, Static, RIP, OSPF

B. Direct, OSPF, Static, RIP
C. Direct, OSPF, RIP, Static
D. Direct, RIP, Static, OSPF
Answer: B
Question: 193
A router has learned two routes for the same network with the same prefix. One route has been learned
via OSPF with a metric of 4882, while the other route has been learned via RIPv2 with a metric of 4.
Which route (s) will be found in the routing table?
A. The RIPv2 route.

B. The OSPF and RIPv2 routes.
C. The OSPF route.
D. Neither of these routes will be found in the routing table.
Answer: C
Question: 194
Assume that the router has learnt the best route to the same destination by using RIP, OSPF and Static
Route respectively. By default, the Huawei router will select the route learnt via ( ) as the best route.
A. RIP
B. OSPF
C. RIPv2
D. Static route
Answer: B
Question: 195
After checking the OSPF neighbor state, the administrator discovers that the router has established a
TWOWAY state with the peering router. What can be understood from this information? (Choose two)
A. The routers are configured using the same process ID

B. The routers are configured using the same area ID
C. The routers are configured using wrong router ID
D. The routers are considered DROthers in a broadcast network
Answer: D
Question: 196
Refer to the graphic. An administrator has configured OSPF on the two routers, following which he then
implements the command silent-interface s0/0/1 on RT
A. What effect will this command have on the network? (Choose two)
A. The link information advertised by RTB will be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA.
B. The OSPF neighbor relationship will fail between two routers.
C. The configuration will not affect the OSPF neighbor relationship between the two routers.
D. The link information advertised by RTB will no longer be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA.
Answer: B, D
Question: 197
Refer to the graphic. Which statements correctly explains the forwarding behavior between RTA and
RTE? (Choose two)
A. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0
B. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0.
C. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path from via E0/0/1.
D. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S2/0/0.
Answer: B, C
Question: 198
What functions does a Hello packet of OSPF implement? (Choose two)
A. Neighbor discovery
B. Deletion of unreachable neighbors.
C. Maintaining of neighbor relationships.
D. Negotiation of parameters among adjacent ports.
Answer: A, C
Question: 199
Refer to the graphic. The link between RTA and RTB is encapsulated using PPP. The IP addresses of serial
1/0/1 of RTA and serial 1/0/1 of RTB are in different network segments. Which following is correct?
(Choose two)
A. RTA can ping 10.1.1.2 successfully

B. RTA cannot ping 10.1.1.2
C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in the routing-table of RTA
D. The route entry 10.1.1.2/32 exists in the routing-table of RTA
Answer: A, D
Question: 200
Two routers are connected through serial interfaces and support PPP encapsulation. Which parameters
must be negotiated to establish the PPP connection? (Choose three).
A. MRU
B. Authentication password
C. Magic-Number
D. IP address
Answer: A, C, D
Question: 201
What are the three protocol components defined by PPP? (Choose three).
A. Data encapsulation.
B. LCP
C. NCP
D. IPCP
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 202
Two routers are connected via serial interfaces, for which the link-protocol is PPP. The network
administrator wishes to configure PPP authentication to improve security on this link. Which PPP
authentication method provides a more secure solution?
A. CHAP
B. PAP
C. MD5
D. SSH
Answer: A
Question: 203
If PPP authentication fails, which type of packet will be sent to the authenticated peer by the
authenticator?
A. Authenticate-Ack
B. Authenticate-Nak
C. Authenticate-Reject
D. Authenticate-Reply
Answer: B
Question: 204
Two routers are connected via serial interfaces and the link-protocol is PPP, but the MRU of two serial
interface’s are different, in PPP LCP negotiated stage, what will happen?
A. LCP negotiation will fail

B. Negotiation will use the smaller value
C. Negotiation will use the larger value
D. Negotiation will use 1500
Answer: B
Question: 205
PPP is more secure than HDLC because PPP supports authentication protocols such as ( ). (Choose two)
A. PAP
B. MD5
C. CHAP
D. SSH
Answer: A, C
Question: 206
When both ends running PPP protocol detect that the physical link is active, the link state will transit
from dead to establish. Which of the following protocols is used to negotiate the link parameters during
this phase?
A. IP
B. DHCP
C. LCP
D. NCP
Answer: C
Question: 207
A serial interface of a Huawei router currently using HDLC needs to assign PPP as the encapsulation
protocol.
Which of the following commands is required to be configured at the serial interface view?
A. link-protocol ppp
B. encapsulation ppp
C. enable ppp
D. address ppp
Answer: A
Question: 208
When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the PPP authentication method
as PAP?
A. ppp pap
B. ppp authentication-pap
C. ppp authentication-mode pap
D. ppp pap-authentication
Answer: C
Question: 209
When configuring the PPP authentication method as PAP, which of the following operations are
necessary? (Choose three)
A. Add the user name and password of the authenticated party to the local user list
B. Configure the encapsulation type of the interface connected to the peer as PPP.
C. Configure PPP authentication method as CHAP
D. On the authenticated party end, configure the user name and password that are sent to authenticator
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 210
In the PPP protocol, which of the following encryption algorithms is used by CHAP?
A. DES
B. MD5
C. AES
D. None
Answer: B
Question: 211
What is the function of the “ip address ppp-negotiate” command?
A. Enables the function of requesting for an IP address from the peer device.
B. Enables the function of accepting the request for an IP address from the remote device.
C. Enables the function of statically allocating IP addresses to the peer.
D. None of the above
Answer: A
Question: 212
Two routers have established a point-to-point network using PPP. The administrator has configured the
routers to run OSPF in the same area with the same router ID, what will behavior will occur as a result of
the configuration?
A. The routers will build a neighbor relationship even though both routers are using the same router ID.
B. VRP will notify of a router ID conflict between the two routers.
C. The routers will build an adjacency even though both routers are using the same router ID.
D. The routers will not send hello packets to each other because they are using the same router ID.
Answer: B
Question: 213
The PPPoE session establishment process can be divided into which stages? (Choose two).
A. Discovery stage
B. DHCP stage
C. PPPoE Session stage
D. PPP connecting stage.
Answer: A, C
Question: 214
To establish multiple PPP point-to-point connections in the Ethernet network, a PPPoE server establishes
connections with multiple PPPoE clients on one Ethernet port. How does PPPoE differentiate between
each connection?
A. MAC address.
B. IP address and MAC address
C. MAC address and ppp-id
D. MAC address and session-id
Answer: D
Question: 215
When configuring a router as a PPPoE client, which configuration is not necessary?
A. Configuration of the dialer-rule

B. Configuration of the dialer interface
C. Configuration of an IP address on the dialer interface
D. Configuration of a password on the dialer interface
Answer: C
Question: 216
Refer to the graphic. RTA is a PPPoE client, and sends PADI packets to Server
A. Which distribution method is used for sending PADI packets?
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast
Answer: C
Question: 217
Refer to the graphic. RTA is a PPPoE client, and following transmission of PADI, Server A responds with
PADO packets to RT
A. Which distribution method is used for sending PADO packets?
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast
Answer: A
Question: 218
In the PPPoE discovery stage, the PPPoE server assigns a session-id to the PPPoE client in which packet?
A. PADI
B. PADO
C. PADR
D. PADS
Answer: D
Question: 219
Which command can be used to check the PPPoE client session status?
A. display ip interface brief

B. display current-configuration
C. display pppoe-client session packet
D. display pppoe-client session summary
Answer: D
Question: 220
[Huawei]rip 1
[Huawei-rip-1]version 2
Refer to the command output. An administrator wishes to configure RIP. Which other command needs to
configured for RIP routes to be advertised?
A. import-route GigabitEthernet 0/0/1

B. network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
C. network GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
D. network 192.168.1.0
Answer: D
Question: 221
Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are running RIPv1. RTA has advertised 10.0.0.0 and 192.168.1.0 to the
RIP network. Which routes will exist in the IP routing table of RTB? (Choose two)
A. 10.0.0.0/8
B. 192.168.1.1/32
C. 10.1.12.1/32
D. 192.168.1.0/24
Answer: C, D
Question: 222
Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv1 to advertise its routes, while
RTB is using RIPv2. What effect will this have on learned routes?
A. RTA and RTB will both learn the routes advertised by RIP.
B. RTA will learn the RIP route advertised by RTB, however RTB is unable to learn the route advertised by
RTA.
C. RTB will learn the RIP route advertised by RTA, however RTA is unable to learn the route advertised by
RTB.
D. Neither RTA nor RTB are able to learn the RIP routes advertised by the peer.
Answer: B
Question: 223
RTB is using RIPv2 to advertise the route 1.1.1.1/32. How will the route 1.1.1.1/32 appear in the IP
routing table of RTA?
A. This route will not appear in the IP routing table of RTA.

B. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/8.
C. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/24.
D. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/32.
Answer: D
Question: 224
RTB is using RIPv1 to advertise the route 1.1.1.1/32. The administrator configures “RIP version 2
multicast” for interface G0/0/1 of RTB. How will the route 1.1.1.1/32 appear in the the IP routing table of
RTA?
A. This route will not appear in the IP routing table of RTA.

B. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/8.
C. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/24.
D. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/32.
Answer: D
Question: 225
A RIP router receives the routing update information from its neighbor. Which of the following
statements regarding routing update are correct? (Choose three)
A. The received route that is not in the routing table will be added only when its hop count value is less
than 16.
B. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is
the router's neighbor and the cost value is smaller.
C. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is
not the router's neighbor and the cost value is smaller.
D. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is
the router's neighbor and the cost value has been changed.
Answer: A, C, D
Question: 226
Which of the following commands is used to display the current running state and configuration of RIP?
A. display protocol rip

B. show rip
C. display rip
D. display this rip
Answer: C
Question: 227
A user can view the information for the RIP protocol on a router. What does “Age time” in the returned
result of the command mean?
A. The interval of updating an RIP packet

B. The aging time of an RIP route
C. The suppression time of an RIP route
D. The time spent on switching between RIP routes
Answer: B
Question: 228
After a command for displaying RIP route information is entered on a router, peer 192.168.1.2 on
Serial1/0/0 is displayed in the returned result. What does 192.168.1.2 stand for?
A. Address of a RIP neighbor

B. Address of the port with the RIP protocol enabled
C. Next hop address of the RIP route
D. Transmission address of the RIP protocol
Answer: A
Question: 229
Refer to the grapic. An administrator has configured RIPv2 on the two routers, following which he
implements the command silent-interface s0/0/1 on RT
A. What effect will this command have on the network? (Two Answers)
A. RTA will continue to learn routes from RTB
B. RTB will continue to learn routes from RTA
C. RTA will have no neighbor relationship with RTB
D. RTB will have no adjacency relationship with RTA
Answer: A, D
Question: 230
Refer to the graphic. R1, R2 and R3 are running RIPv1. R1 and R3 both advertise 172.16.0.0 to the RIP
network. How will this affect R2?
A. R2 will not have a route to the networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 172.16.2.0/24

B. R2 will only have a route to 172.16.1.0/24
C. R2 will only have a route to 172.16.2.0/24
D. R2 will have a route to both networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 172.16.2.0/24, but some packets for these
destinations will be lost.
Answer: D
Question: 231
<R2>debugging rip 1
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.1-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13414: RIP 1: Receiving v1 response on
GigabitEthernet0/0/0 from 10.0.12.1 with 1 RTE
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.2-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13465: RIP 1: Receive response from 10.0.12.1 on
GigabitEthernet0/0/0
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.3-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13476: Packet: Version 1, Cmd response, Length 24
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.4-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13527: Dest 1.0.0.0, Cost 1
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.5-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 2688: RIP 1: Ignoring packet. This version is not
configured.
Refer to the debug output. Following configuration of R2, the administrator discovers that the behavior is
not as expected and performs debugging. Based on the output from the debug, what is the source of the
problem?
A. R2 has configured an ACL to block the route to network 1.0.0.0

B. R2 has enabled split horizon.
C. R1 is using authentication, however R2 is not.
D. R2 is operating using RIPv2, while R1 is using RIPv1.
Answer: D
Question: 232
Refer to the graphic. An administrator has configed RIPv2 in the two routers shows in the figure. What
will happen after configuring the following commands? (Choose two)
[RTA-Serial0/0/1]rip output
[RTA-rip-1]silent-interface s0/0/1
A. RTA will have the route learned from the RTB

B. RTB will have the route learn from the RTA
D. RTB will have no neighbor relationship with RTB
Answer: A, D
Question: 233
Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multicast mode are true?
(Choose three)

Answer: A, B, C
Question: 234
Refer to the following DHCP flowchart, the following statement is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. The first step is to send a multicast packet.

B. The second step is to send a unicast message.
C. The third step is to send a broadcast message.
D. The fourth step is to send a unicast message.
E. The fourth step is to send a broadcast message.
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 235
Two authentication domains "Area1" and "Area2" are configured on the authentication server. If the user
uses the correct username "huawei" and the password is used.
The code "hello" is authenticated, and which authentication domain is this user assigned to?
A. Authentication domain "Area1"

B. Authentication domain "Area2"
C. Authentication domain "default domain"
D. Authentication domain "default_admin domain"
Answer: C
Question: 236
Under the RIP process of the Huawei device, when the network 10.1.1.1/30 is announced, the following
configuration is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. network 10.1.1.0
B. undo summary network 10.1.1.0

C. Version 2 summary network 10.0.0.0
D. undo summary network 10.1.0.0
E. network 10.0.0.0
Answer: C, E
Question: 237
The login timeout time in the VRP system needs to be configured on the VTY interface.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 238
NAPT distinguishes the IP addresses of different users by the protocol number in TCP or UDP or IP
packets.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 239
There are two routers RTA and RTB between the source device and the destination device. Use the
Tracert command to check the path. When checking the first hop RTA, the source
The device sends a UDP packet with a TTL of 1 to a large port of the destination device. When the packet
reaches the RTB, the TTL becomes 0.
The RTA responds to the source device with an ICMP() message.
A. Time Exceeded
B. Echo Request
C. Echo Reply
D. Port Unreachable
Answer: A
Question: 240
Regarding the correspondence between the access control list number and the type, the following
description is correct ().
Huawei question bank battle report group: 434299778
A. The basic access control list number range is 1000-2999

B. Advanced access control list number range is 3000-9000
C. The basic access control list number range is 4000-4999
D. The basic access control list number range is 1000-2000
Answer: C
Question: 241
The following two configuration commands can be used to implement the router backup and backup of
the router RTA to the same destination 10.1.1.0:
[RTA]ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 12.1.1.1 permanent
[RTA]ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 13.1.1.1
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 242
The ACL does not filter the traffic that the device itself generates to access other devices. It only filters
the forwarded traffic. The forwarded traffic includes other device access.
The traffic of the device.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 243
The following description of static and dynamic routing errors is ().
A. Static routing is simple to configure and easy to manage when applied in an enterprise.
B. After administrators deploy dynamic routing protocols in the enterprise network, post-maintenance
and expansion can be more convenient.
C. After a link fails, static routes can automatically complete network convergence.
D. Dynamic routing protocols take up more system resources than static routes
Answer: C
Question: 244
Referring to the following topology and configuration, routers R1 and R2 are connected through a Serial
low-speed cable, and the data link layer uses PPP. When R1 and R2
When the Holdtimes are inconsistent, ARP negotiation fails and communication cannot be performed.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 245
The network administrator uses the ping command on the AR G3 series router to test connectivity to
10.0.0.2. The following description of the output is correct.
Yes().
PING 10.0.0.2: 800 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break
--- 10.0.0.2 ping statistics ---
2 packet(s) transmitted
2 packet(s) received
0.00% packet loss
Round-trip min/avg/max = 30/35/40 ms
A. The command used by the network administrator is ping -c 2 -s 800 10.0.0.2

B. The command used by the network administrator is ping -a 2 -v 800 10.0.0.2
C. Destination address 10.0.0.2 is unreachable
D. The network administrator modified the default TTL value to 255.
Answer: A
Question: 246
The network administrator configures the RIPng protocol on a small IPv6 network. Which of the
following configurations is correct and effective?
Answer: A
Question: 247
Which of the following features is no longer supported by OSPFv3 on an IPv6 network?
A. Multi-regional division
B. Router-ID
C. Authentication function
D. Send protocol packets in multicast mode
Answer: C
Question: 248
The necessary technology to enable a host with an IP address of 10.0.0.1 to access the Internet is ().
A. Static routing
B. Dynamic routing
C. Route introduction
D. NAT
Answer: D
Question: 249
Which version of the SNMP protocol supports encryption features?
A. SNMPv1
B. SNMPv2
C. SNMPv2c
D. SNMPv3
Answer: D
Question: 250
In the STP protocol, assume that all switches have the same priority, and the MAC address of switch 1 is
00-e0-fc-00-00-40, switch 2
The MAC address of the switch is 00-e0-fc-00-00-10, the MAC address of switch 3 is 00-e0-fc-00-00-20,
and the MAC address of switch 4 is 00-e0-fc-
00-00-80, then the root switch should be ().
A. Switch 1
B. Switch 2
C. Switch 3
D. Switch 4
Answer: B
Question: 251
As shown in the figure, the network administrator creates VLAN 2 on the SWA and SWB, and configures
the ports connected to the host on the two switches as access terminals.
Port, into VLAN 2. Configure G0/0/1 of SWA and G0/0/2 of SWB as trunk ports to allow all VLANs to pass.
Then we have to implement two
Hosts can communicate normally, and () is required.
A. Create VLAN2 on SWC.

B. Configure G0/0/1 on the SWC as the trunk port and allow VLAN 2 to pass.
C. Configure G0/0/1 and G0/0/2 on the SWC as trunk ports and allow VLAN 2 to pass.
D. Create VLAN 2 on the SWC, configure G0/0/1 and G0/0/2 as trunk ports, and allow VLAN 2 to pass.
Answer: D
Question: 252
When upgrading the router software using the FTP protocol, the transfer mode should be selected ().
A. Binary mode
B. Streaming byte mode
C. Byte mode
D. Text mode
Answer: A
Question: 253
The error about the above configuration command is ().

<Huawei>system-view
[Huawei]user-interface console 0
[Huawei-ui-console0]user privilege level 15
[Huawei-ui-console0]authentication-mode password
[Huawei-ui-console0]set authentication password cipher huawei2012
[Huawei-ui-console0]quit
A. The administrator wants to log in and manage the device through the console port.
B. After the configuration is completed, the administrator cannot implement device management
through remote login.
C. The user who logs in to the device through the console has the highest user privilege level.
D. The user password for logging in to the device through the console is cipher huawei2012.
Answer: D
Question: 254
In order to check whether the serial port S0/0/1 on the router is a DTE interface or a DCE interface,
which of the following commands should be used?
A. display controller serial

B. display saved-config
C. display interface s0/0/1
Answer: C
Question: 255
In the OSI reference model, the ability to perform end-to-end error detection and flow control is ().
A. Physical layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer
Answer: D
Question: 256
When the specified interface is running in RIPv2 multicast mode, the following statement is correct ().
(multiple choice)
A. Receive only RIPv2 multicast packets.

B. Do not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. Receive RIPv1 broadcast messages
D. Receive RIPv1 multicast packets
Answer: A, B
Question: 257
A port in the discarding state of RSTP, although it will discard the received data frame, but it can receive
it according to the port.
The data frame maintains a MAC address table.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 258
When using the Tracert program to test the path through which the target node passes, the default is to
count () times for each Traceroute.
A. 3
B. 4
C. 6
D. 8
Answer: A
Question: 259
As shown in the figure, the network administrator wants to manually aggregate the two physical links
between the SWA and the SWB into an Eth-Trunk link.
The correct one is ().
A. It works normally after aggregation
B. It can be aggregated. Only GE port can be used after aggregation.

C. Can be aggregated, only Ethernet port can be used after aggregation
D. Cannot be aggregated
Answer: D
Question: 260
As shown in the figure, the administrator configured the following command on the RTA, and the correct
description is (). (multiple choice)
[RTA-Serial0/0/1] rip output

[RTA-rip-1]silent-interface s0/0/1
A. RTA can still learn the routing information published by RTB.

B. RTB can still learn the routing information published by RTB.
C. RTA neighbor information does not include RTB
D. RTB neighbor information does not include RTA
Answer: A, D
Question: 261
The above is the display startup information of the AR2200 router. For this information, the error is ().
A. The running configuration file is not saved

B. When the device starts using the system file, ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
C. The system file cannot be modified when the device starts next time.
D. The system file of the next startup of the device can be modified by using the command "startup
system software<startup-software-name>.cc".
Answer: C
Question: 262
The following static route configuration is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. ip route-static 129.1.0.0 16 serial 0

B. ip route-static 10.0.0.2 16 129.1.0.0
C. ip route-static 129.1.0.0 16 10.0.0.2
D. ip route-static 129.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.0.0.2
Answer: A, C, D
Question: 263
A switch receives a data frame with a VLAN tag, but finds that the MAC address of the data frame cannot
be queried in its MAC address table.
Then the processing behavior of the data frame by the switch is ().
A. The switch broadcasts the data frame to all ports.

B. The switch broadcasts this data frame to all ports (except the receiving port) in the VLAN that belongs
to the data frame.
C. The switch broadcasts this data frame to all access ports.
D. The switch will discard this data frame
Answer: B
Question: 264
The network administrator has captured a data frame in the network with a destination MAC address of
01-00-5E-A0-B1-C3. About the MAC address
The correct statement is ().
A. It is a unicast MAC address

B. It is a broadcast MAC address
C. It is a multicast MAC address
D. It is an illegal MAC address
Answer: C
Question: 265
As shown in the configuration, if the administrator configures OSPF on R1 but R1 cannot learn the routes
of other routers, the possible reason is ().
(multiple choice)
[R1]ospf
[R1-ospf-1]area 1
[R1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1]network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.255
A. The area ID configured by this router is different from the area ID of its neighbor router.
B. The router is not configured with authentication, but the neighbor router is configured with
authentication.
C. The OSPF process ID is not configured when this router is configured.
D. This router does not announce the network connecting neighbors when configuring OSPF.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 266
As shown in the figure, the ports connected to the host by SWA and SWB are both Access ports and the
PVID is 2. G0/0/1 of SWA is a Hybrid port.
The PVID is 1, and the port hybird tagged vlan 2 command is configured. G0/0/1 of the SWB is a trunk
port, the PVID is 1, and VLAN 2 is allowed.
Passed. The correct one in the following description is ().
A. Host A can send a data frame to Host B but cannot receive a reply from Host B.
B. Host A cannot send data frames to Host B but can receive data frames sent by Host B.
C. Host A and host B cannot communicate at all.
D. Normal communication between host A and host B
Answer: D
Question: 267
As shown in the figure, regarding the frame relay device, the following description is correct (). (multiple
choice)
A. RTA is a DTE device

B. FRA is a DTE device
C. FRB is a DCE device
D. The S1/0/1 interface on the RTA is the DCE interface.
Answer: A, C
Question: 268
When STP is running on Huawei Sx7 series switches, the priority of the switch is () by default.
A. 4096
B. 8192
C. 16384
D. 32768
Answer: D
Question: 269
The ARP protocol can resolve the MAC address of the target device according to the destination IP
address, so as to map the link layer address and the IP address.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 270
An access port can only send and receive untagged frames. When receiving a data frame with a tag, it
will directly discard it.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 271
The following is a description of the Forwarding state description error in the spanning tree protocol ().
A. Forwarding port can receive BPDUs.

B. Forwarding state port does not learn the source MAC address of the packet.
C. Forwarding state port can forward data packets.
D. Forwarding port can send BPDUs.
Answer: B
Question: 272
What is the encryption algorithm used by CHAP in PPP?
A. DES
B. MD5
C. AES
D. Do not use encryption algorithms
Answer: B
Question: 273
The following analysis of ICMP messages is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. ICMP messages can record time, including original time, receiving time, and sending time.
B. ICMP packets are encapsulated in IP packets without being encapsulated in the transport layer.
C. ICMP packets protect ICMP error packets, control packets, request/response packets, and refresh
packets.
D. ICMP does not support redirection
E. ICMP messages cannot be used to detect MTUs in a path.
Answer: B, C
Question: 274
As shown in the figure, it can be judged that 00e0-fc99-9999 is the specific host MAC address learned by
the switch through ARP, and the host has been replaced by three.
Secondary IP address.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 275
Which elements can NAPT convert?

C. Only MAC address
D. Only IP address
Answer: B
Question: 276
As shown in the figure, both ports GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 are configured with different Hybrid
configurations. The correct statement is (). (many selected)
A. The administrative department and the finance department cannot exchange visits because the
VLANs belonging to the two departments are different.
B. The data frame sent by the administrative department carries the tag in the switch as VLAN20.
C. The data frame sent by the finance department carries the tag in the switch as VLAN20.
D. The switch here can be a Layer 2 switch or a Layer 3 switch because communication does not need to
go through a Layer 3 gateway.
E. If both ports GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 of the switch are modified to be trunk ports, the two departments
can communicate normally.
Answer: C, D
Question: 277
The following description of the OSPF area is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. Configure the ip address of the loopback interface of the router before configuring the OSPF area.
B. The area number range is from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
C. The number of the backbone area cannot be 2
D. All networks should be announced in zone 0
Answer: B, C
Question: 278
Which of the following parameters should be considered when electing a root port in STP? (multiple
choice)
A. The port reaches the cost of the root switch

B. Port priority
C. Port slot number, such as G0/0/1D. MAC address of the port
E. Duplex mode of the port
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 279
The following statement about the working mode of the Ethernet port is correct? (multiple choice)
A. Gigabit Ethernet can only work in full-duplex mode

B. 10 Gigabit Ethernet can only work in full duplex mode
C. The Ethernet port mode works normally when it does not match.
D. Ethernet port mode can be considered as defined
E. 100M Ethernet port working mode supports full duplex and half duplex
Answer: D, E
Question: 280
When the administrator configures the DHCP server, which of the following commands configures the
lease time to be the shortest?
Ip pool pool1
Network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway-list 10.10.10.1
A. dhcp select
B. lease day 1
C. lease 24
D. lease 0
Answer: B
Question: 281
You can use the vlan batch command to create multiple VLANs in batches on the Huawei switch to
simplify the configuration process.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 282
As shown in the figure, the administrator wants to improve the performance of this network. Which of
the following is most appropriate?
A. Connect each host with a switch and change the working mode of each host to full duplex.
B. Connect each host with a switch and change the working mode of each host to half duplex
C. Connect each host with the HUB and change the working mode of each host to full duplex.
D. Connect each host with the HUB and change the working mode of each host to half duplex.
Answer: A
Question: 283
Which of the following OSPF versions is for IPv6?
A. OSPFv1
B. OSPFv2
C. OSPFv3
D. OSPFv4
Answer: C
Question: 284
In the network as shown, the following description is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. The same collision domain between RTA and SWC

B. The same broadcast domain between SWA and SWB
C. SWA and SWC are both a collision domain
D. SWA and SWC are both a broadcast domain
Answer: C, D
Question: 285
When the route has a loop, which of the following problems may occur? (multiple choice 2)
A. Packets are passed endlessly

B. Increased CPU consumption of the router
C. Increased memory consumption of the router
D. The destination IP address of the packet is constantly modified.
E. The number of bytes in the packet is getting bigger and bigger
Answer: B, C
Question: 286
The network structure and OSPF partition are shown in the figure. In addition to R1, routers R2, R3 and
R4 are OSPF ABR routers.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 287
The two routers are running on the PPP link. The administrator has configured OSPF single areas on both
routers, and their router IDs are the same.
The correct description below is ().
A. Two routers will establish a normal full neighbor relationship

B. VRP will prompt the router ID conflicts between the two routers.
C. Two routers will establish a normal full adjacency
D. Two routers will not send hello messages to each other.
Answer: B
Question: 288
The company has users who report that when using the network to transfer files, the speed is very low.
The administrator found a packet in the network using Wireshark software to capture packets.
Some duplicate frames, the following description of the possible causes or solutions is correct ().
A. When the switch cannot find the destination MAC address of the data frame in the MAC address table,
the switch will flood the data frame.
B. The switching equipment of the company network must be upgraded

C. The network has a loop on the second floor.
D. No VLAN is configured in the network.
Answer: C
Question: 289
After the GRE keepalive function is enabled, the local end of the GRE tunnel periodically sends a
keepalive packet to the peer every 10 s.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 290
Regarding PPP configuration and deployment, the following statement is correct ().
A. PPP cannot be used to deliver IP addresses.

B. PPP supports CHAP and PAP authentication methods.
C. PPP cannot modify keepalive time
D. PPP does not support mutual authentication
Answer: B
Question: 291
Regarding the above configuration, the correct statement is ().

<Huawei>system-view
[huawei-ui-console0]history-command max-size 20
A. history-command max-size 20 is to adjust the size of the history command cache to 20

B. The default size of the history command cache is 5
C. The default size of the history command cache is 5 bytes.
D. After the above configuration is completed, the history command cache can save 20 bytes of
commands.
Answer: A
Question: 292
Regarding the commands used to detect IP network connectivity, the following statements are incorrect
(). (multiple choice)
A. ping 127.0.0.1, this command is used to check whether the network cable of the host is plugged in.
B. ping 127.0.0.2, this command is used to check whether the host's network cable is plugged in.
C. The ping command can be used to detect the connectivity of the host to the local gateway.
D. The ipconfig/release command can be used to detect the connectivity of the host to the local gateway.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 293
There is a TTL field in the header of the IP packet. The correct statement about this field is ()
A. The length of this field is 7 digits.

B. This field is used for packet fragmentation.
C. This field is used for packet anti-ring
D. This field is used to prioritize the packet data packet.
Answer: C
Question: 294
As shown in the figure, two hosts communicate between VLANs through one-arm routing. When the
G0/0/1.2 sub-interface of RTA receives host B and sends it to host A.
Which of the following operations does RTA perform when data frames?
A. RTA forwards the data frame directly through the G0/0/1.1 subinterface.
B. After the RTA deletes the VLAN tag 20, it is sent out by the G0/0/1.1 interface.
C. RTA first deletes VLAN tag 20, then adds VLAN tag 10, and then sends it out through G0/0/1.1
interface.
D. RTA will discard the data frame
Answer: C
Question: 295
As shown in the topology and the configuration on the switch interconnect port, you can determine that
the data frame labeled as VLAN 10 can be between the two switches.
Normal forwarding.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 296
In the OSPF protocol, what are the correct ones for the description of DR? (multiple choice)
A. By default, all routers in this broadcast network will jointly vote with DR.
B. If the priority values of the two routers are different, select the router with the smaller priority value
as the DR.
C. If the priority values of the two routers are equal, select the router with the large router ID as the DR.
D. Adjacency relationship should also be established between DR and BDR.
Answer: A, C, D
Question: 297
Administrators can't manage the AR2200 through Telent. When troubleshooting, find other
administrators have no problems, then which of the following options are possible?
the reason? (choose 2 answers)
A. The admin user account has been disabled B. The privilege level of the admin user account has been
modified to 0.
C. The admin user account has been deleted
D. The telnet service of the AR2200 router has been disabled.
Answer: A, C
Question: 298
The correct description of GVRP below is ().
A. GVRP enables dynamic discovery and deletion of network devices

B. GVRP is a protocol that must be enabled on the switch, otherwise the switches cannot communicate
with each other.
C. GVRP is based on the GARP working mechanism and is used to maintain VLAN dynamic registration
information in the device and propagate the information to other devices.
D. GVRP is enabled by default, or can be manually closed
Answer: C
Question: 299
Which routing subnets 10.0.0.24/29 may be aggregated by the following subnet routes? (multiple
choice)
A. 10.0.0.24/30
B. 10.0.0.23/30
C. 10.0.0.26/30
D. 10.0.0.28/30
Answer: A, D
Question: 300
The network administrator created VLAN 10 on the Layer 3 switch and configured the IP address on the
virtual interface of the VLAN. When using life
After the display ip interface brief is displayed, the interface of VLANIF 10 is down.
Do you make the VLANIF 10 interface return to normal?
A. Use the command "undoubtedly shutdown" on the VLANIF 10 interface.

B. Add any physical interface into VLAN 10
C. Add a physical interface whose status must be UP to VLAN 10.
D. Add a port that must be UP and must be a trunk type into VLAN 10.
Answer: C
Question: 301
As shown in the figure, the correct description about this network topology is ().
A. There are 6 collision domains in this network.

B. There are 2 broadcast domains in this network.
C. There is 1 conflict domain in this network
D. There are 6 broadcast domains in this network
Answer: B
Question: 302
On a multi-access network such as Ethernet, the PPPoE server can establish PPP with many PPPoE clients
through an Ethernet port.
Connection, so the server must establish a unique session identifier for each PPP session to distinguish
between different connections. What parameters will PPPoE use?
Create a session identifier?
A. MAC address
C. MAC address and PPP-ID
D. MAC address and Session-ID
Answer: D
Question: 303
The authentication scheme, authorization scheme, accounting scheme, HWTACACS, or RADIUS server
template created on the AR router.
It will not take effect until it is applied under the domain.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 304
Which of the following fields in the packet shown will be encrypted by the ESP protocol of IPsec VPN?
A. TCP Header, Data, ESP Trailer

B. ESP Header, TCP Header, Data
C. ESP Header, TCP Header, Data, ESP Trailer
D. ESP Header, TCP Header, Data, ESP Trailer, ESP Auth
Answer: A
Question: 305
If a company network administrator wants to be able to remotely manage branch network devices,
which of the following protocols will be used?
A. CIDR
B. RSTP
C. Telnet
D. VLSM
Answer: C
Question: 306
A trunk port can send both tagged data frames and unlabeled data frames.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 307
The port in the Huawei device supports auto-negotiation technology. The following is true about the
negotiation result ().
A. The result of the negotiation under the 10 Gigabit electrical port must be full duplex.
B. The result of the negotiation under the 100M electrical port must be half duplex
C. The negotiation process is a downgrade negotiation, ie 1000M->100M->10M
D. When the duplex mode is inconsistent, you can solve it by replacing the network cable.
Answer: C
Question: 308
As shown in the figure, STP is disabled on both switches. Host A sends an ARP Request, and the following
description is correct ().
(multiple choice)
A. These two switches can achieve load balancing

B. The CPU usage of these two switches will be very high.
C. The MAC address table of the two switches will frequently jitter
D. Repeated frames will appear in this network
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 309
PPP is more secure and reliable than HDLC because PPP supports (). (multiple choice)
A. PAP
B. MD5
C. CHAP
D. SSH
Answer: A, C
Question: 310
The following statement is incorrect (). (multiple choice)
A. The priority of each static route can be different.

B. By default, the order of route priority is OSPF higher than RIP.
C. If the cost of the route is larger, the priority of the route is higher.
D. In VRP, the greater the priority of the routing protocol, the higher the priority of the route.
Answer: C, D
Question: 311
When a NAT uses a dynamic address pool, the addresses in the address pool can be reused, that is, the
same IP is mapped to multiple intranet IPs at the same time.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 312
The network topology is as shown in the figure. The cost of all links in the network is the default value.
When the RTA forwards the packet to the RTE, about routing.
The correct description is () (multiple choice).
A. If the routers in the network are running OSPF, the RTA will use the S1/0/0 interface to forward data to
the RTE.
B. If the routers in the network are running RIPv2, the RTA will use the S1/0/0 interface to forward data
to the RTE.
C. If the routers in the network are running OSPF, the RTA will use the E0/0/1 interface to forward data to
the RTE.
D. If the routers in the network are running RIPv2, the RTA will use the S2/0/0 interface to forward data
to the RTE.
Answer: B, C
Question: 313
When deploying an ACL on a Huawei device, the following description is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. Calling an ACL under an interface can only be applied to the exit direction.
B. The same ACL can be called under multiple interfaces
C. ACLs can only define rules in the order of 10, 20, and 30.
D. ACLs cannot be used to filter OSPF traffic because OSPF traffic is not encapsulated using UDP protocol
E. The ACL can match the TCP/UDP port number of the packet, and can specify the range of the port
number.
Answer: B, E
Question: 314
When the router is powered on, the configuration file is read from the default storage path for
initialization of the router. If there is no default storage path
Configuration file, what will the router use to initialize?
A. New configuration
B. Initial configuration
C. Default configuration
D. Current configuration
Answer: C
Question: 315
The correct statement about free ARP is (multiple choice)
A. By sending a free ARP, you can confirm whether the IP address has a conflict.
B. The format of the free ARP packet is the same as that of the normal ARP request packet.
C. Free ARP can help update old IP address information
D. The format of the free ARP packet is the same as that of the normal ARP reply packet.
Answer: A, B
Question: 316
The router ID of OSPFv3 can be generated automatically by the system.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 317
As shown in the figure, all four switches run STP, and various parameters use default values. It is blocked
on the G0/0/2 port of the root switch C.
When a configuration BPDU is sent through this port, how long will the blocked port in the network
enter the forwarding state?
A. About 30 seconds
B. About 50 seconds
C. About 15 seconds
D. About 3 seconds
Answer: B
Question: 318
The following description of the Router ID in OSPF is incorrect (). (multiple choice)
A. The router IDs must be the same in the same area. The router IDs in different areas can be different.
B. The router ID must be the IP address of an interface of the router.
C. The router ID must be specified by manual configuration.
D. The prerequisite for the normal operation of OSPF is that the router has a router ID.
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 319
The packet capture tool captures an Ethernet frame and finds that the value of the Type/Length field of
the frame is 0x0800. The following description of the frame is correct.

(). (multiple choice)
A. The interface of this frame is Ethernet_II format

B. The frame structure of the frame is 802.3 format
C. The frame carries an IP packet.
D. The frame carries an IPX message.
Answer: A, C
Question: 320
Network management hopes to effectively use the IP address of the 192.168.176.0/25 network
segment. Now that the company's marketing department has 20 hosts, it is best to allocate the
following.
Which address segment is given to the marketing department?
A. 192.168.176.0/25
B. 192.168.176.160/27
C. 192.168.176.48/29
D. 192.168.176.96/27
Answer: D
Question: 321
The Tracert Diagnostic Tool in Huawei routers uses UDP to encapsulate trace data.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 322
What is the function of the port tunk allow-pass vlan all?
A. Allow all data frames of all VLANs to pass on this port.

B. The peer port connected to the port must be configured at the same time. port trunk permit vlan all
C. The connected peer device can dynamically determine which VLAN IDs are allowed to pass.
D. If the port default vlan 3 command is configured for the connected remote device, VLAN 3 between
the two devices cannot communicate.
Answer: A
Question: 323
The main function of .InARP is to solve the protocol address of the peer device connected to each virtual
link, including IP address and IPX address.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 324
Which of the following flow control methods can be used in the transport layer of the OSI reference
model? (multiple choice)
A. Confirmation technology
B. Cache technology
C. Source suppression message
D. Window mechanism
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 325
When a router forwards a packet, if it does not match the corresponding detail route and there is no
default route, the router will discard the packet directly.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 326
As shown in the figure, the configuration of the VLAN on the Huawei switch is correct (). (multiple
choice)
A. Client1 belongs to VLAN 10, and the commands for VLAN division on the switch are correct.
B. Client2 belongs to VLAN 20, and the VLAN-based command on the switch is correct.
C. Client3 belongs to VLAN 30, and the commands for VLAN division on the switch are correct.
D. Client4 belongs to VLAN 40, and the commands for VLAN division on the switch are correct.
E. Client4 is not in VLAN 40, and the command to divide the VLAN on the switch is incorrect.
Answer: A, B, E
Question: 327
.[Huawei]user interface vty 0 14 -

[Huawei ui vty0 14]acl 2000 inbound - - -
[Huawei ui vty0 14]user privilege level 3 - - -
[Huawei ui vty0 14]authentication mode password - - - -
Please configure the login password(maximum length 16): huawei
The configuration of Vty is as shown above, and the user privilege level is set to level 3, which is also the
highest level that can be set.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 328
The ACL configuration shown above is completed on the router RTA, and the following description is
correct ().
[RTA]acl 2001
Huawei question bank battle report group: 434299778[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 20 permit source 20.1.1.0
0.0.0.255
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 10 deny source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
A. The VRP system will automatically adjust the order of the first rule in the order of configuration.
B. The VRP system does not adjust the sequence number, but will first match the rule of the first
configuration. 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
C. Configuration error, the order number of the rule must be from small to large.
D. The VRP system will first match the second rule in order. deny source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
Answer: D
Question: 329
As shown in the figure, after the switch SWA is running RSTP, the administrator configures the port of the
G0/0/3 of the SWA as an Edge Port and uses one switch.
The machine replaces the host C, and the correct description below is ().
A. The G0/0/3 port of SWA will be closed after receiving the BPDU sent by the switch.
B. The G0/0/3 port of SWA will discard the received BPDU and forward the data normally.
C. The G0/0/3 port of SWA will perform RSTP operation after receiving the BPDU.
D. Among all hosts, only host A can send and receive data normally.
Answer: C
Question: 330
Which of the following is not included in the routing table?
A. Source address
B. Next hop
C. Target network
D. Routing cost
Answer: A
Question: 331
A host in a private network needs to access the Internet. To achieve this requirement, the administrator
should do the following on the edge router of the network.
What configuration? (multiple choice)
A. NAT Easy IP
B. DHCP
C. STP
D. Default route
Answer: A, D
Question: 332
The correct statement about inter-VLAN communication is (). (multiple choice)
A. Inter-VLAN communication can be achieved by one-arm routing

B. Inter-VLAN communication can be realized through a three-layer switch
C. Inter-VLAN communication cannot be implemented through a Layer 2 switch.
D. Inter-VLAN communication can be realized by GVRP
E. Inter-VLAN communication must rely on routers to achieve
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 333
Which of the following types of addresses are not included in the Pv6 address?
A. Unicast address
B. Multicast address
C. Broadcast address
D. Anycast address
Answer: C
Question: 334
The correct DD packet and LSA description for OSPF middle age is (). (multiple choice)
A. The DD message contains the details of the LSA.

B. The DD packet contains only the header information of the LSA.
C. The head of the LSA can uniquely identify an LSA
D. LSA head is just a small part of the LSA
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 335
Huawei AR G3 series routers can update system files through FTP and TFTP. The following description is
correct () (multiple choice)
A. AR G3 series routers can be used as FTP clients.

B. AR G3 series routers can be used as FTP Server
C. AR G3 series routers can be used as TFTP clients.
D. AR G3 series routers can be used as TFTP Server
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 336
The following is true about PPP description (). (multiple choice)
A. For the physical layer, PPP supports asynchronous links and synchronous links.
B. PPP is not scalable and cannot be deployed on an Ethernet link.
C. PPP supports plaintext and ciphertext authentication
D. PPP supports multiple network layer protocols, such as IPCP and IPXCP.
E. PPP supports bundling multiple physical links into logical links to increase bandwidth
Answer: A, C, D, E
Question: 337
In a frame relay network, DLCI is only the identifier of a virtual circuit under an interface. It must be
globally unique when planning and deploying.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 338
The following is a mistake in the priority of static routes in Huawei devices ().
A. The static router priority value ranges from 0 255 -

B. The default value of static router priority is 60.
C. The priority of static routes is divided into internal priority and external priority. Administrators can
modify external priority.
D. The priority value of the static route is 255, indicating that the route is unavailable.
Answer: A
Question: 339
If the administrator wants to update the VRP of the AR2200 router, the correct method is (). (multiple
choice)
A. The administrator configures the AR2200 as an FTP client to transfer VRP software through FTP.
B. The administrator configures the AR2200 as an FTP server to transmit VRP software through FTP.
C. The administrator configures the AR2200 as a TFTP server and transmits VRP software through TFTP.
D. The administrator configures the AR2200 as a TFTP client to transmit VRP software through TFTP.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 340
In order to change some office locations frequently, network administrators often plan to access users
from different switches to the corporate network.
VLAN10, which method should I use to divide VLANs?
A. Port-based VLAN
B. VLAN based on protocol
C. VLAN based on MAC address
D. VLAN based on subnets
Answer: C
Question: 341
[RTA]aaa
[RTA-aaa]domain huawei
The network administrator performs the above configuration on the Huawei router RT
A. If a user needs to be authenticated in the authentication domain "huawei", the following is true.
The correct description is ().
A. Will use the "authentication-scheme au1" certification
B. Will use the "authentication-scheme au2" certification
C. will use the "authentication-scheme au1" certification, if "au1" is deleted, will use "au2"
D. will use the "authentication-scheme au2" certification, if "au2" is deleted, will use "au1
Answer: B
Question: 342
The Age time of the RIP route that is viewed by the command on the router is ().
A. RIP packet update interval

B. RIP route aging time
C. RIP route suppression time
D. RIP route switching time
Answer: B
Question: 343
Both the alternate port and the backup port in RSTP cannot forward user traffic, but can receive, process,
and send BPDUs.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 344
The following configuration can be used to determine that the IP address of the GigabitEthernet0/0/0
interface is incorrectly configured because the IP address of the interface is not
May end in 0.
[Huawei]interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0
[Huawei GigabitEthernet0/0/0] ip address 19.224.17.0 255.255.128.0 -
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 345
Which of the following protocols does the Frame Relay network use to dynamically map IP addresses to
DLCIs?
A. ARP protocol
B. RARP Agreement
C. InARP protocol
D. MAP protocol
Answer: C
Question: 346
Warning:The action will delete the save configuration in the device.The configuration will be erased to
reconfigure.Continue?[Y/N]:
The administrator performs the following configuration on the AR2200. The following description about
the configuration information is correct ().
A. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should choose Y.
B. The configuration file will be retained when the device starts up.
C. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should choose N
D. The saved configuration file will be replaced by the running configuration file.
Answer: A
Question: 347
In Huawei devices, which method can OSPF elect the router ID? (multiple choice)
A. If a loopback interface is configured, select the largest IP address from the IP address of the loopback
interface as the router ID.
B. If the loopback interface is not configured, select the largest IP address as the router ID among the IP
addresses of other interfaces.
C. Huawei switch may use the largest VLANIF IP address as the router ID.
D. Use the default 127.0.0.1
E. Manually define an arbitrary legal router ID
Answer: A, B, C, E
Question: 348
The following description about the trunk port and the access port is correct ().
A. The Access port can only send untagged frames.

B. The access port can only send tagged frames.
C. Trunk port can only send untagged frames
D. Trunk port can only send tagged frames.
Answer: A
Question: 349
You can use the preference preference to configure the priority value of a RIP route or the command in
the RIP process of the Huawei device.
After specifying a routing policy, set the priority value for the specific route that meets the conditions.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 350
An existing switch is directly connected to the designated port of the peer device through a port, but the
port does not forward any packets but can be connected.
Receive a BPDU to listen for network changes, then the role of the port should be ().
A. Root port
B. Designated port
C. Alternate port
D. Disable port
Answer: C
Question: 351
The following is true about the TTL field in the IP packet header ().
A. TTL defines the number of packets that the source host can send.
B. TTL defines the time interval at which the source host can send packets.
C. Whenever a packet passes through a router, its TTL value will be decremented by one.
D. Whenever a packet passes through a router, its TTL value will be increased by one.
Answer: C
Question: 352
.VRP supports OSPF multi-process. If no process number is specified, the default process number is ().
A. 0
B. 1
C. 10
D. 100
Answer: B
Question: 353
Which of the following WLAN standard operating frequencies are in the 5 GHz band? (multiple choice)
A. 802.11a
B. 802.11b
C. 802.11g
D. 802.11n
Answer: A, D
Question: 354
Which of the following are routing protocols? (multiple choice)
A. IP
B. OSPF
C. BGP
D. IPX
Answer: B, C
Question: 355
In the frame relay network, regarding the mapping information on the DTE device, the description is
correct ()
A. Local DLCI and remote IP address mapping

B. Mapping of local IP address to remote DLCI
C. Mapping of local DLCI to local IP address
D. Remote DLCI and remote IP address mapping
Answer: A
Question: 356
Which of the following parameters cannot be used for the advanced access control list?
A. Physical interface
C. Agreement number
D. Time range
Answer: A
Question: 357
On the Huawei AR G3 router, the -i parameter of the Ping command in the VRP is used to set ()
A. Interface for sending Echo Request messages

B. Source IP address for sending Echo Request messages
C. Interface for receiving Echo Reply packets
D. Destination IP address of the received Echo Reply packet
Answer: A
Question: 358
As shown in the figure, according to the configuration on the router R1, it can be judged that the two PCs
can access the ISP network normally.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 359
According to the command shown above, the correct one in the following description is (). (multiple
choice) [Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/1]port link-type access
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/1]port default vlan 10
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/2]port link-type trunk
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/2]port trunk allow-pass vlan 10
A. The PVID of port GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 is 10.

B. The PVID of port GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 is 1.
C. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/2 is 10
D. The PVID of the GigabitEthernet0/0/2 port is 1.
Answer: A, D
Question: 360
As shown in the figure, if the command ping 10.1.1.2 is executed on R1, LSW1 receives the data frame
from VLAN 10 of LSW2.
Signed.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 361
The CHAP authentication command enabled in .PPP is: ppp chap authentication.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 362
The Ethernet electrical interface can work in 3 duplex modes, and the Ethernet optical interface can only
work in () mode.
A. Full duplex
B. Half duplex
C. Auto-negotiation
D. Simplex
Answer: A
Question: 363
The Ethernet electrical interface can work in 3 duplex modes, and the Ethernet optical interface can only
work in () mode.
A. Full duplex
B. Half duplex
C. Auto-negotiation
D. Simplex
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 364
What are the following characteristics of the default VLAN in a Layer 2 Ethernet switch? (multiple choice)
A. The default VLAN cannot be manually deleted

B. By default, the switch is a member port of the default VLAN.
C. You must create a default VLAN before you can assign a port to it.
D. The IP address configured on the switch will only be applied to the member port of the default VLAN.
Answer: A, B
Question: 365
The two routers are connected through a serial port, and the serial link is encapsulated in PPP. Which of
the following parameters is required before the PPP link is Up?
negotiatable? (multiple choice)
A. MRU
B. Authentication Password
C. Magic-Number
D. Authentication Protocol
Answer: A , C, D
Question: 366
In standard STP mode, which of the following non-root bridge switches forwards the TC set by the root
switch to BPUD?
A. Root port
B. Backup port
C. Designated port
D. Provisioning port
Answer: C
Question: 367
The following description of the Layer 2 Ethernet switch is incorrect ().
A. Ability to learn MAC address

B. It is necessary to make certain modifications to the three-layer header of the forwarded message, and
then forward it.
C. Forward according to the Layer 2 header information of the Ethernet frame
D. Layer 2 Ethernet switch works at the data link layer
Answer: B
Question: 368
As shown in the figure, the host has established a connection with the router through Telnet. For the
data sent by the host to the router, the following description is positive.
Indeed (). (multiple choice)
A. The destination MAC address of the data frame sent by the host is the MAC address of the interface
G0/0/0 of the router.
B. The destination MAC address of the data frame sent by the host is the MAC address of the switch.
C. The destination port number in the data segment sent by the host is 80.
D. The destination IP address of the packet sent by the host is the IP address of the interface G0/0/0 of
the router.
Answer: A, D
Question: 369
NAPT allows multiple private IP addresses to be mapped to the same public IP address through different
port numbers. The following information about the port number in NAPT
Description The correct one is ().
A. You must manually configure the mapping between port numbers and private addresses.
B. Only need to configure the range of port numbers
C. No need to do any configuration about the port number
D. Need to use ACL to assign port number
Answer: C
Question: 370
How many ways does VRP support router configuration? (multiple choice)
A. Configure the router through the console port.

B. Configure the router through Telent
C. Configure the router through the mini USB port
D. Configure the router through FTP
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 371
A company applies for a Class C IP address segment, but it is assigned to six subsidiaries. The largest
subsidiary has 26 computers. Different children
The company must be on a different network segment and the subnet mask should be set to ().
A. 255.255.255.0
B. 255.255.255.128
C. 255.255.255.192
D. 255.255.255
Answer: D
Question: 372
In the following description of eSight, the error is ().
A. eSight can be used to monitor and manage enterprise networks

B. eSight can only manage Huawei network devices.
C. eSight supports WLAN device management and hotspot coverage monitoring
D. eSight supports configuration file backup and traffic analysis.
Answer: B
Question: 373
As shown in the figure, the R0 and RTB G0/0/1 interfaces are configured with IPV6 addresses of different
network prefixes, and the network administrator is on two routers.
Both run the OSPFv3 protocol and configure the OSPFv3 Router ID for each router. The correct
description is (). (many selected)
A. RTA and RTB can establish OSPFv3 neighbor relationships.

B. RTA and RTB cannot establish OSPFv3 neighbor relationships.
C. RTA can ping RTB
D. RTA cannot ping RTB
Answer: A, C
Question: 374
VLSM can expand any IP segment, including Class D addresses.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 375
As shown in the figure, after the network administrator finishes Telnet configuration on the router, it
finds that the host cannot establish a connection with the router through Telnet.
Which options can help solve this problem? (multiple choice)
A. Check if the host's ARP cache table overflows

B. Check if the switch is configured with the default gateway address.
C. Use ping to check the IP connectivity between the host and router G0/0/0 interface
D. Check if the Telnet configuration on the router is correct.
Answer: C, D
Question: 376
What command can I type in system view to switch to user view?
A. system-view
B. router
C. quit
D. user-view
Answer: C
Question: 377
As shown in the figure, regarding the topology and configuration of OSPF, the correct statement in the
following statement is ()
A. R1 and R2 can establish stable OSPF neighbor relationships

B. R1 and R2 can establish stable neighbor relationships as long as the interface network type of R1 is
restored to the default broadcast type.
C. As long as the interface network type of R1 is restored to the default broadcast type, and the hello
time is adjusted to 10s, R1 and R2 can be established.
Neighbor relationship
D. R1 Compared with R2, R2 has a better chance of becoming a DR because its interface DR priority value
is relatively small.
Answer: C
Question: 378
The description of the above display information is correct ().

[R1]display interface g0/0/0
GigabitEthernet0/0/0 current state:Administratively DOWN
Line protocol current state:DOWN
A. GigabitEthernet0/0/0 interface is connected with a wrong cable.

B. GigabitEthernet0/0/0 interface is not configured with an IP address.
C. GigabitEthernet0/0/0 interface does not have dynamic routing protocol enabled.
D. GigabitEthernet0/0/0 interface was manually closed by the administrator.c
Answer: D
Question: 379
The administrator finds that the two routers stay in the TWO-WAY state when establishing an OSPF
neighbor. The correct description is ().
A. The router is configured with the same process ID.

B. The router is configured with the same zone ID
C. The router is configured with the wrong router ID
D. These two routers are DR Other routers in the broadcast network.
Answer: D
Question: 380
IPsec VPN is used to transfer data between the two hosts. In order to hide the real IP address and ensure
the highest possible data, use IPsec.
VPN mode and protocol package is better? (choose 2 answers)
A. AH
B. Transmission mode
C. Tunnel mode
D. ESPc
Answer: C, D
Question: 381
Huawei devices can be managed using the Telnet protocol. Which of the following statements is correct
about this management function?
A. The default port number used by Telnet is 22, which cannot be modified.
B. Telnet must have a VTY interface enabled and a maximum of 15
C. Telnet does not support authentication based on username and password
D. Telnet does not support deploying ACLs for added security
Answer: B
Question: 382
On the switch, which VLANs can be deleted by using the undo command? (multiple choice)
A. VLAN 1
B. VLAN 2
C. VLAN 1024
D. VLAN 4094
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 383
In the command fr map ip 10.1.1.2 200, the meaning of the number 200 is ().
A. Peer logical channel number

B. Local DLCI number
C. Peer interface number
D. Peer node number
Answer: B
Question: 384
As shown in the figure, a static NAT command is deployed on router R1. When the PC accesses the
Internet, the destination address in the packet does not occur.
Any changes.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 385
The company network engineer has an AR2200 that cannot be started normally. How can the
administrator want to update its VRP?
A. The administrator needs to use the console cable to connect to the router and host, and then enter
the BootROM interface to complete the upgrade.
B. The administrator needs to configure the AR2200 as an FTP client and use FTP to transfer the new VRP.
C. The administrator needs to configure the AR2200 to obtain an IP address through DHCP and then
obtain the VRP system file through TFTP.
D. The administrator needs to use telnet on the local host to remotely update the VRP system files of the
device.
Answer: B
Question: 386
[RTA]acl 2002
Which of the following entries will be matched on the router PTA using the ACL matching routing entries
shown above? (multiple choice)
A. 172.16.1.1/32
B. 172.16.1.0/24
C. 192.17.0.0/24
D. 172.18.0.0/16
Answer: A, D
Question: 387
After the host obtains the IP address from DHCP server A and restarts, what kind of message will the
following message be sent to DHCP server A?
A. DHCP DISCOVER
B. DHCP REQUEST
C. DHCP OFFER
D. DHCP ACK
Answer: B
Question: 388
The ACL of the AR G3 series router supports two matching sequences: configuration order and automatic
sorting.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 389
The STP switch sends BPDUs. The correct statement about BPDU is (). (multiple choice)
A. BPDU is a frame using the IEEE802.3 standard

B. BPDU is a frame using the Etherent II standard
C. The Control field value of the BPDU frame is 3.
D. The destination MAC address of the BPDU frame is the broadcast address.
Answer: A, C
Question: 390
Referring to the output result as shown in the figure, it can be judged that the routing table of the router
is composed of a direct route and a static route, and the direct route is
The route priority value cannot be modified.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 391
In the RSTP standard, the port that the switch directly connects to the terminal instead of the other
bridge is defined as ().
A. Fast port
B. Backup port
C. Root port
D. Edge port
Answer: D
Question: 392
The Access port strips out the VLAN ID when it receives the same data frame with the same VLAN ID and
PVID. Then forward directly.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 393
When the port of the Access type sends a message, it will ().
A. Send a packet with a tag

B. Strip the VLAN information of the message and then send it out.
C. Add the VLAN information of the packet, and then send it out.
D. Put the PVID information of this port and then send it out.
Answer: B
Question: 394
You can use the undo summary command to disable automatic summarization of the routing protocol
RIPv2 in Huawei devices.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 395
If the network address of a network is 10.1.1.0/30, then its broadcast address is ()?
A. 10.1.1.1
B. 10.1.1.2
C. 10.1.1.3
D. 10.1.1.4
Answer: C
Question: 396
On the VRP platform, the order of the default protocol priorities of direct route, static route, RIP, and
OSPF is ().
A. Direct route, static route, RIP, OSPF

B. Direct route, OSPF, static route, RIP
C. Direct routing, OSPF, RIP, static routing
D. Direct routing, RIP, static routing, OSPF
Answer: B
Question: 397
As shown in the figure, all three switches run GVRP, create VLAN 10 and VLAN 20 on SWA and SWC, and
create them on SWB.
VLAN 10. SWB dynamically learned VLAN 20 from SWA and SWC through GVRP. If the port G0/0/1 on the
SWB is modified to be GVRP
In the Fixed mode, the following description is correct ().
A. Host A can continue to communicate with Host C.

B. Host B can continue to communicate with Host D
C. Hosts belonging to the same VLAN can continue to communicate
D. All hosts cannot communicate with any other host
Answer: A
Question: 398
The MAC address of G0/0/1 on a router is 00E0-FC03-AA73. The IP address of this interface is
2001::2E0:FCFF:AA73, root.
Based on this information, it can be determined that the interface identifier of this interface is based on
().
A. DHCPv6
B. Auto-link
C. ARP
D. EUI-64
Answer: D
Question: 399
In PPP, when the dual-end of both communicating parties detects the physical link activation, it will
switch from the link unavailable phase to the link establishment phase.
This phase is mainly through the negotiation of link parameters through the () protocol.
A. IP
B. DHCP
C. LCP
D. NCP
Answer: C
Question: 400
Regarding the RIP routing protocol, the following description is correct ().
A. The router cannot send a router entry with a hop count of 16 to its directly connected neighbor.
B. The router may receive a route entry with a hop count of 16 sent by the directly connected neighbor,
but will discard it immediately after receiving it, and will not do any other processing.
C. The router may receive a route entry with a hop count of 16 sent by the directly connected neighbor.
After receiving it, it will use it to update its own routing table.
D. The above description is incorrect.
Answer: C
Question: 401
Which of the following storage media are commonly used by Huawei routers? (multiple choice)
A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. Hard Disk
E. SD Card
Answer: A, B, C, E
Question: 402
The Layer 2 Ethernet switch generates a MAC address table option based on the () packet received by the
port.

Answer: A
Question: 403
In OSPF, which routers does a DR other router exchange link state information with? (multiple choice)
A. DR
B. BDR
C. DR other
Answer: A, B
Question: 404
As shown in the figure, the H frame contains an IP packet sent from Host A to Host B, and the destination
MAC address of the H frame is ().
A. MAC address of G0/0/1 interface of RTB

B. MAC address of G0/0/1 interface of RTC
C. Host B's MAC address
D. RTC G0/0/0 interface MAC address
Answer: D
Question: 405
After deploying a DHCP server on the network, the administrator finds that some hosts have obtained
the address specified by the DHCP server.
What are the possible reasons? (multiple choice)
A. There is another DHCP server in the network that is more efficient.

B. Some hosts cannot communicate properly with the DHCP server. These host client systems
automatically generate addresses in the range of 169.254.0.0.
C. Some hosts cannot communicate properly with the DHCP server. These host client systems
automatically generate addresses in the range of 127.254.0.0.
D. The address pool of the DHCP server has been completely allocated.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 406
What is the role of the command "interface vlan vlan-id" on the VRP platform?
A. Create a VLAN
B. Create or enter the VLAN virtual interface view
C. Configure a VLAN for a port
D. No such order
Answer: B
Question: 407
A Windows host is started for the first time. If the IP address cannot be obtained from the DHCP server,
then the host may use the following one.
IP address?
A. 0.0.0.0
B. 127.0.0.1
C. 169.254.2.33
D. 255.255.255.255
Answer: C
Question: 408
On Huawei devices, administrators can announce subnets in RIPV2 because RIPV2 supports VLSM.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 409
The administrator wants to upgrade the configuration file for the AR2200 via a USB cable, and the
following description is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. Connect the mini USB cable of the PC and AR2200 with a mini USB cable.
B. Connect the USB interface of the PC and AR2200 with a mini USB cable.
C. The AR2200 does not support the use of USB to update configuration files.
D. After connecting the cable, the administrator needs to install the driver for the mini USB.
Answer: A, D
Question: 410
The above information is the port status information displayed on a switch running STP. Based on this
information. The following description is wrong ().
A. It is possible to include only this switch in this network.

B. This switch may be a switch in the network.
C. This switch is a non-designated switch for the network it is connected to
D. This switch may be connected to 6 other switches.
Answer: C
Question: 411
As shown in the figure, if Host A and Host B want to implement inter-VLAN communication through one-
arm routing, which one should be configured under G0/0/1.1 interface of RTA.
Set?
A. dot1q termination vid 1

B. dot1q termination vid 10
C. dot1q termination vid 20
D. dot1q termination vid 30
Answer: B
Question: 412
The following description about IPv6 is correct (). (choose 2 answers)
A. IPv6 address length is 64bits

B. IPv6 address length is 128bits
C. When an IPv6 message has multiple extension headers, the extension header must appear in an
orderly manner
D. When an IPv6 message has multiple extension headers, the extension header can appear randomly.
Answer: B, C
Question: 413
When using Telnet to log in to the router, which authentication methods can I choose? (choose 2
answers)
A. password authentication
B. AAA local certification
C. MD5 ciphertext authentication
D. Not certified
Answer: A, B
Question: 414
As shown in the figure, the G0/0/0 and G0/0/1 interfaces of the RTA are connected to two different
network segments respectively, and the RTA acts as a gateway for the two networks. Host A
Before sending data to host C, it will send an ARP Request to get the MAC address of ().
A. Host C
B. RTA G0/0/0 interface
C. RTA G0/0/1 interface
D. SWA
Answer: B
Question: 415
When an image file is transmitted over the network using the application software, the TCP/IP
encapsulation process is: data data segment data - -
Packet Data frame Data stream. - -
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 416
As shown in the figure, the three Layer 2 switches are interconnected with one HUB, and the STP
function is enabled on the switch. For the bridge ID setting of the STP switch, refer to the following.
Figure, others are the default configuration. The following statement is wrong ().
A. After the bridge ID comparison, LSW1 is the root bridge.

B. The G0/0/2 port of LSW1 is blocked.
C. G0/0/1 of LSW3 is an AP port and is blocked.
D. Both ports of LSW1 are designated ports and are in the forwarding state.
Answer: D
Question: 417
Which of the following is not included in the VRP system login method?
A. Telnet
B. SSH
C. Web
D. Netstream
Answer: D
Question: 418
As shown in the Display information, when the switch needs to forward a frame with a destination MAC
address of 5489-98ec-f011. The following description is correct
().
A. The switch needs to send a request to discover the device with the MAC address 5489-98ec-f011.
B. The switch will send the target unreachable message to the source device.
C. The switch will flood the frame on all ports except the one that received the frame.
D. The switch did not find a matching entry in the MAC address table, so the frame will be discarded.
Answer: C
Question: 419
What versions of SNMP are supported by eSight? (multiple choice)
A. SNMPv1
B. SNMPv2
C. SNMPv2c
D. SNMPv3
Answer: A, C, D
Question: 420
The following description is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. The next hop in the routing table is redundant. If there is an outgoing interface, the packet can be
forwarded.
B. Routes obtained through different routing protocols have different priorities
C. The metrics defined by different routing protocols are comparable.
D. The metrics defined by different routing protocols are not comparable.
Answer: B, D
Question: 421
When an IPsec tunnel is established between two routers, which of the following parameters does not
need to be consistent between IPsec peers?
A. The security protocol used
B. Data encapsulation mode

C. Proposal name
D. Authentication algorithm
Answer: C
Question: 422
As shown in the figure, all four switches run STP, and various parameters use default values. Sending a
block on a port of the root switch and failing to pass the
When a port sends a configuration BPDU, how long does the blocked port in the network enter the
forwarding state?
A. About 30 seconds
B. About 50 seconds
C. About 15 seconds
D. About 3 seconds
Answer: B
Question: 423
When configuring the router through the Console, the correct setting for the terminal emulator is ().
A. 48006ps, 8-bit data bits, 1-bit stop bit, odd parity and no flow control
B. 96006ps, 8-bit data bit, 1 stop bit, no parity and no flow control
C. 96006ps, 8-bit data bits, 1-bit stop bit, even parity and hardware flow control
D. 192006ps, 8-bit data bit, 1 stop bit, no parity and no flow control
Answer: B
Question: 424
The following description of the specified port for the spanning tree is correct.
A. There is only one designated port per bridge

B. The designated port can forward configuration BPDUs to its connected network segment.
C. The port on the root switch must not be the designated port.
D. Specify the port to forward configuration BPDUs from this switch to the root switch.
Answer: B
Question: 425
On a frame relay network, a static MAP has been configured on an interface. If you continue to configure
the fr inarp command, the interface will send an Inverse.
The ARP request packet is sent to the peer and the static MAP record is overwritten.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 426
Which of the following commands can be used to check whether OSPF has correctly established
neighbor relationships?

Answer: C
Question: 427
If the administrator finds that the file cannot be transferred to the Huawei AR2200 through TFTP, what is
the possible cause? ()
A. TFTP service is disabled on the router

B. TCP port 69 of the TFTP server is disabled
C. UDP port 69 of the TFTP server is disabled
D. The username and password on the TFTP server are modified.
Answer: C
Question: 428
Which of the following commands can be used to check the session status of a PPPoE client?

B. display current-configuartion
Answer: D
Question: 429
An AR2200 router learned the route entries to the same network and the routes learned through OSPF
through OSPF and RIPv2.
The overhead value is 4882, and the number of hops learned by RIPv2 is 4, and there will be () in the
router's routing table.
A. RIPv2 routing
B. OSPF and RIPv2
C. OSPF routing
D. Both do not exist
Answer: C
Question: 430
The client has an error accessing the FTP server. If there is no problem checking the connectivity
between the server and the client, then which servers are possible?
Is the port blocked? (choose 2 answers)
A. 21
B. 80
C. 20
D. 50649
Answer: A, C
Question: 431
The function of OSPF hello packets is (). (multiple choice)
A. Discovering neighbors
B. Publish parameter information such as Router ID and Router Priority.
C. Maintaining neighbor relationships
D. Synchronous router LSDB
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 432
The administrator wants to completely delete the old device configuration file config.zip, then the
following command is correct ().
A. delete/force config.zip
B. delete/unreserved config.zip
C. reset config.zip
D. clear config.zip
Answer: B
Question: 433
On the command line interface of the Huawei AR router, the save command saves the current system
time.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 434
When the router's configuration file is saved, which storage medium is generally stored on it?
A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. Boot ROM
Answer: C
Question: 435
.ip route-static 10.0.12.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.11 The correct description for this command is ().
A. This command configures a route to the 192.168.1.1 network.

B. This command configures a route to the 10.0.12.0 network.
C. The priority of this route is 100.
D. If the router learns the route of the same network as this route through other protocols, the router
will prefer this route.
Answer: B
Question: 436
This is the three packets that the administrator has captured on the network. The following statement is
incorrect ().
A. These three packets represent the three-way handshake of TCP.

B. The IP address of the Telnet server is 10.0.12.1, and the IP address of the Telnet client is 10.0.12.2.
C. These three data packages do not contain application data.
D. The Telnet client uses the 50190 port to establish a connection with the server.
Answer: B
Question: 437
The broadcast address is a special address in the network address where the host bits are all set to 1. It
can also be used as a host address.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 438
The backup port in RSTP can replace the failed root port.
Huawei question bank battle report group: 434299778
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 439
What types of networks are supported by the OSPF protocol? (multiple choice)
A. Point-to-Point
B. Broadcast
C. Non-Broadcast Multi-Access
D. Point-to-Multipoint
Answer: A, B, C, D
Question: 440
When two switches use link aggregation technology for interconnection, which of the following
conditions do each member port need to meet? (multiple choice)
A. The number of physical ports connected to the two ends is the same.
B. The physical ports connected to the two ends have the same rate.
C. The physical port duplex mode connected to the two ends is the same.
D. The physical numbers of the physical interfaces connected to the two ends are the same.
E. The optical modules used by the physical ports connected to the two ends are of the same type.
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 441
The network management work manages the network device through the SNMP protocol. When the
managed device has an abnormality, the network management workstation will receive it.
SNMP packets?
A. get-response message
B. set-request message
C. trap message
D. get-request message
Answer: C
Question: 442
The following description about the ICMP redirect function is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. After the router receives the data packet from an interface and sends the data packet from the
interface again, the router will send ICMP.
Redirect the message to the source device.
B. After the router receives the data packet from an interface, it finds that the IP address of the interface
and the destination IP address of the data packet are on the same network segment.
The router will send an ICMP redirect message to the source device.
C. After the router receives the data packet from an interface and sends the data packet from the
interface, the source device will send an ICMP weight.
Direct the message to the router.
D. After the router receives the data packet from an interface, it finds the source IP address of the data
packet and the next hop when the router continues to forward the data packet.
If the IP address belongs to the same network segment, the router will send an ICMP redirect message
to the source device.
Answer: A, D
Question: 443
On the VRP interface, you cannot use the command delete or unreserved vrpcfg.zip to delete files. You
must empty them in the recycle bin to thoroughly
Delete Files.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 444
Regarding the role of ARP protocol and packet encapsulation, the description is correct ()
A. Inverse ARP in ARP is used to resolve device names

B. The MAC address of the destination and the address of the UUID can be obtained through the ARP
protocol.
C. ARP protocol supports deployment on PPP links and HDLC links
D. ARP protocol is based on Ethernet package
Answer: D
Question: 445
The topology and configuration are as shown in the figure. Then, an Eth Trunk - logical link can be
established between the two switches. And LSW2 is active end.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 446
As shown in the figure, RTA is a DTE device connected to a frame relay switch. If RTA uses dynamic
mapping to establish a PVC connection, which of the following
These commands do not need to be configured on the RTA? (multiple choice)
A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1] ip address 172.16.1.124

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]link-protocol fr
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr interface-type dte
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr inarp
Answer: C, D
Question: 447
If two IPsec VPN peers want to use both AH and ESP to ensure secure communication, how many do the
two peers need to build?
SA (Security Alliance)?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
Answer: D
Question: 448
A trunk port can allow multiple VLANs to pass, including VLAN4096.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 449
217.#
Interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
Port link type trunk -
Port trunk allow pass vlan 2 to 4094 -
#
According to the command output shown above, the correct one in the following description is ()
(multiple choice)
A. GigabitEthernet0/0/1 does not allow VLAN1 to pass.

B. GigabitEthernet0/0/1 allows VLAN1 to pass
C. If you want to change the GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port to an Access port, you must first use the
command “undo port trunk allow pass vlan -
All clear the default configuration
D. If you want to change the GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port to an Access port, you must first use the
command “undo port trunk allow pass vlan -
2 to 4094" clear default configuration
Answer: B, D
Question: 450
The STP root switch is elected based on the comparison of switch priorities. In RSTP, the switch priority
and MAC address are compared. site.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 451
The administrator performs the above configuration on the Router. After the completion, a switch is
connected to the G1/0/0 interface of the router.
The IP address description of this host is correct ().
[Router]ip pool pool 1
[Router-ip-pool-pool 1]network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-pool 1] gateway-list 10.10.10.1
[Router-ip-pool-pool 1]quit
[Router]ip pool pool 2
[Router-ip-pool-pool 2]network 10.20.20.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-pool 2] gateway-list 10.20.20.1
[Router-ip-pool-pool 2]quit
[Router]interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0
[Router-GigabitEthernet 1/0/0] ip address 10.10.10.1.24
[Router-GigabitEthernet 1/0/0]dhcp select global
A. The obtained IP address belongs to the 10.10.10.0/24 network.

B. The obtained IP address belongs to the 10..20.20.0/24 network.
C. The host cannot obtain an IP address.
D. The obtained IP address may belong to the 10.10.10.0/24 network, or it may belong to the
10.20.20.0/24 network.
Answer: A
Question: 452
As shown in the figure, RTA sends a PADI message to server A as a PPPOE client, and server A replies to a
PADO message. PADO message is One () frame.
A. Unicast
B. Multicast
C. Broadcast
D. Anycast
Answer: A
Question: 453
As shown in the figure, the address is configured on the Serial 1/0/1 interface of the RTA using the
command "ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0".
Borrowing, the following description is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. The IP address of the interface of Serial 1/0/1 of the RTA is 10.1.1.1/24.

B. The IP address of the interface of Serial 1/0/1 of RTA is 10.1.1.1/32.
C. There is a 10.1.1.0/24 routing entry in the RTA routing table.
D. There is no 10.1.1.0/24 routing entry in the RTA routing table.
Answer: B, D
Question: 454
The following is incorrect about the description of STP () (multiple choice)
A. There can only be one designated switch in a switched network

B. All ports of the root switch are root ports
C. All ports in the root switch are designated ports
D. The switch with the lowest switch priority value in the switched network becomes a non-root switch.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 455
A router learns routes to the same destination address through RIP, OSPF, and static routes. By default,
VRP will be the most
Which routing protocol does the terminal choose to learn?
A. RIP
B. OSPF
C. The routes learned by the three protocols are selected.
D. Static routing
Answer: B
Question: 456
The administrator plans to implement a route backup by configuring a static floating route. The correct
implementation method is ().
A. The administrator needs to configure different protocol priority values for the primary static route and
the alternate static route.
B. The administrator only needs to configure two static routes.
C. The administrator needs to configure different TAGs for the primary static route and the standby static
route.
D. The administrator needs to configure different metrics for the primary static route and the alternate
static route.
Answer: A
Question: 457
What is the full name of VRP?

Answer: D
Question: 458
The port cost calculated by STP has a certain relationship with the port bandwidth. That is, the larger the
bandwidth, the more overhead ().
A. small
B. Big
C. Consistent
D. Not necessarily
Answer: A
Question: 459
After a fault occurs in the network, the administrator finds out that the configuration of a router has
been modified. What measures should the administrator take to avoid?
Avoid this happening again? (multiple choice)
A. The administrator should configure all account login devices except the administrator to have a
privilege level of 0.
B. The administrator should configure AAA to authenticate and authorize users who log in to the device.
C. The administrator should configure the ACL to control only the administrator to log in to the device.
D. The administrator should enable port-security on the management port of the route
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 460
If the network address of a network is 192.168.1.0, then its broadcast address must be 192.168.1.255.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 461
The following figure shows the routing table of a router. When the router receives a packet with the
destination IP address of 9.1.1.1, the router forwards the packet according to the route of 9.1.0.0/16
because the route matches the destination address 9.1. The number of bits in .1.1 is more.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 462
The VRP operating system commands are divided into four levels: access level, monitoring level,
configuration level, and management level. Can run various business configuration commands but not
Which level of operating file system?
A. Access level
B. Monitoring level
D. Management level
Answer: C
Question: 463
On a Huawei device, if AAA authentication is used for authorization, when the remote server does not
respond, authorization can be performed from the network device.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 464
When configuring AAA authentication on Huawei AR G3 series routers, how many domains can be
configured?
A. 30
B. 31
C. 32
D. 33
Answer: A
Question: 465
A port of the switch is configured as a trunk port, and it is now intended to connect a host to the port to
access the network. The following essential operations are
().
A. Delete multiple VLANs on the port in the global view.

B. Delete multiple VLANs on the port in interface view
C. Close the interface and re-enable it to restore the default configuration
D. Configure the interface as an access port
Answer: D
Question: 466
Port aggregation is the aggregation of multiple ports to form an aggregation group to implement load
balancing among member ports. Port aggregation is in
() implemented on.
A. Physical layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer
Answer: B
Question: 467
When configuring an AR2200 router as a PPPoE client, which of the following configurations is not
required?
A. Configure dialing rules

B. Configure the dialer interface
C. Configure an IP address on the dialer interface
D. Configure the password on the dialer interface
Answer: C
Question: 468
How do I enter the view of OSPF area 0 in the VRP operating system? (multiple choice)
A. [huawei]ospf area 0
B. [huawei-ospf-1]area 0
C. [huawei-ospf-1]area 0.0.0.0
D. [huawei-ospf-1]area 0 enable
Answer: B, C
Question: 469
If you use a 10 Gigabit optical module to interconnect two Huawei S5700 switches, the working mode of
the interconnect port defaults to full duplex.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 470
The broadcast address of the subnet 192.168.1.0/25 is 192.168.1.128.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 471
As shown in the figure, the packet is encapsulated in IPsec VPN. Which type of packet is encapsulated in
IPsec VPN?
A. General mode
B. Transmission mode
C. Tunnel mode
D. This package error
Answer: C
Question: 472
If the Authenticator sends the wrong username and password to the Authenticator during the PPP
authentication process, what type of Authenticator will send

Message to the authenticated person?
A. Authenticate-Ack
B. Authenticate-Nak
Answer: B
Question: 473
Network administrators typically use link aggregation technology in their corporate networks. Which of
the following descriptions are the advantages of link aggregation? (multiple choice)
A. Implement load sharing

B. Increase bandwidth
C. Improve reliability
D. Improve security
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 474
As shown in the figure, if the switch runs STP with default parameters, which of the following ports will
be elected as the designated port?
A. Port G0/0/1 of Switch A

B. Port G0/0/2 of Switch A
C. HUB's E0/0/1 port
D. HUB's E0/0/2 port
Answer: A
Question: 475
After the administrator successfully logs in to the router through Telnet and finds that the IP address of
the interface of the router cannot be configured, the possible causes are ().
A. The Telnet terminal software used by the administrator prohibits the corresponding operation.
B. The authentication mode of the Telnet user is incorrectly configured.
C. The Telnet user level is incorrectly configured.
D. SNMP parameter configuration error
Answer: C
Question: 476
Which of the following IPv6 addresses can be manually configured on the router interface? (multiple
choice)
A. fe80:13dc::1/64
B. ff00:8a3c::9b/64
C. ::1/128
D. 2001: 12e3: 1b02:: 21/64
Answer: A, D
Question: 477
The role of the VLSM is to divide the corresponding number of bits from the host bit portion as a
network bit based on the classful IP address. But on the router
Routing protocol support is required when deploying.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 478
Regarding IPv6 address 2031: 0000:72C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:130B, which of the following

abbreviations are correct? (multiple choice)
A. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E0:839A:130B
B. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B
C. 2031::720C::9E:839A:130B
D. 2031:0:720C::9E0:839A:130B
Answer: A, D
Question: 479
The administrator found that the above message popped up on the device. The correct statement about
this information is ().

<Huawei>Warning:Auto-Config is working.Before configuring the device,stop Auto-Config.If you perform
Configurations when Auto-Config is running,the DHCP,routing,DNS,and VTY configurations will be lost.Do
You want to stop Auto-config?[Y/N]:
A. If you need to enable automatic configuration, the administrator needs to choose Y

B. If you do not need to enable automatic configuration, the administrator needs to select N
C. When the device is first started, the auto configuration function is enabled.
D. When the device is first started, the auto configuration function is disabled.
Answer: C
Question: 480
On the VRP platform, if you want the ping program to use the specified IP address as the source address
of the echo request message, which of the following can be used?
One parameter?
A. -a
B. -s
C. -d
D. -n
Answer: A
Question: 481
A frame relay PVC is configured on the router and found to be invalid. What is the possible cause?
(multiple choice)
A. Configure the same DLCI on the same router

B. LMI type configuration error
C. Frame Relay encapsulation type configuration error
D. DLCI configuration error
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 482
It is known that the routing table of a router has the following two entries. If the router wants to forward
packets with the destination address of 9.1.4.5, the following is said.
The correct thing in the law is ().
A. Select the first item as the best match because the OSPF protocol has a higher priority.
B. Select the second item as the best match because the RIP protocol has a lower value.
C. Select the second item as the best match because the exit is Ethternet0, which is faster than Serial 0.
D. Select the second term as the best match because the route entry is a more accurate match for the
destination address 9.1.4.5
Answer: D
Question: 483
What are the advanced ACLs on Huawei devices that can be used to filter? (multiple choice)
A. Network traffic based on a specific source address

B. Application-specific traffic, such as QQ
C. Network traffic based on a specific destination address
D. Network traffic based on a specific port number
E. Network traffic based on a specific username
Answer: A, C, D
Question: 484
The subnet mask of a network segment 150.25.0.0 is 255.255.224.0, then () is the valid host address in
the network segment. (multiple choice)
A. 150.25.0.0
B. 150.25.1.255
C. 150.25.2.24
D. 150.15.3.30
Answer: B, C
Question: 485
As shown in the figure, RIP runs between R1 and R2, and R1 cannot learn the route of 2.2.2.2/32 or
2.0.0.0/8.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 486
For the description of the PPP link establishment process, the following statement is wrong () (multiple
choice)
A. The Dead phase is also called the physical layer unavailability phase. When both ends of the
communication side detect physical line activation, they will migrate from the Dead phase.
To the Establish phase
B. During the Establish phase, the PPP link negotiates LCP parameters. Negotiation content includes
maximum receiving unit MRU, authentication method, magic
Word options
C. During the Network phase, the PPP link performs NCP negotiation. Select and configure a network
layer protocol through NCP negotiation, and conduct network
Network parameter negotiation
D. After the NCP negotiation is successful, the PPP link will remain in communication and enter the
Terminate phase.
E. PPP link supports half-duplex and full-duplex modes
Answer: D, E
Question: 487
The administrator configures OSPF on a router. However, if the loopback interface is not configured on
the router, the description of the router ID is correct.
().
A. The minimum IP address of the physical interface of the router will become the router ID.
B. The maximum IP address of the physical interface of the router will become the router ID.
C. The IP address of the router management interface will become the router ID.
D. The priority of the router will become the router ID.
Answer: B
Question: 488
A DHCP OFFER packet can carry a DNS address, but can only carry one DNS address.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: B
Question: 489
UDP is connectionless and must use () to provide the reliability of the transmission.
B. Application layer protocol
C. Network layer protocol
Answer: B
Question: 490
You cannot create VLAN 4095 when creating a VLAN rule on a Huawei switch. You cannot delete VLAN 1.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 491
Which of the following forms of DUID can be configured when DHCPv6 is configured in the VRP system?
(multiple choice)
A. DUID-LL
B. DUID-LLT
C. DUID-EN
D. DUID-LLC
Answer: A, B
Question: 492
Refer to the configuration results of the following output, the correct one in the RIP description is ().
A. Automatic summary is on
B. RIP process number is 1
C. The interval for sending RIP route update packets is 30s.
D. The garbage timeout time of the RIP route is 180s.
Answer: C
Question: 493
As shown in the figure, there is a web server in the private network that needs to provide more HTTP
services to the public network users, so the network administrator needs to be at the gateway.
Configure NAT on the router RTA to meet the requirements. The correct configuration to meet the
requirements in the following configurations is ().
A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1] nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1] nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080
C. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1] nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
D. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]] nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080
Answer: A
Question: 494
There are 50 private IP addresses in a company network. The administrator uses NAT technology to
access the public network, and the company has only one public network address.
Which NAT conversion method meets the requirements?
A. Static conversion
B. Dynamic conversion
C. easy-ip
D. NAPT
Answer: C
Question: 495
As shown in the figure, the RTA sends a PADI message to the server A as a PPPOE client. Which of the
following transmission methods will the PADI message use?
A. Unicast
B. Multicast
C. Broadcast
D. Anycast
Answer: C
Question: 496
While improving network reliability, STP can also solve loop problems in switched networks.
A. Correct
B. Error
Answer: A
Question: 497
Which command can be used to display the mapping between network address and DLCI on the router?
B. display fr
C. display map-info
D. display fr brief
Answer: C
Question: 498
192.168.1.127/25 stands for the () address.
A. Host
B. Network
C. Multicast
D. Broadcasting
Answer: D
Question: 499
The Tracert diagnostic tool records the () of each ICMP TTL timeout message, so that the user can be
provided with the message to reach the destination.
IP address.
A. Destination port
B. Source port
C. Destination IP address
D. Source IP address
Answer: D
Question: 500
From the perspective of project cutover, there is no need to back up or adjust the configuration file when
upgrading the VRP system, because the lost files can be retrieved in the recycle bin.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: B
Question: 501
As shown in the broadcast network, OSPF runs on four routers and is in the same area and on the same
network segment. OSPF
A DR and multiple BDRs will be automatically elected to achieve better backup results.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: B
Question: 502
The Layer 2 switch belongs to the data link layer device and can identify the MAC address information in
the data frame, forward the data according to the MAC address, and
Some MAC addresses and corresponding port information are recorded in their own internal MAC
address table.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: A
Question: 503
When two OSPF routers form a TWO WAY-neighbor relationship, the LSDB has completed
synchronization, but the SPF algorithm has not been run.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: B
Question: 504
SNMP packets are carried over TCP.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: B
Question: 505
When RIPv1 is enabled on the Huawei router, the interface that is advertised to the RIP receives the
RIPv1 broadcast packet, the RIPv2 broadcast packet, and the multicast packet by default.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: A
Question: 506
<Huawei>system view -
[Huawei]command privilege level 3 view user save -
The correct statement about the above configuration command is ()
A. Modify the save command of a user to have a permission level of 3

B. Modify the permission level of the save command in the user view to 3
C. Modify the user view command to a permission level of 3, and save the configuration
D. Modify the user's permission level to 3, and save the configuration
Answer: B
Question: 507
Which of the following functions does the Ctrl+Z key combination have in the VRP system? (multiple
choice)
A. Return from the system view to the user view

B. Exit the current view
C. Exit interface view
D. Exit the Console interface view
E. Return from any view to the user view
Answer: A, B, C, D, E
Question: 508
In standard STP mode, which of the following non-root switches forwards the TC set BPDU generated by
the root switch?
A. Root port
B. Backup port
C. Designated port
D. Provisioning port
Answer: C
Question: 509
The following statement about DLCI is correct (). (multiple choice)
A. DLCI only has local significance

B. DLCI is assigned by the DTE side
C. The DLCI range available to the user is 16 1007 -
D. Different physical interfaces can be configured with the same DLCI
Answer: A, D
Question: 510
STP root switch priority range is 0 65536 -
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: B
Question: 511
Network administrators use ping to check network connectivity. Which of the following protocols might
be used in the process?
(multiple choice)
A. ICMP
B. TCP
C. ARP
D. UDP
Answer: A, C
Question: 512
When saving the router's configuration file, which storage medium is usually stored on it?
A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. Boot ROM
Answer: B
Question: 513
When the routers are running in the same OSPF area, the description of their LSDB and routing table is
correct ().
(multiple choice)
A. The link state database obtained by all routers is the same

B. The link state database obtained by each router is different.
C. The routing table of each router is different.
D. The routing tables obtained by all routers are the same.
Answer: A, C
Question: 514
If the broadcast address of a network is 172.16.1.255, then its network address may be ()?
A. 172.16.2.0
B. 172.16.1.253
C. 172.16.1.128
D. 172.168.1.1
Answer: C
Question: 515
The following configuration default routing commands are correct ()
A. [Huawei]ip route static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.1 -

B. [Huawei]ip route static 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 192.168.1.1 -
C. [Huawei Serial0]ip route static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 - -
D. [Huawei]ip route static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
Answer: A
Question: 516
When the packet security mode of IPSec is tunnel mode, the IP address of the intranet host is hidden.
The reason for this is to protect the entire original data.
Package security
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: A
Question: 517
Referring to the configuration of the one-arm route in the following figure, it can be judged that even if
the ARP proxy is not enabled on the sub-interface of R1, between the administrative department and the
finance department Can also visit each other.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: B
Question: 518
As shown in the figure, the network administrator needs to configure static NAT on the RTA so that host A
in the private network can communicate with the public network host C.
Letter, then the following about the configuration of static NAT, the correct is ()
A. [RTA Serial 1/0/1]nat outbound 200.1.1.10 -

B. [RTA Serial 1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.0 -
C. [RTA Serial 1/0/1]nat static global 192.168.1.1 inside 200.1.1.10 -
D. [RTA Serial 1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.1
Answer: D
Question: 519
When the data encapsulation mode of IPSec is tunnel mode, the IP address of the intranet host is
hidden. The reason for this is to protect the entire original packet.
Safety
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: A
Question: 520
<Huawei>system - view
[Huawei]command - privilege level 3 view user save
The correct statement about the above configuration command is ()
A. Modify the user's permission level to 3, and save the configuration.

B. Modify the user view command to a permission level of 3, and save the configuration.
C. Modify the permission level of the save command used by a user to 3
D. Modify the permission level of the save command in the user view to 3
Answer: D
Question: 521
SNMP packets are carried over TCP.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: B
Question: 522
NAT can be implemented in a variety of ways, suitable for different scenarios. For example, dynamic NAT
can translate the server address inside the private network into a public IP address.
Provide services to the public network.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: B
Question: 523
With reference to the following topology and configuration, two routers are connected through a serial
cable. If no Layer 2 protocol is specified, PPP is used by default.
Protocol interconnection
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: A
Question: 524
AAA is an abbreviation for Authentication, Authorization, and Accouting.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: A
Question: 525
The function of InARP is the opposite of that of ARP. The main purpose is to reversely resolve the known
target MAC address to the protocol address of the peer device on the Ethernet.
Including IP address and IPX address.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: B
Question: 526
The biggest advantage of NAPT is its flexibility, that is, it can be used as a source address translation, as
well as a destination address translation, and can also be used as a protocol port.
Conversion.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: B
Question: 527
Refer to the following topology and router configuration. The NAT configuration does not specify a NAT
global address pool, so address translation cannot be performed correctly.
A. Yes
B. Wrong
Answer: B
Thank You for Purchasing H12-211 PDF
Test Your Preparation with

Practice Exam Software
Use Coupon “20OFF” for extra 20% discount on purchase of Practice
Test Software. Practice Exam Software helps you validate your
preparation in simulated exam environment.
Download Free Practice Test Demo from Here:
https://www.dumpsacademy.com/H12-211.html
H12-211
Number: H12-211
Passing Score: 800
Time Limit: 120 min
File Version: 1
H12-211
https://t.me/catinit
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Exam A
QUESTION 1
An administrator currently manages AR2200 devices in the network through a single password, however the
company wishes to introduce another two administrators and provide unique user credentials and privilege
levels for telnet access to the network devices.
What action can be taken? (Choose three)
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
Explanation/Reference:
QUESTION 2
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 3
configured using the command “authorization-mode hwtacacs if-authenticated”.
Which of the following statements regarding this command are true? (Choose three).
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 4
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are correct regarding the configuration of
the ACL on RTA? (Choose two).

B. Packets from network 172.16.1.0/24 will be denied.
C. Packets from network 172.17.1.0/24 will be denied.
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 5
The network administrator wants to improve the performance of network transmission, what steps can the
administrator take? (Choose two)

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 6
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255

C. duplex auto
D. undo duplex
Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 7
The network administrator wishes to transmit data between two end stations. The network interface cards of
both devices operates at 100Mbps however one supports half duplex while the other uses full duplex mode.

B. The end stations can communicate, but data may be lost during transmission of large amounts of traffic.
D. The end stations can communicate, but speed is different during transmission of large amounts of traffic.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 8
An Ethernet port can work one of three duplex modes, whereas an Optical Ethernet port only supports one
single mode.
Which of the following represents this mode?
A. Full-duplex
B. Half-duplex
C. Auto-negotiation
D. Simplex
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 9
A. Acknowledgement
B. Buffering
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
D. Windowing
Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 10
Refer to the capture output. The administrator has captured three packets in the network. Which statement
regarding the captured packets is incorrect?

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 11
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 12
A. The maximum value of TTL is 65535.

consume a lot of bandwidth.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
D. TTL value will be decremented as a packet is passed through the network devices such as hub, LAN switch
and router.
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 13
A. Destination port
B. Source port
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 14
A. The ping 127.0.0.1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly inserted into the
host’s Ethernet port.
D. The command “ipconfig /release” can be used to check connectivity problems between the host and the
local gateway.
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 15
A network administrator uses the ping command to check for points of failure in the network.
Which protocols will be used during this process? (Choose two)
A. ICMP
B. TCP
C. ARP
D. UDP
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Explanation
QUESTION 16
A network administrator uses the ping command to test connectivity to the destination 10.0.0.2 on a Huawei AR
series router.
Which statement regarding the output is correct?

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 17
source is on the same segment as the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the
source.
B. When a router receives data on an interface, and the router’s IP address matches the destination IP of the
data, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the source.
the router.
source is on a different segment from the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to
the source
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 18
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
A. Route
B. Netstat
C. Tracert
D. Send
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 19
How many probe packets are sent for each TTL value by default when "tracert" is used to detect the path along
which packet is sent from source to destination?
A. 3
B. 4
C. 6
D. 8
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 20
On VRP platform, which of the following parameters can be used together with the "ping" command to specify
the source address of an echo request message?
A. -a
B. -s
C. -d
D. -n
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 21
A router functioning as a Proxy receives an ARP request packet, but finds that the destination address in the
packet is not intended for itself. In this case, what will the router do? (Choose two)

C. Forward its MAC address to the ARP request sender after finding that a route to the destination address is
available.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 22
What will the destination MAC address be at the moment a frame is transmitted by the host, when the router is
the IP destination?

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 23
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 24
Refer to the graphic.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
The administrator has configured an IP address for Host A and Host B, but had forgotten to configure a default
gateway.
What effect will this have on the hosts?
C. Hosts will be unable to communicate unless arp-proxy is enabled on the router.
D. The host will be unable to reach neither the local nor remote network destinations.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 25
The administrator uses the ping command on the host to test connectivity to the website www.huawei.com.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 26
An administrator connects two switches together in a local enterprise network. The ports of one switch support
Fast Ethernet, while the ports of the other switch support Gigabit Ethernet. Hosts connected to one switch are
able to communicate, however communication between the two switches fails.
What is the possible reason for this?

B. One port is supporting auto-negotiation, while auto-negotiation is disabled on the port of the other switch.
C. The port of one switch is operating using half duplex mode, while the port of the other switch is using full
duplex mode.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
QUESTION 27

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 28
Which of the following statements about collision domains and broadcast domains are correct? (Choose three)

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 29
A. The switch learns MAC addresses automatically.

B. The layer-3 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted.
D. The layer-2 LAN switch operates at data link layer.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 30
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 31
Which of the following are routed protocols? (Choose all that apply.)
A. IP
B. OSPF
C. BGP
D. IPX
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 32
A. source address
B. next hop
D. cost
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 33
A. Slow convergence
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 34
The administrator cannot use telnet to manage the AR2200. The administrator is able to verify connectivity to
the router and has been informed that other administrators have no difficulties using telnet.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Which statements describe the possible reasons for this problem? (Choose all that apply.)

B. The user’s privilege level has been changed to 0.
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 35
A user logged into a VRP supported device through telnet, but when attempting to configure the device, found
that he is unable to use the system-view command to enter the system-view.
What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose two)
A. The device’s VTY interface only provides permission for some telnet users to run the system-view
command.
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 36
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 37
On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command “ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0” has been
configured.
Which following statements are correct? (Choose two).

Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 38
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
The host has a problem establishing a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0. Which of
the following steps can be used to help the administrator identify the problem? (Choose two)

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 39

B. Through Telnet
D. Through FTP
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 40
Which of the following must be used to establish the configuration environment when a router is powered on
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
for the first time?
A. SSL
B. SSH
C. Console port
D. Telnet
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 41
On VRP platform, the command lines are classified into four levels in increasing priority: Visit level, Monitoring
level, Configuration level, and Management level. At which level, the operator is permitted to configure service
but is not permitted to operate the file system?
A. Visit level
B. Monitoring level
D. Management level
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 42
On Huawei VRP platform, which of the following can be used to invoke the history command saved by the
command line interface? (Choose two)

C. Ctrl+P
D. Ctrl+U
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 43
The administrator wishes to change name of the router. Under which view should the administrator be in order
to achieve this?
A. User-view
B. System-view
C. Interface-view
D. Protocol-view
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 44
<Huawei>system-view
A. The command is used to adjust the size of the history command buffer.
D. Once configured, commands totaling up to 20 bytes can be saved in the buffer.
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 45
(Choose all that apply.)
A. Reset the saved configuration.

B. Clear the current configuration.
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 46
An administrator has been requested to replace the configuration file of a router in the network. The
administrator has been instructed that after logging into the router, he must first permanently erase the current
configuration file config.zip from the system.
Which command should he use to achieve this?

C. reset config.zip
D. clear config.zip
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Explanation
QUESTION 47
A. System-view
B. Router
C. Quit
D. User-view
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 48
A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. BootROM
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 49
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 50
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 51
<Huawei>
Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you perform configurations
when Auto-Config is running, the DHCP, routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost. Do you want to stop
Auto-Config? [y/n]:
Refer to the output. When the administrator first starts the router, a system notice is displayed, however after
rebooting this router, the notice disappeared. What is the reason for this? (Choose all that apply.)
B. The administrator has configured the device and saved the configuration, causing the notice to disappear.
C. The administrator selected ‘n’ and did not save the configuration.
Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 52
An end system is unable to communicate with a DHCP server following the startup process.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Which IP address may be used by the client?
A. 0.0.0.0
B. 127.0.0.1
C. 169.254.2.33
D. 255.255.255.255
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 53
Refer to the configuration output. The administrator wishes to configure the DHCP server pool in order to
assign an IP address to the customer’s terminal device.
Which command should be included in the configuration to provide the minimal lease period for IP addresses?

B. lease day 1
C. lease 24
D. lease 0
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 54
A DHCP server has been established in the enterprise network. After the client has obtained an IP address
from the DHCP server, the user decided to modify the IP address manually.
In what way may this affect the enterprise network? (Choose two).

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
QUESTION 55
A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An administrator
discovers however that some hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the DHCP server’s
address pool.
What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose three).
A. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is allocating IP addresses to hosts that happen to be within
a closer proximity than the authorized DHCP server.
D. All addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned.
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 56
Refer to the configuration output. Following configuration, a host is connected to the interface Gigabit Ethernet
0/0/1 of the router. Which IP address will the client obtain?

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 57
A DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) in DHCPv6 can be configured in VRP using which formats? (Choose two).
A. DUID-LL
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
B. DUID-LLT
C. DUID-EN
D. DUID-LLC
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 58
Which of the following statements about the information contained in a Database Description packet are true?
(Choose three)

Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 59
A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 60

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
QUESTION 61
A. LMI protocol
B. ARP protocol
C. RARP protocol
D. InARP protocol
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 62
addresses?
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 63
A. ARP protocol
B. RARP protocol
C. InARP protocol
D. Map protocol
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 64
A. Local DLCI
B. Remote DLCI
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 65

Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 66

B. local DLCI
D. remote node ID
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 67
Which of the following commands can be used to display mapping relationship between network address and
DLCI?
B. display fr
D. display fr brief
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 68
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255

Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 69
An administrator wishes to update the VRP software of company’s AR2200 router. How can this be achieved?
(Choose three)
C. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP server.
D. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP client.
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 70
An administrator wishes to implement new features in the network, but the VRP version of one AR2200 router
is out of date. The administrator needs to upgrade the VRP software.
Which of the following options regarding file transfer is false?
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 71
An administrator discovered he/she was unable to use TFTP to transfer files to the router.
Which of the following describes the likely reason for this?

1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 72
FTP may be used to upgrade a router's VRP image.
Which of the following transmission modes should be used to achieve this?
A. binary mode
B. ASCII mode
C. byte mode
D. letter mode
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 73
A client failed to transfer a file to the FTP server, but found the IP connectivity was without problem. The client
assumed that the problem was with the port configuration.
The blocking of which ports would likely cause this problem? (Choose two)
A. 21
B. 80
C. 20
D. 50649
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 74
When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the data link layer encapsulation type
of a serial interface as HDLC?
C. hdlc enable
Correct Answer: B
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 75
2031:0000:720C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:130B? (Choose two).
A. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E0:839A:130B
B. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B
C. 2031::720C::9E0:839A:130B
D. 2031:0:720C::9E0:839A:130B
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 76
A. fe80:13dc::1/64
B. ff00:8a3c::9b/64
C. ::1/128
D. 2001:12e3:1b02::21/64
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 77
The IPv6 address architecture does not include which of the following address types?
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 78
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 79
Interface G0/0/1 on RTA contains a MAC address of 00e0-fc03-aa73 and is configured with the IPv6 address
2001::2E0:FCFF:FE03:AA73. Which method is most likely to have been used to configure the interface IPv6
address?
A. DHCPv6
B. Auto-link
C. ARP
D. EUI-64
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 80
In a small network supporting IPv6, a network administrator wishes implement RIPng.
Which of the following commands should be used to enable this protocol?
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 81
A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentication
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Explanation
QUESTION 82
The network administrator has decided to configure link aggregation in the enterprise network.
Which of the following represent advantages of link aggregation? (Choose three)
A. Load balancing.
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 83
The Eth-Trunk frame forwarding mechanism used to prevent changes in the data sequence forwards frames
based on which of the following parameters?
A. The same source or destination IP address.

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 84

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 85
The network administrator wishes to forward data over an Eth-trunk, however associated member interfaces
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
operate at different rates. In terms of the resulting behavior, which of the following is true?

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 86
The network administrator attempts to add interface G0/0/1 on Switch A to Eth-trunk 1, however the command
fails.
Which of the following may cause this?

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 87
administrator is required to configure NAT on RTA.
Which configuration should be used?
Correct Answer: A
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 88
A. Static route
B. Dynamic route
C. Route import
D. NAT
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 89
Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multicast mode are true? (Choose
three)

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 90

Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 91
1.1.1.1?
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 92
A. OSPFv1
B. OSPFv2
C. OSPFv3
D. OSPFv4
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 93
The administrator wishes to configure OSPF on a router in the network however the router has no loopback
interface.
Which value will be used as the router ID?

C. The IP address of the management interface.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 94
Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Explanation
QUESTION 95

D. Only NBMA or Broadcast networks need to elect DR.
Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 96
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 97
A. neighbors
B. LSDB
C. LSA
D. adjacency
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 98
A. 0
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
B. 1
C. 10
D. 100
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 99
A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentication
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 100
Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements is correct when this router forwards the packet to the
destination host 9.1.4.5?
A. The router selects the first entry to match the destination address of the packet because the preference of
OSPF is higher than the preference of RIP.
B. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the cost of RIP
is lower than that of OSPF.
C. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the outgoing
interface is an Ethernet interface. The forwarding speed of an Ethernet interface is faster than the
forwarding speed of a serial interface
D. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the router will
match the most specific address.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 101
According to the default value of route preference on the VRP platform, which of the following represent the
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
correct sequence for direct route, static route, RIP and OSPF if they are listed from high preference to low
preference?

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 102
TWOWAY state with the peering router.
What can be understood from this information? (Choose two)

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 103
If PPP authentication fails, which type of packet will be sent to the authenticated peer by the authenticator?
A. Authenticate-Ack
B. Authenticate-Nak
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 104
interfaces are different, in PPP LCP negotiated stage, what will happen?

1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 105
A serial interface of a Huawei router currently using HDLC needs to assign PPP as the encapsulation protocol.
C. enable ppp
D. address ppp
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 106
When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the PPP authentication method as
PAP?
A. ppp pap
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 107
A. DES
B. MD5
C. AES
D. None
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
QUESTION 108
Two routers have established a point-to-point network using PPP. The administrator has configured the routers
to run OSPF in the same area with the same router ID, what behavior will occur as a result of the
configuration?
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 109
The PPPoE session establishment process can be divided into which stages? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Discovery stage
B. DHCP stage
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 110
connections with multiple PPPoE clients on one Ethernet port.
How does PPPoE differentiate between each connection?
A. MAC address.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 111
[Huawei]rip 1
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255

B. network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
D. network 192.168.1.0
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 112
A RIP router receives the routing update information from its neighbor.
Which of the following statements regarding routing update are correct? (Choose three)
A. The received route that is not in the routing table will be added only when its hop count value is less than
16.
B. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is the
router's neighbor and the cost value is smaller.
C. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is not the
D. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is the
router's neighbor and the cost value has been changed.
Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 113

B. show rip
C. display rip
D. display this rip
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 114
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Refer to the debug output. Following configuration of R2, the administrator discovers that the behavior is not as
expected and performs debugging. Based on the output from the debug, what is the source of the problem?

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 115
When a network administrator configures STP in the network, BPDU begin to be sent by switch. Which of the
following statements regarding the BPDU frame are correct?
A. A BPDU uses the IEEE 802.3 standard frame type

B. A BPDU uses the Ethernet II standard frame type
C. The BPDU frame’s control field is 3
D. The destination MAC address field of a BPDU frame is a broadcast address
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 116
In the case of Huawei router, the Tracert command uses UDP to encapsulate probe packets.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
QUESTION 117
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 118
Assuming all STP enabled switches have the same bridge priority. The MAC address of switch A is 00-e0-fc-
00-00-40, the MAC address of switch B is 00-e0-fc-00-00-10, the MAC address of switch C is 00-e0-fc-00-00-
20, and the MAC address of switch D is 00-e0-fc-00-00-80.
Which switch will be elected as the root switch?
A. Switch A
B. Switch B
C. Switch C
D. Switch D
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 119
As specified by the RSTP protocol, when a root port fails, which type of port will function as a new root port and
enters the forwarding state without any delay?
A. Forwarding Port
B. Alternate Port
C. Backup Port
D. Edge Port
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 120
Refer to the graphic. Which statements correctly explains the forwarding behavior between RTA and RTE?
(Choose all that apply)
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
B. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0
C. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path from via E0/0/1
D. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S2/0/0
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 121
Refer to the graphic. OSPF is used on four routers that are in the same area and on the same network
segment. In this scenario, OSPF selects one DR and multiple BDRs to ensure backup.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 122
On Huawei devices, you can use the undo summary command to prohibit automatic route summarization of
RIPv2.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 123
Which of the following WLAN standards support operation in the 5GHz range? (Choose all that apply)
A. 802.11a
B. 802.11b
C. 802.11g
D. 802.11n
Correct Answer: AD
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 124
According to the topology and configuration of interconnected interfaces of switches shown in the figure, the
data frame tagged with VLAN 10 can be forwarded correctly between the two switches.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 125
The network administrator creates VLAN 10 and assigns an IP address to VLANIF10. When using the
command “display ip interface brief”, the administrator finds that VLANIF10 is down. What should be done to
enable VLANIF10?
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
A. Use the command “undo shutdown” under the interface view for VLANIF10
B. Assign a physical interface that has either an active of inactive physical state to VLAN 10
C. Assign only a physical interface that has an active physical state to VLAN 10
D. Add an interface that has an active physical state and a trunk port associated with VLAN 10
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 126
A network administrator wishes to implement VLAN 10 to isolate certain users. It is common however for these
users to often change their physical location. Which of the following VLAN implementations should be used?
A. Port based VLAN assignment

B. Protocol based VLAN assignment
C. MAC based VLAN assignment
D. IP subnet based VLAN assignment
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 127
Refer to the graphic. GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 on the switch are configured as hybrid interfaces. Which of the
following statements are true? (Choose all that apply)
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
A. The administrative department and the finance department cannot communicate with each other because
the VLANs of the two departments are different.
B. The data frames sent by the administrative department carry tagged VLAN 20 on the switch.
C. On the switch, the data frames sent by the finance department carry tagged VLAN 20.
D. The switch can be a Layer 2 or Layer 3 switch because communications do not need to be transmitted
through a Layer 3 gateway.
E. If GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 on the switch are changed to trunk ports, the administrative department and
finance department can communicate with each other.
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 128
On the VRP, what is the function of the “interface vlanif <vlan-id>” command?
A. It is used to create a VLANIF interface

B. It is used to create a VLANIF interface and enter the VLANIF interface view
C. It is used to configure a VLAN for a VLANIF interface
D. There is no such command
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 129
On an FR network, the DLCI identifies a virtual circuit on an interface. The DLCI must be unique during
planning and deployment.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
QUESTION 130
SNMP packets are encapsulated in TCP packets.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 131
In OSPFv3, router IDs can be used automatically generated by the system.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 132
There are two routers (RTA and RTB) between the source device and destination device. The Tracert
command is used to detect the path between the two devices. During detection of the first hop (RTA), the
source device sends a UDP packet with a TTL of 1 to an interface with a large interface number on the
destination device. The TTL turns to 0 when the packet arrives at RTB, upon which RTA sends an ICMP
______ message to the source device.
A. Time Exceeded.
B. Echo Request.
C. Echo Reply.
D. Port Unreachable.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 133
Which of the following statements are true about ICMP messages? (Multiple Choice)
A. ICMP messages can record time, including the original time, packet receiving time, and packet sending
time.
B. ICMP messages are encapsulated in IP packets but not at the transport layer.
C. ICMP messages include error messages, control messages, request/response messages, and update
messages.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
D. ICMP does not support redirection.
E. ICMP messages cannot be used to detect a path’s MTU.
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 134
If a network’s broadcast address is 172.16.1.255, which of the following addresses can be the network
address?
A. 172.16.2.0
B. 172.16.1.253
C. 172.16.1.128
D. 172.16.1.1
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 135
In RSTP, a backup port can replace a faulty root port.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 136
Which of the following statements about static route preference on Huawei devices is false?
A. Static route preference ranges from 0 to 255.

B. Default static route preference is 60.
C. Static route preference is either internal or external. Administrators can modify external preferences.
D. If static route preference is 255, the route cannot be used.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 137
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
implements the command silent-interface s0/0/1 on RTA. What effect will this command have on the network?
(Multiple Choice)
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 138
In an RIP process on a Huawei device, which of the following configurations are correct for advertising network
10.1.1.1/30? (Multiple Choice)
A. network 10.1.1.0
B. undo summary
network 10.1.1.0
C. version 2
undo summary
network 10.0.0.0
D. undo summary
network 10.1.0.0
E. network 10.0.0.0
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 139
The following configuration commands implement route backup on RTA for a route to the same destination
10.1.1.0.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: B
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 140
Refer to the command output. Which statement is true regarding this command?
A. The configuration represents a static route to the 192.168.1.1 network

B. The configuration represents a static route to the 10.0.12.0 network.
C. The preference value of this configured route is 100.
D. If the router has learned the same destination network via a dynamic routing protocol, the static route will
always take precedence.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 141
Which of the following network types does OSPF support? (Multiple Choice)
A. Point-to-Point.
B. Broadcast.
C. Non-Broadcast Multi-Access.
D. Point-to-Multipoint.
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 142
Refer to the configuration output. Which following statements are correct? (Multiple choice)
A. VLAN 1 cannot pass over interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1.

B. VLAN 1 can pass over interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1.
C. Prior to changing the link-type to access, the command “undo port trunk allow-pass vlan all” must be used
to renew the default configurations.
D. Prior to changing the link-type to access, the command “undo port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 to 4096” must be
used to renew the default configurations.
Correct Answer: AD
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 143
Refer to the graphic, after the ping 10.1.1.2 command is executed on R1, LSW1 receives a tagged data frame
from VLAN 10 on LSW2.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 144
Which of the following statements is true about the PPP configuration and deployment?

B. PPP supports both CHAP and PAP authentication.
C. PPP cannot change the keepalive time.
D. PPP does not support bidirectional authentication.
Correct Answer: B
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 145
According to the following topology and configuration, R1 and R2 are connected through low-speed serial
cables and PPP is used to encapsulate data link layer packets. When the Holdtime values of R1 and R2 are
different, PPP negotiation and communication fail.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 146
A. TCP, Data and ESP Trailer.

B. ESP, TCP and Data.
C. ESP, TCP, Data and ESP Trailer.
D. ESP, TCP, Data, ESP Trailer and ESP Auth.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 147
Which SNMP version focuses on two main aspects, namely security and administration. The security aspect is
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
addressed by offering both strong authentication and data encryption for privacy. The administration aspect is
focused on two parts, namely notification originators and proxy forwarders.
A. SNMPv1
B. SNMPv2
C. SNMPv2c
D. SNMPv3
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 148
Which of the following route entries can be aggregated into 10.0.0.24/29? (Choose all that apply.)
A. 10.0.0.25/30
B. 10.0.0.23/30
C. 10.0.0.26/30
D. 10.0.0.22/30
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 149
According to the configuration of single-armed routing in the following figure, the administrative department and
finance department can communicate with each other even the proxy ARP is disabled on the subinterface on
R1.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 150
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
In the private network, RTA dynamically assigns a public address from the address pool to hosts
without port translation. Host C wishes to access the public network while addresses are assigned to Host A
and Host B. What will occur as a result?
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 151
Both switches are operating using STP. With exception to those shown, all other default parameters have been
maintained. Which port will be blocked?
A. Port G0/0/1 of switch A.

B. Port G0/0/2 of switch B.
C. Port G0/0/1 of switch B.
D. Port G0/0/2 of switch A.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 152
Layer 2 switches are data link layer devices that identify MAC addresses of Layer 2 data frames and forward
Layer 2 data frames based on MAC addresses. In addition, they record mappings between MAC addresses
and interfaces in the MAC address table.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 153
How can the default route be generated? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Manually configured.
B. Automatically generated by the router.
C. Generated by dynamic routing protocols.
D. Generated by link layer protocols.
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 154
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
The routing table includes direct routes and static routes and the preference of the direct routes cannot be
changed.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 155
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Host A and Host B use VLAN routing to facilitate communication. When interface G0/0/1.2 of RTA receives a
frame from Host B, what will RTA do?
A. RTA will immediately forward the frame via interface G0/0/1.1.

B. RTA remove the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame.
C. RTA will remove the VLAN tag and add a new tag for VLAN10 before forwarding the frame.
D. RTA will discard the frame.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 156
On an FR network, when the fr inarp command is executed, the interface where static address mapping entries
have been configured sends an Inverse ARP Request packet to the remote device to replace the static
address mapping entries.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
QUESTION 157
Which of the following fields are contained in an ARP packet?
A. Source Hardware Address

B. Hardware Type
C. Source Protocol Address
D. Operation Code
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 158
Which of the following can be displayed on the Versatile Routing Platform (VRP) to indicate that GE port 2 on
subcard 0 in slot 3 of a router?
A. interface GigabitEthernet 3/2/0

B. interface GigabitEthernet 3/0/2
C. interface Ethernet 3/0/2
D. interface XGigabitEthernet 3/0/2
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 159
When a network engineer enters a command, the following information is displayed:
Error: Unrecognized command found at '^' position. Which of the following statements is true about such
information?
A. The parameter type is incorrect.

B. The entered command is incomplete.
C. The entered parameter is not specified.
D. No keyword is found.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 160
In RSTP mode, interfaces in the Discarding state discard received data frames but maintain the MAC address
table based on received data frames.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 161
The MAC address table of a switch is as follows. If the switch receives a data frame whose destination MAC
address is 5489-9885-18a8 from Eth0/0/2, which of the following statements is true?
A. The data frame is forwarded through Eth0/0/2.

B. The data frame is flooded.
C. The data frame is forwarded through Eth0/0/1.
D. The data frame is discarded.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 162
What is the total length of the port ID in STP?
A. 4 bits
B. 8 bits
C. 2 bits
D. 16 bits
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
QUESTION 163
ICMP packets do not contain port numbers. Therefore, NAPT cannot be used.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 164
Which of the following protocols can be used on a Layer 2 network with redundant links to prevent loops?
A. UDP
B. VRRP
C. STP
D. ARP
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 165
You can configure a static route on a broadcast interface by specifying the next-hop IP address or outbound
interface.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 166
What are the advantages of OSPF?
A. OSPF supports packet authentication.

B. OSPF can load balance traffic among equal-cost routes.
C. OSPF supports Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR).
D. OSPF supports area partition.
Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
QUESTION 167
Which of the following statements are true about the default route?
A. In a routing table, the route to 0.0.0.0 (with the mask being 0.0.0.0) is the default route.
B. If the destination address of a packet does not match any entry in the routing table, the packet is forwarded
through the default route.
C. The default route can only be manually configured by the administrator.
D. The routing table of any router must contain the default route.
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 168
Which layer of the OSI reference model does a router work at?
A. Application layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 169
On the network shown in the figure, if all routers run OSPF, which router is elected as the BDR?
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
A. Router B
B. Router A
C. Router D
D. Router C
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 170
The output of the following command on router R1 is as follows.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Which of the following statements are true?
A. The router discards the packets destined for 11.0.0.0/8.

B. The packets destined for 12.0.0.0/8 are forwarded through Ethernet0/0/0 on the router.
C. The router forwards the packets destined for 12.0.0.0/8.
D. The packets destined for 11.0.0.0/8 are forwarded through GigabitEthernet0/0/0 on the router.
Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 171
On the network shown in the figure, if all links are Ethernet links and all routers run OSPF, how many DRs will
be elected on the entire network?
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
A. 2
B. 4
C. 3
D. 1
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 172
As shown in the preceding VTY configuration, the user privilege level is set to 3.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 173
As shown in the following figure, switch A and router A are connected through two links. The two links are
aggregated in manual load balancing mode. The aggregation port number is 1. The aggregated link needs to
carry VLAN tag 100. Switch A uses the trunk link.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Which of the following configurations need to be performed on switch A?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
QUESTION 174
What is the total length of the VLAN frame defined by IEEE 802.1Q?
A. 4
B. 3
C. 2
D. 1
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 175
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 176
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Which of the following is/are not included in AAA?
A. Audit
B. Authentication
C. Authorization
D. Accounting
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 177
Which of the following encapsulation modes is/are supported by IPsec VPN?
A. Routing mode
B. Tunnel mode
C. Transport mode
D. Switching mode.
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 178
Which of the following SNMP packets is/are sent by the agent on the managed device to the NMS?
A. Get-Request
B. Response
C. Get-Next-Request
D. Set-Request
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 179
According to the following configuration of Router C, how many global unicast address prefixes are advertised
by Router C?
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
A. 1
B. 4
C. 2
D. 3
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 180
If the MAC address of an interface is 0EE0-FFFE-0FEC, the corresponding EUI-64 address is ( ).
A. 0CE0-FFFF-FEFE-0FEC
B. 0EE0-FFFF-FEFE-0FEC
C. 0EE0-FFFE-FFFE-0FEC
D. 0CE0-FFFE-FFFE-0FEC
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
QUESTION 181
Segment routing-traffic engineering (SR-ТЕ) is a new ТЕ tunneling technology that uses SR as a control
protocol. All nodes of an SR-TE tunnel, including the ingress and transit nodes, must be aware of the tunnel
and complete label distribution and forwarding.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 182
Which area ID is used by OSPFv3 to identify the backbone area?
A. 0
B. 3
C. 2
D. 1
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 183
The output of the “display vlan” command on a switch is as follows.
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
A. When GE0/0/1 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 20, the frames are untagged.
B. When GE0/0/1 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 10, the frames are untagged.
C. When GE0/0/2 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 20, the frames are tagged.
D. Four VLANs are manually created.
Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 184
Which of the following authentication method is more secure for PPP?
A. CHAP.
B. MD5.
C. SSH.
D. PAP.
Correct Answer: A
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Section: (none)
Explanation
1EFB657328D9343266DF00194B7D4255
Sr Des Answer
1 SNMP packets are encapsulated in TCP packets.(True/False) FALSE
SNMPv1 defines five protocol operations. .(True/False) TRUE
2
By default, it takes at least 30 seconds for an STP-enabled port to transition from
TRUE
3 Disabled to Forwarding..(True/False)
For STP, ihe Message Age in the configuration BPDUS sent by the mot bridge is O
TRUE
4 .(True/False)
SR encapsulates the segment list identifying a forwarding path into a data packet header
for transmission.After receiving the data packet, the receive end parses the segment list.
lf the top SID of the segment ist belongs to the local node, the top SID is popped out, and
TRUE
then further processing is performed If the top SID of the segment list does not belong to
the local node, the data packet is forwarded to the next node in equal cost multi
5 choiceple path (ECMP) mode..(True/False)
The aggregation port ofa router can be configured with a routing sub-
TRUE
6 interface..(True/False)
In PPP, you can use the 'ppp chap authentication' command to enable CHAP
FALSE
7 authentication.(True/False)
8 The default bridge priority ofa switch is 32768.(True/False) TRUE
When redundant links exist on a switching network, STP can be used to eliminate
TRUE
9 loops..(True/False)
on the network shown in the following,ospfv3 is enabled on all interface .An adjacency
cannot be established between rtr A and rtr B?
TRUE
10
Which of the following items can be translated by NAPT?(single)
A. MAC Address + Port Number.
B. IP Address + Port Number.
B
C. Only MAC Address.
D. Only IP Address.
11
Which of the following packet is is sent by a DHCPV6 client before it sends a request
packet to the DHCPv6
server?(single)
A. RS
A
B. RA
C, NS
D. NA
12
On a broadcast network with four routers, all the routers run OSPFV3, and the DR
priorities of all the routers are not 0. How many adjacencies are there on the
network?(single)
A.3
C
B.4
C.5
D.6
13
According to the figure, which of the following statements is true?(single)
A. The IP address mask of host A is different from that of host B. Therefore, host A and
host B cannot communicate with each other.
B. Host A can successfully ping host B.
C. The broadcast addresses of host A and host B are the same.
D. Host A and host B can communicate with each other only when the IP addresses of host
A and host B have the same masks.
A
14
Which ofthe following bridge IDs cannot exist in configuration BPDUS sent by a
switch?(single)
A. 0 OU-01-02-03-04-CC
C
B. 2048 00-01-02-03-04-CC
C, 4096 00-O1-02-03-04-CC
15 D. 8192 00-01-02-03-04-CC
Which ofthe following IPv6 addresses is a global unicast address?(single)
A. 2001::12:1
B. FE80::2EO:ZFCFF:FEEF:FEC B
C. FF02::1
D. FFO2:2E0:FCF:FEEF:FEC
16
As shown in the following figure, the IPsec tunnel mode is used. Which ofthe following is
the ESP encrption scope?(single)
A.1
B.2
C.3 A
D.4
17
What is the total length of the VLAN frame defined by IEEE 802.1Q?(single)
A. 1Byte
a. 2Byte D
c, 3Byte
18 D. 4Byte
In the PPP frame format, the Protocol field is 0xc021. What is the protocol?(single)
A. LCP
B. NCP A
C. PAP
19 D. CHAP
If PPP authentication fails, which type of packet will be sent to the authenticated peer by
the authenticator?
A. Authentizate-ACk.
B
B. Authenticate-Nak.
C, Aulhenticate'Reject
20 D. Authenticate-Reply.
What is the decimal value ofthe `Protocol' field in the IPv6 packet header of OSPFv3
packet is? (single)
A. 59
C
B. 69
C. 89
21 D. 92
Which of the following multi cast addresses is used in OSPFv6 to represent all
routers(single)
A.FF02::5
A
B.FF02::6
C.FF02::7
22 D.FF02::8
Which of the following statements regarding the "port trunk allow-pass vlan all"
command is true?(single)
A. The specified port allows all VLAN IDs to pass through.
B. The peer port connected to this port must have the same port trunk allow-pass vlan all
command configured. A
C. The peer device connected to this port can dynamically determine which VLAN IDs are
allowed to pass through.
D. If the port default vlan 3 command is run onthe conneded remote device, VLAN 3 will be
23 blocked between the two devices.
Which of the following options is not a segment routing (SR) label action?(single)
A. push
B. swap
D
C.pop
D.Switch
24
Which of the following statements is true about the backup port in RSTP?(single)
A. A backup port acts as a backup of the designated port and provides a backup path from
the root bridge to the related network segment.
B. A backup port acts as a backup ofthe root port and provides an alternate path from the B
designated bridge to the root bridge,
C. The backup port does not forward user trafhc but learns MAC addresses.
25 D. The backup port forwards user traffic and learns MAC addresses.
The PPPoE client sends a PADI packet to the server, and the server returns a PADO
packet, Which type of frame is a PADO packet? (single)
A. Unicast A
B. multi choicecast
C, Broadcast
26 D. Anycast
How many VLANs are created when using the commands "vlan batch 10 20" and "vlan
batch 10 to 20" ?(single)
A.2 and 2.
D
B.11 and 11
C.11 and 2.
27 D.2 and 11.
On the network shown in ihe figure, if all links are Ethernet links and all routers run
OSPF, how many DRS will be elecled on the entire network?
A.1
B.2
C.3
D.4 D
28
On the network shown in the figure, all routers run OSPF and the cost value is above the
link. Which of the following is the path for Router A to send packets to
10.0.0.0/8?(single)
A. A-B-D
B. A-D
C. A-C-D
D. RA fails to reach 10,0.0.0/8. C
29
Segment routing (SR) is a protocol designed based on ( ) to forward data packets on a
network?(single)
A. Source routing
B. Destination routing A
c. Policy-based routing
D. Routing policy
30
system-view
Refer to the command output, What is the result of the shown command?(single)
B
C. The command adjusts the user view command privilege level to 3, and saves the
configuration
31 D. The command adjusts lhe privilege level ofa user to 3, and saves the configuration,
Which layer of the OSI reference model does a switch work at?(single)
A. Network layer
B. Data link layer B
c. Physical layer
32 D. Transport layer
As shown in the following figure, the router configuration information is as follows.
Which of the following statements is/are correct? (single)
Router A
dotiq termination vid 200
ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0
#
Router B
interface Gigabitethernet/0/0.200
dotiq termination vid 200
ip address I0.0.12.2 255.2S5.255.0 A
#
A. The sub-interface numbers of Router A and Router B are different. Therefore, Router A
and Router B cannot communicate with each other,
B.10.0.12.1 Can ping 10.0.12.2
C. The sub-interface of Router A cannot learn the MAC address of the sub-interface of
Router B.
D. The sub-interface of Router B cannot learn the MAC address of the sub-interface of
Router A
33
If the MAC address of an interface is EEEO-AABB-CD7B, the corresponding EUI-64 address
is ()(single)
A. ECE0-AAFF-FEBB-CD7B
A
B. CCE0-AAFF-FEBB-CD7B
C. EEE0-AAFF-FEBB-CD7B
34 D. CCE0-AABB-FFFE-CD7B
Which of the following commands is used to display the OSPF neighbor relationship
establishment?(single)
C
B. display ospl brief
35 D. display ospf interface
Which of the following authentication modes does/do not require a user name and a
password?(single)
A. authentication-mode hwtacacs
B. authentication-mode local C
C, authentication-mode none
D. authorization-mode hwtacacs
36
How many types of OSPF packets are available?(single)
A.2
B.3
D
C.4
D.5
37
By default, the dead time of an OSPFv3 adjacency on a P2P link is () seconds.(single)
A. 10
B. 20
A
C.30
D. 40
38
Which of the following IPv6 addresses is/are multi choicecast address(es) within the link
range?(multi choice)
a.FF02:1
ALL
b.FF02:2
c.FF12:1
39 d.FF12:2
Which of the following command line views exist on the Versatile Routing Platform
(VRP)?(multi choice)
A. User view
B. System view ALL
C. Protocol view
D. Interface view
40
A DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) in DHCPv6 can be configured in VRP using which
formats?(multi choice)
A. DUID-LL.
B, DUID-LLT. AB
C. DUID-EN.
D. DUID-LLC.
41
Which ofthe following information must be configured for a DHCPV6 relay agent?(multi
choice)
A. DHCPv6 DUID
B, IPv6 address of the DHCPV6 server AB
C. DHCPv6 address pool
D. DNS server address
42
The PPPoE session establishment process can be divided into which stages?(multi choice)
A. Discovery stage.
B, DHCP stage.
AC
C. PPPoE Session stage,
D. PPP conneding stage.
43
As shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows,
Which of the
following statements about the network and configuration is/are true?(multi choice)
Router B
interface SeriaI1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10.0.21.1 255.255.255.0
#
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.0.21.1 0.0.0.0
#
Router A
interface Seria|1/0/0
link-protocol ppp D
ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0
#
area 0.0.0.0
ip address I0.0.12.1 255.255.255.0
A. OSPF neighbor relationships can be established between the two routers.

B. No DR or BDR exists on the network.
C. Router A and Router B have ARP tables.
D. Router A and Router B cannot learn the MAC address of each other's interface.
44
SWA and SWB run RSTP. Which of the following statements are true?(multi choice)
A. G0/0/3 of SWA is a designated port.
B. Go/0/3 of SWB is a backup pon.
C. G0/0/3 of SWB is an alternate port.
D. G0/0/2 of SWA is a designated port.
ALL
45
Which of the following statements about collision domains and broadcast domains are
correct?
. (multi choice)
A. Devices connected to the same Hub form collision domain.
ABD
B. Devices connected to the same hub form a broadcast domain.
C. Devices connected to the same bridge form a collision domain.
D. Devices connected to the same bridge form a broadcast domain.
46 E. Devices connected to the same router form a broadcast domain
Which of the following statements are true aboui the TTL field in an IPv4 header?(multi
choice)
A. The TTL value decreases by 1 each time a packet passes through a Layer 3 device.
B. The TTL field length is 8 bits.
ALL
C. When a routing loop occurs, the TTL value can be used to prevent infinite packet
forwarding
D. The TTL value is in the range from 0 to 255.
47
Which ofthe following commands can be used to query OSPF configurations of a
device?(multi choice)
B. In the OSPF protocol view: display this AB
C, dis ip routing-table
D. display ospf peer
48
One of the reasons that segment routing (SR) is introduced is that traditional LDP has
some restrictions.
Which of the following statements about LDP restrictions are true?(multi choice)
A. LDP does not support automatic label allocation.
BCD
B. LDP supports path computation only based on IGP SPF (minimum cost), not based on
traffic engineigng.
c, LDP path computation depends on an IGP. If the |GP and LDP are not synchronized,
49 black holes are generated,
affecting
Which of services.
the following routing protucols can be used to generate default routes?(multi
choice)
A. Direct routing
B. OSPF BCD
C. OSPFV3
D. Static routing
50
To implement the network layer function on a VLAN interface, which of the following do
you need to
configure for the VLAN interface?(multi choice)
A. IP address
AB
B. Subnet mask
C, MAC address
D. IP prefix
51
Which ofthe following packets are OSPF packets?(multi choice)
A. HELLO
B. LSR ALL
C. LSU
52 D. LSA
A network administrator uses the ping command to check for poinls of failure in the
network. Which
protocols will be used during this process?(multi choice)
A. ICMP.
AD
B. TCP.
C, ARP.
D. UDP.
53
Which ofthe following packet types are DHCPv6 packet types?(multi choice)
A. solicit
B. Advetise
C. Discover AB
D. Offer
54
When two switches are connected through link aggregation, what are the requirements
for the interfaces on the two switches?(multi choice)
A, The physical interface quantities of the interconnected switches are the same.
B. The physical interface rates of the interconnected switches are the same.
c. The duplex made; ofthe physical interface onthe interconnected switches are the same.
ABC
D, The physical interface IDs of the interconnected switches are the same.
E. The models of the optical modules used bythe interconnected switches are the same.
55
Compared with IPv4 headers, IPv6 headers do not contain the IHL field?(True/False)
TRUE
56
The packets returned by the DHCP server to the DHCP client must be unicast
TRUE
57 packets(True/False)
58 The broadcast address of the subnet 192.168.1.0/25 is 192.168.1.128(True/False) FALSE
When a two-way neighbor relationship is set up between two OSPF-enabled routers, it
means the LSDB
synchronization has been completed, but the SPF algorithm has not been performed FALSE
yet.(True/False)
59
By default, it takes atleast 30 seconds for an STP-enabled port to transition from
TRUE
60 Disabled to Forwarding(True/False)
61 If a loop occurs on a switching network, a broadcast storm may occur(True/False) TRUE
As shown in the figure, the host has ARP cache. Host A sends a data packet to host B,
Which of the
following are the destination MAC address and destination IP address of the data
packet?(Single)
A. MAC-A,11.0.12.1 C
B, MAC-B,11.0.12.1
C. MAC-C,11.0.12.1
D. MAC-C 10.0.12.2
62
display startup
MainBoard:
Startup system software; sdl2/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200 cc
Next startup system software: sdli/ar2220 v200r003c00spc200 cc
Backup systernlsoftware for next startup: null
Startup saved-configuration file: null
Next startup saved-configuration
Startup license lile: null
Next stadup license ile: null
file: null
C
Startup voice»fiIes: null
The preceding information is the 'display startup' command output on the AR2200
router. Which of the following statements is false about such information?(Single)
A. The running configuration file is not saved.
B. The system file used for this startup is ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc.
C, The system file for next startup cannot be modified.
D. Vou can run the ‘startup system software <startup-software-name>‘ command to
modify the system file for next
63
Which of the following statements is false about a gratuitous ARP packet?(Single)
A. Gratuitous ARP packets are used to check for duplicate IP addresses. Normally, a host
does not receive an ARP Replypacket after sending an ARP Request packet with the
destination address of its own IP address. If the host receives and ARP Reply packet,
another host has the same IP address,
C
B. Gratuitous ARP packets are used to advertise a new MAC address. lf the MAC address
ofa host changes because its network adapter is replaced, the host sends@gratuitous ARP
packet to notify all hosts of the change before the ARP entry ages out.
C, Gratuitous ARP packets are used to activate gateways when a host is idle,
64 D. Gratuitous ARP packets are used to notify the active/standby switchover of routers in a
VRRP
By group.the dead time of an OSPFV3 adjacency on a P2P link is () seconds(Single)
default,
A. 10
B. 20 D
C, 30
65 D. 40
Which of the following statements is false about OSPF area partition?(Single)
A. The link state databases (LSDBs) of routers are the same in the same OSPF area.
B, OSPF area partition can reduce the LSDB size of the router.
B
C, Area 0 is the backbone area, and other areas must be connected to this area.
D. Only area border routers (ABRS) can function as the autonomous system boundary
66 routers (ASBRs)
The network administrator finds that a port on the switch has learned an MAC address
but cannot forward data frames. What is the state of the port?(Single)
A. Blocking
B, Disabled D
C. Listening
D. Learning
67
Which of the following data packets are the OPSF protocol packets encapsulated
into?(Single)
A. IP packet
B. TCP packet A
C, UDP packet
D. Http packe!
68
Which of the following statements is true about an STP-enabled port in Forwarding
state?(Single)
A. The port forwards user traffic and processes BPDUs.
B, The port only receives and processes BPDUS and does not fonrvard user traffic. A
C, The port does not process BPDUs or forward user traffic.
D. The port creates MAC address entries based on the received user traffic but does not
69 forward user traffic
If an IPv6 host wants that a sent packet can be forwarded by at most 10 routers, which of
the following
parameters in the IPv6 packet header needs to be modified?(Single)
A. Version D
B, Trafic Class
C. Next Header
70 D. Hop Limit
Which command can be used to check the PPPoE client session status?(Single)
A. display ip interface brief.
B.display current-configuraiion. C
C. display pppoe-client session packet.
71 D. display pppoe-client session summary
In the PPPoE discovery stage, the PPPoE server assigns a session-id tothe PPPoE client in
which packet?(Single)
A. PADI.
D
B. PADO.
C, PADR.
72 D. PADS.
An administrator discovered he/she was unable to use TFTP to transfer files to the
router. Which of the following describes the likely reason for this?(Single)
C
B, TCP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
73 D. The usemame and password had been modiiied.
Which of the following port states is not included in Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP)?(Single)
A. Forwarding
D
B, Learning
C, Discarding
74 D. Blocking
Which of the following IPv4 addresses cannot be used by a host to access the lnternet
without nat?(Single)
A. 100.1.1.1
C
B. 200.11 .1
C, 10.1.1.1
75 D. 50.1.1.1
Which of the following commands can be used to view only static routes on the
VRP?(Single)
A. display ip routing-table
D
B. display ip routing-table statistics
C, display ip routing-table verbose
76 D. display ip routing-table potocol static
If the EUI-64 address DC7E-FFFF-FEFF-BCOA is calculated based on a MAC address, what
is the MAC address?(Single)
A. DE7E-FFFF-BCOA
B, DE7E-FFFE-BCOA
C. DC7E-FFFF-BCOA
D. EE7E-FFFE-BCOA
77
As shown in the figure, which of the following network devices can be used to
implement communication between host A and host B?(Single)
C
A. Hub
B. Layer 2 switch
C. Router
D. Hub
78
Which of the following seeviice modules has/have the ACL with the default action of
permit?(Single)
A. Telnet
D
B. HTTP
C. SNMP
79 D.Flow policy
If the network administrator assigns the IPv4 address 192.168.1.1/28 to a host on the
network, how many hosts can be added to the network where the host resides?(Single)
A.12
8.13
C
C.14
D.15
80
[R1]dispIay interface g0/0/0
GigabitEthernet0/0/0 current state : Administratively DOWN
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Which of the following statements about the "display interface g0/0/0' command output
ls true?(Single)
D
A. A cable is incorrectly conneted to Gigabitlithernet 0/0/0.
B, No IP address is conigured for GigabitEthernet 0/0/0.
C. No dynamic routing protocol is enabled on Gigabithernet 0/0/0.
D. Gigabitithernet 0/O/0 is manually disabled by the administrator
81
Which of the following statements is true about root bridge election of STP?(Single)
A. If the bridge priorities of devices are the same, the device with the largest MAC address
becomes the root bridge
B. The device with the largest bridge priority becomes the root bridge. C
C. The device with the smallest bridge priority becomes the root bridge.
D. If the bridge priorities are the same, the device with the largest number of ports
82 becomes the root bridge.
Which of the following transmission modes require(s) clock synchronization between the
two communication parties?(Single)
A. Asynchronous transmission
B
B.Synchronous transmission
C. Wireless transmission
83 D. Data transmission
What is the destination port number ofthe DHCPV6 Advertise packets sent bythe
DHCPV6 server?(Single)
A. 546
B, 547 A
C.548
D. 549
84
RSTP uses the P/A mechanism to speed up switching of the upstream port state to
Forwarding. However, no loop occurs. Why?(Single)
A. Ensure that loops do not occur by blocking its own non-root ports
A
B, The Forward Delay timer is shortened,
C. Election of port roles is accelerated.
85 D. Edge ports are introduced
Apply the following ACL to Telnet. Which of the following statements is/are true?(Single)
acl number 2000
rule 5 deny source 172.16.105.3 0
rule 20 permit
D
#
A. The device whose IP address is 172.16.105.3 can use the Telnet service.
B, The device whose IP address is 172.l6.105.4 can use the Telnet service.
C. The device whose IP address is 172.16.105.5 can use the Telnet service.
D. The device whose IP address is 17Z.16.105.6 can use the Telnet service.
86
In STP, which of the following items may affect the selection of the root switch?(multi
choice)
A. Switch priority.
B. Switch port ID.
AD
C. Switch interface bandwidth,
D. Switch Mac address.
E. Switch IP address.
87
Which of the following modes are supported by link aggregation?(multi choice choice)
A. Manual load balancing mode
B. LACP mode
C, Hybrid mode AB
D. Manual active/standby mode
88
The network administrator has decided to configure link aggregation in the enterprise
network. Which of the following represent advantages of link aggregation?(multi choice)
A. Load balancing.
B. Improved bandwidth. ABD
89
Which of the following port status may exist on an STP-enabled switch?(multi choice)
A. Forwarding
B. Listening
ABD
C.Discarding
D. Disabled
90
Which of the following packet types are OSPFV3 packet types?(multi choice)
A. Hello packet
B. Database Description (DD) packet ALL
C. Link State Request (LSR) packet
91 D. Link State Update (LSU) packet
As shown in the ligure, STP is enabled the switches. After the network is stable, which of
the following
statements are true?(multi choice)
A. SWA is the root bridge on the network.
B. SWB is the root bridge on the network.
C, The two ports of SWB are in Forwarding state,
D. The two ports of SWC are in Forwarding state AC
92
Which of the following network types are supported by OSPF?(multi choice)
A. Broadcast
B, Point to-point (P2P)
ABCD
C, NBMA
D. Point to-multipoint (P2MP)
93
Which of the following authentication methods are supporteded for Telnet users?(multi
choice)
A. Password authentication, AB
B. AAA local authentication.
C, MD5 authentication,
94 D. No aulhentication.
Which of the following are the features of the default VLAN setting in a switch
configuration?(multi choice)
A. The default VLAN cannot be deleted manually.
B. By default, all ports on switches are member ports of a default VLAN, AB
C, A default VLAN must be created before a port is allocated to a VLAN.
D. The IP address conflgured for a swltch ls applled oniy to a member port ln the default
95 VLAN.
An ACL rule is as follows. Which of the following IP addresses can be matched by the
permit rule?(multi choice)
rule 5 permit ip source 10.1.1.0 255.0.254.255
A. 9.1.1.1 AD
B. 8.2.2.1
c. 7.1.2.1
96 D. 6.1.3.1
If an Ethernet data frame carries Length/Type = Ox8100, which of the following cannot
be the payload of the data frame?(multi choice)
A. RSTP data frame
AB
B. STP data frame
C. ARP response packet
97 D.OSPF packet
If the network mask is 255.255.240.0, which of the following are valid network
address?(multi choice)
A. 150.150.0.0
AD
B, 150,150.0.8
C, 150.1 50.8.0
98 D. 150.150.16.0
56~ Which of the following storage devices are supported by Huawei router?(multi
choice)
A. SDRAM.
B. NVRAM. ABC
C. Flash,
D. Hard Disk.
99
Which of the following statements about Ethernet sub-interfaces is/are tme?
A. The sub-interface ID must be the same as the VIAN ID.
B, A sub-interface can be bound to multiple VLANs. CD
C, The sub-interface cannot be configured with an IP address.
100 D. The IP addresses for sulrinterfaces must not cn the same network segmenL
In which of the following scenarios does the Forward Delay timer exist?(multi choice)
A. The STP-enabled port transitions from Disabled to Blocking.
B, The STP-enabled port transitions from Blocking to Listening,
C, The STP-enabled port transitions from Listening to Learning. BCD
D. The STP»enab|ed port trans` ions from Learning to Forwarding.
E. The STP-enabled port transitions from Forwarding to Disabled.
101
The data link layer adopts the HDLC encapsulation mode. The IP addresses of the
FALSE
102 communication parties can be in different network segments.(True/False)
Which of the following types of packets is used to carry RA packets for IPv6 stateless
address
autocontiguration?(Single)
A. iCMPv6 A
B.lGMPv6
C. TCPv6
103 D. UPv6
Which of the following statements regarding static routing and dynamic routing is
incorrect?(Single)
A. The static routing can be easily configured and managed on the enterprise network
B. The use of dynamic routing is more convenient for the administrator to manage the
C
network following network
convergence.
C. The static routing can automatically recover when a link failure is encountered.
104 D. Dynamic routing will use more resources than static routes.
Which of the following is/are the characteristic(s) of HDLC?(Multi Choice)
A. HDLC s ports point-to-point links.
B. HDLC does not support IP address negotiation.
ABC
C. HDLC does not support authentication.
D. HDLC supports point-to-multipoint links.
105
The DHCPv6 server also provides configuration information, such as the DNS server
TRUE
106 address, for hosts(True/False)
If Proto of a route displayed in the routing table is OSPF, the preference of the route
TRUE
107 must be 10.(True/False)
108 A DHCP Offer packet can carry only one DNS server address(True/False) FALSE
The MPLS label header is encapsulated between the data link layer header and the
TRUE
109 network layer header.(True/False)
110 In the MPLS domain, the full name of LER is label egress router.(True/False) FALSE
You can configure a static route on a broadcast interface by specifying the next-hop IP
address or outbound TRUE
111 interface.(True/False)
The following figure shows the network topology and OSPF area partition. Routers R2,
R3, and R4 are OSPF
ABRS but R1 is not.(True/False)
TRUE
112
When redundant links exist on a switching network, STP can be used to eliminate
loops.(True/False) TRUE
113
The IPv6 address 2001:ABEF:224E:FFE2:BCCO:CD00:DDBE:8D58 cannot be
TRUE
114 abbreviated(True/False)
In which of the following states can an STP-enabled port transition to the Forwarding
state directly?(Single)
A. Blocking
D
B. Disabled
C, Listening
115 D. Learning
Which of the following statements is the function of OSPFv3 LSUs during adjacency
establishment?(Single)
A. OSPFV3 LSUs are used to send the required LSAs tothe peer router.
B. OSPFv3 LSUs are used to request the LSAs that are not included in the local LSDB.
C, OSPFVS LSUs are used to describe the local LSDB.
D. OSPFV3 LSUs are used to discover and maintain neighbor relationships.
116
What is the number range of a basic ACL?(Single)
A. 2000-2999
B. 3000-3999
A
C, 4000-4999
D. 6000-6031
117
Which of the following statements about node segments is false?(Single)
A. Node segments are special prefix segments.
B. A node segment is used to identify a specific node.
C, The node SID must be different from the prefix SID of the node. C
D. When an IP address is configured for a loopback interface of a node, the prefix SID ofthe
node is the node SID
118
What is the protocol number of OSPF packets at the network layer?(Single)
A.0
B.1
D
C..6
D. 89
119
What is the TPID value defined by IEEE 8O2.lQ?(Single)

A. 0xB100
B. 0x82D0 A
C. 0x9100
D. 0x7200
120
The LACP priority is shown in the figure. Switch A and switch B adopt link aggregation in
LACP mode, all interfaces are added to the link aggregation group (LAG), and the
maximum number of active ports is set to 3. Which port of switch A is not an active
port?(Single)
A. G0/0/0
B. G0/0/1
C. G0/0/2
D. G0/0/3
D
121
A switch receives a VLAN tagged frame, but the destination MAC address can' t be found
in the switch’ s MAC address table, how will the switch react? (Single)
A. The switch will broadcast this frame to all ports.
B
B. The switch will broadcast this frame to all ports in this VLAN.
C. The switch will broadcast this frame to all access ports in this VLAN.
122 D. The switch will discard this frame.
Which of the following is not the reason why RSTP can increase the convergence
speed?(Single)
A. P/A mechanism
B
B. Edge port
C. Quick transition between root port states
123 D. The Forward Delay timer is canceled.
What of the following statements is correct regarding Access Control List types and
ranges?(Single)
A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999.
C
B. An advanced ACL value ranges from 3000-4000.
C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999.
124 D. An interface ACL value ranges 100D-2000.
Which of the following data packets are the OPSF protocol packets encapsulated
into?(Single)
A. IP packet
B. TCP packet A
C, UDP packet
D. HTTP packet
125
The following command output is displayed on an STP port on a switch, Which of the
following statements is false?(Single)
[Huawei]disp|ay stp interface Ethemet O/0/1
-------[GIST Global lnfo][Mode STP]»----~
CIST Bridge :32768.4c1f-cc46-4618
Contig Times :Hello 4s MaxAge 20s FwDly 155 MaxHop 20
Active Times :Hello 25 MaxAge 20s FwDly 15s MaxHop 20
CIST Root/ERPC :0 .4c1f-ccf7-3214 / 200000 D
CIST RegRoot/IRPC :32768.4c1f-cc46-4618 / 0
A. The interval at which the port sends configuration BPDUS is 2 seconds.
B. The Max Age timer for configuration BPDUs is set to 20 seconds.
C. The Forward Delay timer is set to 20 seconds.
D. The switch is not a root bridge.
126
Which of the following packets is used by the DHCPv6 client to respond to the Advertise
packet sent by the DHCPv6 server?(Single)
A. Request
A
B. Offer
C. Advertise
127 D. Reply
IPv6 can also be called ()(Single)
A. IPng
B. iP+
A
C. Ripng
D. NextIP
128
Which of the following descriptions regarding the STP forwarding state is
incorrect?(Single)
A. A port in a forwarding stale can receive BPDU.
B
B. A port in a forwardirng state does not learn the source MAC address of a frame.
C. A port in a forwarding state can forward frames.
129 D. A pori in a fonnlarding state can send BPDU.
Which of the following statements is true about the Forward Delay timer of STP?(Single)
A. Improve the STP convergence speed.
B. Reduce the interval for sending BPDUS.
C. Prevent temporary loops.
C
D. Delay is required when a port transitions between Blocking and Disabled.
E. Improve the configuration BPDU lifetime, ensuring that the configuration BPDUS can be
forwarded to more switches
130
Which of the following protocols is not a file transfer protocol?(Single)
A. FTP
B. TFTP D
C. SFTP
131 D. HTTP packet
An administrator wishes to configure a floating static route, In order to successfully
achieve this, which
operation should be performed?(Single)
A. The adminstrator is required to configure a different preference values for the primary
static route and floating static
route. A
B. The administrator is only required to configure two static routes.
C. The administrator is required to configure different route tags for the primary static
route and floating static route.
D. The administrator is required to configure a diferent costs metric forthe piimary static
132 route and floating static route
Which of the following fields is not included in the OSPF Hello packet?(Single)
A. Hello Interval
B. Neighbor D
C. Network Mask
133 D. sysname
What is the value of the Flag field in the PPP frame format?(Single)
A. 0x7E
B. 0x8E A
C. 0xFF
134 D. 0xEF
The DHCPV6 sewer adds the stateful configuration flag (O) to an RA packet. If O is set to
1, which of the
following statements is true?(Single)
A. DHCPV6 stateful address configuration is enabled on the client.
B. IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration is enabled on the client. A
C. The client needs to use stateful DHCPVG to obtain other network configuration
parameters.
D. The client needs to use stateless DHCPv6 to obtain other network configuration
135 parameters.
To provide the information about the IP addresses that a user packet traverses along the
path to the
destination, which of the following does Tracert record in each expired ICMP TTL
packet?(Single)
D
A. Destination port.
B. Source port.
C. Destination IP address.
136 D. Source IP addess.
In the PPP frame format, the Protocol field is 0xC023_ What is the protocol?
A. LCP
B. NCP
C
C. PAP
D. CHAP
137
In the PPP frame format, the Protocol field is 0xC223_ What is the protocol?
A. LCP
B. NCP
D
C. PAP
D. CHAP
138
According to the VLAN frame format defined in IEEE 802.1Q, how many bits does a VLAN
ID contain?
A. 6
B. 8 A
C. 10
D. 12
139
According to the VLAN frame format defined in IEEE 802.1Q, how many bits does a VLAN
ID contain?
A. 6
B. 8 D
C. 10
D. 12
140
What action does an access port take in the process of sending VLAN frames?
A. The access port sends tagged frames,
B. The access port strips the VLAN tag and forwards the frame.
C. The access port exchanges the VLAN tag of the inbound and outbound port of the frame B
before forwarding the
frame.
141 D. The access port attaches its PVID information to the frame.
Which of the following is the default port number of the Telnet server?
A. 21
B. 22 C
C. 23
142 D. 24
How does an access port process data frames?(Single)
A. The access port sends tagged packets.
B. The access port replaces the VLAN tag of the data frames and then forwards them.
C
C. The access port removes the VLAN tag of the data frames and then forwards them
D. The access port adds the PVID to the data frames and [hen forwards them.
143
Which of the following statements about IPv6 anycast addresses are true?(Multi)
A. Packets destined for an anycast address are sent to the nearest interface identified
based on the routing distance
ALL
B. Anycast and unicast addresses use the same address space.
C. IP\/6 anycast addresses provide redundancy functions for services.
144 D. IPv6 anycast addresses implement load balancing for services.
Which of the following parts are contained in global unicast addresses?(Multi Choice)
A. Global Routing Prelix
B. Subnet ID
C. Interface ID ABC
D. Protocol ID
145
Refer to the graphic. Which ofthe following statements describes the network
shown?(Multi)
A, There are 6 collision domains inthe network.
C. There are 4 collision domains in the network
D. There are 6 broadcast domains in the network.
BC
146
In STP, which of the following items may affect the selection of the root switch?(Multi)
A. Switch priority.
B. Switch port ID.
C. Switch interface bandwidth. AD
D. Switch MAC address.
E. Switch IP address.
147
Which of the following statements are true according to the following
configuration?(Multi)
dispiay ospfv3 peer 10.0.3.3 verbose
OSPFV3 Process (1)
Neighbor 10.0.3.3 is 2 Way, interface address FE80::2E0:FCFF:FE48:4ECB
In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface GEO/0/0
Options is 0x000013 (-|R|-|-|E|V6)
Dead timer due in 00:00:35 h
Database Summary Packets List 0 ABD
Neighbour Event: 2
Neighbour If Id : 0x3v
A. The local router is a DR Other router.
B. The router ID of the DR is 10.0.2.2.
C. The router ID of the DR is 10.0.1,1.
D. The local router and the router whose router ID is 10.0.3.3 cannot directly exchange link
state information.
148
Which of the following elements are included in a routing table?(Multi)
A. Deslination/Mask
B. Protocol
C. COST ALL
D. Next-hop address
E. Interface
149
Which of the following statements about Ethernet sub-interfaces is/are true?(Multi)
A. The sub-interface ID must be the same as the VLAN ID,
B. A sub-interface can be bound to multiple VLANs. D
C. The sub-interface cannot be configured with an IP address.
150 D. The IP addresses for sub-interfaces must not on the same network segment.
The administrator wishes to update the configuration file of an AR2200 router using a USB
cable. How can this be achieved?(Multi)
A. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the mini USB
port of the AR2200 router.
B. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the USB port
AD
ofthe AR2200 router.
D. The administrator should install the mini USB drivers on the terminal after connecting
the USB.
151
Which of the following descriptions about IPv6 addresses are correct?(Multi)
BC
152
Which of the following statements are true about transport-layer protocols?(Multi)
A. The well-known port number range is from 0 to 1023.
B. UDP uses SYN and ACK flags to request and conlirm connection establishment.
C. Establishing a TCP connection requires the three-way handshake mechanism, while
terminating a TCP connection
AC
requires the four-way handshake mechanism.
D. UDP is suitable for transmitting delay-sensitive trafhc, and UDP pac ets can be
reassembled based on the sequence
number field in the packet header.
153
Refer to the graphic. In order to improve security, the two hosts use IPsec VPN to transmit
data. Which
IPsec mode and protocol can be used to hide the host' s iP address?(Multi)
A. AH.
B. Transport mode. BC
C. Tunnel mode.
D. ESP.
154
As shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows, Which
of the
following statements about the network and configuration is/are true?(Multi)
Router A
aaa
local-user test password cipher test
local-user test service-type ppp
#
interface Serial1/0/0
link-protocol ppp
ppp authentication-mode chap
ppp pap local-user test1 password cipher test1
ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0
#
Router B ABC
aaa
local-user test1 password cipher test1
local-user test1 service-type ppp
#
link-protocol ppp
ppp authentication-mode pap
link-protoco| ppp
ppp authentication-mode chap
ppp pap local-user test1 password cipher test1
ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0
155
Which of the following address types are of IPv6 addresses?(Multi)
A. Unicast address
B. Anycast address ABC
C. Multicast address
156 D. Broadcast address
Which of the following fields are contained in an ARP packet?(Multi)
B. Source Protocol Address
ALL
C. Hardware Type
D. Operation Code
157
On Huawei devices, which of the following methods can be used in OSPF router ID
selection?(Multi)
A. If a loopback interface is configured, the largest IP address of the loopback interface is
selected as the router ID
B. It loopback interfaces are not contigured, the largest IP address of an interface is
ABCE
selected as the router ID.
C. A Huawei switch may use the largest IP address of VLANIF interfaces as the router ID.
D. The default ID 127.0.0.1 is selected as the router ID.
E. A valid router ID can be configured manually.
158
The RADIUS information of the router is configured as follows. Which of the following
statements is/are correct?(Multi)
radius-server template huawei
radius-server shared-key cipher huawei
radius-server authentication 200.0.12.1 1812
AC
radius-server accounting 200,0.12.l 1813
radius-attribute nas-ip 200.0.12.2
A. The IP address of the authentication server is 200.0_12.1.
B. The IP address ofthe authorization server is 200.0.12.1.
C. The IP address of the accounting server is 200.0.12.1.
159 D. The source IP address of the RADIUS packets sent by the router is 200.0.12.2
Before forwarding IPv6 packets, routers do not need to re-encapsulate the data link
layer.
O True FALSE
O False
160
When a host uses the IP address 192.168.1.210 access the Internet, NAT must be
performed
O True TRUE
O False
161
The VLAN ID cannot be set to 0
O True
TRUE
O False
162
UDP does not guarantee data transmission reliability and does notno provide packet
sorting and traffic control
functions, It is suitable for the traffic that has low requirements for data transmission
reliability, but high TRUE
requirements for the transmission speed and delay.
True
163 False
The router ID of the OSPF process takes effect immediately after being changed
O True
FALSE
O False
164
According to the topology and configuration shown in the figure, an Eth-Trunk link can
be set up between
the two switches on which LSW2 is the Actor.
O True
O False
FALSE
165
ICMP packets do not contain port numbers. Therefore, NAPT cannot be used
O True
FALSE
O False
166
DHCP Request packets must be sent in broadcast mode
O True FALSE
167 O False
A segment routing global block (SRGB) is a set of local labels reserved for global
segments. In MPLS and IPv6, an SRGB is a set of local labels reserved for global labels.
O True TRUE
O False
168
Two routers have established a point-to-point network using PPP, The administrator has
configured the
routers to run OSPF in the same area with the same router ID, what behavior will occur
as a result of the
configuration?(Single Choice)
A. The routers will build a neighbor relationship even though both routers are using the B
same router iD.
C. The routers will build an adjacency even though both routers are using the same router
ID.
D. The routers will not send hello packets to each other because they are using the same
169 router ID.
Which of the following percentage does the lease time of a DHCP cIient's IP address
reach to trigger the
DHCP client to send a lease renewal packet for the first time?(Single Choice)
B
A. 0.25
B. 0.5
C. 0.875
170 D. 1
When a host uses DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. the host sends a DHCPV6 ( )
packet to request
configuration information?
A. Information-Request
A
B. CONFIRM
C. SOLICIT
D. REBIND
171
The length of an IPv6 address is () that of an IPv4 address(Single Choice)
A. double
B. triple C
C. four times
172 D. Five times
A router has learned two routes for the same network with the same prefix. One route
has been learned via
OSPF with a metric of 4882, while the other route has been learned via RiPv2 with a
metric of 4. Which
route(s) will be found in the routing table?(Single Choice)
C
A. The RIPv2 route.
B. The OSPF and RiPv2 routes.
C. The OSPF mute.
173
What is the main function of the DNS protocol?(Single Choice)
A, Domain name resolution

B. File transfer A
C. Remote access
D. Email transmission
174
Assuming all STP enabled switches have the same bridge priority. The MAC address of
switch A is 00-e0-fc
00-00-40, the MAC address of switch B is 00-e0-fc-00-OO-10, the MAC address of switch
C is 00-e0-fc-00-
00-20, and the MAC address of switch D is 00-e0-fc-00-00-80. Which switch will be
elected as the mot
B
switch? (Single Choice)
A. Switch A.
B. Switch B.
C. Switch C.
175 D. Switch D.
Which of the following values of the Length/Type Held in an Ethernet data frame
indicates the PPPoE session stage?(Single Choice)
A, 0x8863
B
B. 0x8864
C. 0x806
D. 0xt0800
176
Which of the following values is used in the LengthfType field of the Ethernet data
frame, indicating that the packet is in the PPPoE discovery phase?
A. 0x0800
B
B. 0x8863
C. 0x8864
177 D. 0x0806
Which of the following parameters cannot be allocated in DHCPv6 stateless
autoconfiguration?(Single Choice)
A, IPv6 address
B
B. DNS address
C. NIS server address
D. SNTP server address
178
Which of the following is the full name of VRP?(Single Choice)
A, Versatile Routing Platform
A
C. Versatile Routing Protocol
D. Versatile Redundancy Platform
179
Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you
perform
configurations when Auto-Conng is running, the DHCP, routing, DNS, and WY
configurations will be lost.
The administrator finds that the preceding information is displayed on the device. Which
of the following
C
statements is true about the preceding information?(Single Choice)
A. To enable automatic configuration, select ‘y'.
B. If automatic configuration is not required, select ‘n'.
C. When the device is started for the first lime, the automatic configuration function is
enabled.
D. When the defvice is started for the first time, the automatic configuration function is
180 disabled.
On the network shown in the figure, if all routers run OSPF, which router is elected as the
BDR?(Single Choice)
A. Router A
B. Router B
C. Router C
D. Router D
181
In which of the following ranges can the VLAN IDs be used by users?(Single Choice)
A, 0 to 4095
B. 1 to 4096 D
C. 0 to 4096
182 D. 1 to 4094
Which of the following statements are false about major functions of routers?(Multi
Choice)
A. Routers can forwrd packets based on the source IP address of the parket
B. Routing tables are established using multiple protocols. AC
C. Routers can be used to achieve communication between devices on the same network
segment.
D. Routers forward data according to the routing table.
183
Which of the following statements about link aggregation are true?(Multi Choice)
A, Eth-Trunk interfaces cannot be nested.

B. GE electrical interfaces and GE optical interfaces cannot be added to the same Elh-Trunk
ALL
interface
C. GE interfaces and FE interfaces cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk interface.
D. Devices at both ends of an Eth-Trunk must use the same link aggregation mode.
184
Which of the following statements are true about ICMP packets?(Multi Choice)
A. The value of the protocol type Held in the IPv4 header of an ICMP packet is 1
B. The length ofthe 'Checksum' field in an ICMP packet is 8 bits. ACD
C. The length of the 'Type' field in an ICMP packet format is 8 bits.
D. The length ofthe 'Code' field in an ICMP packet format is 8 bits.
185
On a network running Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), which of the following ports
are in Discardingstate when the topology is stable?(Multi Choice)
A, Root port
B. Designated port CD
C. Altemaie por!
D. Backup port
186
Which of the following statements about OSPFV3 router IDs are true?(Multi Choice)
A, Router IDs can only be manually configured.
B. The router ID must be the same as the IPv6 address of an interface onthe router.
ACD
C. The total length of each router ID is 32 bits.
D. To modify an OSPFv3 router ID, you need to delete it and reconfigure one.
187
When a two-way neighbor relationship is set up between two OSPF-enabled routers, it
means the LSDB
synchronization has been compleied, but the SPF algorithm has not been performed yet.
FALSE
O True
O False
188
In the MPLS forwarding progess, when MPLS packets pass through the ingress LER, the
ingress LER pops out
a label.
FALSE
O True
189 O False
Only CHAP authentication can be used for PPPoE sessions.
O True FALSE
O False
190
When a switch receives a unicast data frame, if the destination MAC address of the data
frame can be found in the MAC address table of the switch, the data frame is definitely
forwarded through the portcorresponding to the MAC address. TRUE
O True
191 O False
In terms of security, the tunnel mode is more secure than the transport mode
O True TRUE
192 O False
The maximum number of VTY user interfaces determines how many users can log in to
the device through
Telnet or stelnet at the same time. TRUE
O True
193 O False
The rules in an ACL may overlap. If packets match the rules with loose conditions, the
later ACL rules are not
processed. In this case, packets cannot match the rules with strict conditions. Therefore,
the rules with strict
conditions must be arranged in front lines and those with loose conditions rnusl be
TRUE
arranged towards the
end.
O True
O False
194
For the Versatile Routing Platform (VRP), The login timeout period can be set only on a
VTY interface
FALSE
O True
195 O False
FTP may be used to upgrade a router's VRP image. Which of the following transmission
modes should be
used to achieve this?(Single)
A, Binary mode. A
B. ASCII mode.
C. Byte mode.
196 D. Letter mode.
Which of ihe following commands is/are used to set the authentication mode to
HWTACACS(Single)
authentication?
A, authentication-mode hwtacacs A
B. authenticaliowmode local
C. authentication-mode none
197 D. authorization-mode hwvtacacs
What is the default priority of OSPF routes on a Huawei AR router?(Single)
A. 0
B. 10
B
C. 20
D. 30
198
Which of ihe following addresses cannot be used as the IPv4 address of a host?(Single)
A, Class A address
B. Class B address
D
C. Class C address
D. Class D address
199
A router has learned two routes for the same network with the same prefix. One route
has been leamed via
OSPF with a metric of 4882, while the other route has been Ieamed via RiPv2 with a
metric of 4, Which
route(s) will be found in the routing table?(Single) C
A. The RIPv2 route.
B. The OSPF and RlPv2 routes.
C. The OSPF route.
200 D. Neither of these routes will be found in the routing lable.
Which of ihe following descriptions regarding the TTL field of the IP packet is
correct?(Single)
C
201 D. The TTL value will increment by 1 each time the packet is routed,
Which of ihe following parameters is not contained in STP configuration BPDUS?(Single)
A, Root ID
B. Bridge ID
C. Port ID D
D. VLAN ID
202
According to the following configuration of an interface, if all the displayed IPv6
addresses are available, how many global unicast address prefixes are advertlsedl by the
interface?(Single)
ipv6 enable
ipv6 address 2003::1/64
ospfv3 1 area 0.0.0.0
#
A.1
B.2
C.3
203 D.4
The Network Management Station uses SNMP to manage devices, which SNMP message
is sent when an
SNMP registered abnormal event occurs?(Single)
C
A. get-response
B. se!-request
C. trap
204 D. get-request
If the application-layer protofol is Telnet, what is the value ofthe ‘Protocol" field in the
IPv4 header?
A, 6 A
B. 17
C. 53
205 D. 67
You can use the Telnet protocol to manage Huawei devices, Which of the following
statements is true?(Single)
A. The default Telnet poRT number is 22 and cannot be modified.

B
B. VTY interfaces must be enabled for Telnet and 15 maximum of VTY interfaces can be
used.
C. Telnet does not support authentication using a username and a password.
206 D. An ACL cannot be deployed to enhance security in Telnet mode.
Refer to the graphic, The switch is operating using STP. All default parameters have been
maintained
Which port will be assigned a designated port role?(Single)
A
A.G0/0/1 of switch A
B.G0/0/2 of switch A.
C.E0/0/1 of me hub.
207 D.E0/0/2 of the hub
Which of ihe following option is not included in the basic information contained in ihe
nexi hop label
forwarding entry (NHLFE)?(Single)
A, Next hop ofthe packet

D
B. Label action
C. Outbound interfere ofthe packet
D. Inbound interface of the packet
208
If the MAC address of an interface is 00E0-FCEF-0FEC, the corresponding EUI-64 address
is ()(Single)
q A. 02E0-FCFF-FEEF-OFEC
A
q B. OOEO-FCEF-FFFE-OFEC
q C. OOEO-FCFF-FFFE-OFEC
q D. 00E0-FCFF-FEEF-OFEC
209
Which type of ACL does the following command configure?(Single)
rule permit 8021 p 7
A. Basic ACL
C
B. Advanced ACL
C. Layer 2 ACL
D. Intermediate ACL
210
system-view
[Huawei-ui-console0]history-command max-size 20
Refer to the command output. Which statements regarding the shown command are
true?(Multi choice)
A
A. The command is used to adjust the size of the history command buffer,
B. The default value of ihe history command buffer is 5.
211 D. Once configured, commands totalling up to 20 bytes can be saved in the buffer.
How can the default route be generated?
AC
212 D. Generated by link layer protocols.
As shown in the figure, router A has successfully telneted to rouier B using 10.0.12,2_
Which ofthe following
operations viill interrupt ihe Telnet session between router A and router B?
A. Disable G0/0/1.
B. Change the IP address of G0/0/1
C. Enable OSPF On G0/0/1.
D. Configure a static route. AB
213
Which of ihe following IPv6 addresses can be obtained by the host if the DHCPV6 address
pool is
configured as follows?(MULTI)
dhcpv6 pool huawei
address prefix 2019::/125
excluded-address 2019::1 to 2019::3
BC
dns-domain-name huawei.com
#
A. 2019::2
B. 2019::4
C. 2019::6
214 D. 2019::8
Which of the following statements are incorrect?(MULTI)
A. The preferences for each static routes entry can be different.

B. By default, OSPF maintains preference over RIP.
CD
C. The greater the cost, the better the route is.
D. For those routes to the same destination on VRP platform. the route with a higher
preference value is more preferred
215 over the route with a lower preference value.
49. Which of ihe following modes are supported by link aggregation?(MULTI)
A, Manual load balancing mode
B. LACP mode
AB
C. Hybrid mode
D. Manual active/skandby mode
216
Which of the following encapsulation modes is/are supported by IPsec VPN?(MULTI)
A, Routing mode
B. Transport mode
C. Tunnel mode BC
D. Switching mode.
217
On the network shown in the following figure, host A uses DHCPV6 stateful
autoconfiguration, and Router
A functions as a DHCPV6 server. Which of the following statements may cause host A to
fail to obtain an
IPv6 address?(MULTI)
A. The RA function is disabled on G 0/0/1 of Router A.
B. DHCP is not enabled globally on Router A
BC
C. No IPv6 address is available in the address pool of Router A.
D. No DNS server address is specified for Router A.
218
Which of the following statements about one-arm routing is/are true?(MULTI)
A. Only one physical link is used between the switch and router.
B. On the switch, conugure the port connected to the router as a trunk interface and allow
ABC
frames of related VLANs to
pass through.
C. Sub-interfaces need to be created on the router.
219 D. Each VLAN has a physical connection.
For the link aggregation technology, which of the following parameters can an Eth-Trunk
interface use to implement traffic load balancing?(MULTI)
A. Same source or destination IP address
AB
B. Same source or destination MAC address
C. Same protocol type
220 D. Same source or destination port number
Which of ihe following siatements are true according to the following command
output?(MULTI)
[Router Bldisplay ospfv3 peer verbose
OSPFv3 Process (1)
Neighbor 10.0.1.1 is Full, interface address FE80::2E0:FCFF:FEC6:4A10
In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface GE0/0/0
DR Priority is1 DR is 10.0.2.2 BDRis10.0.1.1
Options is oxooooia (-|R|-|-|E|V6)
Database Summary Packets List 0 BCD
Link Slate Request List 0
Link Slate Reiransmisfon List O
Neighbour Event: 6
Neighbour If Id : 0x3
A. The local router is a BDR.

B. The router ID ofthe neighbor is 10.0.1.1
C. ThE DR priority of the local router is 1.
D, The OSPFv3 process ID is 1.
221
As shown in the figure, ail routers run OSPF, The OSPF process ID and the area ID are
required to be 1 and
0, respectively. Which of the following commands can be used on Router A t0 meet this
requirement?(MULTI)
A. # interface GigabitEthemet0/0/1 ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0 ospf enable 1 area
0.0.0.0 #
B. # ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 nelwork 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.255#
C. # ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network10,0,12.1 0.0.0.0 # B
D. # OSpf area 0.0.0.0 network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.3 #
222
On the network shown in the figure, which of the following commands can be used to
enable host A to
successfully ping host B?(MULTI)
A. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1 Router B : ip route-
static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.2
B. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.1 Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0
11.0.12.2
C. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.2 Router B : ip route-
static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1
D. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.2 Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0
11.0.12.1
CD
223
In a scenario without virtual links, the next hop of each OSPFv3 route is a link-local
address?
A
A. True
224 B. False
Before device sends the IPv6 packet, the packet length is compared with the MTU value. If
the value is greater than the MTU value, the packet is directly discarded.
FALSE
A. True
225 B. False
IPv6 uses NS and NA packets to perform duplicate address detection(DAD)
A. TRUE TRUE
226 B. FALSE
Which of the following packet is used by OSPFv3 to maintain neighbor relationship(Single )
A. Hello packet
B. Database Description (DD) packet
A
C. Link State request (LSR) packet
D. Link State Update (LSU) packet
227
Which memory saved configuration is used to select VRP version file when the device
starts up?(Single )
q A. NVRAM
A
q B. SD Card
q C. Flash
228 q D. USB
What is the default least time of the IP address allocated by the DHCP server
A. 1 hour
B. 12 hour D
C. 18 hour
229 D. 24 hour
Basic ACL
B. Advanced ACL
C
C. Layer 2 ACL
230 D. User ACL
Which of the following parameters are identified by the SA (Security Association)?
(Multiple choice)
BCD
231 O D. Security Protocol (AH or ESP) (Right Answers)
An explicit path can be easily defined by SR (Segment Routing), and nodes in the network
only need to maintain Seament Routing information. It can respond to the real-time rapid
development of business. What are the following characteristics of Segment Routing?
(Multiple Choice)
q A Support both the centralized control mode of the controller and the distributed control
mode of the repeater. Provides a balance between centralized control and distributed
control (Right Answers)
ACD
q B SR (Segment Routing) uses IP forwarding without additional maintenance of another
label forwarding table.
q C A better smooth evolution of existing networks by extending existing protocols such as
IGP (Right Answers)
q D Using source routing technology to provide rapid interaction between the network and
upper-layer applications (Right Answers)
232
The following election statement about DR and BDR, which is correct? (Muitiple choice)
A. If an interface has a priority of 0, the interface will not participate in the election of or
BDR. (Right Answers)
B. DR must exist in the broadcast network (Right Answers)
C. If the priorities are the same, the router ID is compared. The larger the value, the higher
the priority is elected as the DR. (Right Answers )
D. BDR must exist in the broadcast network
233
What is the total length of the interface identifier of the link-local unicast address?
CI A. 48bit
I=1 B. 32bit
234 1:1 D. 96bit
A.multiple areas
B.Router-ID
C
C.authentication
D.multicast updates
235
To establish multiple PPP point-to-point connections in the Ethernet network, a PPPoE
server establishes connections with multiple PPPoE clients on one Ethernet port. How does
PPPoE differentiate between each connection?
A.MAC address. D
B.IP address and MAC address
C.MAC address and ppp-id
236 D.MAC address and session-id
As shown in the figure, regarding OSPF topology and configuration, which of the
folbwing statement is correct?
A Compared RI with R2, R2 has a better chance of becoming a OR because its interface OR
priority value is smaller
B RI and R2 can establish stable neighbor relationships as long as the interface network
type of RI is restored to the default broadcast type.
C_ As long as the interface network type of RI is restored to the default broadcast type,
and the hello time is adjusted to 10s, RI and R2 can establish a stable neighbor relationship
(Right Answers)
CI RI and R2 can establish stable OSPF neighbor relationships
C
237
618 As shown in the following figure, all switches run the SIP protocol_ After the
topology is stable, modify the sending period of the configuration BPDU on which of
following switch can affect the sending period of the SWD configuration BPDU?
q A SWD
q B_ SWG
q a SWB
q D SWA (Right Answers)
238
The administrator configured the above on the AR2200, and which of the following
description about the configuration information is correct?
B
q A. The saved configuration file will be replaced by the running configuration file.
q B. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should select "Y" (Right
Answers)
q C. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should select "N"
239 q D. The configuration file will be retained when the device starts up.
Which of the following statements about the handling of RSTP configuration BPDU are
A After the topology is stable, the non-root bodge device sends configuration BPDUs at the
interval specified by the Hello timer, regardless of whether the configuration BPDUs are
received from the root bodge_ (Right Answers)
B After the topology is stable, the non-root bridge demo sends the configuration BPDU AD
after receiving the configuration BPDU sent by the upstream device.
C The root port must wait for the BPDU Max Age timeout to re-top the topology
calculation.
d When a port receives a sub-optimal RST BPDU from the upstream designated bridge, the
240 port immediately responds to its stored RST BPDU, (Right Answers )
If the Ethernet data frame is Lengthaype=0x0806, which of the ft:Mowing statement is
A. This data frame is an Ethernet H frame. (Right Answers)
B. This data frame is an IEEE 802.3 frame
C. The source MAC address of this data frame must not be FFFF-FFFF-FFFFF (Right AC
Answers)
D The destination MAC address of this data frame must be FFFF-FFFF-FFFFF.
Answer: AC
241
With what kind of routers does a DRother route exchange link state information and route
information(Multiple Choice)
A. DR
B. BDR AB
C. DRother
242
5. When a router enabled with Proxy ARP function receives an ARP request packet and
finds that the requested IP addr(Multiple Choice)
q A If there is a route to the destination address, send its own MAC address to the ARP
requester (Right Answers ) AD
q B. Discard the message
q C. Broadcast ARP request message
243 q D. Find if there is a route to the destination address or not (Right Answers )
501_ Which of the following functions are supported by the LCP protocol in the PPP
protocol? {Multiple choice)
q A. Negotiate the maximum receiving unit MRU (Right Answers )
ABD
q B. Negotiate the authentication protocol (Right Answers)
q C. Negotiate the network layer address
244 q D. Detect link loops (Right Answers)
For an STP- enabled switch, a port in any state can transition to the disabled state
A. TRUE
TRUE
B. FALSE
245
When forwarding a IPv6 packet, the router needs to find the routing table based on the
source FP address of the [P6 packet.
FALSE
q A. True
246 q B. False (Right Answers)
If the configuration information of a port on a switch is as follows, when this port sent the
data frames of which VLAN, the VLAN TAG is stripped?
port hybrid untagged vlan 4 6 C
q A. 4,5,6
q B. 4,6
q C. 1,4,6 (Right Answers )
247 q D. 1,4,5,6
The router needs to modify the destination IP address in the data packet when forwarding
the data packet.
A. True FALSE
B. False (Right Answers)
248
Refer to the graphic, 00e0-fc99-9999 is a specific host MAC address learned by a switch
through ARP and the host changes the IP address three times?
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
TRUE
249
The LER in the MPLS domain is called the Label Egress Router.
q A. True FALSE
250 q B. False
As shown in the following figure, what is the scope of AH protocol authentication in IPsec
tunnel mode?
O A. 1 D
O B. 2
O C. 3
251 O D. 4 (Right Answers)
What is the value range of the DSCP field in the IPv4 header?
El A. 0-15
q B. 0-63 (Right Answers) B
q C. 0-31
252 q D. 0-7
What is the value range of the Hop Limit field in an IPv6 header?
A. 0-7
B. 0-15 A
C. 0-31
253 D. 0-255
A network administrator has been assigned the IP address segment 192.168.176.0/25
from which he/she must aliocate a subnet to support 20 users in the marketing
department. Which IP subnet best supports this requirement?
A. 192.168.176.0/25 C
B. 192.168.176.0/30
C. 192168.176.48/29
254 D. 192168.176.96/27
MSTID Port Role STP State Protection
0 GigabitEthernet0/0/1 DESI FORWARDING NONE
The preceding information shows port states displayed on a switch running STP.
According to such information, which of the following statements is false?
A. This network may contain only one switch.
B. The switch may be the root switch on the network.
C. The switch is a non-designated switch on the network to which it is connected.
255 D. The switch may be connected to six other switches.
B. Network layer
B
C. Transport layer
256 D. Data link layer

Which of the following storage devices is used to store the startup configuration files in a
router?
A.SDRAM
B.NVRAM B
C.Flash
D.BootROM
257
What is the main role of the DHCP DISCOVER message?
A. The client is used to find the DHCP server. (Right Answers)
B. The DHCP server responds to the DFHCP DISCOVER packet, which carries various
A
configuration information.
C. The server responds to the confirmation of the REQUEST message.
258 D. The client requests configuration or renews the lease term.
Which of the following IP addresses can be used by another host to communicate with the
host whose ip address is 200.200.200.201/30 without the need to forward traffic through
a router?
A. 200.200.200.1 C
B. 200.200.200.200
C. 200.200.200.202
259 D. 200.200.200.203
Which of the following is not the working principle of CSMA/CD?
A. Listening before sending
B. Listening while sending
E
C. Sending suspension upon a conflict
D. Resending after a random delay
260 E. Resending after a fixed delay
Which of the following commands can be used to permanently delete the old device
configuration file < config.zip > ?
A. deiete /force config.zip B

C. reset config.zip
261 D. clear config.zip
33, As shown in the figure, assume that the MAC address table of SWA is as follows. Host A
sends a data frame whose destination MAC address is MAC-B to SWA. Which of the
following statements is true?
A.SWA discards the data frame.

B. SWA forwards the data frame only through G0/0/2.
C. SWA forwards the data frame only through G0/0/3.
D.SWA floods the data frame.
262
Which of the following ACLs cannot match network layer information?
A. Basic ACL
B. Advanced ACL
C
C. Layer 2 ACL
D. User ACL
263
The users who log on the router through Telnet are not permitted to configure IP address.
What is the possible reason
A. Communication failures occur between the user and the router
C
B. The authentication mode of Telnet is set incorrectly
C. Privilege level of Telnet is set incorrectly
264 D. SNMP parameters are set incorrectly
On the VRP what is the function of the “interface vlanif” command?(SINGLE)
A.It is use create a VLANIF interface.
B.It is use create a VLANIF interface and enter the VLANIF interface view. B
C.It used to configure a VLAN for a VLANIF interface.
265 D.There is no such command.
Which of the following routing protocols are dynamic routing protocols ?(Multi)
A. Static Routing
B. Direct Routing CD
C. OSPF
266 D. BGP
In which of the following cases does a switch generate configuration BPDUs?(Multi)
A. When a designated port receives an inferior configuration BPDU, the designated port
immediately sends its own configuration BPDU to the downstream device.
B. When the root port on a device receives a configuration BPDU, the device sends a copy
of the configuration BPDU to each of its designated ports.
C. When a non-designated port receives an inferior configuration BPDU, the port
immediately sends its own configuration BPDU to the downstream device.
D. During initialization, once STP is enabled on a port, the configuration BPDU is sent
through the specified port according the interval specified by the Hello timer.
267
A configured internal host of a private network wishes to access the internet. What
must be configured on the enterprise network egress router in order to achieve this?
A. NAT easy ip
A
B. DHCP.
C. BGP.
268 D. Defauit route.
Which of the following statements are false about major functions of routers?
A. Routers can forward packets based on the source IP address of the packet,
B. Routing tables are established using multiple protocols.
ABD
C. Routers can be used to achieve communication between devices on the same network
segment.
269 D. Routers forward data according to the routing table.
Which of the fallowing storage media are commonly used by Huawei routers? (Multiple
Choice)
A. SDRAM (Right Answers)
B. NVRAM (Right Answers) ABCE
C_ Flash (Right Answers )
D_ Hard Disk
270 E. SD Card (Right Answers )
An ACL rule is as follows. Which of the following IP addresses can be matched by the
permit rule?(Multi)
rule 5 permit ip source 10.0.1.0 0.0.254.255
AB
A 10.0.1.2
B. 10.0.2.3
C.10.0.3.4
271 D. 10.0.4.5
The packet capture tool captures an Ethernet frame and finds that the value of the
Type/Length field of the frame is 0x0800 Which of the following descriptions are correct
about the frame? (Multiple Choice)
A The frame carves an IPX message. BC
B The frame carries an IP packet (Right Answers)
C The frame structure of the frame is the Ethernet_11 format (Right Answers)
272 D. The frame structure of the frame is 802 3 format
Which of the following protocol does the PPP protocol consist of? (Multiple Choice)
A. Certification Agreement/Authentication (Right Answers)
B. NCP (Right Answers) ABC
C. LCP (Right Answers)
273 D. PPPOE
What packet types are included in DHCP?(Multichoice)
A. DHCP Discover packet
B. DHCP Offer packet ABC
C. DHCP Request packet
274 D. DHCP Rollover packet
There are four network segments: 10.24.0.0/24, 10.24.1.0/24, 10.24.2.0/24, and
10.24.3.0/24. Which of the following network segments can the four network segments
be summarized into?
AB
A. 10.24.0.0/22
B. 10.24.0.0/21
C. 10.24.0.0/23
275 D. 10.24.1.0/23
Which of the following statements regarding link-state database and routing-table of a
“single” OSPF area are correct?

AB
B. The link- state databases that all routers build are different.
276
To enable the FTP server function on a router, set the user name and password to
"huawei", and set the FTP root directory to “flash:/dhcp/*, which of the following
commands must be configured?
ALL
A. ftp server enable
B. local-user huawei password cipher huawei
C. local-user huawei Ftp-directory flash:/dhcp/
277 D. local-user huawei service-type ftp
Which of the following IPv6 addresses can be added to the interface based on the
configurations of the interface?
ipv6 enable
ipv6 address 2001::12:1/64
ipv6 address 2019::12:1/64 AB
#
A. 2001::21:1/64
B. 2019::21:1/64
C. 2018::12:1/64
278 D. 2020::12:1/64
The configuration information of router DHCP address pool is as follows. Which is
correct? (Multiple choice)
ip pool test
network 192. 168. 1. 0 mask 255. 255. 255. 0
excluded-ip-address 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.254 lease day 0 hour 12 minute 0 BCD
A. The address pool has 199 available IP addresses. (Right Answers)
B. The lease of the IP address is 12h. (Right Answers)
C. The address pool has 55 available IP addresses.
279 D. The IP address that the DHCP client may obtain is 192.168.1.2. (Right Answers)
In the VRP system, what are the functions of Ctrl+Z?
A. Return from the system view to the user view.
B. Exit from the current view.
AE
C. Exit from the interface view.
D. Exit from the console interface view.
280 E. Return to the user view.
On the network shown in the figure, the ports connecting switch A and switch B to hosts
belong to VLAN 10 and VLAN 20 respectively. The ports through which the two switches
are interconnected are trunk ports, and the PVIDs of the ports are 10 and 20,
respectively. Which of the following statements are true?
A. Host A and host B belong to different VLANs and cannot ping each other.
BC
B. Host A and host B can ping each other.
C. When the data frames sent by the hosts are forwarded between the switches, the
frames are untagged.
D. ARP requests from host A cannot be forwarded to host B.
281
. If an Ethernet data frame is forwarded by the switch and is added with two VLAN tags,
how many extra bytes are added to the data frame?
A.2
B.4
C6
282 D.8
Which of the following statement about the OSPF backbone area is correct?
A. Area 0 is the backbone area. (Right Answers)
B. All areas can be backbone areas
A
C. The backbone area must be deployed when the number of routers running OSPF
exceeds two.
283 D. All routers in the backbone area are ABR
Which of the following descriptions about STP designated ports is correct?
A.Each bridge can have only one designated port
B.Designated ports are responsible for sending BPDU to connected network segments B
C.Designated ports represent the path leading to the root switch
284 D.Designated ports forward frames destined for the root switch
1 A network administrator has captured a data frame in the network with the destination MAC address of 01-00-5E-A0-BI-C3. The correct statement about this MAC address s Q.
❑ A It is a unicast MAC address
❑ B. It is a broadcast MAC address
❑ C. It is a multicast MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. It is an illegal MAC address
2. Which of the following is not the working principle of CSMNCD?

❑ A. Listen While Talk
❑ B. RRetransmission after a fixed time delay (Right Answers)
❑ C. Conflict suspension
❑ ITh Retransmission after random delay
❑ E. Listen Before Talk
Answer: B
3. The 1Py4 address of the host is 200_200_200_201/30_ Which host with the following IPv4 address and its communication do not need to be forwarded by the muter?
❑ A 200 200 200.1
❑ B. 200 200 200_202 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 200 200 200 200
❑ O. 200 200 200 203
Answer: B
4_ If the Ethernet data frame is Lengthaype=0x0806, which of the ft:Mowing statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. This data frame is an Ethernet H frame. (Right Answers)
❑ B. This data frame is an IEEE 802.3 frame
❑ C. The source MAC address of this data frame must not be FFFF-FFFF-FFFFF (Right Answers)
❑ D The destination MAC address of this data frame must be FFFF-FFFF-FFFFF.
Answer: AC
5. When a router enabled with Proxy ARP function receives an ARP request packet and finds that the requested IP addr not its own, what actions are performed? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A If there is a route to the destination address, send its own MAC address to the ARP requester (Right Answers )
❑ B. Discard the message
❑ C. Broadcast ARP request message
❑ D. Find if there is a route to the destination address or not (Right Answers )
Answer: AD
6. Which of the fallowing storage media are commonly used by Huawei routers? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. SDRAM (Right Answers)
❑ B. NVRAM (Right Answers)
❑ C_ Flash (Right Answers )
❑ D_ Hard Disk
❑ E. SD Card (Right Answers )
Answer: ABCE
7 The Vag operating system commands are droded into four access nanMnro Innl. canaqurasan Wan and management level. Much level can run various busirress configurabon commands but cannot operate te file system ,
▪ Access level
D a. Mantonere level
coDevratian 'Teo might Answers)
❑ D. Management level
/NSW C
8 On the VRP interface, you cannot use the command delete or unreserved vrpcfg zip to delete files. You must empty them in the recycle bin to delete files comretely.
OA. TRUE
OB FALSE (Right Answers)
Answer: F
9 The switch MAC address table is existing as follows. which of the following statements is correct?
(fluawei>ictim mac-address
RAC address table of slot 0:
*AC Address VLAM/ PtVLAN CEVLAN Port Type (17R
VS1/SI
Ilk7.•1tn1-!
SON -0811 -0b49 I - Et h0/0/3 stati.
Total amtchias items on slot 0 displayed =
*AC address table of slot C:
*AC Akira: VLAN/ PEVLM Cf YLMI Port Type LSP/LSR-ID

VSI/SI RAC-Tunnel
5489-989d-ld30 Ith0/0/1 *amid 0/-
548.5-9895-18a6 I - Eth0/0/2 dynamic 0/-
c
-
total watching Item on slot 0 displayed 7'
E A The MAC address 5489-9885-1838 is manually configured by the administrator.
E 13_ The MAC address 5489-9811-0b49 is manually configured by the administrator (Right Answers)
E C. The MAC address 5489-3891-1450 is manually configured by the administrator.
E D. After the switch is restarted, all MAC addresses need to be re-learned.
Answer: 13
10 As shown in the figure below, the switch starts the STP protocol. When the network is stable, which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A SWB is the root bridge in this network

❑ B SWA is the root bridge in this network (Right Answers)
❑ C Both ports of SWB are in Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑ D Both ports of SWC are in Forwarding state_
Answer: BC
11 The STP protocol is enabled on both switches shown in the figure below_ An engineer made the following conclusions on this network_ Do you think what is the correct conclusion? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The GO/0/2 port of SWB is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers )
❑ B The GO/N2 port of SWA is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑ C Both pods of SWB are designated pods_
❑ D The GO/0/3 part of SWA is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers )
❑ E Both pods of MA are designated pods (Right Answers)
Answer: ABDE
12. Compared to STP protocol, which kind of port role is added in RSTP protocol? (Multiple Choice)
El A. Alternate port (Right Answers)
I=1 B. Backup port (Right Answers)
I=1 C. Root port
❑ D. Designated port
Answer: AB
13 As shown in the figure, the two switches use the defaut parameters to run STP On Switch A the configuration command SIP root primary is used. On the switch B the configuration command SIP priority 0 is used. Which of the following
,
ports will be blocked
5WA HUB SWEI
E0
EO 0 3 GO 0 1
GO 0 1
MAC 00e0-ft00-0001 mac:wee-mama

❑ A GO/0/2 of switch A (Right Answers)
❑ B. GO/0/1 of switch B
❑ C GO/0/1 of switch A
❑ D E0/0/3 of HUB
Answer: A
14. Which of the following parameters does not the configuration BPDU packet of the STP protocol?
❑ A. Port ID
I=1 B. Bridge ID
❑ C. VLAN ID (Right Answers)
❑ D. Root ED
Answer: C
15. By default, how many seconds are the Forward Delay of STP protocol?
I=1 A. 20
I=1 B. 15 (Right Answers )
El C. 10
1=1 D. 5
Answer: B
16. Which of the following parameters are used in the switched network that runs the STP protocol when performing spanning tree calculations? (Multiple Choice)
7 A. Root path cost (Right Answers)
❑ B. Port ID (Right Answers)
O C. Bridge ED (Right Answers)
E D. Forward Delay
Answer: ABC
17. In the STP protocol, assume that at switches are configured with the same piton-Ey. The MAC address of switch 1 s 0.0-en-fc-0600-40, and the MAC address of switch 2 is 011.04,00-00-10, the MAC address of switch 3 e. 00-e0-fc-00-00-
20, and the MAC address of switch 4 is 00-e0-fc-00-00-80, then the root switch sheuM be ()
17 A. Switch 1
❑ 13_ Switch 2 (Right Answers)
El C. Switch
El a Switch 4
Answer: B
18, The network shown in the figure below, the MAC address of the switch has been marked Enter the command sip root secondary on the SW0 switch. Which of the following switches become the root bridge of this network,
SWA SWB
00-01-02-03-04-AA 00-01-02-03-04-BB
00-01 02 03 04-CC 00-01-02-03-04-OD

❑ A SWA
❑ 13 SWB
▪ SWC
❑ 0 SW0 (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
19. Both the two switches shown in the following figure have SIP enabled. Which port will eventually be in the Blocking state?
SWA SWB
4096 00-01-02-03-04-AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-BB
G 0/0/3
G 0/0/2
❑ A. GO/0/2 port of SWA

❑ B. GO/0/3 port of SWA
❑ C. GO/0/2 port of SWB
❑ D. G0/0/3 port of SWB (Right Answers )
Answer: ❑
20 The network as shown in the following figure, after the OSPF protocol is stable, what is the neighbor status of Router A and Router B?
Router A Router B
Router ID 10.0.1,1 Router ID 10.0.2.2
Priority=255 Priority=0
Router C
Router ID 10.0.3.3
Priority=0
❑ A 2-way
❑ B. Down
❑ C FuiE (Right Answers )
❑ D. Attempt
Answer: C
21. In the network shown below, which of the following commands can be entered in the router to enable Host A to ping through Host B? (Multiple Choice)
GO/0/1
16.612.2/30
OST A Rou r A
Gl
11.0.12.1/30 immiumml
10.0i.1.1/30 0
W:10.0.12.2
1-Lavin°
G0/0/2
10.0 1
HOST B
the 10.0.12.5/
O A. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1 Router B : ip route-static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.2
O B. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.1 Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.2
I=1 C. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.2 Router B : ip route-static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1 (Right Answers )
O D. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.2 Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.1 (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
22. The network as shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.25510.0.12.2
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.21.2 preference 70
GO/0/1
0.0.12.1/24 __10,012.2/24 I oopback 0
10.0.2.2/32
10.0,21.1/24 10.0.21.2/2
G0/0/2 Router B
❑ A. The NextHop that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is 10.0.12.2. (Right Answers)
O B. If the GO/0/1 port is Down, the route that Router A reaches 10.0.0.2 is changed to 10.0.21.2. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is 10.0.21.2.
0 D. If the GO/0/2 port is Down, the route that Router A reaches 10.0.0.2 is changed to 10.0.12.2.
Answer. AB
23. Which of the following OSPF versions are suitable for IPv6?
El A. OSPFv2
1:1 B. OSPFv3 (Right Answers)
C] C. OSPFv4
D D. OSPFv1
Answer: B
24 T he network as shown in the following figure, which of the following commands can enable RouterA to forward a packet with the destination IP address of 19 00 32 (Multiple Choice)
Loopback0 10.0.2.2/32
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24
GO/0/1 O
Router A Router B
O a
O
nr
3.3
/33
Router C
Loopback0 10_0.3.3/32
❑ A ip route-static 10.03.3 255 255 255 255 10 0.1 22 (Right Answers)
❑ B ip route-static 10 0.2.2 255 255255 255 100_12 2 ip route-static 10 03 3 255255.255 255 10 0 2 2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. ip route-static 0.0 0.0 0.0.0.0 10 0 122 (Right Answers )
❑ 0 ip route-static 10 0.33 255 255255255 1002 2
Answer: ABC
25. Which of the following about the statement of static routing are incorrect?
❑ A. Manual configuration by network administrator
❑ B. Inter-route information needs to be exchanged between routers (Right Answers)
❑ C. Can not automatically adapt to changes in network topology
❑ D. Low system performance requirements
Answer: B
26. Which of the following commands can be used to check whether OSPF has correctly established neighbor relationships?
❑ A. display ospf neighbor
❑ B. display ospf brief
❑ C. display ospf peer (Right Answers )
❑ D. display ospf interface
Answer: C
27 For multiple paths to the same destination network, the router needs to select by comparing the size of the Cost value_ If the value of the Cost is the same, then select according to the size of the Preference value.
❑ A. True
CO.False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
28. As shown in the figure below ; Host A and Host B cannot communicate.
HOST A HOST B
IP: 10.0.12.1/30 IP: 10.0.12.2/24
❑ B False
Answer: A
29 For multiple paths to the same destination network, the router needs to select by comparing the size of the Preference value_ If the Preference is the same, then select according to the size of the Cost value.
❑ B False
Answer: A
30. The routing table consists of multiple elements. What is wrong with the following statement?
❑ k Proto shows to learn the routing protocol of this route

❑ B. NextHop shows the local interface address of this route (Right Answers)
❑ G. Pre shows the priority of this routing protocol
❑ D. Destination/Mask shows the address and mask length of the destination network/host
Answer: B
31 The correct description of the following is 0 (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The next hop in the routing table is redundant_ If there is an outgoing interface, the packet can be forwarded.
❑ B. Routes obtained through different routing protocols have different priorities (Right Answers)
❑ C. The metrics defined by different routing protocols are not comparable (Right Answers)
❑ D. The metrics defined by different routing protocols are comparable
Answer: BC
32. ip route-static 10_0.2.2 255255/55.25510.0.12.2 preference 20, about this command, which is the correct statement? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The route can guide the data packets forwarding with the destination IP address of 10.0.2.2. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The route can guide the data packets forwarding with the destination IP address 10.0.12.2.
❑ C. The priority of the route is 20 (Right Answers)
❑ D The NextHop of the route is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
33. The network as shown in the following figure, when the network administrator performs traffic planning, it is expected that the packets sent by Host A to Host B will be connected to G0/0/3 interface between the routers. The packets sent by
Host B to Host A go pass the G0/0/4 interface between routers Which of the following commands can implement this requirement, (Multiple Choice)
0.0.122/30
HOST A
11.0,2-1
19: 10.0.12.1/30 /
OW:10.0.112
IP: 10.0.12.5/30
10.0.126
❑ A_ Router A p route-static 10 0.12.5 255 255 255 252 11.0 12.2 Router B ip route-static 10.0.12 1 255255255252 11012 5 (Right Answers)
❑ B Router A p route-static 0 0 0.0 0.0.0.0 11.0.12 6 Router B ip route-static 0 00 0 0.0.0.0 11 0.12.1
❑ C. Router A p route-static 10.0.12 5 255255255252 11 0.12_6 Router B ip route-static 10 0 12 1 255 255 255 252 11 0 12.1
❑ D. Router A p route-static 0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0 11.0 12 2 Router B ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 11_0.12.5 (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
34. If the IP address requested by the DHCP client is already occupied, which packet will the DHCP server use as the response?
❑ A. DHCP ACK
❑ B DHCP RELEASE
❑ G. DHCP NAK (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCP DISCOVER
Answer: C
35. The DHCP REQUEST message must be sent in broadcast form.

❑ A. True
Answer: B
36. Which DHCP message does the DHCP client send when it wants to leave the network?
❑ A. DHCP DISCOVER
❑ B. DHCP RELEASE (Right Answers)
DHCP REQUEST
• DHCP ACK
Answer: B
37 Huawei devices can be managed using the Telnet protocol. Which of the following statements is correct about this management function?
❑ A The port number used by Telnet defaultly is 22, which cannot be modified
❑ B. Telnet must enable the VTY interface, and the maximum is 15 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Telnet does not support authentication based on username and password
❑ D. Telnet does not support deploying ACLs to increase security.
Answer: B
38 As shown, the topology and the configuration on the switch interconnect pod, you can determine that the data frame labeled as VLAN 10 can be forwarded normally between the two switches_
GEO 1 GE 1
LSW1 LSW2
[LSWIlinterface GigatitEthemet0/0/1
[LSW1-Gigabitatiemet0/0/1]Port link-type trunk
(LSW1-GigabitEttitunet0/0/11eort trunk pvid vlan 20
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/111kort trunk allow-pass Nan 10
I
ILSW2jinterface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
ILSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/1Wort link-type trunk
f LSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/11Nart trunk pvid vlan 10
(LSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/11Port trunk allow -pass Wan 10
❑ A True
❑ B- False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
30 The output information of a port of the switch is as follows What is wrong with the following statement?
port trunk allow-pass vlan 100 200
❑ A. tithe data frame carries a VLAN TAG of 200, the switch strips the VLAN TAG and sends out (Right Answers)
❑ B. If the port receives a data frame without VLAN TAG, the switch needs to add VLAN TAG100.
❑ C The link type of the port is Hybrid type
E D. If the data frame carries a VLAN TAG of 100, the switch strips the VLAN TAG and sends out.
Answer: A
40 Which information of the data frame is judged by the VLANIF interface to perform Layer 2 forwarding or Layer 3 forwarding?
❑ A. Destination MAC (Right Answers)
❑ B Source IP
❑ C. Destination pod
❑ D Source MAC
Answer: A
41 Packets forwarded between two routers must not carry VLAN TAG.
❑ A True
❑ B False (Right Answers )
Answer: B
42. The Priority field in the VLAN tag identifies the priority of the data frame. What is the priority range?
❑ A. 0-15
❑ EL 0-63
❑ C. 0-7 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 0-3
Answer: C
43. What is the characteristic of port-based VLAN partition?
❑ A. Add a VLAN tag to the data frame based on the lP address carried in the packet.
❑ B. Assign the VLAN ID according to the protocol type and encapsulation format of the data frame.
❑ G. The host moving location no need to reconfigure the VLAN
❑ D. The host moving location needs to reconfigure VLAN (Right Answers)
Answer: D
44. The Protocol field in the PPP frame format is OxC223, indicating that the protocol is:
❑ A. CHAP (Right Answers )
❑ B. PAP
❑ C. NCP
❑ D. LCP
Answer: A
45 The configuration information of a router is as follows. Which combination of wernarne and password used by the peer router can enable PPP channel associated to complete authentication?
mist Password cipher teat

test service -,YPC 151,4
El A. Username: (esti Password: (esti

❑ B Llwmame: test Password: test (Right Answers)
❑ C. Username: test2 Password: test
▪ Llsername: test2 Password: test2
Answer: B
46. Which method does the PPPoE client use to send PADI packets to the Server?
❑ A. Broadcast (Right Answers)
❑ B. Unicast
❑ C. Multicast
❑ D. Anycast
Answer: A
47 The network shown in the following figure requires the network where the host is located to access the Internet through Easy IP. Which of the following ACL5 should be used on the 00/0/3 interface of the muter?
❑ A. ad number 2000 rub 5 permit source 10 0.13.1 0 0 0 0

❑ B. act number 2000 rub 5 permit source 10 0.120 00 0255
❑ G ad number 2000 rub 5 permit source 100 12_1 00 00
❑ B. act number 2000 rub 5 permit source 100_13 0 0 0 0 255 (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
48 The configuration information of a router is as follows Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
ISOM
authent i cal ien..schtme default.
authentication-scheme huawei
authentication-mode radius
authorization-scheme default
authorisation-scheme huawei
accounting-scheme•, defnult
domain default
domain default_admin
domain huawei
authentication-schema huawei
authorization-scheme huawei
local-user huawei password cipher 1.23956
local-user huaweitthuawei password cipher GS41321.
ke
❑ N The domain which domain name is huawei does not use the accounting scheme (Right Answers)
❑ B. if the username huawei is used for authentication, the password needs to be 654321.
❑ C. The authorization mode used by the domain which domain name is huawei is local authorization. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The authentication mode used by the domain which domain name is huawei is local authentication.
Answer: AC
49. The IKE protocol is used to establish an SA for IPsec auto-negotiation, which can support identity authentication when the address of the initiator of the negotiation changes dynamically
❑ B. False
Answer: A
50. By default, in the SNMP protocol, which port number is used by the proxy process to send an alarm message to the NMS,
❑ A 163
❑ B. 161
❑ D. 164
Answer: C
51. If the result of the packet matching ACL is "reject", the packet is finally discarded.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
52. In terms of security, [Psec tunnel mode is superior to [Psec transport mode.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
53. What is the status of the OSPFv3 adjacency relationship after it is established?
❑ A. Loading
O B. 2-way
O C. Full (Right Answers)
❑ D. Down
Answer: C
54. The network as shown in the following figure, when OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces, Router A and Rcuter B cannot establish adjacencies.
Fe80::fe03:e24f/64 Fe80::fe03:c3fb/64
-1
30011 2:1/64 300112;1/64 1
GO/0/1
Router B Router A
Router ID 10.0.2.2 Router ID 10.0.2.2
0 B. False
Answer: A
55. Which of the following fields are fields that exist in both 1Pv6 and [PV4 headers? (Multiple Choice)
O A. Source Address (Right Answers)
El B. Version (Right Answers)
O C. Destination Address (Right Answers)
O D. Next Header
Answer: ABC
56. What is the destination address of the DHCPv6 request packet?

O A. FF01::1:2
LI B. FF02::1:2 (Right Answers)
111 C. FF02::1
O D. FF02::2
Answer: B
57. By defauFt, how many seconds is the period of OSPFv3 HELLO packet sending on the Ethernet link?
O A. 30
O B. 10 (Right Answers)
O C. 20
El D. 40
Answer: B
58. Which of the following fields does the MPLS header include? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Label (Right Answers)
▪ EXP (Right Answers)
❑ TTL (Right Answers)
❑ Tas
Answer: ABC
59 SR (SegmentRouting) defines a destination address prefix/node and adjacency in the network as segments, and assigns SIDS (Segment 10s) to the segments. By performing an unordered list of Adjacency SIDS and Prefix/Node SIDS
(destination address prefixes/node segments), a forwarding path is obtained
❑ A True
Answer: B
60 The ARP protocol can resolve the MAC address of the target device according to the destination IP address, thereby, to map the link layer address and the IP address
❑ B. False
Answer: A
61 The Traced diagnostic tool records the 0 of each ICMP TTL timeout message so that the user can be provided with the IP address of the packet when it arrives at the destination_
❑ A Destination port
❑ B. Source port
❑ C Destination IP address
❑ D. Source 1F1 address (Right Answers)
Answer: D
€2. VLSM can expand any IP network segment ; including Class D addresses.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
63_ Which fields in the IPv4 header are related to sharding? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A_ Fragment Offset (Right Answers)
▪ Flags (Right Answers)
❑ G. Tit
❑ IT identification (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
64. The pwd and dir commands in the VRP operating platform can view the file information in the current directory.
❑ A_ True
Answer: 13
65. The output information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
MainBoard:
Startup system software: flash:/AR2220E-V200R007COOSPC600.cc
Next startup system software: flash:/AR2220E-V200R007COOSPC600.cc
Startup patch package: Null
O A. The currently used VRP version file is the same as the VRP file used for the next startup. (Right Answers)
O B. The currently used VRP version file is different from the VRP file used for the next startup.
O C. The currently used configuration file is different from the one used for the next startup. (Right Answers)
O D. The currently used configuration file is the same as the one used for the next startup.
Answer: AC
66. For a switch running STP, the port can be directly converted to the Disabled state in any state.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
67. Which of the following MAC addresses will not age? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Dynamic MAC address
❑ B. Black hole MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Static MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Port MAC address
Answer: BC
68. By default, the bridge priority of a switch is 32768.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
69. Which port of the following switches is blocked as shown in the following figure?
SVVA SWB
4096 00-01-02-03-04-AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-BB
SWC
32768 00-01-02-03-04-CC
❑ A. GO/0/2 of SWC
❑ B. GO/0/1 of SWC (Right Answers)
❑ C GO/0/3 of SWB
❑ D. GO/0/3 of SWA
Answer: B
70. As shown in the following figure, all hosts can communicate normally. What is the correct relationship between the SWBMAC address and the port?
G 0/0/3 G 0/0/3
SA SB
G 0/0/
G /0/2 G 0/0/1

IP: 10.1.1.1/24 IP: 10.1.1.2/24 IP: 10.1.1.3/24
MAC:MAC-A MAC:MAC-B MAC:MAC-C
❑ A. MAC-A G0/0/3 MAC-B G0/0/3 MAC-C GO/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC-A GO/0/1 MAC-B GO/0/2 MAC-C G0/0/3
❑ C. MAC-A G0/0/2 MAC-B G0/0/2 MAC-C G0/0/3
❑ D. MAC-A GO/0/1 MAC-B GO/0/1 MAC-C G0/0/3
Answer: A
71. A switch running STP protocol will send TCN BPDUs only when a port on the switch fails.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
72. How many bits of the Port ED total length in the spanning tree protocol?
El A. 16 (Right Answers)
El B. 4
El C. 2
El ID 8
Answer: A
73. As shown in the figure, the correct description about this network topology is 0.
VA
HostA Host& Host C Host D

❑ A. There are 6 collision domains in this network.
111 B. There are 6 broadcast domains in this network.
❑ C. There are 12 collision domains in this network.
El D. There are 2 broadcast domains in this network. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
74. Which of the following statements about the Backup port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
O A. Backup port as a backup of the designated port, providing another backup path from the root bridge to the corresponding network segment (Right Answers)
0 B. Backup port not only forwards user traffic but also learns MAC address
C C. Backup port does not forward user traffic but learns MAC address
0 D. Backup port provides another switchable path from the designated bridge to the root as the backup port of the root port
Answer: A
75. A network consisting of switches does not have STP enabled. A Layer 2 loop must occur.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
76_ When a port running the standard STP protocol receives a suboptimal BPDU, it immediately sends its own configuration BPDU from this port_
❑ B. False
Answer: A
77 As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF protocol_ The top of the link is the size of the Cost value_ What is the path of the RA to the network 10 0 0 NB'?
'
1°
10.0.0.0/8
Router Router D
Router C
❑ A. A-B-D
❑ B. PA can not reach 10.0.0.018
❑ C A-D
❑ D A-C-D (Right Answers)
Answer: D
TB Which of the following statements about OSPF neighbor status is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. In the Exchange state, the routers send each other a DO packet containing the summary of the link state information to describe the content of the local LSDB (Right Answers)
❑ B. The master-sinve relationship of OSPF is formed in the ExStarl state (Right Answers)
❑ C_ After the router LSDB is synchronized, it is converted to the Full state_ (Right Answers)
❑ D_ The serial number of the OD packet is determined in the Exchange state_
Answer: ABC
79. On the network shown in the following figure, the administrator wants Router A to use static mutes to send packets to Router B priority through GO/0/1 Which command can be used to meet this requirement'
GO/0/1
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12 2/24 Loopback 0
O 10.0.2.2/32
10.0.21.1/24 10.0.21.2/2
Router A GO/0/2 Router B
❑ A. ip mute-static 100 22 255.255.255.255 10 0.12 2 ip route-static 10.0 22 255.255.255.255 10 0212 preference 40
❑ B. ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255 255 255 10.0.122 ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.212 preference 70 Might Answers)
❑ C ip route-static 10 0 22 255.255.255.255 100_12.2 ip route-static 10 0 22 255.255.255.255 10 0212
▪ ip route-static 10 02 2 255 255 255 255 10 0.12 2 preference 70 ip route-static 10 0 2.2 255.255.255.255 10.021.2
Answer: B
80 ip route-static 10 0.12.0 255 255.255 0 192.168.1.1

The correct description about this command is 0.
❑ A. The priority of this route is 100
❑ B. This command configures a route to the 192.168.1.1 network_
❑ C This command configures a route to the 10_0 12 0 network. (Right Answers)
❑ D. if the router learns the route of the same destination network as this route through other protocols, the router wit prefer this route.
Answer: C
81 Network structure and OSPF partition as shown in the figure, except for R1, routers R2, R3 and R4 are ABR routers of OSPF.
Areal R4 Area2
❑ A True
Answer: B
82[R1] ospf
[R1-ospf-I area I
[R1-ospf-1-area-00 0 1] netted< 10 0.12 0 0 0 0255
As shown in the configuration, the administrator has configured OSPF on R1, but R1 cannot learn the mutes of other routers. The possible reason is () (Multiple Choice)
❑ A This router is not configured with authentication, but the neighbor router is configured with authentication (Right Answers )
❑ B The OSPF process 10 is not configured when this router is configured_
❑ C The area ID configured by this router is different from the area ID of its neighbor router (Right Answers )
❑ B. This router does not announce the network connecting neighbors when configuring OSPF (Right Answers)
Answer: ACID
83. Which of the following data packets is the OSPF protocol encapsulated in?
❑ A. IP (Right Answers)
❑ B. liTTP
❑ C. UDP
❑ D. TGP
Answer: A
84 Whichi of the following about the default route is correct! (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The default route can only be manually configured by the administrator.
❑ B In the routing table the default route appears as a route to the network 0 0 0 0 (the mask is also 0 0 00) (Right Answers)
❑ C There must be a default route in the routing table of any router
❑ 0 If the destination address of the packet cannot match any destination address of the routing table, the packet will be forwarded by selecting the default route (Right Answers)
Answer: BO
85 When configuring a static mule on a broadcast interlace, you can configure a static route by specifying the next hop address or outbound interlace_
❑ A True
Answer: B
86. Which of the following attributes cannot be used as a parameter to measure Cost?
111 A. Delay
111 B. sysname (Right Answers)
El C. Hop count
❑ D. Bandwidth
Answer: B
87. As shown in the following figure. Router A and Router B establish an OSPF neighbor relationship. The OSPF process ID of Router A is 1 and the area ID is O. Which of the following methods can enable Router B to obtain the route of the
nehvork segment where Host A is located? (Multiple Choice)
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24
GO/0/1
Rou er A Router B
is° E;
0
lj IP:192.168.1.1/24
GW:192.168.1.2
HOST A
0 A ospf t area 0.0.0.0 network 192.168.1.00.0.0.255 0 (Right Answers)
FA B ospf 1 import-route direct 0 (Right Answers)
P C. ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 192168.0.00.0.255 255 (Right Answers)
❑ D ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192 168 1.2 0.0.0.0 0 (Right Answers )
Answer. ABCD
88. Which of the following fields does not contain in HELLO packets of OSPF protocol?
El A. Neighbor
11] B. sysname (Right Answers)
CI C. Hello Interval
CI D. Network Mask
Answer: B
89. What are the roles of OSPF DR and BDR? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Reduce the number of adjacencies (Right Answers)
111 B. Reduce the type of OSPF packets
C] C. Reduce the time it takes to establish adjacency
CI D. Reduce the number of exchanges of link state information (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
90. Which of the following are routing protocols? (Multiple Choice)

CI A. BGP (Right Answers)
El B. IPX
111 C. OSPF (Right Answers)
111 D. IP
Answer: AC
91. A company network administrator wants to be able to remotely manage branch network devices. Which of the following protocols will be used?
❑ A. VLSM
❑ B. Telnet (Right Answers)
❑ C. RSTP
❑ D. CIDR
Answer: B
92. Which of the following message types does DHCP contain? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. DHCP ROLLOVER
❑ B. DHCP DISCOVER (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCP REQUEST (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCP OFFER (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
93. Telnet is based on the TCP protocol.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
95. What should do when the Access port sends a data frame?
❑ A. Replace VLAN TAG forwarding
❑ B. Stripping TAG forwarding (Right Answers)
❑ C. Mark PVID forwarding
❑ D. Send a message with TAG
Answer: B
96. If the configuration information of a port on a switch is as follows, when this port sent the data frames of which VLAN, the VLAN TAG is stripped?
❑ A. 4,5,6
❑ B. 4,6
❑ C. 1,4,6 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 1,4,5,6
Answer: C
97. The configuration information of a port on the switch is as follows, when the port sends the data frame of which VLAN TAG is carried, the VLAN TAG is stripped?
*
❑ A 10 (Right Answers)
❑ B 20
❑ C. 30
❑ D. 40
Answer: A
98. When a port of the switch sends a data frame carrying the same VLAN TAG and PVID, it must strip the VLAN TAG forwarding.
❑ A. True
❑ B FaEse (Right Answers)
Answer: B
99 As shown in the following figure, Router A uses manual link aggregation and adds GO/0/1 and G0/0/2 ports to aggregation group 1 The incorret statement about the status of Router A aggregation port 1 is:
Eth-Trunk 1 10.0.12.1/24 Eth-Trunk 1 10.0.12.2/24
O C0/0/2 O
Router A Router B
❑ A_ Only shut down GO/0/2 of Router B, Eth-Trunk 1 protocol up
❑ Tum off GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 ports on Router B at the same time, Eth-Tmnk 1 protocol up (Right Answers)
❑ a Only shut down GO/0/1 of Router B, Eth-Trunk 1protocol up
❑ B. Turn off GO/0/1 and G0/0/2 ports on Router B at the same time, Eth-Trunk 1 protocol down
Answer: B
1 00. In the network shown in the figure the correct description of the following is:
5 WA RTA SWB
HUB SWC
❑ A. The network between RTA and SWC is the same collision domain.
❑ B. The network between SWA and SWC is the same broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The network between SWA and SWC is the same collision domain. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The network between SWA and SWB is the same broadcast domain.
Answer: BC
1 09. When NAT uses a dynamic address pool, addresses in the address pool can be reused, that is, the same IP is mapped to multiple intranet (Ps at the same time
❑ A True
Answer: B
102. Which of the following values is used in the LengthfType field of the Ethernet data frame, indicating that the packet is in the PPPoE discovery phase?
❑ A. 0x0800
❑ B. 0x8863 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 0x8864
❑ D. 0x0806
Answer, B
103. Regarding PPP configuration and deployment ; which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. PPP does not support mutual authentication
❑ B. PPP cannot modify keepalive time
❑ C. PPP cannot be used to deliver IP addresses.
❑ D. PPP supports CHAP and PAP authentication modes. (Right Answers )
Answer: D
104. On the Huawei device, if AAA authentication is used for authorization, when the remote server does not respond, authorization can be performed from the network device side.
0 B. False
Answer: A
105. As shown in the network, the configuration information of Router A is as follows. Which of the following statement is wrong?
acl number 2000
rule 5 deny source 200.0.12.0 0.0.0.7
rule 10 permit source 200.0.12.0 0.0.0.15
traffic-filter outbound acl 2000
Router A
❑ A. The host with the source FP address of 200.0.12.2 cannot access the Internet.
❑ B. The host with the source EP address of 200.0.12.6 cannot access the Internet.
❑ C. The host with the source IP address of 200.0.12.8 cannot access the Internet. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The host with the source IP address of 200.0.12.4 cannot access the Internet.
Answer: C
106. Based on ACL rules, which of the following types can an ACL be classified into? (Multiple Choice)
❑ B. User ACL
❑ C. Advanced ACL (Right Answers)
❑ D. Basic ACL (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
107. The Management Information Base MIB is a virtual database that is stored on the NMS.
O A. True
Answer: B
108. As shown in the following figure, what is the scope of AH protocol authentication in IPsec tunnel mode?
New IP Header IP Header ,AH Header TCP Header Data

1
2
3
4
O A. 1
O B. 2
O C. 3
Answer: D
109. The ACL on the AR G3 series router supports two matching sequences: configuration order and automatic sorting.
D A. True (Right Answers)
[11 B. False
Answer: A
110. The requested node multicast address consists of the prefix FF02::1:FF00:0/104 and the last 24 bits of the unicast address.
O B. False
Answer: A
111. How many seconds is the period of the OSPFv3 HELLO packet on the P2P link by default?
El B. 20
O C. 30
El D. 40
Answer: A
112. The multicast address FF02::2 indicates all routers in the link-local range.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
113. The basic header length of an IPv6 message is a fixed value.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
114. IPv6 address 2001: ABEF 224E: FFE2: BCCO: CDOO: DDBE 8D58 cannot be abbreviated.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
115. The router Router D neighbor relationship is as follows Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
(-Router D>displey osofv3 peer 10. 0, 3. 3 verbose

OSPFv3 Process (1)
Neighbor 10. 0, 3. 3 is 2-Way, interface address FE80; ;MO:FCFF :4ECS

In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface GEC/0/0
Options is 01000013
Database Suaueary Packets List 0
Neighbour Event: 2
Neighbour If Id :
❑ A. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.2.2. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.1.1.
❑ C. This router is a DROther router (Right Answers)
❑ D. This router and the router with Router-ID 10.5.3.3 cannot directly exchange link state information. (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
116. SRGB (segment routing global block). A local label set reserved for the global segment. In MPLS and IP,(6, SRGB is a collection of local labels reserved for global labels.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers )
Answer: B
117_ One of the reasons for the emergence of SR (Segment Routing) is that there are some factors that restrict the devebpment of traditional LOP. What are the correct descriptions about LOP of the following? (MullipP Choice)
❑ A. LOP calculation depends on ICP When IGP and LOP are not synchronized, it will cause black holes and affect the service (Right Answers)
❑ B LOP itself has 11 kinds of protocol packets, which greatly increases link bandwidth consumption and device CPU utilization. (Right Answers)
❑ C. LOP only supports IGP shortest path (minimum overhead) for path calculation, and does not support traffic engineering. (Right Answers)
▪ LOP cannot implement automatic label allocation
Answer: ABC
118_ The network administrator wants to be able to effectively use the IP address of the 192 168 176_0/25 network segment_ Now the company's marketing department has 20 mainframes, it is best to assign which of the following address
segment to the marketing depadment?
❑ A. 192_168_176_160/27
❑ B. 192.168.17696/27 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 192 168 176 0/25
❑ B. 192 168 176 4W29
Answer: B
119 When using gm ping command on the VRP platform, d you need to specify an IP address as the source address of the echo request message, which of the loemung parameters shouts be used/When using the sing command on Ihe VRP
platform, if you need lo specify an IP address as the source address of the echo request message, which of the following parameters should he used?
ID A. -s
❑ Ei -a (Right Answers)
❑ C4
❑ o_ -n
Answer. El
120. Which of the following types of addresses cannot be used as the IPv4 address of host?
❑ A. Class A address
❑ B. Class B address
❑ C. Class C address
❑ D. Class D address (Right Answers)
Answer: D
121. A company applies for a Class C IP address segment, but it is assigned to 6 subsidiaries. The largest subsidiary has 26 computers. Different subsidiaries must be in different network segments. So the network subnet mask of the largest
subsidiary should be, set to 0.
C A 255 255.255.224 (Right Answers)
17 B. 255.255.255.128
C C. 255.255.255.0
E 0. 255.255.255.192
Answer, A
122. Which of the following statement about the transport layer protocol is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. UDP uses the SYN and ACK flags to request to establish a connection and confirm the connection.
❑ B. Well-known port number range is 0-1023 (Right Answers )
❑ C. UDP is suitable for transmitting delay-sensitive traffic and can be reorganized according to the sequence number field in the message header.
❑ D. The establishment of a TCP connection is a three-way handshake process, and the termination of a TCP connection is subject to a four-way handshake. (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
123. Which of the following commands can modify the device name to huawei?
❑ A. rename huawei
❑ B. sysname huawei (Right Answers)
❑ C. do name huawei
❑ D. hostname huawei
Answer: B
124. The administrator wants to update the VRP of the AR2200 router. The correct method is (). (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The administrator configures the AR2200 as a TFTP server to transmit VRP software through TFTP.
❑ B. The administrator configures the AR2200 as a TFTP client to transmit VRP software through TFTP. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The administrator configures the AR2200 as an FTP server to transfer VRP software through FTP. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The administrator configures the AR2200 as an FTP client to transfer VRP software through FTP. (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
125. What are the command line views exsiting on the VRP operating platform?
❑ A. Interface view (Right Answers)
❑ B. User view (Right Answers)
❑ C. Protocol view (Right Answers)
❑ D. System view (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
126. Which bridge ID is not possible in the configuration BPDU sent by the switch?
❑ A. 4096 01-01-02-03-04-05 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 0 10-01-02-03-04-05
❑ C. 32768 06 01 02 03 04 05
❑ D. 0 00-01-02-03-04-05
Answer: A
127. In a switch networking, if a loop occurs, it may cause a broadcast storm.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
128. The loop protection function provided by the RSTP protocol can take effect only on the specified port.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
129. In the RSTP protocol, the edge port loses the edge port attribute when it receives the configuration BPDU message.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
130. When STP is running on Huawei Sx7 series switches ; the priority of the switch is 0 by default.
❑ A. 8192
❑ C. 16384
❑ D. 4096
Answer: B
131. Which of the following statement about the role of the STP protocol Forward Delay is correct?
❑ A. Reduce the time interval for BPDU transmission
❑ B. Delay in the transition of Blocking state and Disabled state
❑ C. Improve the convergence speed of STP
❑ D. Improve the BPDU lifetime and ensure that the configuration BPDU can be forwarded to more switches.
❑ E. Preventing temporary loops (Right Answers)
Answer: E
132. What is the correct statement about the static MAC address table?
❑ A. The user is manually configured and delivered to each interface board. The entries cannot be aged. (Right Answers)
❑ B. By viewing the static MAC address entry, you can determine whether there is data forwarding between the two connected devices.
❑ C. Static MAC address entries are lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or the interface board is reset.
❑ D. You can obtain the number of users communicating on the interface by viewing the number of static MAC address entries.
Answer: A
133. Which parameter is used in the spanning tree protocol to erect the root bridge?
❑ A. Port ID
❑ B. The system name of the switch
❑ C. Root path cost
❑ D. Bridge ID (Right Answers)
Answer: D
134 The administrator finds that the two routers stay in the TWO-WAY state when establishing an OSPF neighbor, the correct description of the following is ()
❑ A. The router is configured with the same zone ID
❑ B. These two routers are DR Other routers in the broadcast network. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The router is configured with the wrong router ID
❑ D The router is configured with the same process ID
Answer: B
135 An AR2200 router barns the route entries to the same network through OSPF and RIPv2 The cost of the route learned through OSPF is 4882 The number of hops learned through 51552 is 4 The routing table of the router will have ()
❑ A OSPF and RIPv2 routing
❑ 8 OSPF routing (Right Answers)
❑ C Both do not exist
❑ D RIPv2 routing
Answer: B
136. When the router forwards the datagram ; the data link layer needs to be re-encapsulated every time a data link layer passed.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
137. Which of the following network types does the OSPF protocol support? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Broadcast type (Right Answers)
❑ B. Point to point (Right Answers)
❑ C. Point-to-point type (Right Answers)
❑ D. NBMA (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
138. Which of the following are the stable states of OSPF neighbor relationships? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Down (Right Answers)
❑ B. Full (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2-way (Right Answers)
❑ D. Attempt
Answer: ABC
139. Which of the following routing protocols are dynamic routing protocols? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. OSPF (Right Answers)
❑ B. BGP (Right Answers)
❑ C. Direct
❑ D. Static
Answer: AB
140 As shown in the figure, all routers run OSPF protocol, and the OSPF process number i5 1 and the area number is 0 Which of the following commands can implement this requirement on Router A? (Multiple Choice)
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24
O GO/0/1 O
Router A Router B
❑ A # ospf 1 area 00 0 0 network 10 0.12.1 0 0 00 # (Right Answers)
❑ B # ospf 1 area 0000 network 100.1200003#
❑ C. # ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 0 12 0 00 0 255 # (Right Answers)
❑ 0 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 ip address 10 0 121 255 255 255 0 ospf enable 1 area 0 0 0 0 # (Right Answers)
Answer: AGO
141. In the OSPF protocol, which of the following description of the DR is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The adjacency relationship must also be established between the DR and the BDR. (Right Answers)
❑ B. If the priority values of the two routers are equal. select the router with the large router ID as the DR (Right Answers)
❑ C if the priority values of the two routers are different, select the router with the smaller priority value as the DR_
❑ D By default, all routers in this broadcast network will participate in DR elections (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
142 As shown in the figure, after the Um routers are configured with OSPF, the administrator configures the <mlenhinterfaces0f0/1> command on the RTA. The correct description is O (Multiple Choice)
RTA RTB
SO/0/1 60/0/1
❑ A The RTA wit continue to receive and analyze the OSPF packets sent by the RTB.
❑ B_ The neighbor relationship of the two routers will be down_ (Right Answers)
❑ C_ RTA wit not send OSPF packets anymore_ (Right Answers)
❑ 0_ The neighbor relationship of the two routers wit not be affected
Answer: BC
143. A DHCP OFFER packet can wry a DNS address, but can only carry one DNS address..
❑ A. True
Answer: B
144 As hown in the following figure, host A logs in to Router A through Telnet, and then obtains the configuration file of Router B through FM on the remote interface_ How many TCP connections exist on Router A?
HOST A
IP :192.168.1.2/2
GW:192.168.1.1
❑ A.1
❑ B2
❑ 0.4
Answer: C
145 At present, the company has a network administrator. The AR2200 in the company network can be for remote management after directly enter the password through Telnet.
The company has two new network administrators, and wants to assign all administrators their respective usernames and passwords, as well as different permission levels. So what should doe (Multiple Choice)
❑ A When configuring each administrator's account, you need to configure different permission levels_ (Right Answers)
▪ R User authentication mode configured by Telnet must select AAA mode (Right Answers)
❑ C Configure three user names and their corresponding passwords in the AAA New. (Right Answers)
❑ CI Each administrator uses different public IP addresses of the device when running the Telnet command_
Answer: ABC
146. What is the role of the port trunk allow-pass vtan all command?
❑ A. The connected peer device can dynamically determine which VLAN IDs can pass.
❑ B. If the port default vian3 command is configured for the connected remote device, VLAN 3 between the two devices cannot communicate.
❑ C The peer port connected to the port must be configured with port trunk permit vlan all
❑ D. Allow all data frames of the VLAN to pass through the port. (Right Answers )
Answer: D
14T_ The Hybrid port can connect to both the user host and other switches_
I=1 A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False
Answer: A
148. The IP addresses of the VLANIF interfaces on the same switch cannot be the same.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
149. As shown in the following figure, the router uses the sub-interface as the gateway of the host. The P address of the gateway is 10 0.12 2 Which of the following commands can fu II this requirement? (Multiple Choice)
10.0.12.2/24
SWA
G 0/0/2 O
Access elan 20 Router A
ct
0
O
HOST A
11,1 10.0.12.1/24
MAC:MAC-A
❑ A interface GigabitEthemet0/0/43 10 dotlq termination yid 10 ip address 100_122 255255 255 0 arp broadcast enable #
❑ B. interface Gi gabitEthernot0/0/0 20 dotlq termination old 20 ip address 100_12 2 255255255 0 arp broadcast enable # (Right Answers )
❑ G. interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0.10 dotlq termination vid 20 ip address 10.0.12.2 255.255.255.0 arp broadcast enable # (Right Answers )
❑ a interface GigabitEthernet0/0/020 dotlq termination yid 10 ip address 10 0 12 2 255255 255 0 arp broadcast enable M
Answer: BC
150 The network administrator creates VLAN 10 on the Layer 3 switch and configures an IP address on the virtual interface of the VLAN_ When you use the command "<I>display ip interface brief</l,to check the status of the interface and
find that the VLANIF 10 interface is down, what operations should be taken to restore the VLANIF 10 interface?
❑ A Use the command "undo shutdown" on the VLANIF 10 interface.
❑ B. Incorporate a physical interface whose state must be Up into VLAN 10 (Right Answers)
❑ C Incorporate any physical interface into VLAN 10
❑ 0_ Incorporate an interface whose state must be Up and must be of the Trurk type into VLAN 10
Answer: B
151 As shown in the figure, the network administrator creates VLAN 2 on the SWA and SWB, and configures the ports connected to the host on the two switches as access ports and assigns them to VLAN 2 Configure GO/0/1 of the SA and
GO/0/2 of the SWB as trunk ports to allow all VLANs to pass. To achieve normal communication between the two hosts, he also needs 0
Hos, Host 13
VI Na VW
❑ A_ Create VLAN 2 on the SWC.

❑ B. Configure GO/0/1 on the SWC as the trunk port and allow VLAN 2 to pass.
❑ G Configure GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 on the SWC as trunk ports and allow VLAN 2 to pass.
❑ 0_ Create VLAN 2 on the SWC, configure GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 as trunk ports and alum VLAN 2 to pass (Right Answers )
Answer:
152 As shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows_ According to the network and configuration, which of the following statements are correct,(Multiple Choice)
Router B
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10 021 1 255.255 255 0

area 0000
network 10 0 21_1 0_0_0_0
Router A
link-protocol ppp
ip address 10 012.1 255 255 255 0

area 0000
network 10 0_121 0 0 0_0
S 1/0/0 S 1/0/0
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.21.1/24
O
Router A Router B
❑ A_ Router A and Router B cannot team the MAC address of the other interface. (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Router A and Router B have ARP tables_
❑ C Two routers can establish OSPF adjacency (Right Answers)
❑ El There is no OR and BOR in the network (Right Answers)
Answer: AGO
153 The data link layer uses PPP encapsulation, and the iP addresses at both ends of the hnk may not he in the same network segment
❑ A True (Right Answers )
❑ B. False
Answer: A
154. The command to enable CHAP authentication in PPP is: ppp chap authentication.
❑ A. True
❑ False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
155. Apply the following ACL in SNMP: which of the following is wrong?
act number 2000
rule 10 permit source 192.168 1_3 0
❑ A. The device with IP address 192_168_1.5 can use SNMP service. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device with IP address 192.168.1.3 can use SNMP service.
❑ C. The device with the [P address of 192.168.1.4 can use SUMP service.
❑ D. The device with IP address 192.168.1.2 can use SNMP service.
Answer: A
156. In the packet encapsulation format shown in the figure, which of the following fields will be encrypted by the ESP protocol of IPsec VPN?
❑ A_ ESP Header, TCP Header, Data

❑ B. ESP Header, TCP Header, Data, ESP Trailer
❑ C. ESP Header, Tam Header, Data, ESP Trailer, ESP Auth
❑ D. TCP Header, Data, ESP Trailer (Right Answers )
Answer: D
157 As shown in the figure below, what is the scope of AH protocol authentication in IPsec transmission mode?
IP Header AH Header CP Header Data

1
2
3
4 .
1=1 A. 1
ID B. 2
CI C. 3
Answer: D
158. When the data encapsulation mode of I Psec is tunnel mode, the IP address of the intranet host is hidden, which can protect the security of the entire original data packet.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
159. Which of the following commands configures the authentication mode to be HWTACACS authentication?
❑ C. authentication-mode none
❑ D. authentication-mode hwtacacs (Right Answers )
Answer: D
160. During the establishment of the adjacency relationship, what is the role of DD packets in OSPFv3?
❑ A. Used to send the required LSA to the peer router
❑ B. Discover and maintain neighbor relationships
❑ C. To describe its own LSDB (Right Answers)
❑ D. Request missing LSA
Answer: C
161. ff the MAC address of an interface is OEEO-FFFE-OFEC, what is its corresponding EU1-64 address?
❑ A. 02E0-FCFF-FEEF-OFEC (Right Answers)
❑ B. OOEO-FCEF-FFFE-OFEC
❑ C. OOEO-FCFF-FFFE-OFEC
❑ D. 00E0-FCFF-FEEF-OFEC
Answer: A
162. Which field of the IPv6 header can be used for Q0S?
❑ A. Next Header
❑ B. Payload Length
❑ C. Traffic Class (Right Answers)
❑ D. Version
Answer: C
163. The simplest form of IPv6 address 3001:0DB8:0000:0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58 is?

❑ A. 3001:0D138::0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
❑ B. 3001:DB8::346:ABCD:42BC:8D58 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 3001:DB8:0346:ABCD:42BC:81358
❑ D. 3001:0DB8:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
Answer: B
164. The same interface of the router cannot be used as both a DHCPv6 server and a DHCPv6
❑ B. False
Answer: A
165. Which packet is sent by the DI ICPv6 client, requesting the DI ICPv6 server to assign an IPv6 address and network configuration parameters to it?
❑ A. Solicit (Right Answers)
❑ B. Advertise
❑ C. Discover
❑ D. Request
Answer: A
166. Segment routing (SR) is a protocol based on what idea to design for forwarding packets on the network?
❑ A. Routing strategy
❑ B. Destination routing
❑ C. Policy routing
❑ D. Source routing (Right Answers)
Answer: D
167. How many bytes are the packets using the MPLS label double-layer nesting technology more than the original IP packets?
❑ A. 4
❑ C. 16
❑ D. 32
Answer; B
168. Which of the following subnet routes can aggregate fron the route entry 10.0.0.24/29? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 10.0.0.24130 (Right Answers )
❑ B. 10.0.0.26130
❑ C. 10.0.0.28/30 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 10.0.0.23/30
Answer: AC
164. An IPv4 packet header length field is 20B. and the Iota[ length field is 1500B then what is the packet payload?
❑ A. 20B
❑ B_ 1520B
❑ C. 1480B (Right Answers )
❑ D. 95000
Answer: C
170. Which of the following is unlikely to be the 1l3v4 packet header length?
❑ A. 208
❑ 8. 64B (Right Answers)
❑ C. 608
❑ ❑. 328
Answer: B
171. The Ethernet optical interface can only work in the 0 mode.
❑ A. Full duplex (Right Answers)
❑ B. Half duplex
❑ C. Simplex
❑ D. Soft-negotiation
Answer: A
172 <Huawei>
Warning- Auto-Gonfig is working. Before configunng the device, stop Auto-Gonfigif you perform configurations when Auto-Gonfig is running, the DHCP routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost.
Do you want to stop Auto-config, [YIN]:
The administrator found that the above message popped up on the demo_ The correct statement about this information is (),
❑ A. If you need to enable automatic configuration, the administrator needs to choose
❑ B. If you do not need to enable automatic configuration, the administrator needs to select N
❑ G When the device is first started, the auto configuration function is enabled (Right Answers)
❑ D When the device is first started, the auto configuration function is disabled.
Answer: C
173. Which of the following commands can be used to query the configuration information of the OSPF protocol? (Mutliple Choice)
❑ A. dis ip routing-table
❑ B. display current-configuration (Right Answers)
❑ C. display ospf peer
❑ D. In OSPF protocol view display this (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
174. The output information of a certain device is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
<Huawei>display interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

ailiegitEthemet0/0/0 current state : DP
Line protocol current slate 7 LIFE
Route Port, The !axiom Transmit Unit is 1000
Internet Address is 10. 0.12. 2/29
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFIT_ETHNI_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc224fff
Port lode: FORCE COPPER
Speed : 100, Loosback: NOW
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: DISABLE
Ech : AUTO
Last 300 seconds input rate 24 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Lest 300 seconds output rate 24 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
❑ A. The MAC address of the interface is 00e0-fe22-4fff (Right Answers)
❑ B. The IP address of the interface is 10 0 122/24. (Right Answers)
❑ C The working speed of this interface is 1Gbps_
❑ D. The MTh value of this interface is 1000. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
175 What is the correct statement about the black hole MAC address table? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The saved entries are not lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or the interface board is reset (Right Answers)
❑ B. It is manually configured and delivered to each interface board. The entries cannot be aged (Right Answers)
❑ C. After the blackhole MAC address is configured, the packet which source MAC address or the destination MAC address is the MAC address will be discarded. (Right Answers)
❑ 0 You can filler out illegal users by configuring blackhole MAC address entries. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABC0
176. Which is the correct statement about the static MAC address table? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A After the interface is stabcaily bound to the MAC address, the other interface receives the packet whose source MAC address is the MAG address will be discarded. (Right Answers)
DB_ By viewing the static MAC address entry, you can determine whether there is data forwarding between the two connected devices.
❑ C. A static MAC address entry can be bound to only one outbound interface_ (Right Answers)
❑ B. The saved entries are not lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or the interface board is reset. (Right Answers)
Answer: AC0
177. In the RSTP protocol, when the root port fails, 0 will he quickly converted to the new root port and immediately enter the forwarding state.
❑ A. Backup port
❑ B. Edge port
❑ C. Forwarding port
❑ D. Alternate port (Right Answers)
Answer: D
1 78. Both the Alternate port and the Backup port in RSTP cannot forward user traffic in RSTP, but can receive, process, and send BPDUs.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
179. Al[ switches in the following figure have STP protocol enabled, if the path cost of all ports is 200_
What is the path cost value included in the configuration BPDU received by the GO/0/4 port of SWD?
SWA SWB
32768 00-01 02 03 04 AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-13E1
SWD
32168 00-01-02.03-04-CC 32768 00-01 -02-03-04- DI)
D A. 0
❑ G. 400
❑ D. €00
Answer: B
180 As shown in the figure, at four switches run SIP, and various parameters use default values. When a port on the root switch sends a lam and fails to send configuration BPOUs through the port, how bng before the bbcked port in the
network enters the forwarding state,
floor
hC
❑ A About 30 seconds
❑ B About 50 seconds (Right Answers)
❑ G About 15 seconds
❑ 0. About 3 seconds
Answer: B
1 81. By default, it takes at least 30 seconds for the port status in SW to be changed from ❑isabled to forwarding.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
182. There are multiple NextHops in the routing table that reach the same destination network. These routes are called?
❑ A. Equivalent routing (Right Answers)
❑ B. ❑efault route
❑ C. Multipath routing
❑ ❑ - Suboptimal routing
Answer: A
183. Which of the following network types does the OSPF protocol need to elect DR and BDR? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Point-to-point type
❑ B. Broadcast type (Right Answers)
❑ C. NBMA (Right Answers)
❑ D. Point to point
Answer: BC
184. The Router ID of the OSPF process takes effect immediately after being modified.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
185. When configuring OSPF on a router, you must manually configure 0. (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Enable OSPF process (Right Answers)
❑ B. Create an OSPF area (Right Answers)
❑ C. Configure the router ID
❑ D. Specify the network included in each zone (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
186. The priority of the static routing protocol cannot be specified manually.
O A. True
Answer: B
187. Which of the following statements about direct route is correct?

❑ A. Direct route priority is lower than dynamic route
❑ B. Direct route requires the administrator to manually configure the destination network and next hop address.
❑ C. Direct route has the highest priority (Right Answers)
O D. Direct route priority is lower than static route
Answer: C
188. The router in the backbone area has all the LSDBs in all its areas.
O A. True
Answer: B
189. Which of the following parameters does the OSPF protocol use for the master-slave relationship election?
O A. Process number of OSPF protocol
O B. Router ID (Right Answers)
O C. Sequence of startup protocols
❑ D. Interface IP address
Answer: B
190.According to the following DHCP flowchart, which statements are true? (Multiple Choice)
Client 08CP Server
DHG. oistaver
Slept
MCP Offer
Strp2
CHCP Request
Srep3
DliCP ACK
sup&
El A. In step 1, multicast packets are sent.

111 B. In step 2 ; unicast packets are sent. (Right Answers)
111 C. In step 3; broadcast packets are sent. (Right Answers)
El D. In step 4, unicast packets are sent. (Right Answers)
El E. In step 4, broadcast packets are sent.
Answer: BCD
191. The DHCP protocol interface address pool has a higher priority than the global address pool.
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
192. As shown in the following figure, all links are Ethernet links, and all routers run OSPF. How many DR are elected in the entire network?
Router
0..
0 A. 1
O B. 2
O C. 3
Answer: D
193. How many member ports can be added to an Eth-Trunk interface on ARG3 series router and X7 series switch?
D A. 6
D C. 10
CI D. 12
Answer; B
194. A trunk port can send both tagged data frames and unlabeled data frames.
Cl B. FALSE
Answer: T
195. As shown in the figure, if host A has host B ARP cache, host A can ping through host B.
Access vian Xo
SWA
G 0/0/2
Access vtan 20 SERVER B
tp 14;0 I/
ipodu 14.41A4
HOST A
IP 10.0.12.1.124
MAC:MAC
0 A. TRUE
Answer: F
196. Which of the following statements about one-arm routing is correct? (Multiple choice)
0 A. One physical connection per VLAN
O B. On the switch, configure the port connected to the router as a trunk port and allow the frames of the relevant VLAN to pass. (Right Answers)
O C. Need to create a sub-interface on the router (Right Answers)
O D. Only one physical link is used between the switch and the router. (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
197. Which of the following statements about link aggregation is correct? (Muitiple choice)
0 A. Eth-Truk interfaces cannot be nested (Right Answers )
O B. Ensure that the modes of link aggregation on the two devices are the same when the two devices are connected to each other_ (Right Answers)
O C. The GE interface and the FE interface cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk interface. (Right Answers)
O D. GE electrical interfaces and GE optical interfaces cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk interface. (Right Answers)
Answer; ABCD
198. NAPT uses the same public IP address but different port numbers to translate private IP addresses. Which statement regarding the port number is correct?
El A. It is necessary to configure port number mapping manually.
El B. It is only necessary to configure the port number range.
El C. It is not necessary to configure port numbers.
0 D. An access control list is needed to assign port numbers. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
RTA RTB
NDLC
Loopback 0 S1/0/1 S1/0/1
10.1.1.1132 I
10.1.1.2/24
On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command "ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0" has been configured.
Which following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
O A. The IP address of RTA interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/24.
O B. The IP address of RTA interface serial 11011 is 10.1.1.1/32. (Right Answers )
Ei C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in RTA's routing-table.
O D. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 does not exist in RTA's routing-table. (Right Answers)
Answer; BD
200. The data link layer is encapsulated in PPP. The IP addresses at both ends of the link cannot be in the same network segment.
O B. FALSE
Answer: T
201. Which of the following parameters are identified by the SA (Security Association)? (Multiple choice)
O D. Security Protocol (AH or ESP) (Right Answers)
Answer; BCD
202. As shown in the following figure, IPSec uses tunnel mode. What is the scope of ESP encryption?
New IP AH ESP IP TCP Data ESP ESP Auth

Header Header Header Header Header Tail Data
0 A. 1 (Right Answers)
O B. 2
O C. 3
O D. 4
Answer, A
203. The Router-ID of OSPFv3 can be automatically generated by the system.

OA. TRUE
Answer: F
204. The following about IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration and DHCPv6, which is correct? (Multiple choice)
O A. IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration uses RA and RS messages (Right Answers)
El B. DHCPv6 is more manageable than stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
O C. DHCPv6 can be divided into DHCPv6 stateful autoconfiguration and DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. (Right Answers)
O D. IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration and DHCPv6 can allocate related configuration information such as DNS address to the host.
Answer; ABC
205. Which of the following is the value of the IPv6 multicast address flag field indicates that the multicast address is a temporary multicast address?
O A. 0
0 B. 1 (Right Answers)
O C. 2
0 D. 3
Answer. B
206. Which of the following is the value of the IPv6 multicast address flag field indicates that the multicast address is permanent multicast address?
O B. 1
O C. 2
O D. 3
Answer. A
207. Based on tv1PLS labels, you can mark up to how many types of data streams with different service fevers?
❑ A. 2
❑ B. 4
El C. 8 (Right Answers)
El D. 16
Answer: C
208. Segment Routing encodes the segment sequence representing the forwarding path in the packet header_ As the packet is transmitted, the receiver parses the segment sequence after receiving the packet. If the top segment identifier of the
segment sequence is the local node, the identifier is displayed, and then the next step is processed. It it is not the local node, the packet is forwarded to the next node by using the ECMP (Equal Cost Muftiple Path) mode.
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
209. The router interface output information is as follows ; which is correct? (Multiple choice)
(1-Turragei>dispIay ipv6 interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

GigabitEthernet0/0/0 curront state : UP
11)v6 protocol current state : UP
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is Irn0::210:FCFF:FF6F:41r36
Global unicast address (es) :
2001: :12:1, subnet is 2001: : /64
Joined group address( es)
'1702: :1 :EF12:1
FF02::2
FF02::1
FF02::1:FF6F:41,36
1111 is 1500 byt ,ts
---------------
O A. The global unicast address of this interface is 2001::12:1 (Right Answers)
O B. The MTU of this interface is 1500_ (Right Answers)
0 C. The link-local address of this interface is FE80: 2E0:FCFF FE6F:4F36 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The IPv6 protocol status of this interface is UP. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
210. The output information of a router is as follows. What is the tunneling protocol used by this interface?
tar Altilsplay interface-Tunnel 0/0/0

anns10/0/0 current state : UP
Lime protocol current state : Up
Last line protocol up time : 2019-03-06 11:03:15 11TC 0;::00
Descriptian:HUAWEI, AR Series, Tunne10/0/0 Interface
Mutes Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet Address is unnumbered. using address of Loopllack0(lu.o.1.1432)
Encapsulation is TUNNEL. ioopbnck not ■et
Tunnel source 10.0.12.1 OGisabitEthernet0/45/0. destination 10. O. 12. 2
Tunnel protacolltransport GRE/IP. key disabled
❑ A. MPLS
❑ B . I Psec
❑ C. LDP
❑ D. GRE (Right Answers)
Answer: D
211. What of the following statements is correct regarding Access Control List types and ranges?
❑ A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999.
❑ B. An advanced ACL value range from 3000-4000.
❑ C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999. (Right Answers)
❑ D. An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000.
Answer: C
212. The configuration information of router DHCP address pool is as follows. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
ip pool test
network 192. 168. 1. 0 mask 255. 255. 255. 0
excluded-ip-address 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.254
lease day 0 hour 12 minute 0
❑ A. The address pool has 199 available IP addresses. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The lease of the IP address is 12h. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The address pool has 55 available IP addresses.
❑ D. The IP address that the DHCP client may obtain is 192.168.1.2. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
213. The output information of router routing table is as follows. Which is correct? (Muitip[e choice)
cle10.41mp1 1p rondo.
Route Flaws: I - rr1 Yr. 11 - download to fn.
-------- ---
Maui Inc 1...O.1 c
Dime ince Iceno In Paw. tvp = $ 0
boas i nationfildeok Pro eel Ire

' Coal I ntl- Ne.sit. r irnr, r>r
ice. o- o.ors rn n I
: 1 /4 / I
,
10.6. 2_ /i2 51411.. In it r
D A. The NextHop of this router reaching 90.0.0.1 is 10.0.21.2_

❑ B. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop of this muter reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.12.2
❑ D. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.21.2 (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
214 The following figure shows a routing table. When this router meows a packet with a destination IP address of 9.1.1.1, the router forwards the packet based on the route 9 1_0 0/16 because the matched bit number in this route is the
largest
<Fluawei>display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, 0 - downloadto fib
Routing Tables: Public Destinations : 2 Routes:2

Destination/Mask Preto Pre Cost Flags NextFlop Interface
0.0.0.0/0 Static 60 0 0 120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
8.0.0.0/13 RIP 100 3 0 120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
9.0.0.0/g OSPF 10 50 0 20.0.0.2 Fthernet2/0/0
9.1.0.0/16 RIP 100 4 0 120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
11.0.0.0/8 Static 60 0 0 120.0.0.2 Seria12/0/0
20.0.0.0/g Direct 0 0 0 20.0.0.1 Fthernet2/0/0
20.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 0 127.0.0.1 loopback0
0 B FALSE
Answer: T
215. Router 1 routing table output information is as follows : which is correct? (Multiple choice)
.0111 -r4t.pl elf 1. p puttees-4.pm..

—
Route flat*: R - rya toy. D - download to fib
Sna Te.ble. PeAdite

: 13 Kr_mat rim . 1:1
P owe Pas e Poo toe or rasa

Prong Prc
, 10. IA, 14.4 et elearrpetteille
R 0
0.0.0.0/0 Slott , Fj•
ThermetO/o/
M. Firwrnall0/0rA
O. 0.0. IVO RIP 11., r.. T. 4
10. 0.2- 0/24 gel r..11 ▪ 1 ......0.10/1
R6
10.0.2. 2132 *Mr to 1, n. I '. 1 F. I twrrw T QInfo
1,
10.0.12-0/24 IA rle,t r. Ii.rITI.10/ 1.0
/Cc 9.12.1/92 Direc e
❑ A. There are two dynamic routing protocols in the routing table. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The mask length of the IP address of the Ethernet0/0 interface on the router is 24 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The IP address of the Etherneto/0/0 interface on the router is 10.0.12.1. (Right Answers)
El D. There is a dynamic routing protocol in the routing table.
Answer: ABC
216. Refer to the dispisy information.
CtLedwepchipley mac-address
MAC Address VIANNSI teamed-Frans Type
5439-38ec-1518 If- GE0/13(13 dynamic
Total terns displayed -1
A switch attempts to forward a frame to the MAC destination 54S9-98eo-1011

What operation will occur on the switch?
❑ A. The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
❑ B. The switch will report that the destination is unreachable and report this to the source.
❑ C. The switch wit flood the frame via ail ports, with exception of the port on which the frame was received. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The switch wit drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address table.
Answer: C
217 The current switch MAC address table is as follows, which is correct?
.1,4411-1D
10C-Twarl
❑ A. When the switch is resteded, the MAC address learned on pod Eth0/0/2 does not need to be re-learned.
❑ B. When the switch is restaded, the MAC address learned on pod Eth0/0/3 needs to be re-learned
❑ C The data frame with the source MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 and the destination MAC address of 5489-989d-1430 is received from the pod and forwarded from Eth0/0/2_
❑ 0_ The data frame with the source MAC address of 5489-98885-18a8 and the destination MAC address of 5489-989d-1d30 is received from the pod and forwarded from Eth0/0/1 (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
218. If the transport layer protocol is UDR the network layer Protocol field takes a value of 6_
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
219. Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. A system can determine whether conflicting EP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP packet. (Right Answers)
❑ B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet. (Right Answers)
❑ C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address
❑ D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.
Answer: AB
220. Which of the following flow control methods can be used in the transport layer of the OSI reference model? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A Source suppression message (Right Answers)
❑ B. Window mechanism (Right Answers)
❑ C. Confirmation technology
❑ D Cache technology (Right Answers )
Answer: ABD
221. The application data must carry the MAC address after being processed by the data link layer.
OA TRUE (Right Answers )
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
222. A network engineer prompts the following message when entering the command line: Error: Unrecognized command found atw'position.
Which is correct about this prompt message?
D A. The input command is incomplete
D B. No keywords found (Right Answers)
D C. Input command is not clear
LI D. Parameter type error
Answer: B
223. By default, the root path cost of the root bridge in the STP protocol must be 0.
0 B. FALSE
Answer: T
224. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which is correct?
-
0141Owei)display mac-address
MAC Address VLAN/ PEVLAN CRVLAN Port Type LSP/LSN-ID

VSI/SI MAC-Tunnel
5489-9885-18e8 blackhole -
5489-9811-0b45 1 Eth0/0/3 static -
Total matching items on slot 0 displayed - 2
O A. MAC 5489-9885-18a8 does not have corresponding port information, the switch appears BUG
0 B. All entries in the MAC address table are dynamically learned by the switch.
0 C. After the switch is restarted, MA C5489-9811-0b49 needs to be re-learned.
0 D. If the switch receives a data frame with a source MAC address or a destination MAC address of 5489-9885-18a8, the switch will discard the frame. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
SWA
Edge Port
GO/0/1 / GO/0/2 \ GO/0/3
C21!
14
' 4i>1
Host A Host S Host C
An administrator has configured the port interface G0/0/3 of Switch A as an edge port.
The user wishes to connect multiple devices to the network and connects his own managed switch to the network.
What effect will this have on the network?
111 A. Port interface GO/0/3 of switch A will shut down, as a BPDU has been received by the edge port.
❑ B. Port interface G0/0/3 of switch A will forward the data normally and drop the BPDU sent by the host to the switch.
CI C. Switch A will receive the BPDU and recaculate the port state of GO/0/3. (Right Answers)
0 D. Only Host A can send data out as before, the other devices linked cannot.
Answer: C
226. Which of the following protocols can be used to avoid loops in a redundant Layer 2 network?
El A. ARP
El B. STP (Right Answers)
CI C. UDP
CI D. VRRP
Answer: B
227 The static MAC address table is reset in the system, after the interface board is hot swapped or the interface board is reset, saved entries are not IosL
O B.FALSE
Answer: T
228 As shown in the following figure, assuming that the MAC address table of the SWA is as follows, now Host A sends a data frame whose destination AC address is MAG-11 Which is correct,
MAC
MAC-B 0.0/0/2
S A
G 0/0/ G I /0/2 G 0/0/3
[ZE
IP: 10.1.1.1/24 IP: 10.1.1.2/24
MAC:MAC A IP: 10.1.1.3/24
MAC:MAC-13 MAC:MAC-C
❑ A SWA discards data frames
❑ B Forward this data frame only from the GO/0/2 pod (Right Answers)
❑ G Forward this data frame only from the GO./0/3 pod
❑ a Generalize this data frame
Answer: B
229. As shown in the figure ; STP is disabled on both switches, and Host A sends an ARP Request. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
SWA
❑ A These two switches can achieve load balancing

O B. The CPU usage of these two switches wit be very high. (Right Answers )
O C. Repeated frames will appear in this network (Right Answers )
E D. The MAC address table of these two switches will frequently jitter (Right Answers )
Answer: BCD
230. What are the three ways for a router to establish a routing table? (Muitiple choice)
E A. Dynamic routing (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Static routing (Right Answers)
E C. Direct routing (Right Answers )
E D. Aggregate routing
Answer: ABC
231. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is wrong? (Muitiple choice)
<R1>dIsplay current-configuration configuration nspf

area 0.0.0.0
network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.255
N
return
<R1>display ospf peer

Neighbors
Area 0.0.0.0 interface 10.0.12.1(GigabitEthernet0/0/0)'s neighbors

Router ID: 10.0.2.2 Address: 10.0.12.2
State: Full Mode:Nbr is Slave Priority: 1
DR: 10.0.12.2 BOR: 10.0.12.1 NTU: 0
Dead timer due in 30 sec
Retrans timer interval: S
Neighbor is up for 00:01:48
Authentication Sequence: [ 0 1
❑ A. This router has enabled regional authentication. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device is faulty. The configured Router Id is inconsistent with the actual Router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The Router Id that is valid for this device is 10.0.12.1.
❑ D. The Router Id that is valid for this device is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
Elm
HOST A HOST B
IP: 10.0.12.1/30 IP: 10.0.12.2/24
❑ A. Host A and host B have different IP address masks, so host A and host B cannot communicate.
❑ B. Host A and host B have the same broadcast address
❑ C. Host A and Host B can communicate only if the masks of Host A and Host B are set to be consistent.
❑ D. Host A can ping host B (Right Answers)
Answer: D
233. In which state does OSPF determine the master-slave relationship of DD packets?
❑ A. 2-way
❑ B. Exchange
❑ C. ExStart (Right Answers)
❑ D. Full
Answer: C
234. Which of the following VRP commands can be used to enter area 0 view? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. [Huawei]ospf area 0
▪ [Huawei-ospf-l]area 0 (Right Answers)
❑ C. [Huawei-ospf-t]area 0.0.0.0 (Right Answers )
❑ D. [Huawei-ospf-I]area 0 enable
Answer: BC
HOST A HOST B
IP: 10.0.12.1/30 IP: 10.0.12.2/24
❑ A. Host A and Host B cannot obtain the MAC address each other. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Host A ARP cache exists 10.0.12.5 MAC-B
❑ C. Host A can ping host B
❑ D. Host A and host B have the same broadcast address
Answer: A
236. All interfaces of the router running OSPF must belong to the same area.
OA. TRUE
B FALSE (Right Answers)
Answer: F
237. On Huawei devices, which of the following methods can be used in OSPF router ID selection? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. If a loopback interface is configured, the largest IP address of the loopback interface is selected as the router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ B. If loopback interfaces are not configured, the largest IP address of an interface is selected as the router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ C. A Huawei switch may use the largest IP address of VLANIF interfaces as the router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The default ID 127.0.0.1 is selected as the router ID.
❑ E. A valid router ID can be configured manually. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCE
238. Which of the following are the basic elements of configuring a static route? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Destination network segment (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC address of the outgoing interface
❑ C. lP address of the next hop (Right Answers )
❑ D. Outlet (Right Answers )
Answer: ACD
239. VRP operating platform, which of the following command can view the routing table?
❑ A. display ip routing-table (Right Answers)
❑ B. display current-configuration
❑ D. display ip forwarding-table
Answer: A
240. The following two configuration commands can implement the router RTA to the primary and backup backups of the same destination 10.1.1.0:
[PTA] ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 12.1.1.1 permanent
[RTA] ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 13.1.1.1
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
241. What is the default server port number used by the Telnet protocol?
1:1 A. 21
❑ B. 24
❑ C. 22
Answer: D
242. The maximum number of UTY user interfaces determines how many users can log in to the device through Telnet or STelnet.
0 B. FALSE
Answer: T
243. Which of the following network parameters can the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP assign? (Muitiple choice)
O A. Operating system
O B. DNS address (Right Answers)
O C. IP address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Gateway address (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
244. According to the topology and configuration shown in the figure, an Eth-Trunk link can be set up between the two switches on which LSW2 is the Actor.
LSW1 LSW2
GEO/0/2 GEO/0/2
31„te. -VA
Vev GEO/0/1 GEO/0/1
S
[LSW131acp priority 100 [LSW2]lacp priority 200
[LSW1Jinterface Eth-Trunk1 [LSW2]interface Eth-Trunk1

[LSW1-Eth-Trunkllmode lacp-static [LSW2- Eth-Trunkl]mode lacp-static
[LSW1-Eth-Trunklimax active-linknumber 2 [LSW2- Eth-Trunk1]max active-linknumber 2
a
[LSW11interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 [LSW2]interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/11eth-trunk 1 [LSW2- GigabitEthernet0/0/1]eth-trunk 1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/1]1acp priority 100 a
[LSW2]interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2
[LSW1linterface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 [LSW2- GigabitEthernet0/0/2]eth-trunk 1
ILSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/21eth-trunk 1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/2]1acp priority 100
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
245 Referring to the configuration of the one-arm route in the following figure, it can be judged that even if the ARP proxy is not enabled on the sub-interface of RI, the administrative department and the finance department can exchange visits.
LSW
'
, ,
00 HautrIce ..eno/o/o.0a.no vod
ate0111G1,0,,000/0/0.1,1pacuiresa 192.168.100056 255051.255.0
,7
i
t =
05.41 51011100001
5 :
0
70'073
7 7:01::000 ration 00110
/0/0.411.1,05 192.160200.250 255.255.215.0
OA TRUE
GB FALSE (Right Answers)
Answer: F
246. In the MAC address table of SWA and SWO, Ore MAC address, VLAN and port correspondence correct,
own
G 010/3
H051 B
❑ A SWA_ MAC Address VLAN Pon MAC-A 10 GE0/006. MA -B

20 GEO/013 MAC-C 100 GEOASIO
❑ B SWI3. MAC Address VLAN 10 GE0/02 MACLB 20
GE010/3 MAC-C 030 GENION plight Ammar.)
D C SWA: MAC Address VLAN Port MAC-A 10 GE011111 MAC-13 20
GEO/012 MAC-C 100 GE000I) Right Ansmer0
0 0. SW13: MAC Address \ CAN BOA MAC-A 10 000/0/3 MAC-B 20
GE0/043 MAC-C 11111 GE0/051
247. What is the value of the Flag field in the PPP frame format?
O A. OxFF
O B. Ox7E (Right Answers )
E C. OxEF
❑ 11. Ox8E
Answer: B
248. ICMP packets do not contain a port number . so NAPT cannot be used.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
249. If the network shown in the following figure requires the host A to access the Internet through Easy IP, which of the following ACL should be used on the G0/0/3 interface of Router A2
10.0.12.2/24
Router A
1
0.0.42/24 HOST R
19; 10.0.12 1/ 24
1=
.
j1
HOST A
0
IP; 1 .0.13.1/24
❑ A eel number 2000 rule 5 permit source 1111112_1 000
❑ B. acE number 2000 rule 5 pernit source 10.0.13.0 0.0 0.255# (Right Answers)
❑ G. act number 2000 rule 5 permit source 19 0_15_1 0 0_0_0
❑ fr act number 2000 rule 5 permit source 10 0 12 0 0 90 255#
Answer: B
250 As shown in the figure, the two private network hosts want to communicate with each other through the GRE tunnel. After the GRE tunnel is established, the network administrator needs to configure a static route on the RTA to import the
traffic from host A to host B The static routing channel can meet which of the following demand,
❑ A ip route-static 10 1.2 0 24 tunnel 0/0/1 (Right Answers)

❑ B ip route-static 10.1 2 0 24 200 1 1 1
❑ C ip route-static 10.1 2024 GmabitEthernet0/0/1
❑ D route-static 10.1 2.0 24 200 2 2.1
Answer: A
251 As shown in the figure below , which of the fol[owing locations should the AH header be inserted in the [Psec transport mode?
1 IP Header TCP Header 13 1 Dat

❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
❑ C. 3
❑ ❑ . 4 (Right Answers)
Answer: ❑
252. Which of the following remote login methods is the safest?

❑ A. Telnet
❑ B. Stelnet v100
❑ C. Stelnet v2 (Right Answers)
❑ D. Steinet vl
Answer: C
253. Which of the following default action business module ACL is permit?
❑ A. HTTP
❑ B. SNMP
❑ C. Telnet
❑ D. Flow strategy (Right Answers)
Answer: D
254. What is the Solicited-node multicast address corresponding to the IPv6 address 2019..8.AB?
El A. FF02::1:FF08:AB (Right Answers)
❑ B_ FF02::FF08:AB
E C. FF02 1 tE08.AB
❑ D_ FF 02:1:FF20: 19
Answer: A
255. What is the destination port number of the DHCPv6 request packet sent by the DHCPve chant?
D A. 546
E B. 548
E C. 547 (Right Answers)
D D 549
Answer: C
256. The OSPFv3 adjacency cannot be established. Which of the following reasons might be caused? (Multiple choice)
E A. Router-ID conflict (Right Answers)
E B. HELLO packet sending period is inconsistent (Right Answers)
E C. Inconsistent area numbers (Right Answers)
E D. Interface IPv6 address prefix is inconsistent
Answer: ABC
257_ Which field is added to the SNMP packet header than the IPv4 packet header?
El A. Version
El B. Flow Label (Right Answers)
El C Destination Address
LI D. Source Address
Answer: B
258 LOP penultimate hop pop-up mechanism (PHP), which allows the label to be ejected on the penultimate hop LS11 Thiscan
This reduce the packet processing complexity of which options,
0 A Last hop and penultimate hop device
0 B Penultimate hop device
0 C All MPLS network equipment
0 0 Last hop device (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
259. Which of the following MAC addresses cannot be used as the MAC address of the host NIG? (Multiple choice)
D A. 00-02-03-04-05-06
❑ E 02-03-04-05-06-07
D C. 01 02 03 04 05 06 (Right Answers)
D D. 03-04-05-06-07-08 (Right Answers )
Answer: CD
260_ Which of the following statements regarding the verification of IP connectmly are false? (Multiple Choice)
111 A The ping 12700_1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly inserted into the host's Ethernet port (Right Anowers
0B ping command with the host IP address as the destination can be used to verify that the TCPAP protocol suite is functioning correctly_ (Right Answers)
0 C. The ping command can be used to verify connectivity between the host and the local gateway.
111 D The command "ipconfig /release" can be used to check connectivity problems between the host and the local gateway (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
261. Now there are four network segments 10.24_0_0/24, 10.24.1_0/24, 10.24.2.0/24, 1024.3.0/24_ Which of the following network segments can be summarized? (Muitiple choice)
A. 10.24.0.0/23
B. 10.24.1.0/23
0 C. 10.24.0.0/22 (Right Answers)
0 D. 1 0.24,00/21 (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
262. The administrator wants to upgrade the configuration file for the AR2200 through the USB cable. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
E A. The AR2200 does not support the use of USB to update configuration files.
E B. Connect the USB interface of the PC and AR2200 with mini USB cable.
El C. After connecting the cable; the administrator needs to install the driver for the mini USB. (Right Answers)
E D. Connect the mini USB cable of the PC and AR2200 with mini USB cable. (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
263. The switch receives a micas' data frame. If the destination MAC address of the data frame can be found in the MAC local table, the data frame must be forwarded from the MAC corresponding port.
GA TRUE
rJ B FALSE (Right Answers)
Answer, F
264. The output information of switch SW port is as follows: Which is wrong with the following statement?
Diumeildisplay stp interface Ethernet 0/0/1

ECIST Global Info] iiodc SIN ----
CIST Bridge : 32768.4c1f -cc46-4618
Config Times : Hello 4s NaxAge 20s FwDly 15s JUL:Hop 20
Active Times :Hello 2s IlaxAge 20s FwDly 15s XaxHop 20
CIST Root/ERPC :0 . 4c1f -cci7-3214 / 200000
CIST RegRoot /WPC : 32768.4c1f -cc46-4618 / 0
❑ A. The switch is not a root bridge
❑ B. Forward-delay is 20s (Right Answers )
❑ C. Configure the MaxAge of the BPDU to be 20s.
❑ D. The period for sending BPDU on this port is 2s.
Answer: B
265 The network shown in the figure below, all switches open STP. Disable the sending function of the BPDU on the G0/0/2 port of the SWA. The GO/0/1 of the SWC re-converges to become the root port. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
SWA SWB
4096 00 01 02 03 04 AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-813
HOST A
10: 10 11/24
MACNIAC, SWC H
32768 00 01 02 03 04 CC
❑ A SWB sends TCN BPDUs to SWA (Right Answers)

❑ B. SWC sends TCN BPDUs to SWB (Right Answers)
❑ C. SWB sends configuration BPDU with TCA set to SWC (Right Answers)
❑ D. SWA sends TC set configuration BPDU (Right Answers)
Answer. ABCD
266. An existing switch directly connects to a designated port of peer device through a poet, but the port does not forward any message, but can receive the BPDU to monitor the network change. The role of the port should be?
CI A. Root port
O B. Designated port
0 C. Alternate port (Right Answers)
O D. Disable Pod
Answer. C
267. The switch MAC address table is as follows, which is correct?
Dittasteildis aac-address
'AC Address WAN/ PEVLAN MILAN Port Type L.SP/LSR -ID

VSI/SI NAC-Tunnel
5404-088S-18a8 1 b/aekbole -
5484-9811-0b49 1 Etb0/0/3
- static -
Total matching items on slat 0 displayed = 2
MAC address table of slat 0:
MAC Address IriAli/ PEVLAN CEVLMI Part Type LSP/LSR-ID

VSI/SI *AC-Tunnel
5489 -18%d -2d30 - Eth0/0/1 styrtaaric 0/ -
Te401. amain, it...s on slot 0 displayed
O A. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 will be discarded.
O B. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-9885-18a8 will be discarded. (Right Answers)
O C. The switch receives the data frame with the source MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 and will be discarded.
❑ D. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-989d-1d30 will be discarded.
Answer: B
268. The device running STP will discard when it receives the configuration BPDU of RSTP.
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
269. STP When the designated port receives a configuration BPDU that is worse than itself, it immediately sends its own BPDU downstream.
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
270. What message is sent when the SW downstream device notifies the upstream device of topology change?
O A. TCA message
O B. TC message
O C. Configure BPDUs
O D. TGN BPDU (Right Answers)
Answer: D
271. Which flag bits of the STP protocol are not used by the Flag field in the RSTP configuration BPDU? (Muitiple choice)
O A. Agreement (Right Answers)
❑ B. TCA
❑ C. TC
O D. Proposal (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
272. The backup port in RSTP can replace the failed root port.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
273. As shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A. The following statements which are correct? (Muitiple choice)
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.25510.0.21.2 preference 40
GO/0/1
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24 Loopback 0
10.0.2.2/32
O
10.0.21.1/24 10.0.21.2/24
Router A G0/0/2 Router B
0 A. If the G0/0/2 port is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is changed to GO/0/1. (Right Answers)
D B. If the GO/0/1 port is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is changed to G0/0/2.
0 C. the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/0/1.
0 D. the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/0/2. (Right Answers )
Answer: AD
274. VRP supports OSPF multi-process. If no process number is specified when OSPF is enabled, the default process number is?
El A. 0
El B. 10
El C. 1 (Right Answers )
P D. 100
Answer; C
275. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
1 >display ospf interface verbose

Interfaces
week: 0. 0. 0. 0 IRKS TE not enabled)
Interface: 10. 0.12, 1. (GisabilEthernet0/0/0)

=oat: 1 State: 5DR Type: Breadcast IITU: 1500
?riority: 1
Designated Router: 10.0.1.2. 2
Nackuv Designated Router: 10.0.12.1
Timers: Hello 10 Dead 40 . Poll 1.20 . Retransmit 5 , Transmit Delay 1
10 Statistics
Type Input Output
Hello 66 65
DB Description 2 3
Link-State Rto 0 1
-State Update '3 2
Link-State Mk 2 ."
MI GROUP
R GROUP
aqueId: 0 PrevState: Waiting
time cost: 1, enabled by OSP!, Protocol
1:1 A. The routing interface DR priority is 10.

ID B. Router ED is 10.0.1.1 (Right Answers)
El C. The value of this interface Cost is "I (Right Answers)
El D. This router is a BDR (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
216. ip route-static 10.0.12.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1 1
Which statement is true regarding this command?
❑ A. The configuration represents a static route to the 192.168 1.1 network.
❑ B. The configuration represents a static route to the 10.0.12.0 network (Right Answers)
❑ C. The preference value of this configured route is 100.
❑ D. If the router has learned the same destination network via a dynamic routing protocol, the static route will always take precedence.
Answer: B
277. Which state does OSPF use to indicate that a neighbor relationship has been established?
❑ A. 2-way (Right Answers)
❑ B. Down
❑ C. Attempt
❑ D. Full
Answer: A
278. By default, the period far sending OSPF HELLO packets on the broadcast network is?
❑ A_ lOs (Right Answers)
❑ B. 40s
❑ C. 30s
❑ 13. 20s
Answer: A
279. Which of the following problems may emerge when a loop exists on a router? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. tntinite packet forwarding.
❑ B. Increased CPU usage. (Right Answers)
❑ C. increased memory usage. (Right Answers)
❑ D. Continuous change of destination LP addresses of packets.
❑ E. Increased packet size.
Answer: BC
280. What are the roles of OSPF DR and BDR? (Muitipie choice)
❑ A. Reduce the number of exchanges of fink state information (Right Answers)
❑ B. Reduce the type of OSPF packets
❑ C. Reduce the time it takes far the adjacency to establish
❑ a Reduce the number of adjacencies (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
281 The Iwo routers are interconnected through the PPP lint The administrator configures OSPF on the Iwo routers and runs in the same area. If their router lOs are the same, which is correct?
❑ A. Two routers will establish a normal full neighbor relationship
❑ B. Two routers will not send helb information to each other
❑ C. Two routers will establish a normal full adjacency
▪ VRP will prompt the router ID conflicts of the Iwo routers. (Right Answers )
Answer: 0
282. Which of the following OSPF versions suit for IPv6?
❑ A. OSPFv1
❑ B. OSPFv3 (Right Answers )
❑ C. OSPFv4
❑ D. OSPFv2
Answer: B
283. The router R1 routing table output information is as follows, which is correct? (Muitiple choice)
<RI>display ip routing—table
Route Flags; R — seleY, D — download to fib
Routing Tables: Public-

Destinations : 13 Routes 13
nest into ion/Insk Prot o Pre Cost Flags Nestlioo Interface
0. 0. 0.0/0 Static 60 0 RD 10. 0.14. 4 Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0

10. 0. 0. 0/8 Stati c 60 0 RD 10.0.12.2 It kerne t 0/0/0
10. 0. 2. 0/24 Stat ic 00 0 RD 10. 0.13. 3 Et hernet0/0/2
10. 0. 2.. 2/32 OSPF 10 00 RD 10.0. 21. 2 Et berm t0/0/1
❑ A. The router forwards the packet with the destination network of 12.0.0.0/8. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The packet with the destination network of 12.0.0.0/8 will be forwarded from the Ethernet0/0/0 interface of the router.
0 C. The packet with the destination network of 11.0.0.0/8 will be forwarded from the GigabitEthernet0/0/0 interface of the router. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router will drop the packet with the destination network of 11.0.0.0/8.
Answer: AC
284. The following election statement about DR and BDR, which is correct? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. If an interface has a priority of 0, the interface will not participate in the election of DR or BDR. (Right Answers)
❑ B. DR must exist in the broadcast network (Right Answers)
❑ C. If the priorities are the same, the router ID is compared. The larger the value, the higher the priority is elected as the DR. (Right Answers )
❑ D. BDR must exist in the broadcast network
Answer: ABC
285. A Windows host is started for the first time. If the address cannot be obtained from the DHCP server, which of the following IP addresses may the host use?
❑ A. 127.0.0.1
0 B. 169.254.2.33 (Right Answers)
0 C. 255.255.255.255
❑ D. 0.0.0.0
Answer: B
286. What is the main role of the DHCP DISCOVER message?

❑ A. The client is used to find the DHCP server. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The DHCP server responds to the DFHCP DISCOVER packet, which carries various configuration information.
❑ C. The server responds to the confirmation of the REQUEST message.
❑ D. The client requests configuration or renews the lease term.
Answer: A
287 As shown in the figure, the two hosts implement inter-machine communication through a single-route. When the available GO/0/1 2 sub-interface receives the data frame sent by Host B to Host A, which of the following operations does the
RTA perform?
RIA
vlasda via.°
Gateway: 10.0_1254 Gateway. 10.0.2.254
❑ A RTA will discard the data frame
❑ fr RTA forwards the data frame directly through the GO/0/1.1 subinterface.
❑ C. After the RTA deletes the VLAN tag 20, it is sent out by the GO/0/1.1 interface_
❑ a The RTA first deletes the VLAN tag 20, then adds the VLAN tag 10, and then sends it out through the GO/0/1.1 interface (Right Answers)
Answer: D
288. What is the role of link aggregation? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. Implement load sharing (Right Answers)
❑ B. Facilitate analysis of data
❑ D. Improve network reliability (Right Answers )
Answer: ACD
289. Which of the following is correct about link aggregation for LACP mode?
❑ A. The number of active ports cannot be set in LAGP mode.
❑ B. All active interfaces in LACP mode participate in data forwarding and share load traffic.
❑ G. There are only up to 4 active ports in LACP mode.
❑ D. In LACP mode, devices at both ends of the [ink send LACP packets to each other. (Right Answers )
Answer: D
290. The following statement about the Hybrid port, which is correct?
❑ A. Hybrid port does not require PVID
❑ B. Hybrid port only receives data frames with VLAN TAG
❑ C. Hybrid port must carry VLAN TAG when sending data frames.
❑ D. The Hybrid port can strip the TAG of certain VLAN frames in the outbound direction. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
291_ In the process of establishing PPP link, which phase can be directly converted into by the Dead phase?
❑ A. Authenticate
❑ B. Terminate
❑ C. Establish (Right Answers )
❑ D. Network
Answer: C
Which of the following values is used in the LengthlType field of the Ethernet data frame, indicating that the packet carrying the PPPoE session phase is carried?
292_
▪ 0x8863
❑ B Ox8864 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 0x0800
❑ D. Ox0806
Answer: B
293. On theVRP platform, which command can set the encapsulation type of the data link layer of the Serial interface to HDLC?
0 A. link-protocol hdlc (Right Answers)
O B. hdlc enable
O C. encapsulation hdlc
O D. link-protocol ppp
Answer: A
294. SNMPvl defines five protocol operations.

0 B. FALSE
Answer: T
295. How many domains can be configured when configuring AM authentication on Huawei ARG3 series routers?
❑ A. 33
O B. 31
❑ C. 32
Answer: D
296. After the GRE keepalive function is enabled, the local end of the GRE tunnel periodically sends a keepalive packet to the peer every 10s.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
297.A The AAA protocol is the RADIUS protocol.

3 A. TRUE
Answer: F
298. The router Radius information is configured as follows: Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The [13 address of the accounting server is 200.0.12.1 (Right Answers)

❑ B. The IP address of the authorization server is 200.0.12.1
❑ C. The source IP address of the router sending Radius packets is 200.0.12.2. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The IP address of the authentication server is 200.0.12.1 (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
299. Which of the following SNMP protocols supports encryption?
❑ A. SNMPv2c
❑ fr SNMPv3 (Right Answers)
❑ G_ SNMPv2
❑ D_ SNMPv1
Answer: B
3011 Which packets are used by the DHC1W6 client and the DHCR6 server to determine whether the client uses DFICPv6 stolenl autoconfigurabon or DHCRe stateless autoconfiguration7 (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DA (Right Answers )
❑ 13 NA
❑ C. NS
❑ D. RS (Right Answers )
Answer: AD
301. What is the destination port number of the DHCPv6 ADVERTISE packet sent by the DHGR/6 server?
❑ A. 548
❑ B. 547
❑ C. 549
Answer: D
302. When the DHCPv6 client receives the value of the 0 flag and the 0 flag in the RA message sent by the DHCP,e6 server, the DHCPN6 client uses the DHCP),6 stateful auto configuration to obtain the IPM address and other configuration
information
10
O B 11 (Right Answers)
El C. 1
O B.0
Answer: B
303_ 1/128 is the 1Pv6 Eoopbeck address.

CA. TRUE (Right Answers)
▪ Ili_ FALSE
Answer: T
304. On the network shown in the following figure, if the static route is configured on the RouterB, the NextHop corresponding to 2001::1/128 is in the routing table of RouterB.
ipv6 route•-static 2001::1 128 3001:12:1
❑ A. 3001::12:2
❑ B, Te80:1903:c3fb
❑ C. 3002::12:1
❑ D. 30011:12:1 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
305. SR (Segment Routing) is attracting more and more attention as a new anemative MPLS tunneling technology_ Many users hope to introduce SR technology to simplify network deployment and management and reduce CAPEX (Capital
Expenditure). As the current mainstream tunneling technology, SR is widely used in bearer networks.
OA. TRUE
Answer. F
306. The broadcast address is a special address in the network address where the host bits are all set to 1. It can also be used as a host address.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
307. As shown in the figure, if the administrator wants to improve the performance of this network, which of the following is the most appropriate?
❑ A. Use a switch to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to full duplex. (Right Answers )
❑ B. Use the Hub to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to half duplex.
❑ C. Use the Hub to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to full duplex.
❑ D. Use a switch to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to half duplex.
Answer: A
308. If the command is executed on the router: user-interface maximum-vty 0, the following statement which is correct?
❑ A. Support up to 4 users to access through VTY at the same time
❑ B. Support up to 15 users to access through VTY at the same time
❑ C. No user can log in to the router through Telnet or SSH. (Right Answers)
❑ D. Support up to 5 users to access through VTY at the same time
Answer: C
309. On the VRP operating platform, what is the command to display the current interface configuration in the interface view?
❑ A. display users
❑ B. display this (Right Answers)
❑ D. display version
Answer: B
310. Regarding the conflict domain and the broadcast domain, the description which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The device connected to a HUB belongs to a broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device connected to a switch belongs to a conflict domain.
❑ C. The device connected to a switch belongs to a broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The device connected to a router belongs to a broadcast domain.
❑ E. The device connected to a HUB belongs to a conflict domain. (Right Answers )
Answer: ACE
311. What is the priority of the bridge priority in the IEEE 802.1D standard?
❑ B. 4
O C. 16
❑ D. 2
Answer: A
312. In RSTP mode, interfaces in the Discarding state discard received data frames but maintain the MAC address table based on received data frames.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
313. As shown in the figure below, which port of the following switch will become the designated port?
❑ A. SWC G01012
❑ B. SWB GO/0/3
❑ C. SWC GO/0/1
❑ D. SVVA GO/013 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
314. The device port running STP is in the Forwarding state. Which is correct?
❑ A. The port only receives and processes BPDU and does not forward user traffic.
O B. The port forwards both user traffic and BPDU. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The port does not process BPDU and does not forward user traffic.
❑ D. The port will build a MAC address table based on the received user traffic but will not forward user traffic.
Answer: B
315 As shown in the network below, the host has an ARP cache which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ k The router needs to be configured with static routes, otherwise Host A and Host B cannot communicate in both directions.
❑ B. Host A has the following entries in the ARP cache. 1110.12.2 MAC-C (Right Answers)
❑ C Host A has the following entries in the ARP cache_ 11_0_12 1 MAC-8
❑ D. Host A and Host B can communicate in both directions (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
316 In the network shown in the following figure, all routers run the OSPF protocol, and the top of the link is the value of the Cost value_ What is the Cost value of the RA) routing table that reaches the network 100m 0/87
❑ A 70
❑ B 20
❑ C.60 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 100
Answer: C
317. As shown in the following figure, host A does not have a gateway configured. Host B has a gateway ARP cache. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. When the ARP proxy is enabled on G0/0/1 of the router, host A can communicate with host B.
❑ B. Host A and Host B cannot communicate in both directions (Right Answers)
❑ G Host B sends a packet with the destination IP address of 10 0 12 1 to he forwarded to host A (Right Answers)
❑ D Host A sends a packet with the destination IP address of 11_0 12 1 to be forwarded to host B
Answer: BC
318. In Huawei AR routers, by default, the value of the RIP priority is?
❑ A. 60
n B. 120
O D. 0
Answer: C
319. When OSPF establishes adjacency, which of the following must be consistent? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Router Priority
❑ B. Router ID
❑ C. Router Dead Interval (Right Answers)
❑ D. Area ID (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
❑ B. Supporting the division of regions (Right Answers)
❑ C. OSPF supports untyped inter-domain routing (CIDR) (Right Answers)
❑ D. OSPF supports packet authentication (Right Answers)
Answer; ABCD
321. What is the destination IP address of the DI-ICP DISCOVER packet?

❑ A. 224.0.0.2
❑ B. 127.0.0.1
❑ C. 224.0.0.1
❑ D. 255.255.255.255 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
322. If an Ethernet data frame has LengthiType=0x8100, then the payload of this data frame cannot be? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. ARP response packet
❑ B. OSPF packet
❑ C. RSTP data frame (Right Answers )
❑ D. STP data frame (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
323. The configuration information of an interface of a router is as follows. Which port can receive the data packets of this VLAN?

❑ B. 20
❑ C. 30
❑ D. 1
Answer: A
324. What should I do when the trunk port sends a data frame?
❑ A. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, the data frame is discarded.
❑ B. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, replace it with PVID forwarding.
❑ C. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, strip the TAG forwarding
❑ D. When the VLAN ID is the same as the PVID of the port and the VLAN ID is allowed to pass through the port, the tag is removed and the packet is sent. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
325. Which of the following features does HDLC have? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. HDLC protocol supports point-to-point links (Right Answers)
❑ B. HDLC protocol does not support FP address negotiation. (Right Answers)
❑ C. HDLC protocol supports point-to-multipoint links
❑ D. HDLC protocol does not support authentication (Right Answers )
Answer: ABD
326. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is correct? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. This interface is a synchronous interface (Right Answers)

❑ B. The IP address of the interface is 10.0.12.1124_ (Right Answers)
❑ C. The protocol used by the data link layer is PPP. (Right Answers)
❑ D. When the packet forwarded by this interface exceeds 1400 Byte, the packet needs to be fragmented.
Answer: ABC
327. The Protocol field in the PPP frame format is 0xCO23, indicating that the protocol is?
❑ A. PAP (Right Answers)
O B. LCP
❑ C. CHAP
❑ D. NCP
Answer: A
328. What is the default ACL step size on the G3 series routers?
0 A. 15
❑ B_ 10 (Right Answers)
❑ G. 10
❑ D. 20
Answer: 8
329. What is the range of advanced ACL?

❑ A. 6000-6031
❑ B. 4000-4999
❑ D. 2000-2999
Answer: C
330. Which of the following protocols is the IPsec VPN architecture?

❑ A. GRE
❑ C. IKE (Right Answers)
❑ ❑. AH (Right Answers)
Answer: BGD
331. About the matching mechanism of ACL, which is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. If the ACL does not exist the result of returning the ACL is: no match (Right Answers)
❑ B. If the last rule is found and the packet still does not match, the ACL matching resuli is mismatch (Right Answers)
❑ C. Regardless of whether the result of the packet matching ACL is 'mismatch', "allow° or "roper, the packet is finally allowed to pass or refuse to pass, which is actually determined by each service module applying the ACL (Right
Answers)
❑ B. By default, the rule with the lowest number in the ACL stags searching. Once the rule is matched, the subsequent rule is stopped. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
332. The network management workstation manages the network device through the SNMP protocol. When the managed device has an abnormality, what kind of SNMP packet will the network management workstation receive?
❑ A. get-response message
❑ B trap message (Right Answers )
❑ C. set-request message
❑ D. get-request message
Answer. B
333_ The router does not need to re-encapsulate the data link layer when forwarding [RE packets.
0A. TRUE
Answer: F
334 There are 4 routers in a broadcast network, and all 4 routers run OSPFv3 protocol If all router DR priorities are not 0, how many adjacencies are there in the network?
❑ A. 6
❑ B.4
❑ C. 5 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 3
Answer: C
335. Which of the following statements about the Prefix Segment is wrong?
❑ A. Prefix Segment can be automatically assigned by IGP (Right Answers)
❑ B. Prefix Segment is spread to other network element through the IGP protocol. It is globally visible and globally valid.
❑ C. Prefix Segment requires manual configuration
❑ D. Prefix Segment is used to identify a destination address prefix in the network.
Answer: A
336. About the TTL field in the IPv4 header, which is correct?
❑ A. When a route has a loop, the TTL value can be used to prevent the packet from being forwarded indefinitely. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The TTL value is reduced by 1 for each Layer 3 device. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The TTL value is 8 bits long. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The range of TTL values is 0-255 (Right Answers )
Answer: ABCD
337. What is the value range of the DSCP field in the IPv4 header?
El A. 0-15
❑ B. 0-63 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 0-31
❑ D. 0-7
Answer: B
338. UDP is connectionless and must use which to provide the reliability of the transmission?
❑ A. Network layer protocol
❑ B. Application layer protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Transmission Control Protocol
❑ D. Internet Protocol
Answer: B
339. Because the TCP protocol uses three-way handshake mechanism when establishing and closing connections, TCP supports reliable transmission.
OA. TRUE
Answer: F
340. Which method VRP does not support to configure the router?
❑ A. Configure the router through Telnet
❑ B. Configure the router through the mini USB port
❑ C. Configure the router through the console port.
❑ D. Configure the router through FTP (Right Answers)
Answer: D
341. In which view can the administrator modify the device name for the router?
❑ A. Protocol-view
❑ B. System-view (Right Answers)
❑ C. User-view
❑ D. Interface-view
Answer: B
342. Which of the following states does the STP protocol elect to perform port roles?
❑ A. Blocking
❑ B. Disabled
❑ C. Learning
❑ D. Listening (Right Answers)
Answer; D
343. What is the total length of the Rag field in the RSTP BPDU message?
❑ A. 6
❑ B. 4
❑ D. 2
Answer: C
344. Which of the following is not the reason that RSTP can improve the convergence speed?
❑ A. Introduction of edge ports
❑ B. Canceled Forward Delay (Right Answers)
❑ C. Fast switching of the root port
❑ D. PIA mechanism
Answer: B
345. Which of the following statements about the edge port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
❑ A. The edge port can be directly transferred from the Disable state to the Forwarding state. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The ports interconnected between the switches need to be set as edge ports.
❑ C. The edge pert discards the received configuration BPDU packet.
❑ D. Edge port participates in RSTP operation
Answer: A
346. A switch running STP can be converted to the Forwarding state after waiting for the forwarding delay in the Learning state.
B FALSE
Answer: T
347. In Huawei AR routers, what is the priority of the static routing protocol by default?
❑ B. 100
❑ C. 120
❑ D0
Answer: A
348. As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. Which device ABR?
❑ A. Router D
❑ 11 Router C
❑ C. Router A (Right Answers )
❑ D. Router B (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
349 As shown in the following figure, if the host has an ARP cache and host A sends a packet to host B, what is the destination MAC address and destination P address of the packet?
❑ A MAC-C 10 0 12 2
❑ B. MAC-A 11 0.12 1
❑ C MAC-C 11 0 12 1 (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC-B 11 0.12.1
Answer: C
350. What types of networks are supported by the OSPF protocol? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. Point-to-Multipoint (Right Answers)
0 B. Non-Broadcast Multi-Access (Right Answers)
❑ C. Point-to-Point (Right Answers)
❑ D. Broadcast (Right Answers)
Answer: ABM
351. How many types of OSPF packets are there?

O A. 3
❑ B. 4
O D. 2
Answer: C
352. When upgrading the router software using the FTP protocol, which transfer mode should be selected?
❑ A. Text mode
❑ B. Byte mode
❑ G. Streaming byte mode
❑ D. Binary mode (Right Answers)
Answer: D
353. Which message does the DHCP server use to confirm that the host can use the IP address?
❑ A. DHCP ACK (Right Answers)
❑ B. DHCP DISCOVER
❑ C. DHCP REQUEST
❑ D. DHCP OFFER
Answer: A
354. A Windows host is started for the first time. If the IP address is obtained by DHCP, what is the source IP address of the first packet sent by this host?
❑ A. 127.0.0.1
❑ B. 255.255.255.255
❑ D. 169.254.2.33
Answer: C
355. What is the range of VLAN [Ds that users can use?
❑ A. 0-4096
❑ B. 1-4096
❑ D. 0-4095
Answer: C
356 if a port has the following configuration information, which port does the VLAN TAG carry when transmitting data frames of the VLAN7
❑ A. 1,2,3,100
❑ B. 2,3,4,6,100
❑ C 2,3,100 (Right Answers)
❑ D 1,2,3,4,6,100
Answer: C
357. The load balancing modes of the two ends of the Eth-Trunk can be inconsistent.
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
358. For the network shown in the fotowing figure, the switch uses the sub-interface pair of the machine interface and the router. Which of the following configurations can fulfill this requirement?
❑ A. interface 10 ip address 10 0.12.1 255255255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type hybrid pod hybrid untag Nan 10 #
❑ B. interface Mandl 0 ip address 10 0.12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 # (Right Answers )
❑ C. interface Menai() ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type access port default Nan 10 #
❑ 0. interface Vlanif10 ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface GigabitEthemet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk paid 10 pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 #
Answer: B
359. In the following options, which is the necessary technology to enable a host with an IP address of 10 0 0 1 to access the Internet?
❑ A. Dynamic routing
❑ B. NAT (Right Answers)
❑ C. Route introduction
❑ D Static routing
Answer: B
360 As shown in the following figure, from the perspective of the security corner, Router A refuses to receive OSPF packets, GRE packets and IGMP packets received from GO/0/1 Which of the following commands can fulfill this requirement?
(Multiple choice)
❑ A act number 3000 rule 5 deny ere rule 10 deny ospf rule 15 deny icmp # interface GmabilEthemet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound act 3000 # (Right Answers)
❑ B act number 3000 rule 5 deny gre rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny icmp # interface GmabilEthernelf1/0/1 traffic-filter inbound act 3000 # (Right Answers)
❑ a eel number 2000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑ 13_ acl number 3000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabrtEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound ad 3000 # (Right Answers)
Answer: ABO
361_ As shown Ingle following figure, which of the folbwing configurations can be used Io preyentfiles1 A from accessing Host B HTTP service. Host B can not access which service of Host A HP? (Multiple choice)
❑ A acl number 3000 ride 5 deny top source 100.0.12 CI 0 GO 255 s.rec-port act woe destination 1030_1311 0 0.0 255# acInonter 3001 rule 5 deny top source 100.01300/0255 source-parrot( fto dean.. 100 0 12 0 0.00.255#
aderface GgabilEthemetll0/1 traffic-51er outbound act 30004 interface GgabitEtherrieffir002 trafrinffitar outbound ark 31031 a
▪ 10 eat number 2000 rule S deny tap source 180.0.13.0 0 0 0.255 desk rmtmn 160 O.12 0 0 0.6.255 deslinatontporl. votwe a ad number 31101 rule 5 deny tcp source 1130.0 12 6 (1,0..0 255 clesfinalion 100.0.13 0 0 0.0.255 dEshrehon-port eq
Ira M traerface GigabilEtheineignOM traPfic-filler inbound 1113000# interface GigabilEtheme100.2 tarts-film inbound eel 3001 # (Right Answers)
❑ G_ act number 3000 rule 5 deny.? rescue 100 0.13 000.055 doshnohon 103.0120 0 00 255 destioabon-pad. www # acl number 3001 rule 5 deny lop source 100 0 )2,0 000.255 d.briatorr 100.0 13 00 0.255 255 d.bnalon-porl aq
ftp if interface GigularlEthame10/0,1 beffic-Stier oulbconcl 101 3000 0 inlerface GigubitElharne100/2 traffic-filler outbound acl 3001 to
❑ D. scl number 3000 rule 5 deny leo source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255 source-poll op wino destination 100.0.13.0 0.0.0.255# ecl number 3001 nile 5 deny Hp source 100.0.13.0 0.0.0.255 source-port ei ftp destination 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.2550
Interface OlgerbilEthernet0/0,1 traffic-filter intbound 5013000#Interface GfigabilEthemat0,02 traffic-filter inbound eel 30015 (Right Artawars)
Answer, HD
362. 0 packets are carried over TCP.

()A. TRUE
Answer: F
363. The multicast address FF02:.1 represents all nodes in the link-focal range.
OA TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
365. In the estabFishment of adjacency relationship : what is the role of OD packets in OSPFv37
❑ A. Request missing LSA
❑ B. Used to send the required LSA to the peer router
❑a Discover and maintain neighbor relationships
❑ ❑. To describe your own LSDB (Right Answers)
Answer: D
366. The simplest form of IPv6 address 3001: ODB8: 0000: 0000: 0346: ABCD: 42BC: 8D58 is?
❑ A. 3001:0DB8::0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
❑ B. 3001: DB8::0346: ABCD: 42BC: 8058
❑ C_ 3001: D68::346: ABCD: 4260: 8058 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 3001:0DB8::0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
Answer: C
367. When the host adopts DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration, which DHCPv6 message is sent by the host to request configuration information?
❑ A. Information-Request (Right Answers)
❑ B. CONFIRM
❑ C. SOLICIT
❑ D. REBIND
Answer: A
368. What is the length of the IPv6 multicast address flag field?
❑ A. 3
❑ B. 2
❑ D. 5
Answer: C
36g. Which of the following statements about the Node Segment is wrong?
❑ A. The Node SID cannot be the same as the node Prefix SID. (Right Answers )
❑ B. Node Segment is used to identify a specific node
❑ C. Configure the IP address as the prefix on the loopback interface of the node. The Prefix SID of this node is actually the Node SID.
❑ D. Node Segment is a special Prefix Segment
Answer: A
370. Which of the following are the actions of the MPLS (Multiple choice)
❑ A. pop (Right Answers)
❑ B. switch
❑ C. swap (Right Answers)
❑ D. puch (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
371. If two Huawei S5710 switches are interconnected using a 10 Gigabit optical module, the working mode of the interconnect port defaults to full duplex.
OB. FALSE
Answer: T
372. On the Huawei ARG3 router, the -i parameter of the Ping command in the VRP is used to set ?
❑ A. Interface for sending Echo Request packets (Right Answers )
❑ B. Source IP address for sending Echo Request packets
❑ C. Interface for receiving Echo Reply packets
❑ D. Destination IP address of receiving Echo Reply packets
Answer: A
373. The following statement about the TTL field in the IP packet header, which is correct?
❑ A. TTL defines the number of packets that the source host can send.
❑ B. Whenever a packet passes through a router, its TTL value is decremented by 1. (Right Answers )
❑ D. Whenever a packet passes through a router ; its TTL value will be increased by 1.
Answer: B
374. Which of the following statements about ICMP messages is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The length of the Type field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The length of the Checksum field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits.
❑ C. The value of the ICMP packet in the first protocol type field of IPv4 is 1. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The length of the Code field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits. (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
375. How does the VRP platform represent the third slot of the router, the sub-card No. 0 and the GE port No. 2.
❑ A. interface GigabitEthernet 3/2/0
❑ B. interface Ethernet 3/0/2
❑ C. interface XGigabitEthernet 3/0/2
❑ D. interface GigabitEthernet 3/012 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
376. Which of the following statements about the Spanning Tree Protocol Root Bridge election is correct?
❑ A. When the bridge priority is the same, the device with the large MAC address becomes the root bridge.
❑ B. When the bridge priority is the same, the device with a large number of ports becomes the root bridge.
❑ C. The device with a smaller bridge priority value becomes the root bridge. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The bridge with a higher priority value becomes the root bridge.
Answer: C
377. In standard STP mode, which of the following ports on non-root switches forward the BPDUs with TC bits set generated by the root switch?
❑ A. Root port.
❑ B. Backup port.
❑ C. Provisioning port
❑ D. Designated port (Right Answers)
Answer: D
378. The Message Age in the configuration BPDU sent by the root bridge in the STP protocol is 0.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
37g. Which of the following parameters should be considered when electing a root port in STP? (Multiple choice)
❑ B. Port priority (Right Answers)
❑ C. the cost of the port reaches the root switch (Right Answers)
❑ D. MAC address of the port
❑ E. Port slot number, such as GO/0/1 (Right Answers)
Answer; BCE
380. As shown in the following figure, assume that all routers run OSPF at the same time. Which kind of router is BDR in this network?
O A. Router A (Right Answers)

❑ B. Router B
❑ C. Router C
❑ D. Router D
Answer: A
381. The routing table shown below, which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The NextHop of the destination network 10.0.3.3/32 is not directly connected, so the router will not forward the packet with the destination IP address of 10.0.0.3.
❑ B. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.2.2 from Ethernet0/010. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.12.1 from Ethernet0/0/0.
❑ D. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.0.3 from Ethernet0/0/0. (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
382.As shown in the figure below, which network device can Host A and Host B use to communicate?
❑ A. Router (Right Answers)

❑ B. Hub
❑ C. HUB
❑ II Layer 2 switch
Answer: A
383. The router output information is as follows, which of the following statement is wrong?
❑ A. The MTU value of the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 1480. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The physical link of Ethernet0/0/0 is normal.
❑ C. The broadcast address corresponding to the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 10.0.12.255.
❑ D. The IP address of the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 10.0.12.1/24.
Answer: A

❑ A. Next hop
O B. Routing cost
❑ C. Source address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Target network
Answer: C
385. Which of the following statement about the OSPF backbone area is correct?
❑ A. Area 0 is the backbone area. (Right Answers)
O B. All areas can be backbone areas
❑ C. The backbone area must be deployed when the number of routers running OSPF exceeds two.
❑ D. All routers in the backbone area are ABR
Answer: A
❑ B. OSPF supports Classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) (Right Answers)
❑ C. OSPF supports packet authentication (Right Answers)
❑ D. Supporting the division of areas (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
387 A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An administrator discovers however that some hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the DHCP servers address pool. What are
the possible reasons for this? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A Alf addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned. (Right Answers)
0 B. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the 169.254.0.0 address range. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is aliocating IP addresses to hosts that happen to be within a closer proximity than the authorized DHCP server (Right Answers )
o D. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the 127.254.0.0 address range.
Answer: ABC
388.[Huawei]user-interface vty 0 14
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] acl 2000 inbound
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] user privilege level 3
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] authentication-mode password
Please configure the login password (maximum length 16): Huawei
The configuration of vty is as shown above, and the user privilege level is set to level 3.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
389. The aggregation port of the router can be configured with a routing subinterface.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
390. Which VLAN partitioning method is most appropriate when the host frequently moves the location?
❑ A. Based on IP subnetting
❑ B. Based on NIAC address division (Right Answers)
❑ C. Basic strategy division
❑ D. Port-based partitioning
Answer: B
391. On the VRP platform, the role of the command "interface vlan <vlan-id>" is 0.
❑ A. Create or enter the VLAN virtual interface view. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Create a VLAN
❑ C. No such command
❑ D. Configure a VLAN for a port
Answer: A
392_ NAPT distinguishes the [P addresses of different users by protocol numbers in TCP or UDP or IP packets.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
393. Which message need to send when needing to terminate a PPPoE session?
❑ A. PADR
❑ B. PADT (Right Answers )
❑ G. PADO
❑ D. PADI
Answer: B
394. Which of the following are the advantages of the PPP protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. PPP protocol supports negotiation of link layer parameters (Right Answers)
❑ B. PPP protocol supports negotiation of network layer parameters (Right Answers)
❑ C. PPP protocol supports both synchronous transmission and asynchronous transmission. (Right Answers)
❑ D. PPP protocol supports authentication (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
395 The network shown below. Which of the following configurations enables all hosts to communicate with Host C, but Host A and Host B cannot communicate?
❑ A. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination mac 5439-93ea-4010 source•-mac 5489-9843-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound acl 4000 #
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98e8-4c7c source-mac 5489-98d3-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound act 4000 #
❑ C. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5439-98ca-4c7c source-mac 5489-9300-550e # interface GigabitEtherne10/0/1 traffic-filter inbound act 4000 # (Right Answers)
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-983a-400 source-mac 5489-98c0-550e # interface GigahltEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound acl 4000#
Answer: C
396. As hown in the figure: IPsec VPN is used to transfer data between two hosts. In order to hide the real IP address and ensure the security of data as high as possible, which mode and protocol of IPsec VPN is better, (Multiple choice)
❑ A. All
❑ B Tunnel mode (Right Answers)
❑ a Transmission mode
Answer: BD
397. Apply the following ACL in Telnet: which of the following statement is correct'?
acl number 2000
rule 20 permit
❑ A. The device with IP address 172.16.105.6 can use the Telnet service. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device with IP address 172.16.105.3 can use the Telnet service.
❑ C. The device with IP address 172.16.105.5 can use the Telnet service.
❑ D. The device with IP address 172.16.105.4 can use the Telnet service.
Answer: A
398. Which of the following lPv6 addresses is a link-local address?

❑ A. FC00::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ B. FE80::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC (Right Answers)
❑ D. FF02::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
Answer: B
399. Which field in the Fv6 header acts like the TTL field in the IPv4 header?
❑ A. Version
❑ B. Traffic Class
❑ C. Hop Limit (Right Answers)
❑ D. Next Header
Answer: C
400. What are the three main roles in the DHCPv6 basic protocol architecture? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DHCPv6 switch
❑ B. DHCPv6 relay (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCPv6 client (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCPv6 server (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
401. The value of the MO flag in the RA message sent by the DHCPv6 service is 01. Which of the following methods does the host use to automatically configure the address?
❑ A. Value does not make any sense
❑ B. DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCPv6 stateful autoconfiguration
❑ D. Stateless autoconfiguration
Answer: B
402. Which of the following statements about the S field in the MPLS packet header is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Is there any other label after marking this label, 1 means yes, 0 means no
❑ B. The S bit exists in each MPLS packet header. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Is there any other label after marking this label, 0 means yes. 1 means no (Right Answers)
❑ D. S bit has only 1 bit in frame mode and 2 bits in cell mode.
Answer: BC
The administrator configured the above on the AR2200, and which of the following description about the configuration information is correct?
❑ A. The saved configuration file will be replaced by the running configuration file.
❑ B. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should select "Y" (Right Answers)
❑ C. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should select "N"
❑ D. The configuration file will be retained when the device starts up.
Answer: B
404. On the VRP interface, use the command startup saved-configuration backup.ofg to configure the backup.cfg file for the next startup.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
405. Which of the following states is the STP port converted between exist Forward Delay? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Forwarding-Disabled
❑ B. Blocking-Listening
❑ C. Disabled-Blocking
❑ D. Listening-Learning (Right Answers)
❑ E. Learning-Forwarding (Right Answers)
Answer: DE
406. Which of the following parameters should be considered when electing a root port in STP? (Multiple choice)
❑ B. Port slot number, such as GO/0/1
❑ C. Port MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Port priority (Right Answers)
❑ E. the cost of the port reaches the root switch (Right Answers)
Answer: CDE
407. Which of the following port states does not the RSTP protocol include?
❑ A. Blocking (Right Answers)
❑ B. Forwarding
❑ C. Discarding
❑ D. Learning
Answer: A
408. Which router is the BDR in this network, as shown in the figure below?
❑ A. Router B
❑ B. Router A
❑ C. no BDR (Right Answers)
❑ D. Router C
Answer: C
409. It is known that the routing table of a router has the following two entries:
If the router wants to forward a message with a destination address of 9.1.4.5, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. Select the second item as the best match because Ethernet is faster than Serialo
❑ B. Select the first item as the best match because the OSPF protocol has a higher priority value.
❑ G. Select the second item as the best match because the RIP protocol has a lower generation value.
❑ D. Select the second term as the best match because the route is a mare accurate match than the destination address of 9.1.4.5 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
410. The following is the routing table of router R1. If R1 sends a packet with the destination IP address of 10.0.2.2, which interface does it need to send from?
❑ A. Ethernet0/0/2
❑ B. Ethernet0/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ethernet0/0/0
❑ D. GigabitEthernet0/0/0
Answer: B
411. When routers are running in the same OSPF area, which of the following description of their LSDB and routing table is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The link state database obtained by each router is different.
❑ B. The routing table cf each router is different. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The link state database obtained by all routers is the same (Right Answers)
❑ D. The routing tables obtained by all routers are the same.
Answer: BC
412. Which of the following elements are included in the routing table? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Interface (Right Answers)
❑ B. Protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Destination/Mask (Right Answers)
❑ D. Cost (Right Answers)
❑ E. NextHop (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCDE
413. The output information of a router routing table is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.21.2.

❑ B. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.21.2. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.12.2. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.12.2.
Answer; BC
414. By default, how long is the lease time of the lP address assigned by the DHCP server?
O A. 1 h
❑ B. 24h (Right Answers)
❑ C. 12h
O D. 18h
Answer: B
415. Which of the following applications is based on the TCP protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. FTP (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ping
❑ D. TFTP
Answer: AB
416 The DHCP server function is enabled on an interface of the router. Which of the following [P addresses may the DHCP client obtain?
ip address 11 0 1 1 255 255.255.0
dhcp select interface
dhcp server excluded-ip-address 11 0 1 2 11 0 1.127
❑ A 11 0 1 1
❑ B. 11.0.1.100
❑ C 11.0.1 254 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 11.0.1.255
Answer: C
417. ❑n the switch. which VLANs can be deleted by using the undo command? (MuttiNe choice)
❑ A. v[an 4094 (Right Answers)
❑ B. vian 1
❑ C. vlan 2 (Right Answers)
❑ D_ elan 1024 (Right Answers)
Answer: AGD
418 In the network shown in the following figure, the output information of switch A is as follows_ In the current MAC address table of itch A, which interlace dues the C address of host B correspond to'
❑ A GigabitEthernet0/0/2
❑ B. Eth-Trunk I (Right Answers)
❑ C GigabitEthemet0/0/1
❑ B. GigabitEthemet0/0/3
Answer: B
419. As shown in the following figure, the router configuration information is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct?
Router A interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0.100
ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0
Router B
ip address 10.0.12.2 255.255.255.0
❑ A. 10.0.12.1 can ping 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)

❑ B. The sub-interface of Router A cannot learn the MAC address of the sub-interface of Router B.
❑ C. The sub-interface of Router B cannot learn the MAC address of the sub-interface of Router A.
❑ D. Router A and Router B cannot communicate because the sub-interface numbers of Router A and Router B are inconsistent.
Answer: A
420. Which of the following parameters does the LCP negotiation use to detect link loops and other anomalies?
❑ A. CHAP
❑ B. MRU
El C. PAP
❑ D. Magic word (Right Answers)
Answer; D
421. Static NAT can only implement one-to-one mapping between private addresses and public addresses.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
422. Which of the following does AAA not include?

❑ A. Accounting
❑ B. Authorization
❑ C. Audit (Right Answers)
❑ D. Authentication
Answer: C
423. Which authorization modes does W support on Huawei ARG3 series routers? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. HWTACACS authorization (Right Answers )
❑ B. Nat authorized (Right Answers )
❑ C. Authorization after successful RADIUS authentication (Right Answers)
❑ D. Local authorization (Right Answers )
Answer: ABCD
424. Which of the following about the function of the AH protocol in IPsec VPN is wrong?
❑ A. Support data integrity check
❑ B. Support anti-message playback
❑ C. Support packet encryption (Right Answers)
❑ D. Support data source verification
Answer: C
425 As hown in the following figure, the router functions as the DHCPy6 relay agent and Router B functions as the DHCPy6 server. Which of the following parameters must be configured on Router B? (Multiple choice)
❑ A Enable RA on port GO/0/1 of Router B

❑ B IPv6 address of the DHCPW relay
❑ C DHCR/6 DUD (Right Answers)
❑ D DHCPy6 address pool (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
426. How many times is the total length of an IPv6 address the length of an IPv4 address?
❑ B. 3
❑ C. 5
LI D. 2
Answer: A
427. Which of the following extended headers are supported by IPv6 packets? {Multiple choice)
❑ A. VLAN extension header
❑ B. hop-by-hop option extension header (Right Answers )
❑ C. Destination option extension header (Right Answers )
❑ D. Slice extension header (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
428. Which packet does the DHCPv6 server use to reply to Solicit packets?
❑ A. Request
❑ B. Advertise (Right Answers)
❑ C. Offer
❑ D. Reply
Answer: B
429. The MPLS architecture consists of a Control Plane and a Forwarding Plane. The forwarding plane mainly performs label switching and packet forwarding.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
430. What is the length of the Ethernet_ll frame that contains the Ethernet header?
❑ B. 60-1560B
❑ C. 64-1500B
❑ D. 46-1500B
Answer: A
431. The Tracert diagnostic tool in Huawei routers uses UDP to encapsulate trace data.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
432. The broadcast address of the subnet 192.168.1.0125 is 192.168.1.128.

❑ A. True
Answer: B
433. Which memory saved configuration is used to select VRP version file when the device starts up?
❑ A. NVRAM (Right Answers)
❑ B. SD Card
❑ C. Flash
❑ D. USB
Answer: A
434. Which of the following parameter settings for terminal emulation are correct when configuring a router through the Console port?
❑ A.9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware flow control.
❑ B.19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control.
❑ C.4800bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no flow control.
❑ D.9600bps ; 8 data bits, 1 stop bits ; no parity check ; and no flow control. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
435. Which layer of the OSI reference model does the switch work on?
❑ B. Transport layer
❑ C. Data link layer (Right Answers)
❑ D. Physical layer
Answer: C
436. Which of the following statements about the Alternate port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
❑ A. The Alternate port serves as a backup for the specified port and provides another backup path from the root bridge to the corresponding network segment.
❑ B. Alternate port forwards user traffic and learns MAC address
❑ C. Alternate port does not forward user traffic but learns MAC address
❑ D. Alternate port provides another switchable path from the designated bridge to the root as the backup port of the root port (Right Answers )
Answer: D
437. Which of the following port states does the RSTP protocol not include?
❑ A. Discarding
❑ B. Blocking (Right Answers)
❑ C. Learning
❑ D. Forwarding
Answer: B
438. In the RSTP standard, in order to improve the convergence speed, the port directly connected to the terminal by the switch can be defined as 0.
❑ A. Fast port
O B. Root port
O C. Edge port (Right Answers )
O D. Backup port
Answer: C
439. VRP operating platform, which of the following commands can only view static routes?
❑ A. display ip routing-table verbose
❑ B. display ip routing-table statistics
❑ C. display ip routing-table protocol static (Right Answers)
❑ D. display ip routing-table
Answer: C
440. Which layer of the OSE reference model does the router work on?
❑ A. Data link layer
❑ B. Network layer (Right Answers)
❑ C. Application layer
Answer: B
441. Which of the following description of static and dynamic routing is wrong?
❑ A. Dynamic routing protocols take up more system resources than static routes
❑ B. Static routing is simple to configure and easy to manage when applied in an enterprise.
❑ C. After a link fails, static routes can automatically complete network convergence. (Right Answers )
❑ D. After administrators deploy dynamic routing protocols in the enterprise network, post-maintenance and expansion can be more convenient.
Answer; C
442. Which of the following features does the OSPF protocol have?
❑ A. Easy to generate routing loops
❑ B. Calculate the shortest path in hops
❑ C_ Supporting the division of regions (Right Answers)
❑ D. Poor scalability
Answer: C
443. A router runs OSPF and does not specify a router ID. The P address of all interfaces is as follows. What is the router ID of the router OSPF protocol?
❑ A. 10.0.12.1
❑ B. 10.0.1.2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 10.0.21.1
❑ D. 10.0.1.1
Answer: B
444. What port number is used by the FTP protocol to control plane?
❑ A. 22
❑ C. 24
❑ D. 23
Answer: B
445_ An administrator cannot log in to the AR22013 router through Te!net However, other administrators can log in normally_ Which of the following are possible causes') (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The admin user account has been deleted (Right Answers )
❑ B. The admin user account has been disabled (Right Answers)
❑ C The privilege level of the admin user account has been modified to 0
❑ 0 The Telnet service of the AR2200 router has been disabled.
Answer: AB
446 The Eth-Truk port in manual link aggregation mode, whose transmission rate is related to 0 (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Bandwidth of member ports (Right Answers )
❑ B. Is the member port on the public or private network?
❑ C. is the IP address configured on the member port?
▪ Number of member ports (Right Answers )
Answer: AD
447. As shown in the followteg tigers the ports connected to De host of Switch A and Switch B belong to 10 end VLAN IC respectively. late port Ape of the switch Is Trunk and the PV1D is to and OIL Which on ale tolowing statements are
-
00013C ,
(Mubpla cuotuei
❑ A Host A and host B boke lodifrononl VANS ate cannot ping each cater
❑ e Hoc A and Host B can pas (Right Answers)
❑ c Host AS ARP ragtag Gavot ha -forwarded to host B
D. The switch does nce carry as VLMI TAG when forwerding tea frames sent by the host Wight Answer.)
Answo BD
448 The authentication scheme, authorization scheme, accounting scheme, HWTACAGS, or RADIUS server template created on the AR router can take effect only after it is applied in the domain.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
449. The router can assign a specified INC address to the host through a stateless address autoconfiguration scheme.
❑ A True
Answer: B
450_ Which multicast address is used in OSPFv3 to represent all routers?

❑ A. FF02: 6
❑ B. FF02:.8
❑ C. FF02:5 (Right Answers)
❑ D. FF02:1
Answer: C
451_ The OSPFv3 adjacency can be established only after the IP& address prefixes of the two ends are the same.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
452. Which of the following IPv6 addresses has a Solicited-node mutticast address of FF02::1 :FF12:12
❑ A. 2020::1200:1
❑ 2019::12:1 (Right Answers )
❑ 201g:112:1000
❑ a 2020:112ABI1
Answer: B
453. Which of the following statements about the Adjacency Segment is wrong?
❑ A. Adjacency Segment is used to identify a certain adjacency of a node in the network_
❑ B. Adjacency Segment is identified by Adjacency Segment ID (STD)
❑ G. Adjacency Sesnent spreads to other network elements through the IGP protocol, which is globally visible and valid locally.
❑ D. Adjacency Segment must be manually configured (Right Answers)
Answer: ❑
454. What levels are not included in the TCPIIPv4 model? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Session layer (Right Answers )
❑ B. Presentation layer (Right Answers )
❑ C. Network layer
❑ E. Application layer
Answer: AB
❑ A. Physical layer
❑ B. Data link layer
❑ G. Network layer
❑ ID_ Transport layer (Right Answers )
Answer: ❑
456 As shown in the figure, after the network administrator completes the Telnet configuration on the router, it is found that the host cannot establish a connection with the router through Telnet. Which of the following options can help solve this
problem? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Check if the switch has a default gateway address configured_

❑ B Use Ping to check the IP connectivity between the host and the router GO/0/0 interface (Right Answers)
❑ C Check if the Telnet configuration on the router is correct (Right Answers)
❑ 0_ Check if the host's ARP cache table overflows
Answer: BC
457. After receiving the BREW set by the TC, the switch running the RSTP protocol clears the MAC address learned by all ports.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
458. In the RSTP protocol, when the topology is stable, which port roles are in the Discarding state? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Backup part (Right Answers)
❑ B. Designated part
❑ C. Alternate port (Right Answers)
❑ D. Root port
Answer: AC
459. Which of the following statement about STP messages is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. During the initialization process ; each switch that enables STP protocol actively sends configuration BPDUs. (Right Answers)
❑ B. When the port is enabled with STP, the switch periodically sends TCN BPDUs from the specified port.
❑ C. The BPDU packet is encapsulated in an Ethernet data frame, and the destination MAC address is a multicast MAC address. (Right Answers)
❑ D. There are two types of packets in the STP protocol, configure BPDUs and TCN BPDUs. (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
460. What is the value of the Type field in the RSTP configuration BPDUs?
❑ A. Ox01
❑ B. 0x03
❑ C. Ox00
❑ D. 0x02 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
461. Which of the following cases will the switch running RSTP generate a configuration BPDU with TO set?
❑ A. A non-edge port migrates to the Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑ B. Backup port down
❑ C. Edge port migrates to Forwarding state
❑ D. Edge port migrates to Discarding state
Answer: A
462. Which of the following routing protocols can generate a default route? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. OSPFv3 (Right Answers)
❑ B. Direct
❑ D. Static (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
463. The router running OSPF first reaches the FULL state, and then performs LSDB synchronization.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
464. As the network shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. The top of the link is the value of the Cost. What is the path of the RA to the network 10.0.0.8/8?
0 A. 70
0 B. 100
0 C. 60 (Right Answers)
0 D. 20
Answer: C
465. Which packet does OSPF use to acknowledge received LSU packets?
❑ A. LSACK (Right Answers)
❑ B. LSA
El C. LSR
❑ D. LSU
Answer: A
466 if the Proto of a routing information in the routing table is OSPF, the priority of this route must be 10.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
467. On the serial interface ; you can configure a static route by specifying the next hop address or outbound interface.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
468 If the network shown in the folbwmg figure is used to make the 1opbacko communication between Router A and Router B through static routes, which of the folbwing command need to enter on Router A?
❑ A p route-static 100 2 2 32 GigabitEthemet 0/0/0

❑ 13_ ip route-static 100 2 2 255255 255255 100 12 1
❑ a ip route-static 10 0 2 2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12 2 (Right Answers)
ip route-static 100220 GigebitEthemet 0/0/0
Answer: C
469. TFTP is based on the TCP protocol.

❑ A. True
Answer: B
470. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The user manually created 4 VLANs. (Right Answers)

❑ B. When the GE0/0/1 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 10, it does not carry the VLAN TAG_ (Right Answers )
❑ C. When the GEO/0/2 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 20, it carries the VLAN TAG.
❑ D. When the GEO/0/1 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 20, it does not carry the VLAN TAG.
Answer: AB
471. A trunk part and a Hybrid port are handled in the same way when receiving data frames.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
472. Which of the following PPPoE messages are sent non-unicast?
❑ A. PADS
❑ B. PADI (Right Answers)
❑ C. PADO
❑ ❑. PADR
Answer: B
473. Which of the following fields does the HDLC frame consist of? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Control field (C) (Right Answers)
❑ B. Frame Check Sequence Field (FCS) (Right Answers)
❑ C. Address field (A) (Right Answers)
❑ ❑ _ Flag field (F) (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
474_ The following figure shows the encapsulation formal of the data packet n IPsec VPN_ Which formal is the type of data packet used toencapsulate in IPsec V1417
❑ A. Tunnel mode (Right Answers )

❑ B. Universal mode
❑ C. Transmission mode
❑ ID_ This encapsulation is error
Answer: A
475. Which of the following SNMP messages is sent to the NMS by the agent on the managed device?
❑ A. Gel-Next-Request
❑ B Get-Request
❑ C. Set-Request
❑ ❑. Response (Right Answers)
Answer: ❑
476 The AOL does not filter the traffic that the device itself generates to access other devices. Only the forwarded traffic is fiItered The forwarded traffic ncludes traffic that other devices access the device.
❑ B False
Answer: A
477. What is the number range of the Layer 2 ACL?

❑ B. 6000-6031
❑ C. 2000-2999
❑ ❑. 3000-3999
Answer: A
478. Which of the following statement about ilpv6 address configuration is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. IPv6 address supports multiple ways of automatic configuration (Right Answers)
❑ B. IPv6 supports DHCPv6 format for address configuration (Right Answers)
❑ C. IPv6 addresses can only be manually configured.
❑ D. IPv6 supports stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
479. The OSPFv3 protocol itself does not provide authentication.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
480. The Flow Label Field, Source Address Field, and Destination Address field in IPv6 together specify a forwarding path in the network for a particular data stream.
D B. False
Answer: A
481. Which of the following IPv6 addresses is a multicast address?

❑ A. FF02::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC (Right Answers)
❑ B. FE80::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ D. FC00.:2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
Answer: A
482. Which technology does the shared medium network use for data forwarding?
❑ A. CDMAtCD (Right Answers)
❑ B. CSMAIAC
❑ C. TDMA/CD
❑ D. CSMA1CD
Answer: A
483. Which of the following IPv4 addresses is a Class A address?

❑ A. 100.1.1.1
❑ B. 172.16.1.1
❑ D. 192.168.1.1
Answer: C
484. How many ways does VRP support to configure router? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Configure the router through Telnet (Right Answers)
❑ B. Configure the router through FTP
❑ C. Configure the router through the mini USB port (Right Answers)
❑ D. Configure the router through the console port. (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
485.
The above is the display startup information of the AR2200 router. For this information, which of the following statements is wrong?
❑ A. The running configuration file is not saved
❑ B. The system file used for starting the device is ar22204200r003c0Ospc200.cc
❑ C. The system file of the next startup of the device can be modified by using the command "startup system software <atartup-software-name>".
❑ D. The system file cannot be modified when the device starts next time. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
486. In the VRP system, which of the following functions does the Ctrl +Z combination key have? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Exit the console interface view.
❑ B. Return to the user view from the system view (Right Answers)
❑ C. Exit interface view
❑ D. Return to the user view from arty view (Right Answers)
❑ E. Exit the current view
Answer: BD
487. Which of the following description of the Forwarding state in the spanning tree protocol is wrong?
❑ A. port in Forwarding state can send BPDUs.
❑ B port in Forwarding state does not learn the source MAC address of the packet. (Right Answers)
❑ C. port in Forwarding state can forward data packets
❑ D. port in Forwarding state can receive BPDUs.
Answer: B
488. The bridge ID of the STP protocol in the switching network is as follows. Which of the following bridge ID owned by switch will become the root bridge?
❑ A. 32768 00-01-02-03-04-AA
❑ B. 32768 00-01-02-03-04-BB
❑ C. 32768 00-01-02-03-04-CC
❑ D. 4096 00-01-02-03-04-DD (Right Answers)
Answer: D
489. The RSTP protocol uses the PIA mechanism to speed up the speed at which the upstream port goes to the Forwarding state, but the loop is not available, what is the reason?
❑ A. Introduced edge ports
❑ B. Shortened the time of Forward Delay
❑ C. Ensure that loops do not occur by blocking its own non-root ports (Right Answers)
❑ D. Speed up the port role election
Answer: C
490. Which of the following statement about the dynamic MAC address table is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The interface learns by using the source MAC address in the packet. The entry can be aged. (Right Answers)
CI B. Dynamic entries are lost after system reset, hot swappable interface board, or interface board reset
❑ C. can obtain the number of users communicating on the interface by viewing the number of dynamic MAC address entries. (Right Answers)
O D. The saved entries are not lost after the system reset, hot swappable interface board, or interface board reset. (Right Answers)
Answer, ACD
491. Which of the following protocols is dynamic IGP routing protocol?

❑ A. Static
❑ B. BGP
❑ D. Direct
Answer: C
492. The router needs to modify the destination IP address in the data packet when forwarding the data packet.
❑ A. True
El B. False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
493. route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2 preference 20, which of the following statement about this command is correct?
❑ A. The route must appear in the routing table.
❑ B. The destination network of the route is 10.0.12.2/32
❑ C. The priority of this route is 100.
❑ ID. The mask length of the route destination network is 32 bits. (Right Answers)
Answer:
494. Which of the following statement about the OSPF protocol DR is correct?
❑ A. DR must be the highest priority device in the network
❑ B. DR election is preemptive
❑ C. Router ID. The larger the value, the higher the priority is elected as DR.
❑ D. An interface priority is 0, and then the interface cannot be a DR (Right Answers )
Answer: D
495_ Which of the following statement about the priority of static routes in Huawei devices is incorrect?
❑ A. The default value of static route priority is 60.
❑ B. The priority value of the static route is 255, indicating that the route is unavailable.
❑ G. The static route priority value ranges from 0 to 255. (Right Answers)
❑ 0. The priority of static routes is divided into internal priority and external priority. Administrators can modify external priority
Answer: C
496_ The router starts the FTP service_ The username and password are both huawei, and the root directory of the FTP is set to flash,/dhcp/. Which of the following commands must be configured? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. local-user huawei password cipher huawei (Right Answers)
❑ B. lip sewer enable (Right Answers)
❑ G. local-user huawei service-type lip (Right Answers)
❑ B_ focal-user huawei flp-directory flash:/dhcp/ (Right Answers )
Answer: ABCD
497 The priority of the LAGP protocol is as shown in the figure. Switch A and Switch B adopt link aggregation in LAGP mode, and all interfaces loin the link aggregation group. The maximum number of active ports is set to 3. Which port of
switch A is not the active port?
❑ A. G0/0/2
❑ 11 GO/0/3 (Right Answers)
❑ a GO/0/0
❑ D. GO/0/1
Answer: B
498. If an Ethernet data frame has LengthiType=0x8100, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. This data frame must carry VLAN TAG (Right Answers)
❑ B. The TCP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.
❑ C. The UDP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.
❑ ❑. The IP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.
Answer: A
49.9. Which of the fat/owing description about the trunk port and the Access port is correct?
❑ A. The Trunk port can only send tagged frames.
❑ B. The Trunk port can only send untagged frames.
❑ C- The Access port can only send tagged frames.
❑ ❑ - The Access part can only send untagged frames. (Right Answers)
Answer: ❑
500 As shown In the following figure, Switch A and Router Aare connected through two Inks_ The two links ere in the manual ead balancing made The a/minimal-ion pert number is I, and the data is forwarded through the aggregation {ink which
needs to carry VLAN TAG 100, which configuration does Router A need to use? (Mottfpla choice)
100$
❑ A interlace Elh-Tuenskl port tune, pert trunk Wow-pass vlan interface GigabilEllownatCgatt athttrunk 1 g interlace Gigab0Elharnet0.0/2 athdrunk 1 a
❑ B. interlace Eth-Trunkl undo ponswitch # interface Elh-Trunki.100 dolgiemitnation red 100 to address 10.0.12.2255.255.255 0 arp broadcast enable -et (Right An...re 7
El C. inlerfeee Eds.Trunkl mode lamp-sleet port tinkeype trued( port think eked pass vtan 1004 tri.rface GtgabdEthanialtlf0f1 att,lrunk 1 u interface GgebilEthernetc/0,2 ath.lrunk I a
Et G. interface 0mabilEtheroato221 ant-trunk t 0 Interlace GigabrtElhernet0312 elh-trunk I tl (Right Answers)
Answer. BB
501_ Which of the following functions are supported by the LCP protocol in the PPP protocol? {Multiple choice)
❑ A. Negotiate the maximum receiving unit MRU (Right Answers )
❑ B. Negotiate the authentication protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Negotiate the network layer address
❑ D. Detect link loops (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
502 A company has 50 private IP addresses. The administrator uses NAT technology to connect the company network to the public network_ However, the company has only one public network address_ Which of the following NAT conversion
methods meets the requirements,
❑ A easy-ip (Right Answers)
❑ NAPT
❑ G Dynamic conversion
❑ a Static conversion)
Answer: A
503 As shown in the figure, there is a Web server in the private network that needs to provide HTTP services to public network users. Therefore, the network administrator needs to configure NAT on the gateway muter RTA to implement the
requirements. Which of the following configuration can meet the requirements,
❑ A [RTA-Serm11/0/1Inat server protocol top gbbal 202 10.101 wnw inside 192.168.1.1 8080 (Right Answers)
❑ [RTA-Senal1/0/1]na1 server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 20210_101 8080
❑ G [RTA-Gmabitetherne10/0/1]nat server protocol top global 20210.101 WNW inside 192_168 1_1 8080
❑ El_ [RTA-Gmabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol top global 192168_11 anew inside 20210101 8080
Answer: A
504 When deploying an ACL on a Huawei device, which of the following description is correct? (Whale choice)
❑ k When AGLs define rules, they can only be advanced in the order of 10, 20, and 30
❑ B. The same ACL can be calked under mufti& interfaces (Right Answers)
❑ C. Can only be applied to the outbound direction when the ACL is called an the interface.
❑ D. AGLs cannot be used to filter OSPF traffic because OSPF traffic is not encapsulated using UDP protocol.
❑ E. The AGL can match the TGP/UDP port number of the packet, and can specify the range of the port number. (Right Answers)
Answer: BE
505. Which of the following message types does RADIUS use t❑ indicate authentication rejection?
❑ A. Access-Reject (Right Answers)
❑ B. Access-Request
❑ G. Access-Challenge
❑ D. Access-Accept
Answer: A
506. Which authentication modes does AAA support on Huawei AR G3 series routers? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. 802.1x
❑ B. None (Right Answers)
❑ C. HWTACACS (Right Answers )
❑ D. Local (Right Answers )
Answer: BCD
507 if the maximum number in Ihe ACL rule is 12, by default, when the user configures a new rule without specifying a number, what is the number assigned In the new rule by the system?
❑ A 14
❑ B. 16
❑ D. 13
Answer: C
508. If two IPsec VPN peers want to use both AH and ESP to ensure secure communication, how many SAs (Security Associations) do the two peers need to build?
❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
0 C. 3
Answer: D
509. DHCPve belongs to a stateful address autoconfiguration protocol.

O B. False
Answer: A
510. The DHCPv6 server includes the management address configuration flag (M) in the RA message. If the value is 1, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. Indicates that the client enables DHCPv6 stateful address configuration. (Right Answers )
❑ B. Indicates that the client needs to obtain other network configuration parameters through stateless DHCPv6.
❑ C. Indicates that the client enables IPv6 stateless address automatic allocation scheme
❑ D. Indicates that the client needs to cbtain other network configuration parameters through stateful DHCPv6.
Answer: A
❑ A. Transport layer (Right Answers)
❑ B. Network layer
❑ C. Data link layer
O D. Physical layer
Answer: A
512. After application data is processed through the data link layer, what does it call?
❑ A. Segment
❑ B. PDU
❑ C. Frame (Right Answers )
❑ D. Packet
Answer: C
[Huawei-ui-console0] history-command max-size 20
Regarding the above configuration, which of the following statement is correct?
O A. history-command max-size 20 is to adjust the size of the history command cache to 20 (Right Answers)
❑ B. The default size of the history command cache is 5
❑ C. The default size of the history command cache is 5 bytes.
❑ D. After the above configuration is completed, the history command cache can save 20 bytes of commands.
Answer: A
514. What is the destination MAC address of the BPDU in the STP protocol?
❑ A. 01-80-C2-04-05-06
❑ B. FF -FF
- - - FF
- - - -FF
- - -FF
- - - FF
❑ C. 00-80-C2-00-00-00
❑ D. 01 -80
- - -C2
- - - 00
- - - -00
- - 00 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
515. As shown in the figure, if the switch runs STP with default parameters, which of the following ports will be elected as the designated port?
El
O A. GO/0/1 port of Switch A (Right Answers)

❑ B. G0/0/2 port of switch A
❑ C. HUB's E0/0/2 port
❑ D. HUB's E0/0/1 port
Answer: A
516. The router has the longest matching principle when looking up the routing table. Which of the following parameter is the length?
❑ A. The size of the NextHoplP address
❑ B. Priority of the routing protocol
❑ C. Cost
❑ D. The length of the mask (Right Answers)
Answer: D
517. Which packet does OSPF use to describe its own LSDB?
❑ A. LSR
❑ B. HELLO
❑ C. DD (Right Answers)
❑ D. LSU
Answer: C
518. HhaweiGigabitEthernet0/011 ] port link-type access

[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port default vlan 10
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] port link-type trunk
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/012] port trunk allow-pass vlan 10
According to the command shown above, which of the following descriptions is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/2 port is 1. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The PVID of GigabitEthernet010/2 port is 10
❑ C. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port is 1.
❑ D. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port is 10. (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
519 As shown in the foleiving gap-AM. Nye switches are connected through four links COPPER refers mine efectneall interfacs, and FISH refers m the optical interlace. Which oil the foilanng Iva interfaces can implement link aggregation,
1
Lff A 0010 3 and FEC/I0I3
El 0 001013 and 00/13/2
❑ C 001012 end FE0/0/3
n 0. 0010:2 and 001011 (Right gnawers)
Answer. Li
520 if a rmsanys network administrator wants to divide users who frequently change office locations and °flan access different nahvorks from tie conch to be cotporata nalwisair to MANIC, which of the following methods should Ice used to
diridaVLAkts?
'LI A drvide MAN based on protocol
:11 d. dads ?DUI based on MAC address (Right Answers)
D C divide VLAN based on Port
71 0 diode WAN based an grlanals
Answer= ft
521. Which two stages can the PPPoE session establishment process be divided into? (Multiple choice)
O A. PPP connecting stage
❑ B. Discovery stage (Right Answers)
O C. PPPoE Session stage (Right Answers)
O D. DHCP stage
Answer: BC
522 IOTA] aaa

IRTA-aaal domain Huawei
[RTA-aaa-domain-Huawei] authentication-scheme alt
]RTA-aaa-domain-Huawei] authentication-scheme au2
The network administrator performs the above configuration on the Huawei router RTA. If a user needs to be authenticated in the authentication domain "Huawei", which of the following description is correct?
CI A will use "authentication-scheme all" authentication, if "aul" is deleted, "au2" authentication will be used
❑ B will use "authentication-scheme au2" authentication, if "au2" is deleted, "aul" authentication will be used
❑ C Will use the "authentication-scheme 002" authentication (Right Answers )
CI B. Will use the "authentication-scheme out" authentication
Answer: C
523. Huawei ARG3 series routers enable all versions of SNMP (SNMPvl, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3) by default.
El B. False
Answer: A
524. Which of the following encapsulation modes does lPsec VPN support? (Multiple choice)
O A. Tunnel mode (Right Answers)
O B. Exchange mode
O C. Transmission mode (Right Answers)
O D. Routing mode
Answer: AC
525 Two authentication domains "Area I" and "Area 2" are configured on a router Mel serves as the authentication server. FM:tit.er arrgentrealm wrIf the correct usemamelivatwer" and passauml "heir Wrieh authunlicalon Wraith wig the
0...signed to?
D A. Authentication domain 'Areal"
▪ 0 Aurvenhcalion domain 'Area?"
❑ C Authenticalsn domain 1default_admin domain"
❑ 0 Authentication Minim "defaull domain" (Right Answers)
Maw, 0
526. If the EUI-64 address 78BC-FEFF-FFFE-EFAB is calculated based on the MAC address, what should its corresponding MAC address be?
❑ A. 7ABC-FEFE-EFAB (Right Answers)
❑ B. 78BC-FFFE-EFAB
❑ C. 7ABC-FFFE-EFAB
❑ D. 78BC-FEFE-EFAB
Answer: A
527. The DHCPv6 client must obtain both IPv6 addresses and another configuration information from the DHCPv6 server.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
528. When the network device sends the IPv6 packet, the packet length is compared with the NTU value. If the value is greater than the MTU value, the packet is directly discarded.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
529. The output information of the router interface is as follows. Which mufticast address data can the interface receive? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. FF02::2 (Right Answers)

❑ B. FF02::1: FF12:1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. FF02::1: FF6FAF36 (Right Answers)
❑ D. FF02::1 (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
530. Which of the following statement about the IPv6 anycast address is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The packet whose destination address is anycast address will be sent to the network interface in the meaning of the route. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Implement load sharing of services (Right Answers)
❑ C. Provide redundancy for services (Right Answers)
❑ D. Anycast address and unicast address use the same address space (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
531. The MPLS label header is encapsulated between the data link layer header and the network layer header of the message.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
532. When using the Traced program to test the path through which the target node passes, the default TTL value for Traceroute is measured 0 times.
❑ A.3 (Right Answers)
❑ fr 8
❑ fr 6
❑ D.4
Answer: A
533. Which of the following description of the role of the free ARP message is wrong?
❑ A Used to advertise the active/standby switchover in the VRRP backup group.
❑ B Used to advertise a new current AC address_ The sender replaces the NIC and the AC address changes. In order to notify all hosts before the AP entry ages, the sender can send a free ARP_
❑ G Used to check duplicate IP addresses. Nommlly, no ARP response will be received. If received, it indicates that there is an address in the network that is duplicated with its own IP address.
❑ 0 Free ARP packets are used to keep active with the gateway device when the host is idle. (Right Answers )
Answer: 0
534. Which of the following statement about the ARP message is wrong?
❑ A. The ARP reply message is sent by the unicast party.
❑ B. Any network device needs to obtain the data link layer identifier by sending ARP packets. (Right Answers)
❑ C. ARP request message is sent by broadcast
❑ ID ARP packets cannot traverse the router and cannot be forwarded to other broadcast domains.
Answer: B
535. Using the command mkdir test in the VRP operating platform, the system will create a folder named test.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
536 When the switch receives a unicast data frame, it will look up the destination MAC address in the MAC table. Which of the following statement is wrong?
❑ A. If the MAC address is found, and the corresponding port of the MAC address in the MAC address table is not the one that enters the switch, the switch performs the forwarding operation
❑ B If the MAC address is found, and the corresponding port of the MAC address in the MAC address table is the port that the frame enters the switch, the switch performs the discard operation
❑ C. If the MAC address is not found, the switch performs the flooding operation_
❑ D. tf the MAC address is not found, the switch performs the discard operation. (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
537. The default route can be derived from (). (Multiple choice)
❑ A Manua[ configuration (Right Answers)
❑ B. Dynamic routing protccof generation (Right Answers)
❑ G. The router itself has
❑ a Link layer protocol generation
Answer: AB
538. Which of the following packets belong to the OSPF protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. LSU (Right Answers)
❑ B. LSA
❑ C. LSR (Right Answers)
❑ D. HELLO (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
539. On the broadcast network, both the DR and the BDR use the mutticast address 224.0.0.6 to receive the link status update packet.
0 B. False
Answer: A
540. As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. Which device is ABR? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Router B (Right Answers)

❑ B. Router D
❑ C. Router C
❑ D. Router A (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
541. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which of the following interfaces can forward data frames with a VLAN ID of 40 and does not carry labels when forwarding?
❑ A. GEO/0/4
❑ B. GEO/0/2
❑ C. GEO/0/3
❑ D. GEO/0/5 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
542. As shown in the figure, which of the following configuration of the VLAN on the Huawei switch is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Clientl belongs to VLAN 10, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Client2 belongs to VLAN 20, and the command for dividing VLAN based on MAC address on the switch is correct. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Client3 belongs to VLAN 30, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct.
❑ D. Client4 belongs to VLAN 40, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct.
❑ E. Client4 does not belong to VLAN 40, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is incorrect. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABE
543. In the link aggregation technology, which parameters can the Eth-Trunk use to implement load balancing? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Same source IP address or destination IP address (Right Answers)
❑ B. Same source port number or destination port number
❑ C. Same source MAC address or destination MAC address (Right Answers )
❑ D. The same protocol type
Answer: AC
544. The Truk port can allow multiple VLANs to pass, including VLAN4096.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
545 As shown in the figure, the administrator wants all hosts to access the Tnternet from 8.00 to 17- 00 every day. In the interface configuration of GO/0/l, h h AGL rule should be bound to traffic-filter outbound?
❑ A time-range am9topm5 08 - 00 to 11:00 working-day # acl number 2003 rule 5 deny time-range am9topm5
❑ B time-range am91opm5 08:00 to 17:00 daily # acl number 2002 rule 5 permit time-range an-e1opm5 #
❑ C. lime-range amgtopm5 08_00 to 17:00 daily # acl number 2001 rule 5 deny time-range am9topm5 # (Right Answers )
❑ D. time-range am9topm5 08:00 to 17-00 off-day # acl number 2004 rule 5 permit time-range am91opm5
Answer: C
546. The router output information is as follows. What is the IPv6 address obtained by this interface?
❑ A. 3000::3000/64
❑ B. 3000::1/64
❑ C_ 3000::2/64 (Right Answers)
❑ D_ 2000::1/64
Answer: C
54T Which of the following features is no longer supported by ❑SPFv3 on an EPv6 network?
❑ A. Router-1D
❑ B. Multi-regional division
❑ C_ Authentication function (Right Answers )
❑ D_ Send protocol packets in mutticast mode
Answer: C
548. Which packet is sent by the DHCF've client in response to the Advertise packet sent by the DHCPv€ sewer?
❑ A. Offer
❑ B. Request (Right Answers)
❑ G. Reply
❑ D Advertise
Answer: B
549 The configuration information of a routers [MGM address pool is as folbws if the host adopts [MGM doleful autoconfiguration, which IPM addresses can the host obtain? (Multiple choice)
dhcps6 pod test

address prefix 3000:164
excluded-address 3000:1
dns-server 2000:1
dns-domain-name huawei dns-domain-name huawercom
❑ A 30002/64 (Right Answers)

❑ 13- 30900/64
❑ C 3000.3000/64 (Right Answers)
❑ 0 2000- 1/64
Answer: AC
550 Segment Routing (SR) is a protocol for extending the existing IGla protocol, based on the MPLS protocol, using source routing technology to forward data packets on the network_
❑ A_ True (Right Answers)
▪ False
Answer: A
551 if the routers Ethernet interface needs to forward a 1600B packet, which of the fallowing statement is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A The value of the Flags field of the first packet is 1 (Right Answers )
❑ B The first message contains the payload 14808 (Right Answers )
❑ G The slice offset field value of the second fragmented packet is 1480 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The value of the Flags field of the second packet is a
Answer: ABC
552. There is a TTL field in the header of the 1P packet. Which of the following statement about this field is correct?
❑ A. This field is used to indicate the priority of the packet.
❑ B. The length of this field is 7 digits.
❑ C. This field is used for packet anti-ring. (Right Answers)
❑ D. This field is used for packet fragmentation.
Answer: C
553. After the network administrator uses the TracedRoute function on the router device, what is the value of the Protocol field of the IPv4 header in the data packet sent by the router?
❑ A6
❑ B.1 (Right Answers)
❑ C.17
▪ 2
Answer:
554 As shown in the following figure, host C is ony required to communicate with one of host A or host B_ Then, which Gourmand can be configured to implement the requirement under the G0/013 port of SWB?
❑ A mtu 2000
❑ B port link-type trunk
❑ C speed 100
▪ mac-limit maximum 1 (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
555_ As shown in the following figure, the MAC address table of the SWA is as follows. The h can never learn the MAC address of the HOST A Which of the following reasons not possible,
❑ A HOST A did not send any data frames

❑ B The GO/0/1 port of the switch is set to ACCESS mode (Right Answers )
❑ C_ The MAC address learning function is disabled on GO/0/1 of the switch.
❑ 0. Turn off the MAC address learning function of the LAN to which HOST A belongs.
Answer. B
556 The network administrator finds that a port on the switch has learned the MAC address, but cannot forward the data frame. Which of the following working states is the port in?
❑ A Disabled
❑ B Blocking
❑ C Listening
❑ D Learning (Right Answers)
Answer,
557_ As shown in the following figure, host A does not have a gateway configured_ Host B has a gateway ARP cache. In host A, the command ping 110 12_1 is used. Which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A The destination MAC address of the data frame sent by Host A is MAC-B.
❑ B The destination MAC address of the data frame sent by Host A is MAC-A.
0 C_ The destination IP address of the packet sent by host A is 11 0.12.1.
❑ 0_ No packets will be sent from host A (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
558. In Huawei AR routers, what is the default OSPF priority value?

❑ A. 20
❑ a 30
❑ ❑_ 0
Answer: B
559. When configuring a static route on a broadcast interface, you must specify the next hop address.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
560. In the OSPF broadcast network, which routers do the DR other routers exchange link state information with? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DR (Right Answers)
❑ B. BDR (Right Answers)
❑ C. All OSPF neighbors
❑ D. DR Other
Answer, AB
561. What is the value of the direct routing protocol priority?

❑ B. 30
❑ C. 10
❑ D. 20
Answer: A
562. The configuration information of the GO/0/1 port of the switch is as follows. Which VLAN data frame does the switch forward not carry the VLAN TAG?
❑ B. 30
0 C. 40
❑ D. 20
Answer: A
563. Referring to the following topology and configuration. routers Ri and R2 are connected through a Serial low-speed cable, and the data link layer encapsulation uses PPP. When the Holdtimes of Ri and R2 are inconsistent, PPP negotiation
fails and communication cannot be performed.
C A True
C B False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
564. PPP is more secure and reliable than HDLC because PPP supports (). (Multiple choice)
❑ A. SSH B. PAP C. MD5 D. CHAP
Answer: BD
565. The configuration information of GO/0/1 interface of Router A is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
acl number 3000
rule 5 deny 17
rule 10 deny 89
rule 15 deny 6
traffic-filter inbound acl 3000
❑ A. This interface does not forward ICMP packets.

❑ B. This interface does not forward received SNMP packets. (Right Answers)
❑ C. This interface does not forward received FTP packets. (Right Answers)
❑ D. This interface can establish OSPF neighbor relationships with other routers.
Answer: BC
566. Layer 2 ACL can match source MAC, destination MAC, source IP ; and destination IP, etc. information.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
567. What is the value of the protocol type field in the FP packet, indicating that the protocol is GRE?
❑ B. 48
❑ C. 2
❑ D. 1
Answer: A
568. OSPFv2 supports lPv6 by adding new types of LSAs.

❑ A. True
Answer: B
569. Which of the following parts does the global unicast address consist of? (Multiple Choice)
El A. Protocol ID
❑ B. Interface ID (Right Answers)
❑ C. Subnet ID (Right Answers)
❑ D. Global Routing Prefix (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
570. The output information of Router C is as follows. How many global unicast address prefixes does Router C advertise?
❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
❑ D. 4
Answer: C
571. What are the values of the currently used IPv6 multicast address flag field (Flag)? (Multiple Choice)
❑ C. 2
❑ D. 3
Answer: AB
572. Which of the following statements about the TTL field in the IP packet header is correct?
❑ A. Whenever a IP packet passes through a router, its TTL value is decremented by 1. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Whenever a IP packet passes through a router, its TTL value will be increased by 1.
❑ D. TTL defines the number of packets that the source host can send.
Answer: A
573. Which of the following is not included in the VRP system login method?
❑ A. Telnet
❑ B. SSH
❑ C_ Netstream (Right Answers)
❑ D. Web
Answer: C
574. Which of the following information is used to prompt by the VRP operating platform for incomplete input commands?
❑ A. Error: Wrong parameter found at w position
❑ B. Error: Incomplete command found at wposition (Right Answers)
❑ G_ Error. Too many parameters found at w position
❑ D. Error Ambiguous command found at "'position
Answer: B
575. Which of the following descriptions about the specified port of the spanning tree is correct?
❑ A. The part en the root switch must not be the designated port.
❑ B. The designated port can forward configuration BPDUs to the network segment connected to it. (Right Answers)
❑ G. Each switch has only one designated purl
❑ D. Specify the porno forward configuration BPDUs from this switch to the root switch.
Answer: B
576 Which of the following statements about the handling of RSTP configuration BPDU are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A After the topology is stable, the non-root bodge device sends configuration BPDUs at the interval specified by the Hello timer, regardless of whether the configuration BPDUs are received from the root bodge_ (Right Answers)
❑ B After the topology is stable, the non-root bridge demo sends the configuration BPDU after receiving the configuration BPDU sent by the upstream device.
❑ C The root port must wait for the BPDU Max Age timeout to re-top the topology calculation.
❑ 0 When a port receives a sub-optimal RST BPDU from the upstream designated bridge, the port immediately responds to its stored RST BPDU, (Right Answers )
Answer: AD
577. Which of the following statements are incorrect? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. By default, the order of route priorities is that direct routes are higher than OSPF.
❑ B. In VRP, the greater the priority value of the routing protocol, the higher the priority of the route_ (Right Answers )
❑ C. The priority of each static route can be different
❑ D. If the cost of the route is larger, the higher the priority of the route. (Right Answers )
Answer: BD
578 Which of the following descriptions are incorrect about the OSPF Router ID? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The prerequisite for the normal operation of OSPF protocol is that the router has a router ID_
❑ B. The router ID must be the LP address of an interface of the router. (Right Answers)
❑ G. The router ID must be specified by manual configuration. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router Ins must be the same in the same area. The router Ins in different areas can be different. (Right Answers )
Answer: BCD
579 When a router forwards a packet, if it does not match the corresponding detail route and there is no default route, the router will discard the packet directly.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
580 After the administrator successfully logs in to the router through Telnet, it is found that the IP address of the interface can not be configured on the muter. So what is the possible reason?
❑ A SNMP parameter configuration error
❑ B The Telnet terminal software used by the administrator prohibits the corresponding operation.
❑ C The Telnet user level is incorrectly configured (Right Answers)
❑ 0 The authentication mode of the Telnet user is incorrectly configured.
Answer: C
581 In the network shown in the following figure, the switch uses the VLANIF interface to connect to the sub-interface of the muter. Which of the following configurations can fulfill this requirement?
111
❑ A interface Mandl° ip address 100 12 1 255255 255 0 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type hybrid pod hybrid untag Nan 10 #
❑ B interface Vbnif10 ip address 100.121 255 255 255.0 # interface GigabitEtherneto/0/2 pod link-type access pod default Nan 10 #
❑ C interface Vlanifl D ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255.255.0 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 # (Right Answers)
❑ 0 interface Vbnif10 ip address 10 a12:1 255 255 2550 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk pvid 10 pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 #
Answer: C
582. If an Ethernet data frame Lengthrrype=0)(8100, which of the following ports might this data frame be sent from? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Switch Hybrid type port (Right Answers)
❑ B. Switch Access type port
❑ C. Serial interface of the router
❑ D. Switch Trunk type port (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
583 As shown in the figure, the two ports of switch GE0/0/1 and GEO/0/2 perform different Hybrid configurations. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The data frame sent by the finance department carries the tag in the switch as VLAN20. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The administrative department and the finance department cannot visit each other because the VLANs belonging to the two depadments are different.
❑ C. If both ports GEO/0/1 and GEO/0/2 of the switch are modified to be trunk pods, the two departments can communicate normally.
❑ 0 The data frame sent by the administrative department carries the tag in the switch as VLAN20
❑ E The switch here can be a Layer 2 switch or a Layer 3 switch because communication does not need to go through a Layer 3 gateway (Right Answers)
Answer: AE
584 In the LPP negotiation phase of lhe PPP protocol, if the parameters sent by the other party are completely accepted, which of the following packet will be sent?
❑ Configure-Reject
❑ B. Configure-Ark (Right Answers )
❑ C. Configure-Request
❑ Configure-Nak
Answer: B
585 As shown in the following figure, which of the following configurations can be used to make Host A and Host B unable to communicate with each other? (Multiple Choice)
▪ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100 0 12_0 0 0 0255 # interface GmabitEthernet0.10/3 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑ B_ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100.0.120 0.0 0255 # interface GigabitEthemet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound net 2000 # (Right Answers )
❑ C_ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100 0.12 0 0.0.0255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑ fr act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000.120 0.0.0_255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 traffic-liter inbound eel 2000 # (Right Answers)
Answer: BB
586. The output information of Router C is as follows: what is the source IPv6 address of Router C sending OSPFv3 LSU packets?
111
❑ A. 2603:1/64
❑ B. FE80::2E0:FGFEFE48:4EC8 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2005: 1/64
❑ 0. 2009-1/64
Answer: B
587. Which of the following message types is used for the RA message that is used for IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration?
❑ A. IGIv1Pv6
❑ El I Clv1Pv5 (Right Answers)
❑ C. UPv5
❑ D. TCPv6
Answer: B
588 The FEC (Forwarding Equivalence Class) is a set of data streams with certain commonalities; the FEC can be divided according to the add but cannot be divided according to the service type, CloS, etc.
❑ A True
Answer: B
589 Which statement is correct about the function of the network layer in the 081 reference model?
111 A. The closest layer to the user in the OSI reference model, providing network services for applications
❑ B Transmit bitstreams between devices, specifying levels, speed, and cable pins
O C. Provide connection-oriented or non-connection-oriented data transfer and error detection before retransmission
0 a Provide a logical address for the router to determine the path (Right Answers)
❑ E. Combine the bits into bytes, combine the bytes into frames, use the link layer address (the Ethernet uses the MAC address) to access the medium, and perform error detection.
Answer: D
590 UDP does not guarantee the reliability of data transmission_ It does not provide functions such as packet sorting and flow control. It is suitable for traffic with low transmission reliability requirements but high transmission speed and delay.
El A True (Right Answers)
❑ B False
Answer: A
591. If the application layer protocol is Millet ; what is the value of the Protocol field in the IPA header?
❑ A. 17
❑ B. 67
E C. 53
Answer: D
592. The MAC address table of the existing switch is as follows. The switch receives a data frame with a source MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 and a destination MAC address of 5489-989d-I d30. Which of the following statements are
111
0 A. If this data frame is received from Eth0/0/1, the switch will discard this data frame (Right Answers)
0 B If the data frame is received from Eth0/0/1, the switch forwards the data frame from the Eth0/0/3 port.
0 C If the data frame is meowed from Eth0/0/1, the switch floods the data frame.
❑ D If the data frame is received from the Eth0/0/3 pod, the switch forwards the data frame from the Eth0/01 port (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
593. SWA and SWB run the RSTP protocol. Which of the fo[lowing statements are correct? (Muth* Choice)
❑ A. The G01013 port of SWA is the designated port. (Right Answers )

❑ B. The GO/0/3 port of SWB is the alternate port. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The G0/0/3 port of SWB is the Backup part.
❑ D. The G01012 part of SWA is the designated part. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
594. On the VRP platform, what is the order of the default protocol priorities of direct route, static route, RIP, and OSPF from high to low?
❑ A. Direct route, OSPF, static route, RIP (Right Answers)
❑ B. Direct route, OSPF, RIP, static route
❑ C. Direct route, RIP, static route, OSPF
❑ D. Direct route, static route, RIP, OSPF
Answer: A
595. As shown in the following figure, assume that all routers run OSPF at the same time. Which router is the DR in this network?
❑ A. Router A
❑ B. Router B (Right Answers )
❑ C. Router C
❑ D. Router ID
Answer: B
596. The OSPF router ID must be the same as the IP address of an interface on the router.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
597. What are the functions of OSPF hello packets? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Publish parameter information such as Router ED and Router Priority. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Synchronous router LSDB
❑ C. Neighbor discovery (Right Answers)
❑ D. Maintaining neighbor relationships (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
598. By default, what is the OSPF protocol Deadtime on the broadcast network?
❑ A. 20s
❑ B. 40s (Right Answers)
❑ C. lOs
❑ D. 30s
Answer: B
599. When two OSPF routers form a TWO-WAY neighbor relationship, the LSDB has completed synchronization, but the SPF algorithm has not been run.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
600. Which of the following protocol does not belong to the File Transfer protocol?
❑ A. TFTP
❑ C. FTP
❑ D. SFTP
Answer: B
601. Which of the following is correct about the VLANIF interface?

❑ A. The VLANIF interface does not need to learn the MAC address.
❑ B. Different VLANIF interfaces can use the same IP address.
❑ C. The VLANIF interface does not have a MAC address.
❑ D. The VLANIF interface is a Layer 3 interface. (Right Answers)
Answer: D
602. The rule for creating a VLAN on a Huawei switch is that VLAN4095 cannot be created and VLAN 1 cannot be deleted.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
interface GigabitEtherneto/0/2
❑ A. Host A and Host B can ping each other. (Right Answers)

❑ B. Data frames on both links do not contain VLAN TAG (Right Answers)
❑ C. Host A and Host B cannot ping
❑ D. The PVID of the port GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 is 20 (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
604. Which of the following protocol does the PPP protocol consist of? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Certification Agreement (Right Answers)
❑ B. NCP (Right Answers)
❑ C. LCP (Right Answers)
❑ D. PPPOE
Answer: ABC
605. Which of the following value is used in the Protocol field in the PPP frame to indicate that the core is an IP packet?
❑ A. 0x8821
❑ B. 0x0021 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ox8021
❑ D. 0x8863
Answer: B
606 As shown in the following figure, ail the hosts can communicate with host C through which of the following configuration?
But host A and host B cannot communicate.
❑ A_ acl number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98d3-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound eel 4000
❑ B. eel number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-93ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98c0-550e # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filler inbound eel 4000 4 (Right Answers)
❑ C act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98c0-550e # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound eel 4000
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98d3-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound act 4000
Answer: B
607. As shown in the following figure, which of the following configurations can be used to make Host A and Host B unable to communicate with each other? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A_ act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000_12 0 00 0 255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound ad 2000 It
❑ B lad number 2000 rub 5 deny source 100 0.12 0 00 0255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/3 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 4
❑ C. act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000.12 0 0.0.0.255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic -finer outbound eel 2000 4 (Right Answers)
❑ D. act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255 # interface GigabitEthemet 0/0/2 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 # (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
608. As shown in the following figure, the administrator wants that all the hosts cannot access the Web service (port number is 80) and other services are accessed normally, what AGL rule should be bound to traffic-filter outbound in the
interface configuration of GO/0/1,
El
❑ A. act number 3001 rule 5 deny udp destination-port eq www rule 10 porn,'
❑ B act number 3003 rule 5 permit ip rule 10 deny udp destination-port eq www #
❑ G act number 3000 rule 5 deny top clestmation-port eq www rule 10 permit ip # (Right Answers)
❑ act number 3002 rule 5 permit ip rule 10 deny tcp destination-port eq www #
Answer, C
609. What is the decimal value of the OSPFv3 packet in the Protocol field in the IPv6 packet header?
❑ A. 69
❑ G. 92
❑ D. 59
Answer: B
610. Which of the following ll3v6 address Solicited-node mudicast addresses are F02:1:FFAB:FECA? (Multiple Choice)
0 A. 2030::BBAB:FECA (Right Answers)
I=1 B. 2020::EEAB:FECA (Right Answers)
El C. 2020::FFAB:FECA (Right Answers)
❑ D. 2020::FFBA:FECA
Answer: ABC
611. Which of the following IPv6 addresses are link-wide multicast addresses? (Multiple Choice)
El A. FF02 . :2 (Right Answers)
CI B. FF02::1 (Right Answers)
El C. FF12::1 (Right Answers)
CI ID_ FF12::2 (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
612. What is the total length of the interface identifier of the link-local unicast address?
CI A. 48bit
I=1 B. 32bit
1:1 D. 96bit
Answer: C
613. The LER in the MPLS domain is called the Label Egress Router.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
614. If the value of the Type/Length field of an Ethernet data frame is 0x0800, the header length of the upper packet carried by the data frame ranges from 20 to 60B.
El A. True (Right Answers)
0 B. False
Answer: A
615. On the VRP platform, which of the following methods can you access the previous history command? (Multiple Choice)
O A. Left cursor
O B. Ctrl+U
El C. Ctrl+P (Right Answers)
El D. Upper cursor (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
616. What is the full name of VRP?
❑ A. Virtual Routing Platform
❑ B. Versatile Redundancy Platform
❑ C. Versatile Routing Protocol
❑ D. Versatile Routing Platform (Right Answers)
Answer: D
617 As shown. the figure, three Layer 2 switches ere interconnected wrgi one HUB, and the switch is enabled web SIP. For the budge ID setting of the switch SIP, refer to the following Figure_ Others ere default configurations. Which of the
foaming statement is wrong?
❑ A After the bridge 10 comparison, LSWI is the mat bridge

❑ 130/0/1 purl of LSW3. is an PP port and is blocked
Li C Both pods of LSW1 era designated ports and are in Ina forwarding state Might Answer)
11 D. poll of LSW1 is blacked_
Answer, C
618 As shown in the following figure, all switches run the SIP protocol_ After the topology is stable, modify the sending period of the configuration BPDU on which of following switch can affect the sending period of the SWD configuration
BPDU?
❑ A SWD
❑ B_ SWG
❑ a SWB
❑ D SWA (Right Answers)
Answer:
619. As shown in the network below, the MAC address of the switch is marked. Enter the command stp root secondary on the SWD switch. Which of the following switche will be the root bridge of this network?
❑ A SWD (Right Answers)

❑ B SWB
❑ C SWC
▪ SWA
Answer: A
62D. The company has users who report !hal when using SIss network to transfer files, the speed is very taw. The administrator uses Wireshark software to capture packets m the nelerork and hods some Ouphcale frames. Which of 11e honosiiing
descrkhion is correct ebonite reason or solution?
❑ A The switching equipment of he company network must be upgraded
❑ B. The network nos a loop on the second floor (flight Answers)
ci a No PLAN is configured In the network
❑ D. When the switch fennel find the destination MAC address of the data frame in the MAC address tribe, the swath wIt Rood the dais frame.
Answer, 0
621. Dynamic routing protocols can automatically adapt to changes in network topology.
❑ 11 False
Answer: A
622. The output information of the router R1 routing table is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.2.2 is forwarded through Ethernet0/0/1 . (Right Answers)
❑ B. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.1.1 is forwarded through the Ethernet0/0/0 interface. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The packet with the destination address of 10.1.1.1 is forwarded through the GigabitEthernet0/0/0 interface.
❑ D. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.2.1 is forwarded through the Ethernet0/0/2 interface. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
623. All interfaces of the router belong to the same broadcast domain.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
624. Which of the following is correct about the command configured for the default route?
❑ A. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.11 (Right Answers )
❑ B. [Huawei-Serial0] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
❑ C. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 192.168.1.1
❑ D. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.00.0.0.0
Answer: A
625. What are the advantages of using DHCP to allocate IP addresses using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Can achieve IP address reuse (Right Answers)
❑ B. Avoid IP address conflicts (Right Answers)
❑ C. Heavy workload and poor management
❑ D. The configuration information changes (such as DNS), only the administrator needs to modify it on the DHCP server to facilitate unified management. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
626_ As shown in the following figure, Router A has passed the IP address 10 0_122 Telnet Router B In the current interface, which of the following operations will cause the Telnet session of the router to be interrupted with router, (Multiple
Choice)
❑ A Close GO/0/1 interface (Right Answers)

❑ B Modify the IP address of GO/0/1 interface (Right Answers)
❑ C Enable OSPF protocol on GO/0/1 interface
❑ D Configure static router
Answer: AB
627. When a port of a switch receives a non-carried VLAN TAG data frame, it must add a PVID.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
628_ Which of the following parameter cannot be used for advanced access control lists?
❑ A. Physical interface (Right Answers)
❑ B. Time range
❑ C. Destination port number
❑ D. Agreement number
Answer: A
629 The AGL does not filter the traffic that the device itself generates to access other devices. Only the forwarded traffic is filtered. The forwarded traffic includes traffic that other devices access the device.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
630. An AGL rule is as foIlows: Which of the following IP addresses can be matched by the permit rule? (Multiple Choice)
Rule 5 permit ip source 10.9.1.0 255.0.254.255
❑ A. 7_1.2.1
❑ B_ 6.1.3_1 (Right Answers)
❑ a 8.2.2_1
❑ D_ 9.9_1_1 (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
631. The router output information is as follows. Which IPv6 address is obtained by this interface?
❑ A. 2000..1/64
❑ B. 3000::2/64 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 3000::3000164
❑ D. 3000::1/64
Answer: B
632. The router's Router ID neighbor relationship is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The router and the router with Router-ID 10.5.3.3 cannot exchange the link status information. (Right Answers)
❑ B. This router is a DR Other router (Right Answers)
❑ C. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.0.2. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
633. Which area number does OSPFv3 use to identify the backbone area?
❑ B. 3
❑ C. 1
❑ D. 2
Answer: A
634. A router OSPFv3 adjacency relationship is as follows. The router is an ABR.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
635. Which of the following type of addresses are not included in the IPv6 address?
• A. Anycast address
O B. Broadcast address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Multicast address
O D. Unicast address
Answer: B
636. If the network address of a network is 10.1.1.0/30, what is its broadcast address?
O A. 10.1.1.4
O B. 10.1.1.2
❑ C. 10. 1. 1.3 (Right Answers)
O D. 10.1.1.1
Answer: C
637. If the network address of a network is 192.168.1.0, then its broadcast address must be 192.168.1.255.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
638. Which of the following are correct about the analysis of ICMP packets? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. ICMP packets are encapsulated in IP packets and are not encapsulated in the transport layer. (Right Answers )
❑ B. ICMP packets cannot be used to detect MTUs in a path.
❑ C. ICMP messages can record time, including original time, receiving time, and sending time. (Right Answers)
❑ D. ICMP protocol does not support redirection function
❑ E. ICMP packets contain ICMP error packets, control packets, request/response packets, and refresh packets.
Answer: AC
639. When the router is powered on, the configuration file is read from the default storage path for initialization of the router.
If there is no configuration file in the default storage path, what does the router use for initialization?
❑ A. Current configuration
O B. New configuration
O C. Default parameters (Right Answers)
O D. Initial configuration
Answer: C
640. In the STP protocol, which of the following factors will affect the election of the root switch? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Switch interface ID
O B. Switch interface bandwidth
❑ C. IP address of the switch
O D_ The current MAC address of the switch (Right Answers)
❑ E. Switch priority (Right Answers )
Answer: DE
641. As shown in the following figure, all switches run STP, when the topology is stable.
The SWA device is powered off. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
Cl
❑ A. SWB still periodically sends configuration BPDUs from port GO/0/1.

❑ B. The SWC sends configuration BPDUs from port GO/0/1 after the current Max Age time.
❑ C. SWC immediately sends TC-BPDUs from port GO/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑ D. SWC and SWB immediately re-elected the root bridge (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
642. As shown in the figure, all four switches run STP, and each parameter adopts the default value.
When a port on the root switch is blocked and cannot be sent through the port, how long will the port in the network enter the forwarding state?
❑ A. About 15 seconds
❑ B. About 50 seconds (Right Answers)
❑ C. About 30 seconds
❑ D. About 3 seconds
Answer: B
643. Which of the following port states does the RSTP protocol include? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Forwarding (Right Answers)
❑ B. Discarding (Right Answers)
❑ C. Listening
❑ D. Learning (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
644. As shown in the figure below, all hosts can communicate normally. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. SWB's 301013 learned 2 MAC addresses (Right Answers)

❑ B. SWA's G01013 learned 3 MAC addresses
❑ C. SWA's G010/3 learned 1 lvlAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. SWA's GO/0/3 learns 2 MAC addresses
Answer; AC
645 The Layer 2 switch belongs to the data link layer device and can identify the MAC address information in the data frame, forward the data according to the MAC address, and record the MAC address and the corresponding pod information
in its own internal MAC address table.
JA True (Right Answers)
rl B. False
Answer, A
646. Which of the following description is wrong about the Layer 2 Ethernet switch?
❑ A. Layer 2 Ethernet switch works at the data link layer
❑ Et. Ability to learn MAC address
❑ C_ Forward according to the Layer 2 header information of the Ethernet frame
❑ fr It is necessary to make certain modifications to the three-layer header of the forwarded message, and then forward it_ (Right Answers )
Answer: D
647_ if the network shown in the folbwmg figure is used to enable loopback 0 communication between Router A and Router B through static routes, which of the following command should be entered in Router A?
❑ A_ ip route-static 10 0 22 32 GmabitEthemet 0/0/0

❑ l Et_ ip route-static 10 0 22 0 GmabitEthernet 0/0/0
❑ C ip route-static 10 0 2 2 255 255 255 255100 12 2 (Right Answers)
❑ a ip route-static 10 02 2 255 255 255 255100 12 1
Answer: C
648_ As shown in the figure, regarding OSPF topology and configuration, which of the folbwing statement is correct?
❑ A Compared RI with R2, R2 has a better chance of becoming a OR because its interface OR priority value is smaller
❑ B RI and R2 can establish stable neighbor relationships as long as the interface network type of RI is restored to the default broadcast type.
❑ C_ As long as the interface network type of RI is restored to the default broadcast type, and the hello time is adjusted to 10s, RI and R2 can establish a stable neighbor relationship (Right Answers)
❑ CI RI and R2 can establish stable OSPF neighbor relationships
Answer: C
E49 As shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
ip mute-static 10 02 2 255 255.255 25510 0.12 2
ip route-static 10_0 22 255 255 255 255 10 0 21 2 preference 40
❑ A. if the port GO/0/1 is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is changed to GO/0/2.
❑ B_ if the GO/0/2 port is Down, the interface that reaches 100 22 in the routing table of Router A is changed to GO/0/1_ (Right Answers)
❑ C_ The interface that reaches 10 02 2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/0/1
❑ D. The interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/012. (Right Answers )
Answer: BD
650 As shown in the broadcast network, OSPF mns on four routers and in the same area and on the same network segment. OSPF automatically elects a OR Multiple BORs to achieve better backup results.
❑ A True
❑ B_ False (Right Answers)
Answer: B
651. When logging in to the router through Telnet, which authentication methods can choose? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. AAA local authentication (Right Answers)
❑ B. Not certified
❑ C. password authentication (Right Answers)
❑ MD5 ciphertext authentication
Answer: AC
652. The packet that the DHCP server responds to the client must be a unicast packet.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
653. Link aggregation is a common technique in enterprise nehvorks. Which of the following descriptions are the advantages of link aggregation technology? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A Improve reliability (Right Answers)
❑ B Improve safety
❑ D Implement load sharing (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
654 A switch receives a data frame with a VLAN tag, tut finds that the destination MAC address of the data frame is not queried in its MAC address table which is the processing behavior of the switch for the data frame ,
❑ A The switch will drop this data frame
❑ B The switch broadcasts this data frame to all Access ports.
❑ C The switch broadcasts this data frame to all ports (except the receiving part) in the VLAN that belongs to the data frame (Right Answers)
❑ El The switch broadcasts the data frame to all ports
Answer: C
655 In order to check whether the serial port SO/D/1 on the router is a DTE interface or a BCE interface, which of the following commands should he used?
❑ A. display interface 80/0/1 (Right Answers )
❑ B. display current-config
❑ C. display saved-config
❑ D display controller serial
Answer: A
656. Which of the following types of ACLs can match the transport layer port number?
❑ A. Intermediate ACL
❑ B. Advanced ACL (Right Answers)
❑ C. Layer 2 ACL
❑ D. Basic ACL
Answer: B
657. What is the total length of an 1Pv€ address?

❑ A. 32
❑ B. 64
I=1 D. 96
Answer: C
658. Which protocol packet is required to bear for DHCPv6 packets?
O A. FTP
O B. TCP
O C. UDP (Right Answers)
O Di_ HTTP
Answer: C
659. Which statements are correct about IPv6 address configuration? (Multiple Choice)
O A. FRC addresses can only be manually configured.
O B. IPv6 supports DHCPv6 format for address configuration (Right Answers)
I=1 C. fPv6 supports stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
O D. [Pv6 address supports multiple ways of automatic configuration (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
660. The multicast address of the requested node corresponding to 2001 . •12:1 is FF02::1:FF12:1.
E B. False
Answer: A
661 The client has an error accessing the FTP server. Checking that there is no problem with the connectiviy between the server and the client is it possibly caused by which of the following server ports are blocked? (Multiple Choice)
El A 21 (Right Answers)
❑ B 20 (Right Answers)
❑ C 50049
❑ D 80
Answer: AB
662. Which fields are not included in the network layer header format?
D A. TTL
LI B. Source IPv4 Address
LI C. Sequence Number (Right Answers)
❑ D_ Destination IPv4 Address
Answer: C
663. Which of the following descriptions are correct if en AR2200 router needs to be restored to its initial configuration? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Re-specify the configuration file to be loaded next time
171 B. Reset the saved configuration (Right Answers)
171 C. Clear current configuration
171 D. Restart the AR2200 muter (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
664. The administrator wants to completely delete the old device configuration file config.zip›, then which of the following command is correct?
❑ A. delete /unreserved config.zip (Right Answers)
❑ B. delete /force config.zip
❑ C. clear config.zip
❑ D. reset config.zip
Answer: A
665. In which of the folowing cases does the switch generate configuration BPDUs? (Multiple Choice) A. During the initialization process, as tong as the port is enabled with STP, the configuration BPDU wit be sent from the designated port
according to the interval specified by the Heto Time timer B. When the root port receives the configuration BPDU, the device where the root port resides sends configuration BPOUs from each of its designated ports. C. When a non-designated
port receives a configuration BPDU that is worse then itself, it immediately sends its own BPDU to the downstream device. D. When the designated port receives a configuration BPDU that is worse then itself, it will immediately send its own
BPDU to the downstream device. Answer ABD
❑ A.select this to commit (Right Answers)
Answer. A
666The port cost calculated by STP has a certain relationship with the port bandwidth, that is, the larger the bandwidth, the () the overhead.
❑ A. Consistent
❑ B. Not necessarily
❑ C. bigger
❑ D. smaller (Right Answers)
Answer: D
667. In the RSTP protocol, the PIA mechanism requires that the link between two switching devices be in point-to-point full-duplex mode.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
❑ A. This router is DR (Right Answers)

❑ 13. Router Router ID is 10.0.1.1
❑ C. Router Router ID is 10.0.2.2 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The interface address of this router is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)
Answer: ACID
669. Which of the following commands can enable the DHCP relay function of the router interface?
❑ A. dhcp select server
❑ B. dhcp select global
❑ C. dhcp select interface
❑ dhcp select relay (Right Answers)
Answer: DI
670 As shown in the following figure, Switch A and Router A are;connected through two link, The two links are in the manual load balancing mode_ The aggregation port number is 1, and the aggregation link needs to forward data. Carrying
VLAN TAG 100, which configuration does Router A need to use? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. interface Eth-Trunkl port ImIk-type trunk port trunk allow-pass Nan 100 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/1 eth-trunk 1 #
❑ El_ interface GmabilEtherneta/0/1 eth-trunk 1 4 interface GmabilEthernet0/0/2 eth-trunk 1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. interface Eth-Trunkl mode lacp-static port link-type trunk port trunk allow-pass Nan 100 4 interface GmabilEthernell)/0/1 eth-trunk 1 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/2 eth-trunk 1 4
0 B. interface Eth-Trunkl undo portswitch # interface Eth-Trurnkl _100 doll q termination vrd 100 ip address 10 0 122 255 255 2550 arp broadcast enable # (Right Answers)
Answer: B0
071 As shown in the figure, the network administrator creates VLAN 2 on the SWA and SWB, and configures the pods connected to the hosts on the two switches es access ports and assigns them to VLAN 2 Configure 60/0/1 of SWA and
61:11012 of SWB as trunk pods to allow ail VLANs to pass_ To achieve normal cornmunIcehon between the two hosts, what do you need led do,
VI
A. ConTguro G0011 On the SWC as the monk pad and Way AII 2 1a pass. GArO1porl is se,as the amass pal and PVID 2
0 13. Create VLAN 2 on the SWC, configure 60.10/1 arid G0,012 as trunk pods, and alp," VLAN 210 pass. Might Amax.)
0 C. Create VLAN2 on the SWC.
D Configure .30.31,1 on the SWC as the trunk port and aBow VLAN 2 to pass.
Answer , B
672 If the Authenticator sends the wrong username and password to the Authenticator during The PPP authentication process, what type of message will the Authenticator send to the Authenticator?
0 A Authenticate-Reject
0 B. Authenticate-Ack
0 G. Authenticate-Nak
0 D. Authenticate-Reply
673. An ACL is a packet filter. The ACL is applied to the service module. The ACL takes effect_
1=I A. True (Right Answers )
I=1 B. False
Answer: A
674. An ACL rule is as follows: Which of the following iP addresses can be matched by the permit rule? (Multiple Choice)
rub 5 permit ip source 10.0.1.0 0.0.254.255
❑ A. 10.0.4.5
El B. 10_0.3.4 (Right Answers)
0 C_ 10_0_1 2 (Right Answers)
El D. 10.0.2.3
Answer: BC
675. When an iPv6 interface receives a packet whose Hop Limit class has a value of 1, the packet is not forwarded.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
676_ By default ; how many seconds is the ❑SPFv3 adjacency Deadtime on a P2P link?
❑ B. 10
❑ C. 20
❑ D. 30
Answer: A
677 An explicit path can be easily defined by SR (Segment Routing), and nodes in the network only need to maintain Seament Routing information. It can respond to the real-time rapid development of business.
What are the following characteristics of Segment Routing? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A Support both the centralized control mode of the controller and the distributed control mode of the repeater. Provides a balance between centralized control and distributed control (Right Answers)
❑ B SR (Segment Routing) uses IP forwarding without additional maintenance of another label forwarding table.
❑ C A better smooth evolution of existing networks by extending existing protocols such as IGP (Right Answers)
❑ D Using source routing technology to provide rapid interaction between the network and upper-layer applications (Right Answers)
Answer: ACD
678. Which of the following statement about MPLS Label tags is wrong?
❑ A. The tag is encapsulated between the network layer and the data link layer (Right Answers)
❑ B. The label is used to uniquely identify the forwarding equivalence class FEC burned by a packet.
❑ C. The label is carried by the header of the packet and does not contain topology information.
❑ D_ The tag is a short identifier with a fixed length and only local significance.
Answer: A
679. Which statement is correct about the VRP operating platform shortcuts? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. CTRL+Z returns to the user view (Right Answers)
❑ B. CTRL+C stops the running of the current command (Right Answers)
❑ C. Move the left cursor key (<--) to the left by one. (Right Answers)
❑ D. TAB prompts for the most recently entered command
Answer: ABC
[Huaweiluser-interface console 0
[Huawei-ui-consoleOlauthentication-mode password
[huawei-ui-console0] set authentication password cipher huawei2012
[Huawei-ui-consoleO]guit
Which statement is wrong about the above configuration command?
❑ A. The user who logs in to the device through the console has the highest user prMlege level.
❑ B. The administrator wants to log in and manage the device through the console port.
❑ C. After the configuration is completed, the administrator cannot implement device management through remote login.
❑ ❑ The password of the user who logs in to the device through the console is cipher huawei2012 (Right Answers)
Answer:
681. In the switch, which of the following is the technology of port and MAC binding?
❑ A. SEP
❑ B. NAT
❑ C. ACL
❑ D. Port Security (Right Answers)
Answer: D
682. Which of the following information does the switch MAC address table not include?
❑ A. MAC address
❑ B. Port number
❑ C. IP address (Right Answers)
❑ D. VLAN
Answer: C
683. What port states might exist on a switch with standard STP protocol enabled? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Discarding
❑ B. Listening (Right Answers)
❑ C. Disabled (Right Answers)
❑ D. Forwarding (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
684. Which of the following routing protocols has the highest priority?
❑ A. Direct (Right Answers)
❑ B. RIP
❑ C. OSPF
❑ D. Static
Answer: A
685. Referring to the output result shown in the figure, it can be judged that the routing table of the router is composed of a direct route and a static route.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
686. Which of the following description is correct about the display information?
❑ A. GigabitEthemet 0/010 interface was manually closed by the administrator. (Right Answers)
❑ B. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface is not configured with an lP address.
❑ C. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface does not enable dynamic routing protocol
❑ D. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface is connected with a wrong cable.
Answer: A
687. The output information of a link aggregation port of a switch is as follows. If you want to delete Eth-Trunk 1, which of the following command is correct?
❑ A. undo interface Eth-Trun< 1

❑ B. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 undo eth-trunk quit undo interface Eth-Trunk 1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. inte GigabitEthernet 0/01 undo eth-trunk quit inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/2 undo eth-trunk quit undo interface Eth-Trunk!
❑ D. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0;2 undo eth-trunk quit undo interface Eth-Trunk 1
Answer: B
688. If an Ethernet data frame Length/Tyme=0z8100, which may be the payload of this data frame? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. TCP data segment (Right Answers)
❑ B. UDP data (Right Answers)
❑ C. ICMP packet (Right Answers)
❑ D. ARP packet (Right Answers)
Answer: ABCD
689. As shown in the figure, a static NAT command is deployed on the router R1. When the PC accesses the Internet, the destination address in the packet will not change.

0 B. False
Answer: A
690. What level of encapsulation format is defined by the PPP protocol in the OBI reference model?
❑ B. Data link layer (Right Answers )
❑ C. Presentation layer
❑ D. Application layer
Answer: B
691. Which of the following authentication methods does not require to input a username and password?
❑ C. authentication-mode hwtacacs
❑ D. authentication-mode none (Right Answers)
Answer: D
692. When forwarding a IPv6 packet, the router needs to find the routing table based on the source FP address of the [P6 packet.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
693. Which order is the 081 reference model from the upper layer to the lower layer?
❑ A. Application layer, session layer, presentation layer, transport layer, network layer, data link layer, physical layer
❑ B. Application layer, transport layer, network layer, data link layer, physical layer
❑ C. Application layer ; presentation layer, session layer ; transport layer ; network layer, data link layer, physical layer (Right Answers)
❑ D. Application layer, presentation layer, session layer, network layer, transport layer, data link layer, physical layer
Answer: C
694. Network administrators use Ping to test network connectivity. Which of the following protocols might he used in the process? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A ARP (Right Answers)
❑ B. TCP
❑ C ICMP (Right Answers)
❑ D. UDP
Answer: AC
695. As shown in the figure, it can be judged that 00e0-fc99-999 is a specific host MAC address learned by the switch through ARP, and the host has changed the IP address three times.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
696.<Huawei>system-view [Huaweilcommand-privilege level 3 view user save

Which statement is correct about the above configuration command?
❑ A. Modify the user view command to a permission level of 3. and save the configuration.
❑ B_ Modify the users permission level to 3, and save the configuration.
❑ C. Modify the permission level of the save command in the user view to 3. (Right Answers)
❑ D_ Modify the permission level of the save command used by a user to 3
Answer: C
697. Which of the following OSPF protocol packets can ensure the reliability of the LSA update?
❑ A. [SACK (Right Answers)
ID B. LSR
❑ C. DD
❑ D. LSU
Answer: A
698 Which of the following protocols does not belong to the file transfer protocol?
❑ A. SFTP
❑ B TFTP
❑ C. FTP
❑ D. HTTP (Right Answers)
Answer: 0
699. Apply the following ACL to Telnet:
Aci number 2000
Rure 5 permit source 172.16.105.20
Only devices with an IP address of 172.16.105.2 are allowed to log in remotely.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
700.[RTA] ac12002
[RTA-acl-basic-2002] rule deny source 172.16.1.1 0.0.0.0
[RTA-acl-basic-2002] rule deny source 172.16.0.0 0 255.0.0
Using the ACL matching route entry shown above on the router RTA, which of the following entries will be matched? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 192.17.0.0/24
❑ B. 172.16.1.1/32 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 172.16.1.0/24
❑ D. 172.48.0.0/16 (Right Answers)
Answer: BD
701. Which type of ACL does the following command belong to?
rule permit 8021p 7
D B. Basic ACL
❑ C. Advanced ACL
❑ D. Intermediate ACL
Answer; A
702. How many bits does the total length of an IPv6 address increase over IPv4?
❑ A. 32
❑ C. 64
❑ D. 128
Answer: B
703. What kind of IPv6 address is FE80::2E0:FCFF:FE6F:4F36?

❑ B. Anycast address
❑ C. Link-local address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Global unicast address
Answer; C
704. If the 1171v6 host wants to send packets up to 10 routers, which parameter should be modified in the Pve header?
❑ A. Next Header
❑ B. Version
❑ C. Hop Limit (Right Answers )
❑ D. Traffic Class
Answer: C
705_ There are two routers RTA and RTB between the source device and the destination device. Use the Traced command to detect the path. When the first hop RTA is detected, the source device sends a UDP packet with a TTL of 1 to a larger
port of the destination device. When the packet reaches the RTB, the TTL becomes 0, and the RTA responds to the source device. ICMP message.
A Echo Request
B. Port Unreachable
o C. Time Exceeded (Right Answers)
LI D. Echo Reply
Answer: C
706. This is the three packets that the administrator has captured on the network. Which of the following statements is incorrect?
❑ A. These three packets represent the three-way handshake process of TCP.

❑ B. Application layer data is not included in all three packets
D C. The IP address of the Telnet server is 10.0.12.1; and the IP address of the Telnet client is 10.0.12.2. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The Telnet client uses the 50190 port to establish a connection with the server.
Answer: C
707. The administrator needs to configure the IP address on the G0f0/0 interface of the router. Which of the following address is correct to use?
❑ A. 145.4.2.55/26 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 237.6.1.2124
❑ C. 127.3.1.4128
❑ D. 192.168.10.112130
Answer: A
708. The subnet mask of a network segment 150.25.0.0 is 255.255.224.0, then which is the valid host address in the network segment? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 150.25.2.24 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 150.15.3.30
❑ C. 150.25.0.0
❑ D. 150.25.1.255 (Right Answers)
Answer: AD
709. How many port states does the RICMP protocol have?
O A. 2
O B. 4
O D. 1
Answer: C
710. A router running OSPF can reach the FULL state after completing the LSDB synchronization.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
❑ A. MAC (Right Answers)
❑ B. Destination/Mask
❑ C. Cost
❑ D. NextHop
Answer: A
/12. Which descriptions are correct about DD packets and LSA in OSPF? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The head of the LSA can uniquely identify an LSA. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The DO packet contains only the header information of the LSA. (Right Answers)
❑ C. DO packet contains LSA details
❑ D. LSA head is only a small part of the LSA (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
713. As shown in the figure, the network administrator wants to manually aggregate the two physical links between SWA and SWB into one Eth-trunk link; which of the following description is correct?
❑ A. Cannot be aggregated (Right Answers)

❑ B It works normally after aggregation
❑ C. It can be aggregated. Only GE ports can send and receive data after aggregation
❑ 0. It can be aggregated_ Only Ethernet ports can send and receive data after aggregation_
Answer: A
114. Which descriptions are correct about the Ethernet subinterface? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The subinterface cannot be configured with an IP address.
❑ B. A subinterface can be bound to multiple VLANs (Right Answers)
❑ C. The [P address of the sub-interface cannot belong to the same network segment. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The subinterface ID should be the same as the VLAN 10
Answer: BC
115. Ethernet frames are processed and forwarded in the form of ULAN TAGs inside the switch .
❑ B. False
Answer: A
716_ As shown in the following figure, from the security point of new, Router A refuses to receive OSPF packets, GE packets, IGMP packets from G0/0/1 Which of the following command can funl this requirement?
❑ A act number 3000 mle 5 deny are rule 10 deny 89 rulc15 deny icmp # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-fitter inbound act 3000 #
❑ B acl number 2000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filler inbound act 2000 # (Right Answers)
❑ G acl number 3000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-fitter inbound acl 3000 #
❑ B. acl number 3000 rule 5 deny are rule 10 deny ospf rule 15 deny icmp # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-fitter inbound acl 3000 #
Answer: B
117. What is the length of the Traffic Class field in the [Pv€ packet header?
O A. 4
❑ C. 2
❑ D.6
Answer: B
718. How many ways to generate a DHCP device unique identifier DUID?
❑ A. 3
❑ C. 4
❑ D_ 1
Answer: B
719 Which of the following descriptions are correct about IPv6? Choice)
❑ A. IPv6 address length is 128 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ B. !RC address length is 64 bits
❑ C. When an IPA packet has multiple extension headers the extension header must appear in an orderly manner (Right Answers)
❑ a When an IPv6 packet has multiple extension headers, the extension header can appear randomly
Answer: AC-
720 The packet capture tool captures an Ethernet frame and finds that the value of the Type/Length field of the frame is 0x0800 Which of the following descriptions are correct about the frame? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The frame carves an IPX message.
❑ B The frame carries an IP packet (Right Answers)
❑ G The frame structure of the frame is the Ethernet_11 format (Right Answers)
❑ B. The frame structure of the frame is 802 3 format
Answer: BC
721 The MAC address table of a switch is as follows lithe switch receives a data frame with the destination AC of 5489-985-I8a 8 from the EthO/0/2 port, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A Forward this data frame front the Eth0/0/2 port

❑ B Forward this data frame from the Eth0/0/1 pert_
❑ C Discard this data frame (Right Answers)
❑ D Flood this data frame out
Answer: C
722. The administrator plans to implement a route backup by configuring a static floating route. Which is the correct implementation method?
❑ A. The administrator needs to configure different protocol priority values for the primary static route and the alternate static route. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The administrator needs to configure different metrics for the primary static route and the standby static route.
❑ C. The administrator needs to configure different TAGs for the primary static route and the standby static route.
❑ D. The administrator only needs to configure two static routes.
Answer: A
723. Regarding the main function of the router; which of the following statements are wrong? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Establish routing tables through multiple protocols
❑ B. Guide data forwarding according to the routing table
❑ C. Forward according to the source IP address of the received packet (Right Answers)
❑ D. Realize communication between devices on the same network segment (Right Answers)
Answer: CD
724. The administrator finds that the file cannot be transferred to the Huawei AR200 router through TFTP. What is the possible cause?
0 A. TCP port 69 of the TFTP server is disabled
❑ B. The username on the TFTP server does not exist.
O C. The username and password on the TFTP server have been modified.
O D. UDP port 69 of the TFTP server is disabled (Right Answers)
Answer: D
❑ A. Host B and host C can ping each other (Right Answers)

❑ B. Host A and Host B cannot ping (Right Answers)
❑ C. Host A and Host C can ping each other (Right Answers)
❑ D. All hosts can ping each other
Answer: ABC
726. Which of the following descriptions are correct about the PPP? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A PPP supports bundling multiple physical links into logical links to increase bandwidth (Right Answers)
❑ B. PPP supports plaintext and ciphertext authentication (Right Answers)
❑ C. PPP is not scalable and cannot be deployed on an Ethernet link.
❑ 0. For the physical layer, PPP supports asynchronous links and synchronous links. (Right Answers)
❑ E. PPP supports multiple network layer protocols such as 'PCP and IPXCP. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABDE
727. The PPPoE client sends a PADI message to the server, and the server replies with a PADO message. What frame is the PADO packet?
❑ A. Multicast
❑ B. Broadcast (Right Answers)
❑ C. Unicast
❑ D. Anycast
Answer: B
728. The following rules exist in an ACL of the router: rule deny tcp source 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 destination 172.16.10.1 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 21
Which of the following statement is correct?
o A. The source IP address is 192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.1, and all TCP packets with the destination port number 21 match this rule. (Right Answers)
o B. The source IP address is 192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.2, and all TCP packets with the destination port number of 21 match this rule.
o C. The source IP address is 192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.3, and all TCP packets with the destination port number 21 match this rule.
o D. The type of ACL is basic ACL.
Answer: A
729. Which of the following IPv6 extension headers can appear twice?
❑ A. Destination option extension header (Right Answers)
❑ B. Fragment extension header
❑ C. Upper layer protocol data message
❑ D. hop-by-hop option extension header
Answer: A
730. When the host uses the stateless address autoconfiguration scheme to obtain an IPv6 address, the DNS server address information cannot be obtained.
❑ B. False
Answer. A
731 Which of the following packets is sent by the DHCPv6 client before sending a request packet to the DHCPv6 server?
P A RA
❑ 6 RS (Right Answers)
❑ C. NA
❑ 0. NS
Answer: B
732. Which type does the IPv6 address FE80::2E0TCFF:FE6F:4F36 belong to?
❑ B. Link-local address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Global unicast address
❑ D. Anycast address
Answer: B
733. In the DHCPv6 stateless automatic allocation scheme, the host does not need to send any DHCPv6 packets.
❑ A. True
Answer, B
734. The last option field of IPv4 is variable length optional information. What is the maximum Length of this field?
❑ A. 40B (Right Answers)
❑ B. 20B
❑ C. 60B
O D. 10B
Answer: A
735. Regarding the role of ARP protocol and packet encapsulation, which description is correct?
❑ A. The MAC address of the destination and the address of the UUID can be obtained through the ARP protocol.
❑ B. ARP protocol supports deployment on PPP links and HDLC links.
❑ C. ARP protocol is based on Ethernet encapsulation (Right Answers)
❑ D. Inverse ARP in ARP is used to resolve device names
Answer: C
736. The STP root switch is elected based on the priority of the switch. In RSTP, the switch priority and MAC address are compared at the same time.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
737. Which of the following statement is correct?

❑ A. The switch works at the network layer.
❑ B. The router works at the physical layer.
❑ C. The switch works at the physical layer
❑ D. The router works at the network layer. (Right Answers)
Answer:
738. A router learns routes to the same destination address through RIP, OSPF, and static routes. By default, VRP will ultimately choose which protocol to learn the route through?
❑ A. The routes learned by the three protocols are selected.
❑ B. Static routing
❑ D. RIP
Answer: C
739. If the network administrator does not configure a backbone area, the router automatically creates a backbone area.
❑ A. True
Answer: B
740. What modes does device link aggregation support? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A_ Mixed mode (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Manual load sharing mode (Right Answers )
❑ C. Manual master mode
❑ D. LACP mode
Answer: AB
741. The output information of a sub-interface of a router aggregation port 1 is as follows. According to this information, which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The sub-interface of the aggregation port carries the VLAN TAG 100 when forwarding the data frame.
❑ B. The IP address of the subinterface of the aggregation port is 10.0.12.2/24. (Right Answers)
❑ C. There are two links in the aggregation port. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The subinterface number of the aggregation port is 100. (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
742. As shown in the figure, the RTA uses NAT technology and implements a many-to-many non-NAPT address translation by defining an address pool, so that hosts on the private network can access the public network. Assume that Mere are
only two public IP addresses in the address pool, and the addresses have been assigned to hosts A and B. If host C also wants to access the public network, which of the following description is correct?
- I A RTA assigns the last public network address to host C. and host B is kicked off the line.
0 B. Al hosts can use the public network address in turn to access the public nehvork.
0 C Host C cannot be assigned to the public network address and cannot access the public network. (Right Answers )
0 D. RTA assigns the first public network address to host C, and host A is kicked off the line.
Answer. C
743. The OSPFv3 interface information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The network type of this interface is P2P. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The Router-ID of this interface is 10.0.0.6. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The interface does not establish an adjacency relationship.
❑ D. The interface area number is 1 (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
744. Which type of network does OSPFv3 need to elect DR?

❑ A. P2P network
❑ B. P2MP network
❑ C. CLNP Network
❑ D. Broadcast network (Right Answers)
Answer: D
745. Compared to IPv4 ; there is no IHL field in the IPv6 header.

❑ B. False
Answer: A
❑ A. OSPFv3 process number is 1. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The DR priority of this router is 1. (Right Answers)
❑ C. This router is BDR
❑ D. The router-ID of the neighboring router is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)
Answer: ABD
747 A company applying for a Class C IP address segment needs to be evenly distributed to 8 subsidiaries. The largest subsidiary h. 14 computers. Different subsidiaries must be in different network segments. What should the subnet mask
be set to,
❑ A 255 255 255 240
❑ B 255 255 255.192
❑ C 255 255 255 0
❑ D 255 255 255 128 (Right Answers)
Answer: D
748. Which of the following commands can be used to check the session status of a PPPoE client?
❑ A. display ip interface brief
❑ B. display pppoe-client session packet (Right Answers)
❑ C. display pppoe-client session summary
❑ ❑. display current-configuration
Answer: B
749. Which of the following configurations belong to Layer 2 ACL?

❑ A. rule 10 permit 12-protacol arp (Right Answers)
❑ B. rule 25 permit source 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0
❑ C. rule 20 permit source-mac 0203-0405-0607
❑ ❑. rule 15 permit vlan-id 100
Answer: A
750. The MPLS label header is encapsulated between the data link layer header of the message and the network layer header.
❑ B. False
Answer: A
Huawei
H12-211
HCIA-Routing & Switching V2.5
QUESTION & ANSWERS
https://www.certificationsprep.com/
Exam A
QUESTION 1
An administrator currently manages AR2200 devices in the network through a single password, however the
company wishes to introduce another two administrators and provide unique user credentials and privilege
levels for telnet access to the network devices.
What action can be taken? (Choose three)
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 2
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 3
On Huawei AR G3 Series routers, which authentication modes does AAA support? (Choose all that apply.)
A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 4
Refer to the configuration output. RTA has been configured using AAA as shown, and associated with the
“huawei” domain. For users in the huawei domain, which authentication-scheme will be used?
A. au1
B. au2
C. au1 will be used. When au1 is deleted, users will use au2
D. au2 will be used. When au2 is deleted, users will use au1
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 5
configured using the command “authorization-mode hwtacacs if-authenticated”.
Which of the following statements regarding this command are true? (Choose three).
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 6
Which of the following descriptions regarding eSight is not correct?
A. eSight is used to monitor and manage enterprise networks.

B. eSight supports only Huawei devices.
C. eSight supports WLAN management and monitoring of hotspot coverage.
D. eSight supports the backup of configuration files and network traffic analysis.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 7
What of the following statements is correct regarding access control list types and ranges?
A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999

B. An advanced ACL value ranges from 3000-4000
C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999
D. An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 8
Which of the following parameters is not used by Advanced ACL?
A. Source interface
C. Protocol number
D. Time-range
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 9
Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements regarding ACL 2001 is correct?

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 10
Refer to the configuration output. A network administrator configured the ACL on router RTA, as shown.
Which of the following statements regarding the rule order are correct? (Choose two).
A. The rule-number of the first rule is 1

B. The rule-number of the first rule is 5
C. The rule-number of the second rule is 2
D. The rule-number of the second rule is 10
Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 11
Following a failure of services in the network, an administrator discovered that the configuration in one of the
enterprise routers had been changed.
What actions can be taken by the administrator to prevent further changes? (Choose three)
A. The administrator should limit access by setting the login privilege of users to 0.
B. The administrator should configure AAA to manage user authorization on the router.
C. The administrator should configure an ACL to allow only the administrator to manage the router.
D. The administrator should configure port-security on the router.
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 12
Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements is correct regarding the configuration of the
ACL on RTA?

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 13
Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are correct regarding the configuration of
the ACL on RTA? (Choose two).

B. Packets from network 172.16.1.0/24 will be denied.
C. Packets from network 172.17.1.0/24 will be denied.
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 14
The network administrator wants to improve the performance of network transmission, what steps can the
administrator take? (Choose two)

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 15

C. duplex auto
D. undo duplex
Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 16
The network administrator wishes to transmit data between two end stations. The network interface cards of
both devices operates at 100Mbps however one supports half duplex while the other uses full duplex mode.

B. The end stations can communicate, but data may be lost during transmission of large amounts of traffic.
D. The end stations can communicate, but speed is different during transmission of large amounts of traffic.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 17
An Ethernet port can work one of three duplex modes, whereas an Optical Ethernet port only supports one
single mode.
Which of the following represents this mode?
A. Full-duplex
B. Half-duplex
C. Auto-negotiation
D. Simplex
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 18
While inspecting packets in the network, a network administrator discovers a frame with the destination MAC
address of 01-00-5E-A0-B1-C3.
What can the administrator determine from this?
A. The MAC address is a unicast address.
B. The MAC address is a broadcast address
C. The MAC address is a multicast address.
D. The MAC address is incorrect.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 19
According to OSI reference model, which layer is responsible for end to end error checking and flow control?
A. Physical layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 20
A. Acknowledgement
B. Buffering
D. Windowing
Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 21
Refer to the capture output. The administrator has captured three packets in the network. Which statement
regarding the captured packets is incorrect?

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 22
An Ethernet frame is captured by wireshark and the value of Type/Length field is 0x0800.
Which of the following statements about the frame are correct? (Choose two)
A. The frame format is Ethernet_II

B. The frame format is IEEE802.3
C. Its upper layer protocol is IP
D. Its upper layer protocol is IPX
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 23
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 24
A. The maximum value of TTL is 65535.

consume a lot of bandwidth.
D. TTL value will be decremented as a packet is passed through the network devices such as hub, LAN switch
and router.
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 25
In the case of Huawei router, what is the "-i" parameter in a Ping command issued on a VRP operating system
used to set?
A. Interface for sending an Echo Request packet

B. Source IP address for sending an Echo Request packet
C. Interface for receiving an Echo Reply packet
D. Destination IP address for receiving an Echo Reply packet
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 26
A. Destination port
B. Source port
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 27
A. The ping 127.0.0.1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly inserted into the
host’s Ethernet port.
D. The command “ipconfig /release” can be used to check connectivity problems between the host and the
local gateway.
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 28
A network administrator uses the ping command to check for points of failure in the network.
Which protocols will be used during this process? (Choose two)
A. ICMP
B. TCP
C. ARP
D. UDP
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 29
A network administrator recently used tracert to trace the path to the destination IP address of an external
website, however the trace path displayed only a timeout result.
Which of the following statements correctly explains the reason for this? (Choose two)
A. The source router had shutdown the ICMP function.

B. This destination IP address does not exist.
C. The gateway cannot find a route to the destination.
D. This is a normal phenomenon.
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 30
A network administrator uses the ping command to test connectivity to the destination 10.0.0.2 on a Huawei AR
series router.
Which statement regarding the output is correct?

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 31
source is on the same segment as the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the
source.
B. When a router receives data on an interface, and the router’s IP address matches the destination IP of the
data, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the source.
the router.
source is on a different segment from the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to
the source
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 32
Host A wishes to send data to host C, and generates an ARP request to obtain the destination MAC address.
Which statement is true?
A. The destination IP address of the ARP request is Host C.

B. The destination MAC address of this ARP request is Host C.
C. The destination IP address for the ARP request is a broadcast IP address.
D. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of G0/0/0 on RTA.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 33
An ARP request is sent by host A to obtain the destination MAC address of host D.
Which statement is true about regarding the ARP reply?
A. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Switch A.
B. The destination IP address of this packet is the VLANIF1 IP address of Switch A.
C. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Host A.
D. The destination IP address of this packet is a broadcast IP address.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 34
A. Route
B. Netstat
C. Tracert
D. Send
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 35
How many probe packets are sent for each TTL value by default when "tracert" is used to detect the path along
which packet is sent from source to destination?
A. 3
B. 4
C. 6
D. 8
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 36
Which of the following types can ICMP packets be classified into? (Choose two)
A. ICMP transport packet

B. ICMP error reporting packet
C. ICMP query packet
D. ICMP application packet
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 37
On VRP platform, which of the following parameters can be used together with the "ping" command to specify
the source address of an echo request message?
A. -a
B. -s
C. -d
D. -n
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 38
A router functioning as a Proxy receives an ARP request packet, but finds that the destination address in the
packet is not intended for itself. In this case, what will the router do? (Choose two)

C. Forward its MAC address to the ARP request sender after finding that a route to the destination address is
available.
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 39
Two end stations in a point-to-point network perform address resolution.
Which of the following statements is correct?
A. The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a unicast MAC address.
B. The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a broadcast IP address.
C. The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a unicast MAC address.
D. The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a broadcast MAC address.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 40
What will the destination MAC address be at the moment a frame is transmitted by the host, when the router is
the IP destination?

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 41
Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Choose two)
A. A system can determine whether conflicting IP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP packet
B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet.
C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address.
D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 42
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 43
The administrator has configured an IP address for Host A and Host B, but had forgotten to configure a default
gateway.
What effect will this have on the hosts?
C. Hosts will be unable to communicate unless arp-proxy is enabled on the router.
D. The host will be unable to reach neither the local nor remote network destinations.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 44
A host has established a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0.
Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose all that apply.)
A. The destination MAC address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of the router interface
G0/0/0.
B. The destination MAC address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of the switch.
C. The destination port number in a segment header will have a value of 80.
D. The destination IP address of a packet will be the IP address of the Router interface G0/0/0.
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 45
The administrator uses the ping command on the host to test connectivity to the website www.huawei.com.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 46
When R2 forwards data to R3 from R1, which of the following items will change? (Choose two)
A. The source MAC address

B. The destination MAC address
C. The source IP address
D. The destination IP address
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 47
If Host B also configured the IP address as “192.168.1.1/24”, an IP address config will occur.
What will happen as a result?
A. Host B will send an ICMP request to the destination with the configured IP address. If a reply is received,
the host will notify of an address conflict.
B. Host A will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destination 192.168.1.1, for
which Host B will reply.
C. Host B will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destination 192.168.1.1, for
which Host A will reply.
D. Host A will ignore any received ARP request intended for destination 192.168.1.1.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 48
Refer to the graphic. A switch attempts to forward a frame to the MAC destination 5489-98ec-f011. What
operation will occur on the switch?
A. The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
B. The switch will report that the destination is unreachable and report this to the source.
C. The switch will flood the frame via all ports, with exception of the port on which the frame was received.
D. The switch will drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address table.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 49
Host A has been connected to a four port switch A on port G0/0/1and configured with an IP address.
When Host A initially forwards a frame, what action will be taken by Switch A?
A. Switch A will drop this frame.

B. Switch A will attempt to flood the frame to all ports except for the G0/0/1 interface.
C. Switch A will forward the frame via ports G0/0/1, G0/0/2 and G0/0/3.
D. Switch will receive this frame before returning the frame to G0/0/1.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 50
A server is linked to port interface G0/0/1 of a switch. The administrator wishes to allow only this server to be
linked to this interface on the switch.
Which method can be used to achieve this?
A. Configure a static ARP entry using the server’s IP address and MAC address in the switch.
B. Configure a static MAC address binding entry of the server’s MAC address and the interface in the switch.
C. Configure the default gateway of the switch to be the same as the server’s IP address.
D. It is not possible to enable a single device to be associated with an interface.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 51
An administrator connects two switches together in a local enterprise network. The ports of one switch support
Fast Ethernet, while the ports of the other switch support Gigabit Ethernet. Hosts connected to one switch are
able to communicate, however communication between the two switches fails.
What is the possible reason for this?

B. One port is supporting auto-negotiation, while auto-negotiation is disabled on the port of the other switch.
C. The port of one switch is operating using half duplex mode, while the port of the other switch is using full
duplex mode.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 52

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 53
Which of the following statements about collision domains and broadcast domains are correct? (Choose three)

Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 54
A. The switch learns MAC addresses automatically.

B. The layer-3 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted.
D. The layer-2 LAN switch operates at data link layer.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 55
Refer to the display output. What can be determined based on the output of the display command?
A. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is connected to a wrong cable

B. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with an IP address
C. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with a dynamically defined route.
D. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 has been manually shut down by an administrator.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 56
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 57
Which of the following are routed protocols? (Choose all that apply.)
A. IP
B. OSPF
C. BGP
D. IPX
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 58
Which of the following statements regarding the routing table are correct? (Choose all that apply.)
A. The next hop in the routing table is redundant because the outgoing interface can be used for packet
forwarding.
B. The routes from generated by different protocols have different preferences.
C. The metrics of different routing protocols are comparable.
D. The metrics of different routing protocols are not comparable
Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 59
Which of the following commands can be used to display the routing table on a Quidway router?
A. display ip path
B. display ip routing-table
C. display interface
D. display current-configuration
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 60
A. source address
B. next hop
D. cost
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 61
A. Slow convergence
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 62
An administrator wishes to manage the router in the remote branch office, which method can be used?
A. Telnet
B. FTP
C. Console Connection
D. DHCP
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 63
The administrator cannot use telnet to manage the AR2200. The administrator is able to verify connectivity to
the router and has been informed that other administrators have no difficulties using telnet.
Which statements describe the possible reasons for this problem? (Choose all that apply.)

B. The user’s privilege level has been changed to 0.
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 64
A user logged into a VRP supported device through telnet, but when attempting to configure the device, found
that he is unable to use the system-view command to enter the system-view.
What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose two)
A. The device’s VTY interface only provides permission for some telnet users to run the system-view
command.
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 65
The users who log on the router through Telnet are not permitted to configure IP address.
What is the possible reason?
A. Communication failures occur between the user and the router.

B. The authentication mode of Telnet is set incorrectly.
C. Privilege level of Telnet is set incorrectly.
D. SNMP parameters are set incorrectly.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 66

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 67
On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command “ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0” has been
configured.
Which following statements are correct? (Choose two).

Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 68
The host has a problem establishing a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0. Which of
the following steps can be used to help the administrator identify the problem? (Choose two)

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 69

B. Through Telnet
D. Through FTP
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 70
The administrator wishes to update the configuration file of an AR2200 router using a USB cable.
How can this be achieved? (Choose all that apply.)
A. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the mini USB port of the
AR2200 router.
B. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the USB port of the AR2200
router.
D. The administrator should install the mini USB drivers on the terminal after connecting the USB.
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 71
The administrator wishes to manage a network through telnet from a user's terminal to a router.
How can this be achieved?
A. A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the console port of the
router.
B. A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the ethernet port of the
router.
C. A connection should be established between the console port of the terminal and the ethernet port of the
router.use console cable connect pc’s ethernet port and router’s console port.
D. A connection should be established between the COM port of the terminal and the console port of the
router.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 72
Whilst configuring a device, an administrator experiences trouble remembering certain commands.
Which of the following will help support the administrator? (Choose two)
A. TAB
B. question mark
C. ctrl+b
D. ctrl+c
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 73
Refer to the configuration output. The administrator configured the device using the commands in the
configuration output. Regarding these commands, which statement is false?
A. The administrator wishes to enable management through the console interface.

B. Following configuration, the administrator cannot manage the device remotely.
C. A user that logs-in through the console interface is assigned the highest privilege level.
D. The password of a user logged in through console is ‘cipher huawei2012’.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 74
Which of the following is abbreviation of VRP?

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 75
Which of the following must be used to establish the configuration environment when a router is powered on
for the first time?
A. SSL
B. SSH
C. Console port
D. Telnet
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 76
Which of the following parameter settings for terminal emulation are correct when configuring a Huawei router
through the Console port?
A. 4800bps, 8 data bits,1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no flow control
B. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control
C. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware flow control
D. 19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 77
Which of the following commands is used to enter the system-view from the user view on a Huawei router?
A. system-view
B. enable
C. configure terminal
D. interface system
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 78
On VRP platform, the command lines are classified into four levels in increasing priority: Visit level, Monitoring
level, Configuration level, and Management level. At which level, the operator is permitted to configure service
but is not permitted to operate the file system?
A. Visit level
B. Monitoring level
D. Management level
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 79
On Huawei VRP platform, which of the following can be used to invoke the history command saved by the
command line interface? (Choose two)

C. Ctrl+P
D. Ctrl+U
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 80
Which of the following commands can be used to view the current configurations on a Huawei router?
B. display saved-configuration
C. view saved-configuration
D. show startup-configuration
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 81
The administrator wishes to change name of the router. Under which view should the administrator be in order
to achieve this?
A. User-view
B. System-view
C. Interface-view
D. Protocol-view
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 82
Refer to the command output. What is the result of the shown command?

C. The command adjusts the user view command privilege level to 3, and saves the configuration.
D. The command adjusts the privilege level of a user to 3, and saves the configuration.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 83
<Huawei>system-view
A. The command is used to adjust the size of the history command buffer.
D. Once configured, commands totaling up to 20 bytes can be saved in the buffer.
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 84
A. Reset the saved configuration.

B. Clear the current configuration.
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 85
An administrator has been requested to replace the configuration file of a router in the network. The
administrator has been instructed that after logging into the router, he must first permanently erase the current
configuration file config.zip from the system.
Which command should he use to achieve this?

C. reset config.zip
D. clear config.zip
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 86
A. System-view
B. Router
C. Quit
D. User-view
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 87
Which of the following storage devices are supported by Huawei router? (Select four)
A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. Hard Disk
E. CF Card
Correct Answer: ABCE

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 88
A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. BootROM
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 89
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 90
When a router is powered on, the router reads the configuration file saved in the default save directory to get
itself initialized. If the configuration file does not exist in the default save directory, what does the router use to
initialize itself?
A. New configuration file

B. Initial configuration file
C. Default parameters
D. Current configuration file
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 91

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 92
<Huawei>
Auto-Config? [y/n]:
When an administrator first initializes the router, a warning is displayed. Which statement regarding this
warning is correct?
A. If Auto-Config is required, the administrator should select ‘y’.

B. If Auto-Config is not required, the administrator should select ‘n’, for which subsequent configuration of the
DHCP server, routing, DNS server and VTY user configuration is lost.
C. When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is active.
D. When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is inactive.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 93
An AR2200 router in the company network cannot boot. In order to resolve this, the administrator wishes to
update the VRP software.
What should he/she do?
A. The administrator should use a console cable to connect the router and host, and directly upgrade the
device.
B. The administrator should use FTP to transfer the VRP software, by configuring the AR2200 router as an
FTP client.
C. The administrator should use DHCP to boot the AR2200, and then use the AR2200 router as a TFTP client
to download the VRP software from the server.
D. The administrator should use the telnet command on the client to remote access the device, and upgrade
the VRP software.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 94
<Huawei>
Auto-Config? [y/n]:
Refer to the output. When the administrator first starts the router, a system notice is displayed, however after
rebooting this router, the notice disappeared. What is the reason for this? (Choose all that apply.)
B. The administrator has configured the device and saved the configuration, causing the notice to disappear.
C. The administrator selected ‘n’ and did not save the configuration.
Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 95
An end system is unable to communicate with a DHCP server following the startup process.
Which IP address may be used by the client?
A. 0.0.0.0
B. 127.0.0.1
C. 169.254.2.33
D. 255.255.255.255
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 96
Refer to the configuration output. The administrator wishes to configure the DHCP server pool in order to
assign an IP address to the customer’s terminal device.
Which command should be included in the configuration to provide the minimal lease period for IP addresses?

B. lease day 1
C. lease 24
D. lease 0
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 97
A DHCP server has been established in the enterprise network. After the client has obtained an IP address
from the DHCP server, the user decided to modify the IP address manually.
In what way may this affect the enterprise network? (Choose two).

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 98
A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An administrator
discovers however that some hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the DHCP server’s
address pool.
What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose three).
A. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is allocating IP addresses to hosts that happen to be within
a closer proximity than the authorized DHCP server.
D. All addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned.
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 99
Refer to the configuration output. Following configuration, a host is connected to the interface Gigabit Ethernet
0/0/1 of the router. Which IP address will the client obtain?

Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 100
The IP addresses of clients in the network are deployed via a DHCP server. When a host reboots, which
message will the host first send to the DHCP server?
A. DHCP DISCOVER
B. DHCP REQUEST
C. DHCP OFFER
D. DHCP ACK
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 101
A DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) in DHCPv6 can be configured in VRP using which formats? (Choose two).
A. DUID-LL
B. DUID-LLT
C. DUID-EN
D. DUID-LLC
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 102
Which of the following statements about the information contained in a Database Description packet are true?
(Choose three)

Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 103
A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 104
How many domains can be configured on a Huawei router?
A. 30
B. 31
C. 32
D. 33
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 105
An authenticator router has been configured with two domains named “Area1” and “Area2”, following which a
user is created with the username “huawei” and the password ”hello” for authentication. Which domain does
this user belongs to?
A. Area1 domain
B. Area2 domain
C. default domain
D. default_admin domain
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 106

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 107
How is mapping performed on a DTE device in a Frame Relay network?
A. The local DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

B. The local IP address is mapped to a remote DLCI number.
C. The local DLCI number is mapped to a local IP address.
D. The remote DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 108
A. LMI protocol
B. ARP protocol
C. RARP protocol
D. InARP protocol
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 109
addresses?
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 110
A. ARP protocol
B. RARP protocol
C. InARP protocol
D. Map protocol
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 111
A. Local DLCI
B. Remote DLCI
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 112

Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 113
Which of the following commands is used to enable dynamic address mapping protocol in the interface
encapsulated with Frame Relay?
A. fr inarp
B. fr reverse-arp
C. inverse-arp
D. reverse-arp
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 114

B. local DLCI
D. remote node ID
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 115
Which of the following commands can be used to display mapping relationship between network address and
DLCI?
B. display fr
D. display fr brief
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 116

Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 117
An administrator wishes to update the VRP software of company’s AR2200 router. How can this be achieved?
(Choose three)
C. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP server.
D. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP client.
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 118
An administrator wishes to implement new features in the network, but the VRP version of one AR2200 router
is out of date. The administrator needs to upgrade the VRP software.
Which of the following options regarding file transfer is false?
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 119
FTP and TFTP can be used to update the system file on Huawei routers. Which of the following statements are
correct? (Choose three)
A. Huawei router can be configured as FTP Client

B. Huawei router can be configured as FTP Server
C. Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Client
D. Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Server
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 120
An administrator discovered he/she was unable to use TFTP to transfer files to the router.
Which of the following describes the likely reason for this?

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 121
FTP may be used to upgrade a router's VRP image.
Which of the following transmission modes should be used to achieve this?
A. binary mode
B. ASCII mode
C. byte mode
D. letter mode
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 122
A client failed to transfer a file to the FTP server, but found the IP connectivity was without problem. The client
assumed that the problem was with the port configuration.
The blocking of which ports would likely cause this problem? (Choose two)
A. 21
B. 80
C. 20
D. 50649
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 123
When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the data link layer encapsulation type
of a serial interface as HDLC?
C. hdlc enable
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 124
If AH and ESP are both required to protect data streams between IPsec peers, how many Security
Associations (SA) are required in total?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 125
Two routers establish an IPsec tunnel, which of the following does not need to be the same on both peering
devices?
A. Encapsulation mode
B. Transform mode
C. Proposal name
D. authentication algorithm
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 126
2031:0000:720C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:130B? (Choose two).
A. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E0:839A:130B
B. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B
C. 2031::720C::9E0:839A:130B
D. 2031:0:720C::9E0:839A:130B
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 127
A. fe80:13dc::1/64
B. ff00:8a3c::9b/64
C. ::1/128
D. 2001:12e3:1b02::21/64
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 128
The IPv6 address architecture does not include which of the following address types?
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 129

Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 130
Interface G0/0/1 on RTA contains a MAC address of 00e0-fc03-aa73 and is configured with the IPv6 address
2001::2E0:FCFF:FE03:AA73. Which method is most likely to have been used to configure the interface IPv6
address?
A. DHCPv6
B. Auto-link
C. ARP
D. EUI-64
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 131
In a small network supporting IPv6, a network administrator wishes implement RIPng.
Which of the following commands should be used to enable this protocol?
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 132
A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentication
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 133
The network administrator has decided to configure link aggregation in the enterprise network.
Which of the following represent advantages of link aggregation? (Choose three)
A. Load balancing.
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 134
In port aggregation, “multiple” ports are aggregated to form a port aggregation group so that all the member
ports in the group share the outgoing/incoming load.
At which layer is port aggregation implemented?
A. Physical Layer
B. Data Link Layer
C. Network Layer
D. Transport Layer
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 135
What benefits does port aggregation yield? (Choose three)
A. Improves link bandwidth

B. Implements load sharing
C. Improves network reliability
D. Facilitates data copy for analysis
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 136
What is the maximum number of member interfaces supported by a single Eth-Trunk?
A. 6
B. 8
C. 10
D. 12
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 137
The Eth-Trunk frame forwarding mechanism used to prevent changes in the data sequence forwards frames
based on which of the following parameters?
A. The same source or destination IP address.

Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 138

Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 139
The network administrator wishes to forward data over an Eth-trunk, however associated member interfaces
operate at different rates. In terms of the resulting behavior, which of the following is true?
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 140
The network administrator attempts to add interface G0/0/1 on Switch A to Eth-trunk 1, however the command
fails.
Which of the following may cause this?

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 141
A network requires a solution to allow 50 private IP addresses to be translated, however only a single public
address is available for use.
Which translation method can be used to support this requirement?
A. Static NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 142
NAPT allows for multiple internal addresses to be mapped to a single public address.
How does NAT distinguish between the different private addresses when mapping to the same public address?
A. The source MAC address is used.

B. The destination MAC address is used.
C. The source port number is used.
D. The destination port number is used.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 143
administrator is required to configure NAT on RTA.
Which configuration should be used?
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 144
The network administrator needs to configure static NAT on RTA, in order to allow Host A to communicate with
Host C.
Which command is correct?
A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat outbound 200.1.1.10

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.0
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 192.168.1.1 inside 200.1.1.10
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.1
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 145
[RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]nat outbound 2000 address-group 1
Refer to the configuration output. What does the value “2000” refer to?
A. It represents the ACL number.

B. It represents the NAT number.
C. It represents the translated port number.
D. It represents the number of bytes that can be translated before the address is returned to the public
address pool.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 146
NAPT uses the same public address but different port numbers to translate private addresses.
Which statement regarding the port number is correct?
A. It is necessary to configure port number mapping manually.
B. It is only necessary to configure the port number range.
C. It is not necessary to configure port numbers.
D. An access control list is needed to assign port numbers.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 147
A configured internal host of a private network wishes to access the internet. What must be configured on the
enterprise network egress router in order to achieve this? (Choose all that apply.)
A. NAT Easy IP
B. DHCP
C. BGP
D. Default route
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 148
Which of the following statements are correct about NAT? (Choose three)
A. NAT is the abbreviation for "Network Address Translation".

B. NAT is used for translation between private and public network addresss.
C. When hosts inside a private network access the outside network, NAT is not required.
D. NAT provides an effective way to solve the problem of insufficient IP addresses.
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 149
A. Static route
B. Dynamic route
C. Route import
D. NAT
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 150
Which of the following items can be translated by NAPT?

C. Only MAC address
D. Only IP address
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 151
three)

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 152
Which of the following statements regarding the router ID in OSPF are incorrect? (Choose three)
A. The router IDs of OSPF routers in the same area must be the same, but can be different in different areas.
B. The router ID must be the IP address of an OSPF router interface.
C. The router ID must be configured manually.
D. A router running OSPF must have a router ID for it to operate properly.
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 153

Correct Answer: ACD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 154
1.1.1.1?
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 155
A. OSPFv1
B. OSPFv2
C. OSPFv3
D. OSPFv4
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 156
The administrator wishes to configure OSPF on a router in the network however the router has no loopback
interface.
Which value will be used as the router ID?

C. The IP address of the management interface.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 157
An administrator of a company supporting a large enterprise network wishes to implement OSPF on the
network as opposed to RIP. Which of the following points should the administrator use to support his reasoning
for this change? (Choose three)
A. OSPF has no hop count limitation.

B. OSPF has a lower routing update overhead.
C. OSPF has a simpler configuration.
D. OSPF supports faster convergence.
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 158
Which of the following statements regarding single area OSPF are correct? (Choose three)
A. An IP address needs to be configured on a loopback interface of each router before configuring an OSPF
area.
B. The value of an area can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
C. A single area can be configured using any supported area number.
D. All of the links of the network need to be advertised in Area 0.
Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 159
10.0.1.0/24 O_ASE 150 2 D 10.0.23.3 Serial2/0/0
Refer to the display output. Which of the following statements regarding route shown are true? (Choose two)
A. The address 10.0.23.3 has been configured on the peer’s serial 2/0/0 interface.
B. The route preference has been changed by the administrator.
C. The metric for the route 10.0.1.0 indicates that two hops are needed.
D. The route has been learned via the OSPF protocol.
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 160
Which of the following statements regarding link-state database and routing-table of a “single” OSPF area are
correct? (Choose two)
B. The link-state databases that all routers build are different.
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 161
Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 162

D. Only NBMA or Broadcast networks need to elect DR.
Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 163
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 164
Which of the following commands is used to display the OSPF neighbor relationship establishment?

Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 165
With what kind of routers does a DRother router exchange link state information and route information?
(Choose two)
A. DR
B. BDR
C. DRother
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 166
A. neighbors
B. LSDB
C. LSA
D. adjacency
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 167
Which of the following statements about router IDs are true? (Choose two)
A. The routers contained in the same LSDB have the same router ID.
B. Each router in an OSPF network must have a unique router ID.
C. Two routers in different OSPF areas can have the same router ID.
D. A router ID is expressed in a 32-bit dotted decimal format.
Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 168
A. 0
B. 1
C. 10
D. 100
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 169
A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentication
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 170
Two routers are configured with OSPFv3. OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces of each router.
Which of the following is true in the event that the network administrator does not configure a Router-ID?
A. The IP address of the loopback 0 interface will be used as the router ID.
B. The IP address of the loopback 1 interface will be used as the router ID.
C. The IP address of interface G0/0/0 will be used as the router ID.
D. No router ID will be assigned to the router.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 171
Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements is correct when this router forwards the packet to the
destination host 9.1.4.5?
A. The router selects the first entry to match the destination address of the packet because the preference of
OSPF is higher than the preference of RIP.
B. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the cost of RIP
is lower than that of OSPF.
C. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the outgoing
interface is an Ethernet interface. The forwarding speed of an Ethernet interface is faster than the
forwarding speed of a serial interface
D. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the router will
match the most specific address.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 172
According to the default value of route preference on the VRP platform, which of the following represent the
correct sequence for direct route, static route, RIP and OSPF if they are listed from high preference to low
preference?

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 173
A router has learned two routes for the same network with the same prefix. One route has been learned via
OSPF with a metric of 4882, while the other route has been learned via RIPv2 with a metric of 4.
Which route (s) will be found in the routing table?
A. The RIPv2 route.

B. The OSPF and RIPv2 routes.
C. The OSPF route.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 174
Assume that the router has learnt the best route to the same destination by using RIP, OSPF and Static Route
respectively. By default, the Huawei router will select the route learnt via ( ) as the best route.
A. RIP
B. OSPF
C. RIPv2
D. Static route
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 175
TWOWAY state with the peering router.
What can be understood from this information? (Choose two)

Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 176
What functions does a Hello packet of OSPF implement? (Choose two)
A. Neighbor discovery
B. Deletion of unreachable neighbors
C. Maintaining of neighbor relationships
D. Negotiation of parameters among adjacent ports
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 177
Two routers are connected through serial interfaces and support PPP encapsulation.
Which parameters must be negotiated to establish the PPP connection? (Choose three).
A. MRU
C. Magic-Number
D. IP address
Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 178
What are the three protocol components defined by PPP? (Choose three).
A. Data encapsulation.
B. LCP
C. NCP
D. IPCP
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 179
Two routers are connected via serial interfaces, for which the link-protocol is PPP. The network administrator
wishes to configure PPP authentication to improve security on this link.
Which PPP authentication method provides a more secure solution?
A. CHAP
B. PAP
C. MD5
D. SSH
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 180
If PPP authentication fails, which type of packet will be sent to the authenticated peer by the authenticator?
A. Authenticate-Ack
B. Authenticate-Nak
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 181
interfaces are different, in PPP LCP negotiated stage, what will happen?

Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 182
PPP is more secure than HDLC because PPP supports authentication protocols such as ( ). (Choose two)
A. PAP
B. MD5
C. CHAP
D. SSH
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 183
When both ends running PPP protocol detect that the physical link is active, the link state will transit from dead
to establish.
Which of the following protocols is used to negotiate the link parameters during this phase?
A. IP
B. DHCP
C. LCP
D. NCP
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 184
A serial interface of a Huawei router currently using HDLC needs to assign PPP as the encapsulation protocol.
C. enable ppp
D. address ppp
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 185
When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the PPP authentication method as
PAP?
A. ppp pap
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 186
When configuring the PPP authentication method as PAP, which of the following operations are necessary?
(Choose three)
A. Add the user name and password of the authenticated party to the local user list.
B. Configure the encapsulation type of the interface connected to the peer as PPP.
C. Configure PPP authentication method as CHAP.
D. On the authenticated party end, configure the user name and password that are sent to authenticator.
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 187
A. DES
B. MD5
C. AES
D. None
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 188
What is the function of the “ip address ppp-negotiate” command?
A. Enables the function of requesting for an IP address from the peer device.
B. Enables the function of accepting the request for an IP address from the remote device.
C. Enables the function of statically allocating IP addresses to the peer.
D. None of the above.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 189
Two routers have established a point-to-point network using PPP. The administrator has configured the routers
to run OSPF in the same area with the same router ID, what behavior will occur as a result of the
configuration?
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 190
The PPPoE session establishment process can be divided into which stages? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Discovery stage
B. DHCP stage
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 191
connections with multiple PPPoE clients on one Ethernet port.
How does PPPoE differentiate between each connection?
A. MAC address.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 192
When configuring a router as a PPPoE client, which configuration is not necessary?
A. Configuration of the dialer-rule

B. Configuration of the dialer interface
C. Configuration of an IP address on the dialer interface
D. Configuration of a password on the dialer interface
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 193
In the PPPoE discovery stage, the PPPoE server assigns a session-id to the PPPoE client in which packet?
A. PADI
B. PADO
C. PADR
D. PADS
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 194
Which command can be used to check the PPPoE client session status?

B. display current-configuration
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 195
[Huawei]rip 1

B. network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
D. network 192.168.1.0
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 196
A RIP router receives the routing update information from its neighbor.
Which of the following statements regarding routing update are correct? (Choose three)
A. The received route that is not in the routing table will be added only when its hop count value is less than
16.
B. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is the
C. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is not the
D. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is the
router's neighbor and the cost value has been changed.
Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 197

B. show rip
C. display rip
D. display this rip
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 198
A user can view the information for the RIP protocol on a router. What does “Age time” in the returned result of
the command mean?
A. The interval of updating an RIP packet

B. The aging time of an RIP route
C. The suppression time of an RIP route
D. The time spent on switching between RIP routes
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 199
After a command for displaying RIP route information is entered on a router, peer 192.168.1.2 on Serial1/0/0 is
displayed in the returned result.
What does 192.168.1.2 stand for?
A. Address of a RIP neighbor

B. Address of the port with the RIP protocol enabled
C. Next hop address of the RIP route
D. Transmission address of the RIP protocol
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 200
Refer to the debug output. Following configuration of R2, the administrator discovers that the behavior is not as
expected and performs debugging. Based on the output from the debug, what is the source of the problem?

Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 201
three)

Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 202
When a network administrator configures STP in the network, BPDU begin to be sent by switch. Which of the
following statements regarding the BPDU frame are correct?
A. A BPDU uses the IEEE 802.3 standard frame type

B. A BPDU uses the Ethernet II standard frame type
C. The BPDU frame’s control field is 3
D. The destination MAC address field of a BPDU frame is a broadcast address
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 203
In the case of Huawei router, the Tracert command uses UDP to encapsulate probe packets.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 204
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 205
A network administrator wishes to assign an IP address to a router interface G0/0/0. Which of the following IP
addresses can be assigned?
A. 192.168.10.112/30
B. 237.6.1.2/24
C. 145.4.2.55/26
D. 127.3.1.4/28
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 206
If a network’s address is 192.168.1.0, the broadcast address of the network is 192.168.1.255.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 207
In the VRP system, what are the functions of Ctrl+Z?
A. Return from the system view to the user view

B. Exit from the current view
C. Exit from the interface view
D. Exit from the console interface view
E. Return to the user view
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 208
In standard STP mode, which of the following ports on non-root switches forward the BPDUs with TC bits set
generated by the root switch?
A. Root port
B. Backup port
C. Designated port
D. Alternate port
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 209
Assuming all STP enabled switches have the same bridge priority. The MAC address of switch A is 00-e0-fc-
00-00-40, the MAC address of switch B is 00-e0-fc-00-00-10, the MAC address of switch C is 00-e0-fc-00-00-
20, and the MAC address of switch D is 00-e0-fc-00-00-80.
Which switch will be elected as the root switch?
A. Switch A
B. Switch B
C. Switch C
D. Switch D
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 210
As specified by the RSTP protocol, when a root port fails, which type of port will function as a new root port and
enters the forwarding state without any delay?
A. Forwarding Port
B. Alternate Port
C. Backup Port
D. Edge Port
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 211
In STP, the priority of the STP root switch ranges from 0 to 65536.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 212
Refer to the graphic. Which statements correctly explains the forwarding behavior between RTA and RTE?
(Choose all that apply)
B. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0
C. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path from via E0/0/1
D. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S2/0/0
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 213
Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are running RIPv1. RTA has advertised 10.0.0.0 and 192.168.1.0 to the
RIP network. Which routes will exist in the IP routing table of RTB? (Choose all that apply)
A. 10.0.0.0/8
B. 192.168.1.1/32
C. 10.1.12.1/32
D. 192.168.1.0/24
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 214
Which of the following configurations regarding static route are correct? (Choose all that apply)
A. ip route-static 129.1.0.0 16 serial 0

B. ip route-static 10.0.0.2 16 129.1.0.0
C. ip route-static 129.1.0.0 16 10.0.0.2
D. ip route-static 129.1.0.0.255.255.0.0 10.0.0.2
Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 215
Refer to the graphic. An administrator has configured RIPv2 in the two routers. What will happen after
configuring the following commands: (Choose all that apply)
A. RTA will have the route learned from the RTB

B. RTB will have the route learned from the RTA
D. RTB will have no neighbor relationship with RTA
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 216
Refer to the graphic. OSPF is used on four routers that are in the same area and on the same network
segment. In this scenario, OSPF selects one DR and multiple BDRs to ensure backup.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 217
On Huawei devices, you can use the undo summary command to prohibit automatic route summarization of
RIPv2.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 218
Which of the following configurations regarding default route configuration is correct?
A. [Quidway] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1

B. [Quidway] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 172.16.2.1
C. [Quidway-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1
D. [Quidway] ip route static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 219
Which of the following WLAN standards support operation in the 5GHz range? (Choose all that apply)
A. 802.11a
B. 802.11b
C. 802.11g
D. 802.11n
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 220
On Huawei switches, you can run the vlan batch command to create multiple VLANs in batches.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 221
According to the topology and configuration of interconnected interfaces of switches shown in the figure, the
data frame tagged with VLAN 10 can be forwarded correctly between the two switches.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 222
The network administrator creates VLAN 10 and assigns an IP address to VLANIF10. When using the
command “display ip interface brief”, the administrator finds that VLANIF10 is down. What should be done to
enable VLANIF10?
A. Use the command “undo shutdown” under the interface view for VLANIF10
B. Assign a physical interface that has either an active of inactive physical state to VLAN 10
C. Assign only a physical interface that has an active physical state to VLAN 10
D. Add an interface that has an active physical state and a trunk port associated with VLAN 10
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 223
A network administrator wishes to implement VLAN 10 to isolate certain users. It is common however for these
users to often change their physical location. Which of the following VLAN implementations should be used?
A. Port based VLAN assignment

B. Protocol based VLAN assignment
C. MAC based VLAN assignment
D. IP subnet based VLAN assignment
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 224
Refer to the graphic. GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 on the switch are configured as hybrid interfaces. Which of the
following statements are true? (Choose all that apply)
A. The administrative department and the finance department cannot communicate with each other because
the VLANs of the two departments are different.
B. The data frames sent by the administrative department carry tagged VLAN 20 on the switch.
C. On the switch, the data frames sent by the finance department carry tagged VLAN 20.
D. The switch can be a Layer 2 or Layer 3 switch because communications do not need to be transmitted
through a Layer 3 gateway.
E. If GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 on the switch are changed to trunk ports, the administrative department and
finance department can communicate with each other.
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 225
On the VRP, what is the function of the “interface vlanif <vlan-id>” command?
A. It is used to create a VLANIF interface

B. It is used to create a VLANIF interface and enter the VLANIF interface view
C. It is used to configure a VLAN for a VLANIF interface
D. There is no such command
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 226
InARP resolves the protocol address of the remote device on each virtual circuit, including IP addresses and
IPX addresses.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 227
On an FR network, the DLCI identifies a virtual circuit on an interface. The DLCI must be unique during
planning and deployment.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 228
If AAA authentication is used on Huawei devices and the remote server does not respond, the authentication
can be performed on network devices.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 229
An ACL does not filter traffic generated by the Huawei device towards other devices, but only filters forwarded
traffic, including traffic generated by other devices to access the Huawei device.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 230
Which of the following statements are true about ACL deployment on Huawei devices? (Choose all that apply)
A. ACL can only be used in the outbound direction of an interface

B. The same ACL can be used on multiple interfaces
C. The ACL rules can only be configured in the following sequence: 10, 20, 30…
D. ACLs cannot be used to filter OSPF traffic because OSPF does not use UDP to encapsulate packets
E. ACLs can be used to match with the TCP/UDP port IDs of packets and to designate the port ID range
Correct Answer: BE
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 231
SNMP packets are encapsulated in TCP packets.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 232
In OSPFv3, router IDs can be used automatically generated by the system.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 233
VLSM can expand any IP network segment, including Class D addresses.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 234
Refer to the graphic, 00e0-fc99-9999 is a specific host MAC address learned by a switch through ARP and the
host changes the IP address three times.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 235
There are two routers (RTA and RTB) between the source device and destination device. The Tracert
command is used to detect the path between the two devices. During detection of the first hop (RTA), the
source device sends a UDP packet with a TTL of 1 to an interface with a large interface number on the
destination device. The TTL turns to 0 when the packet arrives at RTB, upon which RTA sends an ICMP
message to the source device.
A. Time Exceeded.
B. Echo Request.
C. Echo Reply.
D. Port Unreachable.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 236
Which of the following statements are true about ICMP messages? (Multiple Choice)
A. ICMP messages can record time, including the original time, packet receiving time, and packet sending
time.
B. ICMP messages are encapsulated in IP packets but not at the transport layer.
C. ICMP messages include error messages, control messages, request/response messages, and update
messages.
D. ICMP does not support redirection.
E. ICMP messages cannot be used to detect a path’s MTU.
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 237
If a network’s broadcast address is 172.16.1.255, which of the following addresses can be the network
address?
A. 172.16.2.0
B. 172.16.1.253
C. 172.16.1.128
D. 172.16.1.1
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 238
On the command line interface of Huawei AR routers, the role of the Save command is to Save the current
system time.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 239
Which of the following technologies is used to bind MAC addresses to interfaces on a switch?
A. SEP.
B. Port security.
C. ACL.
D. NAT.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 240
In RSTP, a backup port can replace a faulty root port.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 241
During STP calculation, the port cost is associated with port bandwidth. Which of the following statements
about the relation between port cost and port bandwidth is true?
A. Port cost decreases when port bandwidth increases.

B. Port cost increases when port bandwidth increases.
C. Port cost is consistent with port bandwidth.
D. Port cost varies randomly according to port bandwidth.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 242
Which of the following descriptions about STP are incorrect? (Multiple Choice)
A. A layer-2 switching network can have only one designated switch.

B. All the ports of the root switch are root ports.
C. All the ports of the root switch are designated ports.
D. The switch with the smallest priority value is elected as non-root switch.
Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 243
Which of the following statements about static route preference on Huawei devices is false?
A. Static route preference ranges from 0 to 255.

B. Default static route preference is 60.
C. Static route preference is either internal or external. Administrators can modify external preferences.
D. If static route preference is 255, the route cannot be used.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 244
Refer to the graphic, which of the following statements is true about OSPF topology and configuration?
A. A stable OSPF neighbor relationship can be set up between R1 and R2.

B. After the default network type of the interface on R1 is restored to broadcast, a stable OSPF neighbor
relationship can be set up between R1 and R2.
C. After the default network type of the interface on R1 is restored to broadcast and the hello packet sending
interval is changed to 10s, a stable OSPF neighbor relationship can be set up between R1 and R2.
D. Compared with R1, R2 is more likely to become the DR because the DR priority of the interface on R2 is
lower than that of R1.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 245
implements the command silent-interface s0/0/1 on RTA. What effect will this command have on the network?
(Multiple Choice)
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 246
In an RIP process on a Huawei device, which of the following configurations are correct for advertising network
10.1.1.1/30? (Multiple Choice)
A. network 10.1.1.0
B. undo summary
network 10.1.1.0
C. version 2
undo summary
network 10.0.0.0
D. undo summary
network 10.1.0.0
E. network 10.0.0.0
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 247
The following configuration commands implement route backup on RTA for a route to the same destination
10.1.1.0.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 248
Refer to the command output. Which statement is true regarding this command?
A. The configuration represents a static route to the 192.168.1.1 network

B. The configuration represents a static route to the 10.0.12.0 network.
C. The preference value of this configured route is 100.
D. If the router has learned the same destination network via a dynamic routing protocol, the static route will
always take precedence.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 249
Which of the following network types does OSPF support? (Multiple Choice)
A. Point-to-Point.
B. Broadcast.
C. Non-Broadcast Multi-Access.
D. Point-to-Multipoint.
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 250
A DHCP Offer packet can carry only one DNS server address.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 251
Refer to the graphic. Host A and Host B use VLAN routing to facilitate communication. What must be
configured on interface G0/0/1.1 of RTA to achieve this?
A. dot1q termination vid 1.
B. dot1q termination vid 10.
C. dot1q termination vid 20.
D. dot1q termination vid 30.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 252
Refer to the configuration output. Which following statements are correct? (Multiple choice)
A. VLAN 1 cannot pass over interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1.

B. VLAN 1 can pass over interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1.
C. Prior to changing the link-type to access, the command “undo port trunk allow-pass vlan all” must be used
to renew the default configurations.
D. Prior to changing the link-type to access, the command “undo port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 to 4096” must be
used to renew the default configurations.
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 253
Link aggregation is a common technique in enterprise network. Which of the following description is the
advantages of link aggregation? (Multiple Choice)
A. Improves link bandwidth.

B. Implements load sharing.
C. Improves network reliability.
D. Facilitates data copy for analysis.
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 254
On Huawei switches, VLAN 4095 cannot be created and VLAN 1 cannot be deleted.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 255
Refer to the graphic, after the ping 10.1.1.2 command is executed on R1, LSW1 receives a tagged data frame
from VLAN 10 on LSW2.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 256
Refer to the graphic, which of the following statements are true about VLAN configuration on Huawei switches?
(Multiple Choice)
A. Client1 belongs to VLAN 10 and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
B. Client2 belongs to VLAN 20, and the MAC address-based VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is
correct.
C. Client3 is in VLAN 30, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
D. Client4 belongs to VLAN 40, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
E. Client4 does not belong to VLAN 40, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is incorrect.
Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 257
Which of the following statements is true about the PPP configuration and deployment?

B. PPP supports both CHAP and PAP authentication.
C. PPP cannot change the keepalive time.
D. PPP does not support bidirectional authentication.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 258
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 259
A. TCP, Data and ESP Trailer.

B. ESP, TCP and Data.
C. ESP, TCP, Data and ESP Trailer.
D. ESP, TCP, Data, ESP Trailer and ESP Auth.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 260
The authentication, authorization and accounting schemes and HWTACACS or RADIUS server templates
created on AR routers take effect only after being applied to a domain.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 261
Which SNMP version focuses on two main aspects, namely security and administration. The security aspect is
addressed by offering both strong authentication and data encryption for privacy. The administration aspect is
focused on two parts, namely notification originators and proxy forwarders.
A. SNMPv1
B. SNMPv2
C. SNMPv2c
D. SNMPv3
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 262
Which of the following route entries can be aggregated into 10.0.0.24/29? (Choose all that apply.)
A. 10.0.0.25/30
B. 10.0.0.23/30
C. 10.0.0.26/30
D. 10.0.0.22/30
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 263
According to the configuration of single-armed routing in the following figure, the administrative department and
finance department can communicate with each other even the proxy ARP is disabled on the subinterface on
R1.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 264
In the private network, RTA dynamically assigns a public address from the address pool to hosts
without port translation. Host C wishes to access the public network while addresses are assigned to Host A
and Host B. What will occur as a result?
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 265
After the keepalive function is enabled for a GRE tunnel, the local end of the GRE tunnel sends a keepalive
packet to the remote end every 10s.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 266
Both switches are operating using STP. With exception to those shown, all other default parameters have been
maintained. Which port will be blocked?
A. Port G0/0/1 of switch A.

B. Port G0/0/2 of switch B.
C. Port G0/0/1 of switch B.
D. Port G0/0/2 of switch A.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 267
Layer 2 switches are data link layer devices that identify MAC addresses of Layer 2 data frames and forward
Layer 2 data frames based on MAC addresses. In addition, they record mappings between MAC addresses
and interfaces in the MAC address table.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 268
In RSTP mode, both alternate and backup ports cannot forward user traffic but can receive, process, and send
BPDU.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 269
The switch is operating using STP. All default parameters have been maintained. Which port will be assigned a
designated port role?
A. G0/0/1 of switch A.
B. G0/0/2 of switch A.
C. E0/0/1 of the hub.
D. E0/0/2 of the hub.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 270
How can the default route be generated? (Choose all that apply.)
D. Generated by link layer protocols.
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 271
The following figure shows a routing table. When this router receives a packet with a destination IP address of
9.1.1.1, the router forwards the packet based on the route 9.1.0.0/16 because the matched bit number in this
route is the largest.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 272
The routing table includes direct routes and static routes and the preference of the direct routes cannot be
changed.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 273
Host A and Host B use VLAN routing to facilitate communication. When interface G0/0/1.2 of RTA receives a
frame from Host B, what will RTA do?
A. RTA will immediately forward the frame via interface G0/0/1.1.

B. RTA remove the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame.
C. RTA will remove the VLAN tag and add a new tag for VLAN10 before forwarding the frame.
D. RTA will discard the frame.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 274
Refer to the configuration output.
Which of the following statements regarding the configuration output are correct? (Choose all that apply.)
A. The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is 10.

B. The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is 1.
C. The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 is 10.
D. The PVID on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 is 1.
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 275
VLANs 10 and 20 have been created on both SWA and SWC. VLAN 10 has been manually created on SWB.
SWB has learned VLAN 20 from SWA via GVRP, allowing the hosts to belong to different VLANs as shown. If
port Interface G0/0/1 on SWB is changed to fixed mode, what will happen?
A. Host A will still be able to communicate with Host C.

B. Host B will still be able to communicate with Host D.
C. Hosts that belong to the same VLAN will still be able to communicate.
D. All hosts will be unable to communicate with any other host.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 276
On Sx7 series switches, which of the following VLANs can be removed by using command “undo”? (Choose all
that apply.)
A. vlan 1.
B. vlan 2.
C. vlan 1024.
D. vlan 4094.
Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 277
administrator is required to configure NAT on RTA. Which configuration should be used?
A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www.inside 192.168.1.1 8080

B. [RTA-Serial0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www.inside 202.10.10.1 8080
C. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www.inside 192.168.1.1 8080
D. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www.inside 202.10.10.1 8080
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 278
On an FR network, when the fr inarp command is executed, the interface where static address mapping entries
have been configured sends an Inverse ARP Request packet to the remote device to replace the static
address mapping entries.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 279
According to the configuration on R1 shown in the following figure, the two PCs can correctly access the ISP
network.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 280
Which of the following fields are contained in an ARP packet?

B. Hardware Type
C. Source Protocol Address
D. Operation Code
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 281
Which of the following can be displayed on the Versatile Routing Platform (VRP) to indicate that GE port 2 on
subcard 0 in slot 3 of a router?
A. interface GigabitEthernet 3/2/0

B. interface GigabitEthernet 3/0/2
C. interface Ethernet 3/0/2
D. interface XGigabitEthernet 3/0/2
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 282
You can run the “startup saved-configuration backup.cfg” command on the user interface of the Versatile
Routing Platform (VRP) to specify the “backup.cfg” file as the configuration file for next startup.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 283
When a network engineer enters a command, the following information is displayed:
Error: Unrecognized command found at '^' position. Which of the following statements is true about such
information?
A. The parameter type is incorrect.

B. The entered command is incomplete.
C. The entered parameter is not specified.
D. No keyword is found.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 284
In RSTP mode, interfaces in the Discarding state discard received data frames but maintain the MAC address
table based on received data frames.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 285
Which of the following statements is true about the MAC address table of a switch?
A. The MAC address 5489-9811-0b49 is manually configured by the administrator.

B. The MAC address 5489-989d-1d30 is manually configured by the administrator.
C. The MAC address 5489-9885-18a8 is manually configured by the administrator.
D. After the switch restarts, all the MAC addresses need to be learned again.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 286
The MAC address table of a switch is as follows. If the switch receives a data frame whose destination MAC
address is 5489-9885-18a8 from Eth0/0/2, which of the following statements is true?
A. The data frame is forwarded through Eth0/0/2.
B. The data frame is flooded.
C. The data frame is forwarded through Eth0/0/1.
D. The data frame is discarded.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 287
Which of the following descriptions about STP designated ports is correct?
A. Designated ports forward frames destined for the root switch.

B. Designated ports represent the path leading to the root switch.
C. Each bridge can have only one designated port.
D. Designated ports are responsible for sending BPDU to connected network segments.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 288
What is the total length of the port ID in STP?
A. 4 bits
B. 8 bits
C. 2 bits
D. 16 bits
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 289
Which of the following statements are true about STP BPDUs?
A. During initialization, each switch enabled with STP proactively sends configuration BPDUs.
B. BPDUs are encapsulated in Ethernet frames and the destination MAC address is a multicast MAC address.
C. After STP is enabled on a port, the switch periodically sends TCN BPDUs through the designated port.
D. STP has two types of packets: configuration BPDU and TCN BPDU.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 290
ICMP packets do not contain port numbers. Therefore, NAPT cannot be used.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 291
Which of the following protocols can be used on a Layer 2 network with redundant links to prevent loops?
A. UDP
B. VRRP
C. STP
D. ARP
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 292
You can configure a static route on a broadcast interface by specifying the next-hop IP address or outbound
interface.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 293
What are the advantages of OSPF?
A. OSPF supports packet authentication.

B. OSPF can load balance traffic among equal-cost routes.
C. OSPF supports Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR).
D. OSPF supports area partition.
Correct Answer: BCD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 294
Which of the following statements are true about the default route?
A. In a routing table, the route to 0.0.0.0 (with the mask being 0.0.0.0) is the default route.
B. If the destination address of a packet does not match any entry in the routing table, the packet is forwarded
through the default route.
C. The default route can only be manually configured by the administrator.
D. The routing table of any router must contain the default route.
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 295
Which of the following OSPF packets can ensure LSA update reliability?
A. DD
B. LSR
C. LSU
D. LSACK
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 296
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 297
On the network shown in the figure, if all routers run OSPF, which router is elected as the BDR?
A. Router B
B. Router A
C. Router D
D. Router C
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 298
The output of the following command on router R1 is as follows.
A. The router discards the packets destined for 11.0.0.0/8.

B. The packets destined for 12.0.0.0/8 are forwarded through Ethernet0/0/0 on the router.
C. The router forwards the packets destined for 12.0.0.0/8.
D. The packets destined for 11.0.0.0/8 are forwarded through GigabitEthernet0/0/0 on the router.
Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 299
Which of the following statements about the “ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2 preference 20”
command is true?
A. The destination network address of the route is 10.0.12.2/32.

B. The mask length of the destination network address of the route is 32 bits.
C. The preference of the route is 100.
D. The route must exist in the routing table.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 300
Which of the following data packets are the OSPF protocol packets encapsulated into?
A. HTTP packet
B. TCP packet
C. IP packet
D. UDP packet
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 301
On the network shown in the figure, if all links are Ethernet links and all routers run OSPF, how many DRs will
be elected on the entire network?
A. 2
B. 4
C. 3
D. 1
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 302
As shown in the preceding VTY configuration, the user privilege level is set to 3.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 303
What is the main function of DHCP Discover packets?
A. The client sends DHCP Discover packets for requesting to confirm the configuration or renew the lease
time of the IP address.
B. The DHCP server sends DHCP Discover packets to respond DHCP Request packets.
C. The DHCP Discover packet carries various configuration information.
D. The client sends DHCP Discover packets to search for the DHCP server.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 304
As shown in the following figure, switch A and router A are connected through two links. The two links are
aggregated in manual load balancing mode. The aggregation port number is 1. The aggregated link needs to
carry VLAN tag 100. Switch A uses the trunk link.
Which of the following configurations need to be performed on switch A?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 305
What is the total length of the VLAN frame defined by IEEE 802.1Q?
A. 4
B. 3
C. 2
D. 1
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 306
Which of the following is the feature of port-based VLAN assignment?
A. VLAN IDs are allocated based on the protocol type and encapsulation format of data frames.
B. The VLAN does not need to be configured again when hosts move.
C. The VLAN tag is added to data frames based on the IP address carried in the frames.
D. The VLAN needs to be configured again when hosts move.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 307
If an Ethernet data frame carries Length/Type = 0x8100, which of the following cannot be the payload of the
data frame?
A. RSTP data frame

B. OSPF packet
C. ARP response packet
D. STP data frame
Correct Answer: AD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 308
Which of the following statements about a port on a switch is false?
A. If the port receives data frames without VLAN tags, the switch needs to add VLAN tag 200.
B. If the VLAN tag carried in a data frame is 100, the switch removes the VLAN tag and sends the frame.
C. The link type of the port is trunk.
D. The port cannot send data frames carrying VLAN tag 200.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 309
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 310
Which of the following is not included in AAA?
A. Audit
B. Authentication
C. Authorization
D. Accounting
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 311
Which of the following encapsulation modes are supported by IPsec VPN? (Choose two.)
A. Routing mode
B. Tunnel mode
C. Transport mode
D. Switching mode
Correct Answer: BC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 312
The IKE protocol is used to set up an SA for IPsec automatic negotiation. Identity authentication can be
performed when the IP address of the initiator changes dynamically.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 313
Which of the following SNMP packets is sent by the agent on the managed device to the NMS?
A. Get-Request
B. Response
C. Get-Next-Request
D. Set-Request
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 314
The RADIUS information of the router is configured as follows.
Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose three.)
A. The IP address of the authentication server is 200.0.12.1.

B. The IP address of the authorization server is 200.0.12.1.
C. The source IP address of the RADIUS packets sent by the router is 200.0.12.2.
D. The IP address of the accounting server is 200.0.12.1.
Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 315
Which of the following information must be configured for a DHCPv6 relay agent?
A. DHCPv6 address pool

B. DNS server address
C. IPv6 address of the DHCPv6 server
D. DHCPv6 DUID
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 316
Which of the following statements are true according to the following command output?
A. The OSPFv3 area ID is 0.
B. The OSPFv3 process ID is 1.
C. The DR priority of the local router is 1.
D. The router ID of the neighbor is 10.0.1.1.
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 317
According to the following configuration of Router C, how many global unicast address prefixes are advertised
by Router C?
A. 1
B. 4
C. 2
D. 3
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 318
If the MAC address of an interface is 0EE0-FFFE-0FEC, the corresponding EUI-64 address is ( ).
A. 0CE0-FFFF-FEFE-0FEC
B. 0EE0-FFFF-FEFE-0FEC
C. 0EE0-FFFE-FFFE-0FEC
D. 0CE0-FFFE-FFFE-0FEC
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 319
Which of the following address types are of IPv6 addresses?
A. Unicast address
B. Anycast address
C. Multicast address
D. Broadcast address
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 320
Segment routing-traffic engineering (SR-ТЕ) is a new ТЕ tunneling technology that uses SR as a control
protocol. All nodes of an SR-TE tunnel, including the ingress and transit nodes, must be aware of the tunnel
and complete label distribution and forwarding.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 321
In the MPLS domain, the full name of LER is label egress router.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 322
Which area ID is used by OSPFv3 to identify the backbone area?
A. 0
B. 3
C. 2
D. 1
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 323
The output of the “display vlan” command on a switch is as follows.
A. When GE0/0/1 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 20, the frames are untagged.
B. When GE0/0/1 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 10, the frames are untagged.
C. When GE0/0/2 of the switch forwards data frames from VLAN 20, the frames are tagged.
D. Four VLANs are manually created.
Correct Answer: BD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 324
Which of the following authentication method is more secure for PPP?
A. CHAP.
B. MD5.
C. SSH.
D. PAP.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 325
Which of the following cannot be the length of an IPv4 packet header?
A. 64B
B. 60B
C. 20B
D. 32B
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 326
The following shows a command output on a device. Which of the following statements are true? (Choose
three.)
A. The IP address of the interface is 10.0.12.2/24.

B. The MTU value of the interface is 1000.
C. The working rate of the interface is 1 Gbit/s.
D. The MAC address of the interface is 00e0-fc22-4fff.
Correct Answer: ABD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 327
If the “user-interface maximum-vty 0” command is run on a router, which of the following statements is true?
A. A maximum of 5 VTY users can access the router at the same time.
B. No user can log in to the router through Telnet or SSH.
C. A maximum of 15 VTY users can access the router at the same time.
D. A maximum of 4 VTY users can access the router at the same time.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 328
Which of the following methods is not used for logging in to the VRP system?
A. SSH.
B. Web.
C. Netstream.
D. Telnet.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 329
After a device is reset, an interface card is hot swapped, or an interface card is reset, the saved MAC address
entries on the device or interface card are not lost.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 330
Which of the following MAC addresses are not aged out? (Choose two.)
A. Static MAC address

B. Dynamic MAC address
C. Blackhole MAC address
D. Port MAC address
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 331
As shown in the figure, all hosts can communicate with each other. Which of the following is true about the
mapping relationships between MAC addresses and ports on SWB?
A. MAC-A G0/0/2
MAC-B G0/0/2
MAC-C G0/0/3
B. MAC-A G0/0/3
MAC-B G0/0/3
MAC-C G0/0/1
C. MAC-A G0/0/1
MAC-B G0/0/1
MAC-C G0/0/3
D. MAC-A G0/0/1
MAC-B G0/0/2
MAC-C G0/0/3
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 332
Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statement describes the network shown?
A. There are 4 collision domains in the network.
C. There are 6 broadcast domains in the network.
D. There are 6 collision domains in the network.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 333
Which of the following statements is true about the Forward Delay timer of STP?
A. Reduce the interval for sending BPDUs.

B. Improve the configuration BPDU lifetime, ensuring that the configuration BPDUs can be forwarded to more
switches.
C. Improve the STP convergence speed.
D. Prevent temporary loops.
E. Delay is required when a port transitions between Blocking and Disabled.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 334
Which of the following statements is true about the MAC address table of a switch?
A. The switch discards the data frame whose source MAC address is 5489-9811-0b49.
B. The switch discards the data frame whose destination MAC address is 5489-9885-18a8.
C. The switch discards the data frame whose destination MAC address is 5489-9811-0b49.
D. The switch discards the data frame whose destination MAC address is 5489-989d-1d30.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 335
Which of the following parameters is not contained in STP configuration BPDUs?
A. Root ID
B. VLAN ID
C. Bridge ID
D. Port ID
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 336
A. Physical layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 337
A. MAC
B. Next-hop address
C. Destination/Mask
D. Cost
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 338
According to the figure, which of the following statements is true?
A. Host A and Host B can communicate with each other only when the IP addresses of host A and host B
have the same masks.
B. Host A can successfully ping host B.
C. The IP address mask of Host A is different from that of Host B. Therefore, Host A and Host B cannot
communicate with each other.
D. The broadcast addresses of Host A and Host B are the same.
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 339
Which of the following packets is used by OSPF to discover and maintain neighbor relationships?
A. HELLO
B. LSU
C. LSR
D. DD
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 340
On the network shown in the figure, all routers run OSPF and the cost value is above the link. Which of the
following is the path for Router A to send packets to 10.0.0.0/8?
A. A-B-D
B. A-C-D
C. RA fails to reach 10.0.0.0/8.
D. A-D
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 341
An administrator wishes to configure a floating static route. In order to successfully achieve this, which
operation should be performed?
A. The administrator is required to configure a different preference values for the primary static route and
floating static route.
B. The administrator is required to configure a different costs metric for the primary static route and floating
static route.
C. The administrator is required to configure different route tags for the primary static route and floating static
route.
D. The administrator is only required to configure two static routes.
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 342
If a route destined for the same network has multiple next hops, what is the route?
A. Sub-optimal route
B. Multi-path route
C. Default route
D. Equal-cost route
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 343
When searching the routing table, a router follows the longest matching rule.
Which of the following parameters does the length is the longest matching rule indicate?
A. Next-hop IP address length

B. Cost
C. Mask length
D. Preference value of the routing protocol
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 344
What is the default priority of static routes on a Huawei AR router?
A. 120
B. 60
C. 0
D. 100
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 345
To enable Router A to communicate with loopback 0 on Router B on the network shown in the figure, which of
the following commands needs to be run on Router A?
A. ip route-static 10.2.2 32 GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

B. ip route-static 10.2.2 0 GigabitEthernet 0/0/0
C. ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2
D. ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.1
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 346
Segment routing (SR) defines destination address prefixes/nodes and adjacencies on the network as
segments and allocates segment IDs (SIDs) to these segments. Adjacency and prefix/node SIDs are non-
sequentially arranged in a segment list to form a forwarding path.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 347
Which of the following OSPF packets can be used to confirm the received Link State Update (LSU) packets?
A. LSR
B. LSA
C. LSU
D. LSACK
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 348
Which of the following statements about the “ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2 preference 20”
command is true?
A. The next-hop IP address of the route is 10.0.12.2

B. The route can guide forwarding of the data packets with the destination IP address 10.0.2.2.
C. The preference of the route is 20.
D. The route can guide forwarding of the data packets with the destination IP address 10.0.12.2.
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 349
On the network shown in the figure, after the OSPF protocol state is stable, what is the neighbor status
between Router A and Router B?
A. Attempt
B. Full
C. 2-way
D. Down
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 350
Which of the following statements is true?
A. Switches work at the physical layer.

B. Switches work at the network layer.
C. Routers work at the network layer.
D. Routers work at the physical layer.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 351
What is the destination IP address of DHCP Discover packets?
A. 127.0.0.1
B. 224.0.0.1
C. 224.0.0.2
D. 255.255.255.255
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 352
The following shows the DHCP address pool configuration of a router. Which of the following statements are
true? (Choose three.)
A. The lease time of the IP address is 12 hours.

B. The DHCP client may obtain the IP address 192.168.1.2.
C. The address pool has 199 available IP addresses.
D. The address pool has 55 available IP addresses.
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 353
The following shows the Eth-Trunk information on a switch. Which of the following commands can be used to
delete Eth-Trunk 1?
A. undo interface Eth-Trunk 1
B. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
undo eth-trunk
quit
inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/2
undo eth-trunk
quit
undo interface Eth-Trunk 1
C. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
undo eth-trunk
quit
D. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/2
undo eth-trunk
quit
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 354
Which of the following statements about VLANIF interfaces is correct?
A. Different VLANIF interfaces can use the same IP address.

B. A VLANIF interface does not have a MAC address.
C. VLANIF interfaces do not need to learn MAC addresses.
D. A VLANIF interface is a Layer 3 interface.
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 355
According to the VLAN frame format defined in IEEE 802.1Q, how many bits does a VLAN ID contain?
A. 6
B. 8
C. 10
D. 12
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 356
What is the value of the Flag field in the PPP frame format?
A. 0x7E
B. 0xFF
C. 0x8E
D. 0xEF
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 357
Two routers are connected through serial interfaces and support PPP encapsulation.
Which parameters must be negotiated to establish the PPP connection? (Choose three.)
A. MRU
C. Magic-Number
D. Authentication Protocol
Correct Answer: ACD

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 358
During PPP link setup, which of the following phases can be directly converted from the Dead phase?
A. Terminate
B. Authenticate
C. Establish
D. Network
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 359
As shown in the following figure, which position should the AH header in IPsec transmission mode be inserted
into?
A. 2
B. 3
C. 4
D. 1
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 360
Which of the following ACLs can match the transport layer port number?
A. Basic ACL
B. Intermediate ACL
C. Layer 2 ACL
D. Advanced ACL
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 361
SNMP packets are transmitted by UDP.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 362
As shown in the following figure, which of the following is the authentication scope of the AH protocol in IPsec
tunnel mode?
A. 2
B. 3
C. 1
D. 4
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 363
Which of the following IPv6 addresses is a multicast address?
A. FF02::2E0:FCFF:FEEF:FEC
B. 2000::2E0:FCFF:FEEF:FEC
C. FE80::2E0:FCFF:FEEF:FEC
D. FC00::2E0:FCFF:FEEF:FEC
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 364
On a broadcast network with four routers, all the routers run OSPFv3, and the DR priorities of all the routers
are not 0. How many adjacencies are there on the network?
A. 4
B. 6
C. 5
D. 3
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 365
In the DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration solution, hosts do not need to send any DHCPv6 packets.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 366
How many DUIDs can each DHCPv6 server have?
A. 1
B. 4
C. 2
D. 3
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 367
IPv6 can also be called:
A. RIPng
B. IP+
C. IPng
D. NextIP
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 368
Which of the following packets is sent by a DHCPv6 client before it sends a request packet to the DHCPv6
server?
A. RA
B. RS
C. NA
D. NS
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 369
Which of the following fields are included in an MPLS header? (Choose three.)
A. Label
B. TTL
C. EXP
D. Tos
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 370
Refer to the graphic, the static NAT command is executed on R1. When a PC connected to R1 accesses the
Internet, the destination address in the packets does not change.
[R1]interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
[R1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0]ip address 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0
#
[R1]interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
[R1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0]ip address 202.10.1.2 255.255.255.0
[R1]nat static global 202.10.1.3 inside 192.168.0.2 netmask 255.255.255.255
[R1]ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 202.10.1.1
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 371
For DHCP, the priority of an interface address pool is higher than that of a global address pool.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 372
When the host accesses web service of the server, the value of the “Protocol” field at the network layer is 6.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 373
Before forwarding IPv6 packets, routers do not need to re-encapsulate the data link layer.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 374
In the VRP system, you cannot delete files by running the delete or unreserved vrpcfg.zip command. You must
clear files in the recycle bin.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 375
DHCP Request packets must be sent in broadcast mode.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 376
::1/128 is an IPv6 loopback address.
A. True
B. False
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 377
What is the TPID value defined by IEEE 802.1Q?
A. 0×8100
B. 0×8200
C. 0×9100
D. 0×7200
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 378
What is the neighbor state when an OSPFv3 adjacency is established?
A. Down
B. 2-way
C. Full
D. Loading
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 379
Which of the following values of the Length/Type field in an Ethernet data frame indicates the PPPoE discovery
stage?
A. 0×8863
B. 0×8864
C. 0×0806
D. 0×0800
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 380
Which of the following OSPF states can be used to indicate that an adjacency relationship has been
established?
A. Down
B. 2-way
C. Full
D. Attempt
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 381
Which of the following fields is not included in the OSPF Hello packet?
A. Hello Interval
B. Neighbor
C. Network Mask
D. Sysname
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 382
What is the value of the Type field in RSTP configuration BPDUs?
A. 0×00
B. 0×01
C. 0×02
D. 0×03
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 383
If the configuration information of a router is as follows, which user name and password are used by the peer
router to perform PPP link authentication?
aaa
local-user test password cipher test
local-user test service-type ppp
local-user test1 service-type telnet
#
link-protocol ppp
ppp authentication-mode pap
ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0
#
A. User name: test

Password: test
B. User name: test1
Password: test1
C. User name: test2
Password: test2
D. User name: test2
Password: test
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 384
Users in the network discovered that the efficiency of a file transfer is low. The administrator used wireshark to
observe the network and discovered many duplicate frames.
Which statement correctly explains the reason for this?
A. The switch doesn't know the destination and has flooded frames.
B. This network needs upgrading to use newer and more efficient switches.
C. The network has loops at the link layer.
D. The network has not been segmented using VLANs.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 385
As shown in the figure, which of the following ports will become the designated port?
A. G0/0/3 of SWB
B. G0/0/1 of SWC
C. G0/0/2 of SWC
D. G0/0/1 of SWB
Correct Answer: D
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 386
Which of the following commands can be used to change the device name to huawei?
A. sysname huawei
B. hostname huawei
C. rename huawei
D. do name huawei
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 387
Which of the following OSPF packets can be used to send LSAs to the peer router?
A. LSR
B. LSA
C. LSU
D. LSACK
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 388
If the output information of a router is as follows, which of the following tunnel protocols is used by the
interface?
[Router A]display interface Tunnel 0/0/0

Tunnel0/0/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Last line protocol up time : 2019-03-06 11:03:15 UTC-08:00
Description:HUAWEI, AR Series, Tunnel0/0/0 Interface
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet Address is unnumbered, using address of LoopBack0(10.0.1.1/32)
Encapsulation is TUNNEL, loopback not set
Tunnel source 10.0.12.1 (GigabitEthernet0/0/0), destination 10.0.12.2
Tunnel protocol/transport GRE/IP, key disabled
A. GRE
B. IPsec
C. LDP
D. MPLS
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 389
Which layer of the OSI reference model does the PPP protocol define?
A. Presentation layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Application layer
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 390
What is the UDP port number used by the DHCPv6 server?
A. 546
B. 547
C. 548
D. 549
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 391
Which of the following addresses is the solicited-node multicast address corresponding to the IPv6 address
2019::8:AB?
A. FF02::1:FF08:AB
B. FF02::1:FF20:19
C. FF02::FF08:AB
D. FF02::1:FE08:AB
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 392
Which of the following statements is false about OSPF area partition?
A. The link state databases (LSDBs) of routers are the same in the same OSPF area.
B. OSPF area partition can reduce the LSDB size of the router.
C. Area 0 is the backbone area, and other areas must be connected to this area.
D. Only area border routers (ABRs) can function as the autonomous system boundary routers (ASBRs).
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 393
Which type of DHCP packets does a DHCP client send when it wants to leave a network?
A. DHCP Discover packet

B. DHCP Release packet
C. DHCP Request packet
D. DHCP ACK packet
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 394
Which of the following OSPF packets can be sent to request the local lacking LSAs?
A. HELLO
B. LSU
C. LSR
D. LSACK
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 395
When the header length of an IPv4 data packet is 20B and the total packet length is 1500B, what is the valid
payload of the packet?
A. 1500B
B. 1480B
C. 1520B
D. 20B
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 396
What is the destination address of DHCPv6 request packets?
A. FF02::1:2
B. FF02::1
C. FF02::2
D. FF01::1:2
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 397
What is the number range of a basic ACL?
A. 2000-2999
B. 3000-3999
C. 4000-4999
D. 6000-6031
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 398
MPLS dual-label stacking packets are bytes longer than original IP packets.
A. 4
B. 8
C. 16
D. 32
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 399
Which of the following values if the Flag field of an IPv6 multicast address indicates that the multicast address
is a permanent multicast address?
A. 0
B. 1
C. 2
D. 3
Correct Answer: A
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 400
According to the following DHCPv6 address pool configuration of a router, which of the following DNS server
addresses can the host that uses DHCPv6 stateful autoconfiguration obtain?
#
dhcpv6 pool test
address prefix 3000::/64
excluded-address 3000::1
dns-server 2000::1
dns-domain-name huawei
dns-domain-name huawei.com
#
A. 3000::1/64
B. 2000::1/64
C. 3000::2/64
D. 3000::3000/64
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 401
If the IPv4 address of a host on a local area network (LAN) is 192.168.1.1/30, which of the following destination
IPv4 addresses can be carried in data packets that the host can decapsulate?
A. 192.168.1.1
B. 192.168.1.2
C. 192.168.1.3
D. 255.255.255.255
Correct Answer: B
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 402
Which of the following statements are true about the blackhole MAC address table?
A. Entries are manually configured and delivered to each interface card. The entries cannot be aged out.
B. After a device is reset, an interface card is hot swapped, or an interface card is reset, the saved entries on
the device or interface card are not lost.
C. After a blackhole MAC address is configured on a device, the device discards packets whose source or
destination MAC address is the blackhole MAC address.
D. Blackhole MAC address entries can be used to filter out unauthorized users.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 403
Which of the following fields exist in both IPv6 and IPv4 packet headers?
A. Source Address
B. Destination Address
C. Version
D. Next Header
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 404
Which of the following is/are the characteristic(s) of HDLC?
A. HDLC supports point-to-point links.

B. HDLC does not support IP address negotiation.
C. HDLC does not support authentication.
D. HDLC supports point-to-multipoint links.
Correct Answer: ABC

Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 405
Which of the following types of routes can be used by a router to establish a routing table?
A. Direct route
B. Dynamic route
C. Static route
D. Aggregated route
Correct Answer: AC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 406
On the network shown in the figure, which of the following commands can be used to enable host A to
successfully ping host B?
A. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.2
Router B : ip route-static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1
B. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 11.0.12.2
C. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 11.0.12.1
D. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 407
Which of the following packets are OSPF packets?
A. HELLO
B. LSU
C. LSR
D. LSA
Correct Answer: ABC
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 408
Which of the following port status may exist on an STP-enabled switch?
A. Forwarding
B. Listening
C. Discarding
D. Disabled
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 409
One of the reasons that segment routing (SR) is introduced is that traditional LDP has some restrictions.
Which of the following statements about LDP restrictions are true?
A. LDP does not support automatic label allocation.

B. LDP supports path computation only based on IGP SPF (minimum cost), not based on traffic engineering.
C. LDP path computation depends on an IGP. If the IGP and LDP are not synchronized, black holes are
generated, affecting services.
D. LDP has 11 types of protocol packets, which greatly increases link bandwidth consumption and device CPU
usage.
Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 410
The following shows the command output on a router.
display startup
MainBoard:
Startup system software: flash:/AR2220E-V200R007C00SPC600.cc
Next startup system software: flash:/AR2220E-V200R007C00SPC600.cc
A. The current VRP version file is the same as the VRP file for next startup.
B. The current VRP version file is different from the VRP file for next startup.
C. The current configuration file is the same as the configuration file for next startup.
D. The current configuration file is different from the configuration file for next startup.
Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 411
Which of the following statements about Ethernet sub-interfaces is/are true?
A. The sub-interface ID must be the same as the VLAN ID.

B. A sub-interface can be bound to multiple VLANs.
C. The sub-interface cannot be configured with an IP address.
D. The IP addresses for sub-interfaces must not be on the same network segment.
Correct Answer: C
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 412
Which of the following statements are true about the static MAC address table?
A. After a device is reset, an interface card is hot swapped, or an interface card is reset, the saved entries on
the device or interface card are not lost.
B. After an interface is statically bound to a MAC address, other interfaces discarded a packet whose source
MAC address is the bound MAC address.
C. Each static MAC address entry can be bound only to one outbound interface.
D. You can check whether data is forwarded between two connected devices by checking the static MAC
address entries.
Correct Answer: AB
Section: (none)
Explanation
QUESTION 413
On a network running Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), which of the following ports are in Discarding
state when the topology is stable?
A. Root port
B. Designated port
C. Alternate port
D. Backup port
Correct Answer: CD
Section: (none)
Explanation

HCIA - Routing &amp; Switching

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HCIA - Routing &amp; Switching

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 A network administrator has captured a data frame in the network with the destination MAC address of 01-00-5E-A0-BI-C3.

The correct statement about this MAC address s Q.

2. Which of the following is not the working principle of CSMNCD?

*AC Akira: VLAN/ PEVLM Cf YLMI Port Type LSP/LSR-ID

❑ A SWB is the root bridge in this network

5WA HUB SWEI

MAC 00e0-ft00-0001 mac:wee-mama

00-01 02 03 04-CC 00-01-02-03-04-OD

❑ A. GO/0/2 port of SWA

❑ k Proto shows to learn the routing protocol of this route

31 The correct description of the following is 0 (Multiple Choice)

35. The DHCP REQUEST message must be sent in broadcast form.

mist Password cipher teat

El A. Username: (esti Password: (esti

❑ A. ad number 2000 rub 5 permit source 10 0.13.1 0 0 0 0

56. What is the destination address of the DHCPv6 request packet?

68. By default, the bridge priority of a switch is 32768.

HOST A HOST B HOST C

HostA Host& Host C Host D

80 ip route-static 10 0.12.0 255 255.255 0 192.168.1.1

90. Which of the following are routing protocols? (Multiple Choice)

93. Telnet is based on the TCP protocol.

Eth-Trunk 1 10.0.12.1/24 Eth-Trunk 1 10.0.12.2/24

New IP Header IP Header ,AH Header TCP Header Data

(-Router D>displey osofv3 peer 10. 0, 3. 3 verbose

Neighbor 10. 0, 3. 3 is 2-Way, interface address FE80; ;MO:FCFF :4ECS

127. In a switch networking, if a loop occurs, it may cause a broadcast storm.

❑ A_ Create VLAN 2 on the SWC.

ospf 1 router-id 10021.1

ospf 1 router-id 100.121

❑ A_ ESP Header, TCP Header, Data

IP Header AH Header CP Header Data

163. The simplest form of IPv6 address 3001:0DB8:0000:0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58 is?

<Huawei>display interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

187. Which of the following statements about direct route is correct?

Client 08CP Server

El A. In step 1, multicast packets are sent.

New IP AH ESP IP TCP Data ESP ESP Auth

203. The Router-ID of OSPFv3 can be automatically generated by the system.

(1-Turragei>dispIay ipv6 interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

tar Altilsplay interface-Tunnel 0/0/0

❑ A. The address pool has 199 available IP addresses. (Right Answers)

boas i nationfildeok Pro eel Ire

D A. The NextHop of this router reaching 90.0.0.1 is 10.0.21.2_

Routing Tables: Public Destinations : 2 Routes:2

.0111 -r4t.pl elf 1. p puttees-4.pm..

Sna Te.ble. PeAdite

P owe Pas e Poo toe or rasa

MAC Address VIANNSI teamed-Frans Type

5439-38ec-1518 If- GE0/13(13 dynamic

Total terns displayed -1

A switch attempts to forward a frame to the MAC destination 54S9-98eo-1011

MAC Address VLAN/ PEVLAN CRVLAN Port Type LSP/LSN-ID

225. Refer to the graphic.

GO/0/1 / GO/0/2 \ GO/0/3

Host A Host S Host C

❑ A These two switches can achieve load balancing

<R1>dIsplay current-configuration configuration nspf

ospf 1 router-id 10.0.1.1

OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.0.12.1

Area 0.0.0.0 interface 10.0.12.1(GigabitEthernet0/0/0)'s neighbors

232. As shown in the figure below, which is correct?

[LSW131acp priority 100 [LSW2]lacp priority 200

HCIA - Routing & Switching

HCIA - Routing & Switching